{"kind":"task","effective_mode":"full","benchmark":{"kind":"benchmark","effective_mode":"full","slug":"longbench-v2","formal_name":"LongBench v2","introduction":"LongBench v2 evaluates deep understanding and reasoning over long contexts through multiple-choice questions. Its official description lists 503 questions spanning tasks such as single-document and multi-document QA and code-repository understanding.","introduction_ja":"","introduction_en":"","category":"Category not supplied","task_count":null,"acquisition_status":"Acquisition status not supplied","official_url":"https://huggingface.co/datasets/zai-org/LongBench-v2","indexing_mode":"noindex","profile":{"resources":[],"task_format":"","scoring":"","metric":"","size":"","answer_access":"","license":"","citation":"","maintainer":"","released":"","why_hard":"","related":[]}},"task_id":"3f24d946-a574-586c-8f30-9cc568b55dc8","task_key":"train--66ec3fa7821e116aacb1c75d","task_revision_id":"2","upstream_id":"66ec3fa7821e116aacb1c75d","short_description":"Which of the following is inccorect according to the instruction book?","config":"","split":"train","body":"{\"choice_A\":\"I can still take pictures if the card is not full, even when the burst rate lowers.\",\"choice_B\":\"After pressing [WB], I can set the color temperature  at 2400K on the setting screen.\",\"choice_C\":\"If I cannot find the Touch Tab, I can set Touch Tab to [ON] somewhere in the [Custom] menu.\",\"choice_D\":\"When I set the write-protect switch to \\\"LOCK\\\", I may still lose my data.\",\"context\":\"Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual\\n<Complete Guide>\\nDigital Camera\\nDC-S5M2\\n\\n\\n\\n2\\nAbout Operating Instructions\\nThis document, “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Complete \\nGuide>”, includes detailed explanations of all the functions and operations \\nof the camera.\\n™ Symbols Used in This Document\\nBlack icons show conditions in which functions can be used, and gray icons show \\nconditions in which functions cannot be used.\\nExample:\\nPictures/Videos \\nRecording mode \\nOperating symbols\\nIn this document, camera operation is explained using the following symbols:\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n(F)\\n\\n\\nAbout Operating Instructions\\n3\\n(A)\\n:\\nFront dial\\n(B)\\n:\\nRear dial\\n(C) 3421:\\nCursor button up/down/left/right\\nor\\nJoystick up/down/left/right\\n(D)\\n:\\nPress the center of the joystick\\n(E)\\n:\\n[MENU/SET] button\\n(F)\\n:\\nControl dial\\n• Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in \\nexplanations.\\n• This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:\\nExample) Set [Picture Quality] of the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu to [STD.].\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Picture Quality] ¨ Select [STD.]\\n\\n\\nAbout Operating Instructions\\n4\\nNotification classification symbols\\nIn this document, notifications are classified and described using the following \\nsymbols:\\n: To confirm prior to using the function\\n: Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording\\n: Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications\\n: Related functions and information\\n• Images and illustrations used in this document are for explaining the functions.\\n• Description in this document is based on the interchangeable lens (S-R2060).\\n\\n\\n5\\nContents\\nAbout Operating Instructions\\n2\\nIntroduction\\n17\\nBefore Use.................................................................................18\\nStandard Accessories................................................................21\\nLenses That Can Be Used.........................................................23\\nMemory Cards That Can Be Used.............................................24\\nNames of Parts..........................................................................27\\nCamera.............................................................................................. 27\\nSupplied Lens.................................................................................... 35\\nViewfinder/Monitor Displays .............................................................. 37\\nGetting Started\\n39\\nAttaching a Shoulder Strap........................................................40\\nCharging the Battery..................................................................42\\nBattery Insertion ................................................................................ 43\\nInserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging.............................. 45\\nUsing the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/\\nCharging)........................................................................................... 49\\nNotifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply............................... 51\\n[Power Save Mode] ........................................................................... 53\\nInserting Cards (Optional)..........................................................56\\nAttaching a Lens........................................................................60\\nAttaching a Lens Hood...................................................................... 63\\nAdjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle.................................66\\nSetting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)............68\\n\\n\\nContents\\n6\\nBasic Operations\\n72\\nHow to Hold the Camera ...........................................................73\\nSelecting the Recording Mode...................................................75\\nCamera Setting Operations .......................................................76\\nMonitor/Viewfinder Display Settings ..........................................82\\nSetting the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 82\\nSwitching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder ................................ 83\\nSwitching the Display Information ..................................................... 86\\nQuick Menu................................................................................89\\nControl Panel.............................................................................91\\nMenu Operation Methods ..........................................................94\\n[Reset] ............................................................................................... 99\\nEntering Characters.................................................................100\\nIntelligent Auto Mode...............................................................101\\nRecording Using Touch Functions...........................................107\\nTouch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................. 107\\nTouch AE......................................................................................... 110\\nTaking Pictures\\n112\\nBasic Picture Operations .........................................................113\\n[Aspect Ratio] ..........................................................................116\\n[Picture Size]............................................................................118\\n[Picture Quality] .......................................................................120\\nRecording Videos\\n122\\nBasic Video Operations ...........................................................123\\n[System Frequency].................................................................130\\n[Rec. File Format] ....................................................................132\\n\\n\\nContents\\n7\\n[Rec Quality] ............................................................................133\\n[Image Area of Video]..............................................................144\\nFocus / Zoom\\n146\\nSelecting the Focus Mode .......................................................147\\nUsing AF..................................................................................149\\n[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ............................................................ 154\\n[Focus Limiter]................................................................................. 157\\n[AF Assist Light] .............................................................................. 159\\n[1-Area AF Moving Speed].............................................................. 160\\n[AF Micro Adjustment] ..................................................................... 161\\nSelecting the AF Mode ............................................................165\\nAutomatic Detection ........................................................................ 168\\n[Tracking]......................................................................................... 171\\n[Full Area AF] .................................................................................. 172\\n[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone].................................................... 175\\n[1-Area+]/[1-Area]............................................................................ 177\\n[Pinpoint] ......................................................................................... 179\\nAF Area Operations.................................................................181\\nMove the Position of the AF Area.................................................... 181\\nChanging the Size of the AF Area................................................... 184\\nResetting the AF Area ..................................................................... 185\\nFocus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position \\n([AF+AE])......................................................................................... 186\\nMoving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad ........................... 187\\n[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]....................................................... 189\\nRecord Using MF.....................................................................190\\n[Focus Peaking]............................................................................... 195\\nRecording with Zoom...............................................................197\\nExtended Tele Conversion.............................................................. 199\\n\\n\\nContents\\n8\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer\\n201\\nSelecting the Drive Mode.........................................................202\\nTaking Burst Pictures...............................................................204\\nHigh Resolution mode .............................................................211\\nRecording with Time Lapse Shot.............................................216\\nRecording with Stop Motion Animation....................................223\\nTime Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ....................227\\nRecording Using the Self-timer................................................229\\nBracket Recording ...................................................................233\\n[Silent Mode]............................................................................241\\n[Shutter Type] ..........................................................................243\\n[Long Exposure NR] ........................................................................ 247\\n[Min. Shutter Speed]........................................................................ 248\\n[Shutter Delay]................................................................................. 249\\nImage Stabilizer.......................................................................250\\nImage Stabilizer Settings................................................................. 253\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity\\n260\\n[Metering Mode].......................................................................261\\nProgram AE Mode ...................................................................263\\nProgram Shift .................................................................................. 265\\nAperture-Priority AE Mode.......................................................267\\nShutter-Priority AE Mode.........................................................270\\nManual Exposure Mode...........................................................273\\nAvailable Shutter Speeds (Sec.) ..................................................... 276\\n[B] (Bulb) ......................................................................................... 277\\nPreview Mode..........................................................................278\\nExposure Compensation .........................................................280\\n\\n\\nContents\\n9\\n[i.Dynamic Range] ........................................................................... 283\\nLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)............................284\\nISO Sensitivity .........................................................................286\\n[Dual Native ISO Setting] ................................................................ 290\\n[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]................................................................... 291\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality\\n292\\nWhite Balance (WB) ................................................................293\\nAdjusting the White Balance ........................................................... 299\\n[Photo Style] ............................................................................301\\n[Filter Settings].........................................................................314\\n[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]..................................................... 319\\n[LUT Library]............................................................................320\\nLens Compensation.................................................................323\\n[Vignetting Comp.]........................................................................... 323\\n[Color Shading Compensation] ....................................................... 324\\n[Diffraction Compensation].............................................................. 328\\nFlash\\n329\\nUsing an External Flash (Optional)..........................................330\\nRemoving the Hot Shoe Cover........................................................ 331\\nSetting Flash............................................................................333\\n[Flash Mode].................................................................................... 334\\n[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]............................................... 337\\n[Flash Adjust.].................................................................................. 339\\n[Flash Synchro] ............................................................................... 340\\n[Auto Exposure Comp.] ................................................................... 341\\nRecording Using a Wireless Flash...........................................342\\n\\n\\nContents\\n10\\nVideo Settings\\n349\\nRecording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/\\nS&Q)........................................................................................350\\nDisplays Suited to Video Recording ................................................ 351\\nSetting the Exposure for Recording Videos..................................... 352\\nSeparating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures ................... 356\\nUsing AF (Video) .....................................................................358\\n[Continuous AF]............................................................................... 358\\n[AF Custom Setting(Video)]............................................................. 360\\n[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ........................................................ 361\\nVideo Brightness and Coloring ................................................363\\n[Luminance Level] ........................................................................... 363\\n[Master Pedestal Level]................................................................... 364\\nRecording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)......................... 365\\n[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ................................................................... 367\\nAudio Settings..........................................................................368\\n[Sound Rec Level Disp.].................................................................. 369\\n[Mute Sound Input] .......................................................................... 370\\n[Sound Rec Gain Level] .................................................................. 371\\n[Sound Rec Level Adj.].................................................................... 372\\n[Sound Rec Quality] ........................................................................ 373\\n[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ............................................................... 374\\n[Wind Noise Canceller].................................................................... 375\\n[Audio Information] .......................................................................... 376\\nExternal Microphones (Optional) .............................................377\\nSetting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional) ................ 380\\nReduction of Wind Noise................................................................. 381\\nXLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)........................................382\\n[4ch Mic Input] ................................................................................. 384\\nHeadphones ............................................................................385\\n\\n\\nContents\\n11\\n[Sound Monitoring Channel]............................................................ 387\\nTime Code ...............................................................................389\\nSetting the Time Code..................................................................... 390\\nMain Assist Functions..............................................................393\\n[Flicker Decrease (Video)]............................................................... 394\\n[SS/Gain Operation] ........................................................................ 395\\n[WFM/Vector Scope] ....................................................................... 397\\n[Luminance Spot Meter] .................................................................. 401\\n[Zebra Pattern] ................................................................................ 403\\n[Frame Marker]................................................................................ 405\\nColor Bars/Test Tone ...................................................................... 407\\nSpecial Video Recording\\n409\\nSlow & Quick Video .................................................................410\\nHigh Frame Rate Video ...........................................................417\\n[Focus Transition] ....................................................................419\\n[Live Cropping].........................................................................424\\nLog Recording .........................................................................428\\n[V-Log View Assist] ......................................................................... 432\\nHLG Videos .............................................................................433\\n[HLG View Assist]............................................................................ 436\\nAnamorphic Recording ............................................................437\\n[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ................................................... 439\\n[Synchro Scan] ........................................................................441\\n[Loop Recording (video)] .........................................................443\\n[Segmented File Recording] ....................................................445\\nList of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be \\nRecorded .................................................................................446\\n\\n\\nContents\\n12\\nHDMI Output (Video)\\n451\\nConnecting HDMI Devices.......................................................452\\nHDMI Output Image Quality.....................................................453\\nImages Output via HDMI ................................................................. 453\\nHDMI Output Settings..............................................................456\\nOutputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI..................... 457\\nOutputting Control Information to an External Recorder ................. 458\\nOutputting Audio via HDMI.............................................................. 459\\nOutputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI.................. 459\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images\\n460\\nPlaying Back Pictures..............................................................461\\nPlaying Back Videos................................................................463\\nVideo Repeat Playback................................................................... 467\\nExtracting a Picture ......................................................................... 469\\n[Video Divide] .................................................................................. 470\\nSwitching the Display Mode.....................................................472\\nEnlarged Display ............................................................................. 473\\nThumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 475\\nCalendar Playback .......................................................................... 477\\nGroup Images..........................................................................478\\nDeleting Images.......................................................................480\\n[RAW Processing]....................................................................482\\n[Playback] Menu ......................................................................491\\nHow to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu......................... 491\\n[Playback] ([Playback Mode]).......................................................... 493\\n[Playback] ([Process Image])........................................................... 496\\n[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])......................................................... 497\\n[Playback] ([Edit Image]) ................................................................. 498\\n\\n\\nContents\\n13\\n[Playback] ([Others])........................................................................ 501\\nCamera Customization\\n502\\nFn Buttons ...............................................................................503\\nRegister Functions to the Fn Buttons .............................................. 506\\nUse the Fn Buttons.......................................................................... 517\\n[Dial Operation Switch] ............................................................518\\nRegister Functions to the Dials........................................................ 518\\nTemporarily Change Dial Operation................................................ 520\\nQuick Menu Customization......................................................521\\nRegister to the Quick Menu............................................................. 521\\nCustom Mode ..........................................................................528\\nRegister in Custom Mode................................................................ 529\\nUsing Custom Mode........................................................................ 531\\nCalling Up Settings.......................................................................... 532\\n[Custom] Menu ........................................................................533\\n[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])..................................................... 534\\n[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]) .................................................... 540\\n[Custom] menu ([Operation])........................................................... 546\\n[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) ................................... 552\\n[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) ................................... 563\\n[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])............................................................... 567\\n[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]) ..................................................... 569\\n[Setup] Menu ...........................................................................572\\n[Setup] menu ([Card/File])............................................................... 573\\n[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display])................................................... 578\\n[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]) ................................................................. 583\\n[Setup] menu ([Setting]) .................................................................. 588\\n[Setup] menu ([Others])................................................................... 590\\nMy Menu..................................................................................594\\nRegistration in My Menu.................................................................. 594\\n\\n\\nContents\\n14\\nEdit My Menu .................................................................................. 595\\nList of Menu\\n596\\n[Photo] menu ...........................................................................597\\n[Video] menu............................................................................599\\n[Custom] menu ........................................................................602\\n[Setup] menu ...........................................................................606\\n[My Menu]................................................................................608\\n[Playback] menu ......................................................................609\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth\\n610\\nConnecting to a Smartphone...................................................612\\nInstalling “LUMIX Sync” .................................................................. 613\\nConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)..................... 614\\nConnecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])........................... 620\\nSending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple \\nOperations....................................................................................... 626\\nOperating the Camera with a Smartphone ..............................628\\n[Remote shooting] ........................................................................... 630\\n[Shutter Remote Control]................................................................. 632\\n[Import images]................................................................................ 635\\n[Auto Transfer]................................................................................. 637\\n[Location Logging] ........................................................................... 639\\n[Remote Wakeup]............................................................................ 641\\n[Auto Clock Set]............................................................................... 643\\n[Camera settings copy].................................................................... 644\\nSending Images from the Camera to a PC..............................645\\nWi-Fi Connections ...................................................................649\\n[Via Network] ................................................................................... 650\\n[Direct] ............................................................................................. 654\\n\\n\\nContents\\n15\\nConnect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................... 656\\nFn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi] ...................................................... 658\\nSend Settings and Selecting Images.......................................659\\nImage Send Settings ....................................................................... 659\\nSelecting Images............................................................................. 660\\n[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu..................................................................661\\nConnecting to Other Devices\\n663\\nConnecting...............................................................................664\\nViewing on a TV.......................................................................666\\nImporting Images to a PC........................................................670\\nCopying Images to a PC ................................................................. 671\\nInstalling Software ........................................................................... 674\\nStoring on a Recorder..............................................................675\\nTethered Recording.................................................................676\\nInstalling Software ........................................................................... 677\\nOperating the Camera from a PC.................................................... 678\\nMaterials\\n679\\nDigital Camera Accessory System ..........................................680\\nUsing Optional Accessories.....................................................681\\nBattery Grip (Optional) .................................................................... 682\\nShutter Remote Control (Optional).................................................. 684\\nTripod Grip (Optional)...................................................................... 686\\nAC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)................................. 687\\nMonitor/Viewfinder Displays ....................................................688\\nRecording Screen............................................................................ 688\\nPlayback Screen ............................................................................. 704\\nMessage Displays....................................................................709\\n\\n\\nContents\\n16\\nTroubleshooting.......................................................................713\\nPower, Battery................................................................................. 713\\nRecording ........................................................................................ 714\\nVideo ............................................................................................... 719\\nPlayback.......................................................................................... 720\\nMonitor/Viewfinder........................................................................... 721\\nFlash................................................................................................ 722\\nWi-Fi Function ................................................................................. 723\\nTV, PC............................................................................................. 726\\nOthers.............................................................................................. 727\\nCautions for Use......................................................................728\\nNumber of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available \\nRecording Time with the Battery..............................................738\\nNumber of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording \\nTime with Cards.......................................................................743\\nList of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for \\nCopying....................................................................................750\\nList of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode...774\\nSpecifications...........................................................................781\\nTrademarks and Licenses .......................................................799\\n\\n\\n17\\nIntroduction\\nThis chapter describes information you should know before starting.\\n≥Before Use: 18\\n≥Standard Accessories: 21\\n≥Lenses That Can Be Used: 23\\n≥Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 24\\n≥Names of Parts: 27\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Before Use\\n18\\nBefore Use\\n™ Firmware of Your Camera/Lens\\nFirmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add \\nfunctionality.\\nMake sure that the firmware of the camera/lens you purchased is the latest version.\\nWe recommend using the latest firmware version.\\n• To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera and \\nselect [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. You can also update the \\nfirmware in [Firmware Version]. (Î[Firmware Version]: 593)\\n• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware, \\nvisit the following support site:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index4.html\\n(English only)\\n™ Handling of the Camera\\nWhen using the camera, take care not to drop it, bump it, or apply undue force. \\nThese may cause malfunction or damage to the camera and lens.\\nIf sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.\\n– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.\\nDo not place a hand inside the camera mount.\\nThis may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.\\nIf you shake the camera while turning the camera off, a sensor may operate or a \\nrattling sound may be heard. This is caused by the image stabilizer mechanism \\nin the body. It is not a malfunction.\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Before Use\\n19\\n™ Splash Resistant\\nSplash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this \\ncamera offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust. \\nSplash Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is \\nsubjected to direct contact with water.\\nIn order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following \\nprecautions are taken:\\n– Splash Resistant works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically \\ndesigned to support this feature.\\n– Securely close the doors, contact points cover, etc.\\n– When the lens or cap is removed or a door is open, do not allow sand, dust, and \\nmoisture to enter inside.\\n– If liquid gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.\\n™ Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor \\nis Fogged Up)\\n• Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take care \\nas this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens, viewfinder, and \\nmonitor.\\n• If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog \\nwill disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the \\nambient temperature.\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Before Use\\n20\\n™ Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance\\nPerform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that \\nrecording can be performed normally.\\n™ No Compensation Regarding Recording\\nPlease note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could \\nnot be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.\\n™ Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights\\nUnder copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for \\nother than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.\\nBe careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the \\npurpose of personal enjoyment.\\n™ Also Read “Cautions for Use” (ÎCautions for Use: 728)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Standard Accessories\\n21\\nStandard Accessories\\nCheck that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.\\n• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where \\nthe camera was purchased.\\nFor details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual \\n<Quick Start Guide>” (supplied).\\n*1 This is attached to the camera at the time of purchase.\\n≥Digital camera body\\n(This is referred to as camera in this document.)\\n≥Battery pack\\n(This is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.)\\n• Charge the battery before use.\\n≥AC adaptor\\n• This is used for charging and power supply.\\n≥USB connection cable\\n≥Shoulder strap\\n≥Body cap*1\\n≥Hot shoe cover*1\\n≥Cover for the battery grip connector*1\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Standard Accessories\\n22\\n*2 This is attached to the lens at the time of purchase.\\n• The memory card is optional.\\n• Consult the dealer or Panasonic if you lose the supplied accessories. (You can \\npurchase the accessories separately.)\\nItems Supplied with DC-S5M2K (Lens Kit Product)/DC-S5M2W \\n(Double Lens Kit Product)\\n≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:\\nS-R2060 “LUMIX S 20-60mm F3.5-5.6”\\n• Dust and splash resistant\\n≥Lens hood\\n≥Lens cap*2\\n≥Lens rear cap*2\\nItems Supplied with DC-S5M2C (Lens Kit Product)/DC-S5M2W \\n(Double Lens Kit Product)\\n≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:\\nS-S50 “LUMIX S 50mm F1.8”\\n• Dust and splash resistant\\n≥Lens hood\\n≥Lens cap*2\\n≥Lens rear cap*2\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Lenses That Can Be Used\\n23\\nLenses That Can Be Used\\nThe lens mount of this camera is compliant with the L-Mount standard of \\nLeica Camera AG.\\nIt can be used with 35 mm full-frame interchangeable lenses and APS-C \\nsize interchangeable lenses of this standard.\\n• The interchangeable lenses used in the explanations are designated as follows in \\nthis document.\\n– 35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens: full-frame lens\\n– APS-C-size interchangeable lens: APS-C lens\\n• When there is no distinguishing the type of lens, the explanation will use lens.\\n• Refer to catalogs/websites for information regarding supported lenses.\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html\\n(English only)\\n• The angle of view while recording with an APS-C lens is equivalent to the angle \\nof view of a focal length of 1.5× when converted to the focal length of a 35 mm \\nfilm camera. (If a 50 mm lens is used, the angle of view will be equivalent to a \\n75 mm lens.)\\n• As the image area narrows, the following function is not available when using an \\nAPS-C lens:\\n– High Resolution Mode\\n• Attaching commercially available accessories that do not comply with the \\nL-Mount standard may lead to operation failure or malfunction of the camera.\\n– If a failure or malfunction occurs due to this cause, the warranty will be void.\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used\\n24\\nMemory Cards That Can Be Used\\nThis section describes the memory cards that can be used with this \\ncamera. (As of January 2023)\\nCard slot 1/Card slot 2: SD memory card\\n• The camera supports UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3 standard and UHS-II Video \\nSpeed Class 90 standard SD cards.\\n• SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards are referred to \\nby the generic name of SD cards or cards in this document.\\n• For information on memory cards with confirmed operation, check the \\nfollowing support site:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html\\n(English only)\\nSD memory card/SDHC memory card/SDXC memory card (Maximum 512 GB)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used\\n25\\n™ SD Cards That Can Be Used with This Camera\\nWhen using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD \\nSpeed Class, UHS Speed Class, and Video Speed Class.\\n• Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for \\ncontinuous writing.\\n[Video Record]\\nBit rate of the \\nrecording quality\\nSpeed Class\\nExample of \\nindication\\n72 Mbps or less\\nClass 10\\n \\nUHS Speed Class 1 or higher\\nVideo Speed Class 10 or higher\\n200 Mbps or less\\nUHS Speed Class 3\\nVideo Speed Class 30 or higher\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used\\n26\\n• You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by setting the write-protect \\nswitch (A) on the SD card to “LOCK”.\\n• The data stored on a card may be damaged due to electromagnetic waves, static \\nelectricity or a failure of the camera or card. We recommend backing up \\nimportant data.\\n• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n27\\nNames of Parts\\n≥Camera: 27\\n≥Supplied Lens: 35\\n≥Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 37\\nCamera\\n(14)\\n(13)\\n(12)\\n(11)\\n(10)\\n(9)\\n(8)\\n(5)\\n(7)\\n(6)\\n(4)\\n(2)\\n(1)\\n(3)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n28\\n(1)\\nDrive mode dial (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n(2)\\nHot shoe (hot shoe cover) (ÎRemoving the Hot Shoe Cover: 331)\\n• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.\\n(3)\\nStereo microphone (ÎAudio Settings: 368)\\n• Do not block the microphone with a finger. Audio will be difficult to record.\\n(4)\\nFront dial (ÎFront Dial/Rear Dial: 77)\\n(5)\\nShutter button (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113)\\n(6)\\n[WB] (White balance) button (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)\\n(7)\\n[ISO] (ISO sensitivity) button (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n(8)\\n[\\n] (Exposure compensation) button (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)\\n(9)\\nCharging light (ÎCharging Light Indications: 46)/\\nNetwork connection light (ÎChecking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth \\nfunctions: 610)\\n(10) Video rec. button (ÎBasic Video Operations: 123)\\n(11) [\\n] (Recording distance reference mark) (ÎOperations on the MF Assist \\nScreen: 192)\\n(12) Rear dial (ÎFront Dial/Rear Dial: 77)\\n(13) Camera on/off switch (ÎSetting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): \\n68)\\n(14) Mode dial (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n29\\n(15) [LVF] button (ÎSwitching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)\\n(16) [\\n] (Playback) button (ÎPlaying Back and Editing of Images: 460)\\n(17) Monitor (ÎViewfinder/Monitor Displays: 37, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 688)/\\nTouch screen (ÎTouch Screen: 80)\\n(18) [\\n] (AF mode) button (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\n(19) Focus mode lever (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147, Using AF: 149, Record \\nUsing MF: 190)\\n(20) [AF ON] button (Î[AF ON] button: 151)\\n(21) Joystick (ÎJoystick: 79)/\\nFn buttons (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n1: Fn12, 3: Fn13, 2: Fn14, Center: Fn15, 4: Fn16\\n(27)\\n(26)\\n(25)\\n(24)\\n(23)\\n(22)\\n(21)\\n(20)\\n(19)\\n(18)\\n(17)\\n(16)\\n(15)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n30\\n(22) [Q] (Quick menu) button (ÎQuick Menu: 89)\\n(23) Cursor buttons (ÎCursor Buttons: 78)/\\nFn buttons (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n3: Fn8, 1: Fn9, 4: Fn10, 2: Fn11\\n(24) Control dial (ÎControl Dial: 77)\\n(25) [MENU/SET] button (Î[MENU/SET] Button: 78, Menu Operation Methods: 94)\\n(26) [DISP.] button (ÎSwitching the Display Information: 86)\\n(27) [\\n] (Cancel) button (ÎMenu Operation Methods: 94)/\\n[\\n] (Delete) button (ÎDeleting Images: 480)/\\nFn button (Fn1) (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n31\\n(28) Eye sensor (ÎSwitching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)\\n(29) Viewfinder (ÎViewfinder/Monitor Displays: 37, Switching Between the Monitor \\nand Viewfinder: 83, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 688)\\n(30) Eye cup (ÎCleaning the Viewfinder: 730)\\n(31) Speaker (Î[Beep]: 583)\\n(32) Tripod mount (ÎTripod: 736)\\n• If you attempt to attach a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm (0.22 inch) or \\nmore, you may not be able to securely fix it in place or it may damage the \\ncamera.\\n(33) Battery grip connector (cover for the battery grip connector) (ÎBattery Grip \\n(Optional): 682)\\n• Keep the cover for the battery grip connector out of reach of children to prevent \\nswallowing.\\n(36)\\n(34)\\n(37)\\n(29)\\n(33)\\n(28)\\n(30)\\n(32)\\n(40)\\n(42)\\n(39)\\n(41)\\n(35)\\n(38)\\n(31)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n32\\n(34) [REMOTE] socket (ÎShutter Remote Control (Optional): 684)\\n(35) Card slot 1 (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)\\n(36) Card access light 1 (ÎCard Access Indications: 58)\\n(37) Card slot 2 (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)\\n(38) Card access light 2 (ÎCard Access Indications: 58)\\n(39) Card door (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)\\n(40) DC Coupler cover (ÎAC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 687)\\n• When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the Panasonic DC Coupler \\n(DMW-DCC17: optional) and AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) are used.\\n• Always use a genuine Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional).\\n• When using an AC Adaptor (optional), use the AC cable/AC mains lead \\nsupplied with the AC Adaptor (optional).\\n(41) Battery door (ÎBattery Insertion: 43)\\n(42) Battery door release lever (ÎBattery Insertion: 43)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n33\\n(43) Fan outlet (Î[Fan Mode]: 568)\\n• The fan outlet for the cooling fan. \\n• Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers, tablecloths, \\ncurtains, and similar items.\\n(44) Shoulder strap eyelet (ÎAttaching a Shoulder Strap: 40)\\n(45) Fan inlet (Î[Fan Mode]: 568)\\n• The fan inlet for the cooling fan. \\n• Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers, tablecloths, \\ncurtains, and similar items.\\n(46) Preview button (ÎPreview Mode: 278)/\\nFn button (Fn2) (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n(47) Grip\\n(48) Lens release button (ÎRemoving a Lens: 62)\\n(49) Self-timer light (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 229)/\\nAF assist light (Î[AF Assist Light]: 159)\\n(47)\\n(48)\\n(59)\\n(58)\\n(46)\\n(54)\\n(52)\\n(51)\\n(43)\\n(50)\\n(49)\\n(56)\\n(55)\\n(44)\\n(53)\\n(44)\\n(45)\\n(57)\\n(43)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n34\\n(50) Diopter adjustment dial (ÎAdjusting the Viewfinder Diopter: 82)\\n(51) [MIC] socket (ÎExternal Microphones (Optional): 377)\\n(52) Headphone socket (ÎHeadphones: 385)\\n• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause \\nhearing loss.\\n(53) HDMI socket (ÎConnecting HDMI Devices: 452, HDMI socket: 664)\\n(54) USB port (ÎInserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 45, USB port: 665)\\n(55) Lens lock pin (Lens fitting mark) (ÎAttaching a Lens: 60)\\n(56) Sensor\\n(57) Contact points\\n(58) Mount\\n(59) Screw hole for function expansion\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n35\\nSupplied Lens\\nS-R2060\\n(1)\\nLens surface\\n(2)\\nFocus ring (ÎRecord Using MF: 190)\\n(3)\\nZoom ring (ÎRecording with Zoom: 197)\\n(4)\\n[AF/MF] switch (ÎUsing AF: 149, Record Using MF: 190)\\n• You can switch between AF and MF.\\nIf [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.\\n(5)\\nContact points\\n(6)\\nLens mount rubber\\n(7)\\nLens fitting mark (ÎAttaching a Lens: 60)\\n• Recording at or near the closest focusing distance at wide angle will degrade \\nimage quality around the edges of the image. We recommend checking each \\npicture after you have taken it when recording. \\n(4)\\n(5)\\n(6)\\n(1)\\n(2) (3)\\n(7)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n36\\nS-S50\\n(1)\\nLens surface\\n(2)\\nFocus ring (ÎRecord Using MF: 190)\\n(3)\\n[AF/MF] switch (ÎUsing AF: 149, Record Using MF: 190)\\n• You can switch between AF and MF.\\nIf [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.\\n(4)\\nContact points\\n(5)\\nLens mount rubber\\n(6)\\nLens fitting mark (ÎAttaching a Lens: 60)\\n(3)\\n(4)\\n(5)\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n(6)\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n37\\nViewfinder/Monitor Displays\\nAt the time of purchase, the viewfinder/monitor displays the following \\nicons.\\n• For information about the icons other than those described here (ÎMonitor/\\nViewfinder Displays: 688)\\nViewfinder\\nMonitor\\n999\\nISO100\\nF3.5\\n60\\nL\\nFINE\\nAFS\\nAFS\\n(8) (9)(10)(11)(12)\\n(13)\\n(14) (15) (16)(17)\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n(4)\\n(3)\\n(5)\\n(6)\\n(7)\\n999\\nISO100\\nF3.5\\n60\\n±0\\nAFS\\nAFS\\nL\\nFINE\\n\\n\\nIntroduction – Names of Parts\\n38\\n(1)\\nPhoto Style (Î[Photo Style]: 301)\\n(2)\\nLevel gauge (Î[Level Gauge]: 561)\\n(3)\\nPicture quality (Î[Picture Quality]: 120)/\\nPicture size (Î[Picture Size]: 118)\\n(4)\\nAF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n(5)\\nFocus mode (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147, Using AF: 149, Record Using \\nMF: 190)\\n(6)\\nAF mode (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\n(7)\\nImage stabilizer (ÎImage Stabilizer: 250)\\n(8)\\nFocus (green) (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113, Using AF: 149)/\\nRecording state (red) (ÎBasic Video Operations: 123, High Resolution mode: \\n211)\\n(9)\\nRecording mode (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n(10) Metering mode (Î[Metering Mode]: 261)\\n(11) Shutter speed (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113, Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 270)\\n(12) Aperture value (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113, Aperture-Priority AE Mode: \\n267)\\n(13) Exposure compensation value (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)/\\nManual Exposure Assist (ÎManual Exposure Assist: 275)\\n(14) ISO sensitivity (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n(15) Card slot (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)/\\nDouble card slot function (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 574)\\n(16) Number of pictures that can be taken (ÎNumber of Pictures That Can Be Taken \\nand Video Recording Time with Cards: 743)/\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken continuously (ÎNumber of Pictures That \\nCan Be Taken Continuously: 208)\\n(17) Battery indication (ÎPower Indications: 51)\\n• Press [\\n] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.\\n\\n\\n39\\nGetting Started\\nBefore recording, read this chapter to prepare the camera.\\n≥Attaching a Shoulder Strap: 40\\n≥Charging the Battery: 42\\n≥Inserting Cards (Optional): 56\\n≥Attaching a Lens: 60\\n≥Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle: 66\\n≥Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 68\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap\\n40\\nAttaching a Shoulder Strap\\nAttach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to \\nprevent it from dropping.\\n1\\n\\n\\n2\\n\\n\\n\\n3\\n\\n\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap\\n41\\n• Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.\\n• Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.\\n• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.\\n– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.\\nIt may result in injury or accident.\\n• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.\\n– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.\\n4\\n\\n\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n42\\nCharging the Battery\\n≥Battery Insertion: 43\\n≥Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 45\\n≥Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/\\nCharging): 49\\n≥Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply: 51\\n≥[Power Save Mode]: 53\\nYou can charge the battery in the camera body.\\nYou can also turn on the camera and supply power from an electrical \\noutlet.\\nYou can also use the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional).\\n• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLK22. (As of \\nJanuary 2023)\\n• The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before \\nuse.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n43\\nBattery Insertion\\n• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLK22).\\n• If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.\\n• Check that the lever (A) is holding the battery in place.\\n• Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].\\n1\\n2\\n(A)\\n3\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n44\\n™ Removing the Battery\\n1\\nSet the camera on/off switch to [OFF].\\n2\\nOpen the battery door.\\n3\\nPush the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the battery.\\n• Check that the card access lights are off before removing the battery. (ÎCard \\nAccess Indications: 58)\\n• Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the inner side (cushion) of the \\nbattery door.\\n• Remove the battery after use.\\n(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)\\n• The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately after \\ncharging.\\nThe camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.\\n• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n45\\nInserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging\\nCharging time: Approx. 220 min\\n• Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor.\\n• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.\\nThe charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.\\nThe charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not \\nbeen used for a long time may be longer than normal.\\n• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n46\\n1\\nSet the camera on/off switch to [OFF].\\n2\\nInsert the battery into the camera.\\n3\\nConnect the camera USB port and the AC adaptor using \\nthe USB connection cable.\\n• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the \\nplug.\\n(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction.)\\n4\\nConnect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.\\n• The charging light (B) turns red and charging begins.\\n™ Charging Light Indications\\nCharging light (red)\\nOn: Charging.\\nOff: Charging has completed.\\nBlinking: Charging error.\\n3\\n4\\n1\\n2\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n47\\n• You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the \\ncamera with the USB connection cable.\\nIn that case, charging may take a while.\\n• The battery in the Battery Grip (DMW-BGS5: optional) cannot be charged.\\n• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.\\nThis may cause malfunction.\\n• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.\\nThis may cause malfunction.\\n• After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.\\n• While the charging light is blinking red, charging is not possible.\\n– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.\\nTry charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF and \\n86 oF).\\n– The terminals of the battery are dirty.\\nRemove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.\\n• Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera off, it \\nconsumes power.\\nWhen the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug from \\nthe electrical outlet in order to save power.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n48\\n™ Power Supply\\nWhen the battery is inserted into the camera for charging and the camera \\nis turned on, you can record while the camera is being supplied with power.\\n• [\\n] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied.\\n• You can also supply power by using a USB connection cable to connect the \\ncamera and a USB device (PC, etc.).\\n• The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.\\n• Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.\\n• Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions. \\nWhen the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.\\n• Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not \\nbe possible to supply power.\\n• For information about the high temperature display (ÎFor information \\nabout the high temperature display: 128)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n49\\nUsing the Camera While Supplying It with Power \\n(Supplying Power/Charging)\\nSince this camera and the items supplied with the Battery Charger \\n(DMW-BTC15: optional) are compatible with USB PD (USB Power \\nDelivery), you can charge while the camera is being supplied with power.\\nConnect the USB connection cable, AC adaptor and AC cable/AC mains \\nlead of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional) to the camera.\\nCharging time: Approx. 170 min\\n• Use the camera body and the AC adaptor supplied with the Battery Charger \\n(DMW-BTC15: optional). The camera is turned off.\\n• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.\\nThe charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.\\nThe charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not \\nbeen used for a long time may be longer than normal.\\n(C) USB connection cable\\n(D) AC adaptor\\n(E) AC cable/AC mains lead\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n50\\n• Insert the battery into the camera.\\n• Connect using the USB connection cable of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: \\noptional).\\n• When the camera is on, charging will take longer than when the camera is off.\\n• Even when connecting with devices that support USB PD, you may not be able \\nto charge while using the camera.\\n• If connecting with devices (PC, etc.) that do not support USB PD and turning the \\ncamera on, then this will supply power only.\\n• Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the power plug.\\n• Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions. \\nWhen the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.\\n• Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not \\nbe possible to supply power.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n51\\nNotifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply\\n™ Power Indications\\nIndication on monitor\\n(F) USB connection cable supplying power\\n(G) Battery indication\\n(H) Using the battery in the Battery Grip\\n• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.\\nThe exact level varies depending on the environment and the operating conditions.\\n80 % or higher\\n60 % to 79 %\\n40 % to 59 %\\n20 % to 39 %\\n19 % or below\\nBlinking in red\\nLow battery\\n• Charge or replace the battery.\\n(F)\\n(G)\\n(H)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n52\\n• We recommend that genuine Panasonic batteries are used.\\nThere is a possibility that the use of non-genuine batteries can cause \\naccidents or malfunctions that may lead to fire or explosion.\\nPlease be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure resulting \\nfrom the use of non-genuine batteries.\\n• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power \\nplug.\\nOtherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the \\nresulting heat generated.\\n• Do not use the AC adaptor or USB connection cable on other devices.\\nThis may cause a malfunction.\\n• Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.\\n• The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not \\nrecommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery \\nis fully charged.\\n(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)\\n• If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then \\ncharging may not complete successfully.\\nReconnect the power plug.\\n• Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.\\n• If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may stop.\\n• If the battery indication does not go to [\\n] even when charging is complete, \\nthe battery may be deteriorating.\\nTry not to use that battery.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n53\\n[Power Save Mode]\\nThis is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) \\nstatus or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a \\nset time. Reduces battery consumption.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Power Save Mode]\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n54\\n• To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting], \\nperform one of the following operations:\\n– Press the shutter button halfway.\\n– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.\\n• To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press any button.\\n[Sleep Mode]\\nSets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.\\n[Sleep \\nMode(Wi-Fi)]\\nSets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected \\nfrom Wi-Fi.\\n[Auto LVF/\\nMonitor Off]\\nSets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn \\noff.\\n(The camera is not turned off.)\\n[Power Save \\nLVF Shooting]\\nPuts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is being \\ndisplayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/monitor \\nswitching is active.\\n[Time to Sleep]\\nSets the amount of time until the camera is \\nput to sleep.\\n[Method of \\nActivation]\\nSets the screen where the camera is put to \\nsleep.\\n[Only Control Panel]: Puts the camera to \\nsleep only when the control panel (ÎControl \\nPanel: 91) is displayed.\\n[While Recording Standby]: Puts the \\ncamera to sleep from any screen during \\nrecording standby.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Charging the Battery\\n55\\n• [Power Save Mode] is not available in the following cases:\\n– While connected to a PC\\n– During video recording/video playback\\n– During a [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)\\n– When recording with [Focus Transition]\\n– During a [Slide Show]\\n– During HDMI output for recording\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)\\n56\\nInserting Cards (Optional)\\nThis camera supports the double card slot function.\\nWhen two cards are used, relay recording, backup recording, and \\nallocation recording are available.\\n• Format the cards with the camera before use. (Î[Card Format]: 573)\\n\\n\\n1\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)\\n57\\n(A) Card slot 1\\n(B) Card slot 2\\n• Match the orientation of the cards as shown in the figure and then insert them firmly \\nuntil they click.\\n• You can set the way to record to card slots 1 and 2:\\n(Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 574)\\n• You can set the folder and file name where to save the images:\\n(Î[Folder / File Settings]: 575)\\n2\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\n3\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)\\n58\\n™ Card Access Indications\\nThe card access light turns on while the card is being accessed.\\n(C) Card access light for card slot 1\\n(D) Card access light for card slot 2\\n• The card may be warm just after the camera has been used.\\n• Do not perform the following operations during access.\\nThe camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images may \\nbe damaged.\\n– Turn off the camera.\\n– Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug.\\n– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)\\n59\\n™ Removing a Card\\n1\\nOpen the card door.\\n2\\nPush the card until it clicks and then pull the card out straight.\\n• Check that the card access lights are off before removing the card.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Lens\\n60\\nAttaching a Lens\\n≥Attaching a Lens Hood: 63\\nYou can attach the Leica Camera AG L-Mount standard lens to this \\ncamera.\\nFor information about the lens that can be used (ÎLenses That Can Be \\nUsed: 23)\\n• Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].\\n• Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust.\\nIf dirt or dust gets on the lens (ÎDirt on the Image Sensor: 729)\\n• Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Lens\\n61\\n• When removing the body cap, rotate it while pressing the lens release button (A).\\n(B) Lens fitting marks\\n\\n\\n1\\n2\\n\\n\\n\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n3\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Lens\\n62\\n™ Removing a Lens\\n• While pressing the lens release button (A), rotate the lens in the direction of the \\narrow until it stops and then remove it.\\n• When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function \\nwith this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation \\nof the lens information is displayed. You can register the focal length for the lens \\nwhen you select [Yes]. You can also select from amongst already registered lens \\ninformation. (Î[Lens Information]: 258)\\n• You can change the settings so that the confirmation message is not displayed:\\n(Î[Lens Info. Confirmation]: 571)\\n• Insert the lens straight in.\\nInserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.\\n• After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Lens\\n63\\nAttaching a Lens Hood\\nFor recording against strong backlight, a lens hood can reduce the \\ninclusion of unwanted light in images and drop in contrast resulting from \\nthe irregular reflection of light that occurs within the lens.\\nIt allows you take more beautiful pictures by cutting out excess light.\\nWhen attaching the lens hood (flower shape) supplied with the \\ninterchangeable lens (S-R2060)\\n• Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in the figure.\\n• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will become bent.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Lens\\n64\\n1\\nAlign mark (C) (\\n) on the lens hood with the mark on \\nthe tip of the lens.\\n2\\nRotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to \\nalign mark (D) (\\n) on the lens hood with the mark on the \\ntip of the lens.\\n≥Attach the lens hood by rotating it until it clicks.\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Attaching a Lens\\n65\\n™ Removing the Lens Hood (S-R2060)\\nWhile pressing the lens hood button (E), rotate the lens hood in the \\ndirection of the arrow and then remove it.\\n• The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction when carrying the \\ncamera.\\nExample) S-R2060\\n1\\nAlign mark (D) (\\n) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.\\n2\\nAttach the lens hood by rotating it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.\\n\\n\\n(E)\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle\\n66\\nAdjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle\\nAt the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.\\n180°\\n1\\n90°\\n180°\\n2\\n3\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle\\n67\\n• The angles of adjustment are guides only.\\n• Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or \\nmalfunction.\\n• When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface facing in.\\n• You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of \\nthe monitor during recording:\\n(Î[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 556)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)\\n68\\nSetting the Clock (When Turning On for the \\nFirst Time)\\nWhen you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the time \\nzone and clock appears.\\nBe sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded \\nwith the correct date and time information.\\n1\\nSet the camera on/off switch to [ON].\\n≥If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 4.\\n2\\nWhen [Please set the language] appears, press \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nSet the language.\\n≥Press 34 to select the language and then press \\n or \\n.\\n4\\nWhen [Please set the time zone] appears, press \\n or \\n.\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)\\n69\\n5\\nSet the time zone.\\n≥Press 21 to select the time zone and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• If you are using Daylight Savings [\\n], press 3. (The time will move \\nforward by 1 hour.)\\nTo return to the normal time, press 3 again.\\n(A) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)\\n6\\nWhen [Please set the clock] appears, press \\n or \\n.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)\\n70\\n7\\nSet the clock.\\n21: Select an item (year, month, day, hour, minute, or second).\\n34: Select a value.\\nTo set the display order and time display format\\n≥To display the screen for setting the display order (B) and time \\ndisplay format (C), select [Style] by pressing 21 and then press \\n or \\n.\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nGetting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)\\n71\\n8\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press \\n or \\n.\\n9\\nWhen [The clock setting has been completed.] appears, \\npress \\n or \\n.\\n• If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to “0:00:00 1/1/2023”.\\n• Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock \\nbattery even without the battery.\\n(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to charge the \\nbuilt-in battery.)\\n• [Time Zone] and [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:\\n(Î[Time Zone]: 590, [Clock Set]: 590)\\n\\n\\n72\\nBasic Operations\\nThis chapter describes basic camera operations and the Intelligent Auto \\nmode which helps you start recording immediately.\\n≥How to Hold the Camera: 73\\n≥Selecting the Recording Mode: 75\\n≥Camera Setting Operations: 76\\n≥Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings: 82\\n≥Quick Menu: 89\\n≥Control Panel: 91\\n≥Menu Operation Methods: 94\\n≥Entering Characters: 100\\n≥Intelligent Auto Mode: 101\\n≥Recording Using Touch Functions: 107\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – How to Hold the Camera\\n73\\nHow to Hold the Camera\\nTo minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during \\nrecording.\\nHold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your \\nside, and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.\\n≥Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera \\ngrip.\\n≥Support the lens from below with your left hand.\\n• Do not cover the AF assist light (A) or microphone (B) with your fingers or other \\nobjects.\\n• Do not cover the fan inlet (C) and fan outlet (D) of the cooling fan with your hand, etc.\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(D)\\n(D)\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – How to Hold the Camera\\n74\\n™ Vertical Orientation Detection Function\\nThis function detects when pictures were recorded with the camera held \\nvertically orientated.\\nWith the default settings, pictures are automatically played back vertically \\noriented.\\n• If you set [Rotate Disp.] to [OFF], pictures will be played back without being rotated. \\n(Î[Rotate Disp.]: 494)\\n• When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation \\ndetection function may not work correctly.\\n• You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information \\nduring video recording:\\n(Î[Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 571)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Selecting the Recording Mode\\n75\\nSelecting the Recording Mode\\nRotate the mode dial to select the recording mode.\\n[iA]\\nIntelligent Auto mode (ÎIntelligent Auto Mode: 101)\\n[P]\\nProgram AE mode (ÎProgram AE Mode: 263)\\n[A]\\nAperture-Priority AE mode (ÎAperture-Priority AE Mode: 267)\\n[S]\\nShutter-Priority AE mode (ÎShutter-Priority AE Mode: 270)\\n[M]\\nManual Exposure mode (ÎManual Exposure Mode: 273)\\n[\\n]\\nCreative Video mode (ÎRecording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/\\nS&Q): 350)\\n[S&Q]\\nSlow & Quick mode (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\n[C1]/[C2]/[C3]\\nCustom mode (ÎCustom Mode: 528)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Camera Setting Operations\\n76\\nCamera Setting Operations\\nWhen changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the \\nfollowing operation parts.\\n(A) Front dial (\\n) (ÎFront Dial/Rear Dial: 77)\\n(B) Rear dial (\\n) (ÎFront Dial/Rear Dial: 77)\\n(C) Control dial (\\n) (ÎControl Dial: 77)\\n(D) Cursor buttons (3421) (ÎCursor Buttons: 78)\\n(E) [MENU/SET] button (\\n) (Î[MENU/SET] Button: 78)\\n(F) Joystick (3421/\\n) (ÎJoystick: 79)\\n(G) Touch screen (ÎTouch Screen: 80)\\n(G)\\n(F)\\n(E) (D) (C)\\n(B)\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Camera Setting Operations\\n77\\n™ Front Dial/Rear Dial\\nRotate:\\nSelects an item or numeric value.\\n™ Control Dial\\nRotate:\\nSelects an item or numeric value.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Camera Setting Operations\\n78\\n™ Cursor Buttons\\nPress:\\nSelects an item or numeric value.\\n™ [MENU/SET] Button\\nPress:\\nConfirms a setting.\\n• Displays the menu during recording and playback.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Camera Setting Operations\\n79\\n™ Joystick\\nThe joystick can be operated in 8 directions by tilting it up, down, left, right \\nand diagonally and by pressing the center part.\\n(H) Tilt: Selects an item or numeric value, or moves a position.\\n• Place your finger on the center of the joystick before tilting. The joystick may not \\nwork as expected when the sides are pressed.\\n(I) Press: Confirms a setting.\\n• You can disable the operations of operating parts.\\n(Î[Operation Lock Setup]: 547)\\n(H)\\n(I)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Camera Setting Operations\\n80\\n™ Touch Screen\\nOperations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus, \\nand other items displayed on the screen.\\nTouch\\nOperation of touching and then lifting your finger from the touch screen.\\nDrag\\nOperation of moving a finger while it touches the touch screen.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Camera Setting Operations\\n81\\nPinch (widen/narrow)\\nOperations of widening the distance between two fingers (pinch out) and \\nnarrowing the distance between two fingers (pinch in) while they are \\ntouching the touch screen.\\n• If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe the \\nprecautions for the sheet.\\n(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor \\nprotection sheet.)\\n• Touch operations can be disabled:\\n(Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n82\\nMonitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n≥Setting the Viewfinder: 82\\n≥Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83\\n≥Switching the Display Information: 86\\nSetting the Viewfinder\\n™ Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter\\nRotate the diopter adjustment dial while looking through the \\nviewfinder.\\n• Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the viewfinder.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n83\\nSwitching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder\\nWith the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set. \\nWhen you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor (A) works and the \\ncamera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display.\\nYou can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF] button \\n(B).\\nPress [LVF].\\n(C) Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching\\n(D) Viewfinder display\\n(E) Monitor display\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n84\\n™ Simultaneous Display on the Monitor and Viewfinder\\nWhen automatic viewfinder/monitor switching (C), if the monitor is rotated \\ntowards the lens, the recording screen seen when looking through the \\nviewfinder is also displayed on the monitor.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n85\\n• The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the way \\nthe camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.\\n• During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching \\ndoes not work.\\n• To focus when looking through the viewfinder:\\n(Î[Eye Sensor AF]: 545)\\n• The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be changed:\\n(Î[Eye Sensor]: 582)\\n• You can set the display speed for live view on the monitor when recording \\npictures:\\n(Î[Monitor Frame Rate]: 579)\\n• You can set the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when recording \\npictures.\\n(Î[LVF Frame Rate]: 580)\\n• You can adjust the brightness, coloring, red or blue tints, etc., of the monitor/\\nviewfinder:\\n(Î[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]: 580)\\n• You can adjust monitor/viewfinder luminance:\\n(Î[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]: 581)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n86\\nSwitching the Display Information\\nPress [DISP.].\\n≥The display information is switched.\\n™ Recording Screen\\nMonitor\\n(F) With information\\n(G) Without information\\n(H) Control panel\\n(I) Turned off (black)\\n999\\nISO\\nAUTO\\n±0\\nAFS\\nAFS\\nL\\nFINE\\n999\\n999\\nAWB\\nFn\\n0\\n0\\n0\\nAFS\\nFINE\\n3:2\\nISO\\nAUTO\\nOFF\\n(F)\\n(G)\\n(H)\\n(I)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n87\\nViewfinder\\n(J) With information\\n(K) Without information\\n• Press [\\n] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.\\nThis can also be set by using [Level Gauge]. (Î[Level Gauge]: 561)\\n• Control panel operation (ÎControl Panel: 91)\\n• You can hide the control panel and black screen:\\n(Î[Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 562)\\n• The display can be changed so that live view and display information do not \\noverlap:\\n(Î[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 556)\\n• You can display the outline for the live view:\\n(Î[Framing Outline]: 562)\\n999\\nL\\nFINE\\nAFS\\nAFS\\n(J)\\n(K)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings\\n88\\n™ Playback Screen\\n(L) With information\\n(M) Detailed information display\\n• Pressing 34 switches the display information. (ÎDetailed information display: 707)\\n(N) Without information\\n(O) Without blinking highlights\\n• This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Blinking \\nHighlights] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) is set to [ON].\\nIn other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. (Î[Blinking \\nHighlights]: 558)\\n2023.12.1  10:00\\n100-0001\\n1/999\\nISO100\\nF3.5\\n60\\n±0\\nL\\nFINE\\n100\\n100-0001\\nISO\\n0\\nF3.5\\n60\\n2023.12. 1 10:00\\nsRGB\\n1/5\\nFINE\\nAFS\\nSTD.\\nL\\n3:2\\nAWB\\n(L)\\n(M)\\n(N)\\n(O)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Quick Menu\\n89\\nQuick Menu\\nThis menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used \\nduring recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change \\nthe Quick menu display method and the items to display.\\n1\\nDisplay the Quick menu.\\n≥Press [Q].\\n2\\nSelect a menu item.\\n≥Press 3421.\\n≥Directions on the diagonal can also be selected using the joystick.\\n≥Selection is also possible by rotating \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by touching a menu item.\\n0\\n0\\n0\\nAWB\\n3:2\\n0\\n0\\n0\\nAUTO\\nISO\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Quick Menu\\n90\\n3\\nSelect a setting item.\\n≥Rotate \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by touching a setting item.\\n4\\nClose the Quick menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n≥You can also close the menu by pressing [Q].\\n• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.\\n• The Quick menu can be customized:\\n(ÎQuick Menu Customization: 521)\\n0\\n0\\n0\\nAWB\\n3:2\\n0\\n0\\n0\\nAUTO\\nISO\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Control Panel\\n91\\nControl Panel\\nThis screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the \\nmonitor. You can also touch the screen to change the settings.\\nIn the [\\n] mode (Creative Video mode)/[S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick \\nmode), the display changes to one especially for video.\\n• For information about the screen (ÎControl Panel: 696, Control Panel (Creative \\nVideo Mode/Slow & Quick Mode): 699)\\n1\\nDisplay the control panel.\\n≥Press [DISP.] several times.\\n2\\nTouch the items.\\n≥The setting screens for each of the items are displayed.\\n999\\n999\\nAWB\\nFn\\nISO\\nAUTO\\n0\\n0\\n0\\nAFS\\nFINE\\n3:2\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Control Panel\\n92\\n3\\nChange the setting.\\nExample) Changing the AF mode\\n≥Touch the setting item.\\n• Refer to the pages explaining each item for information on how to change the \\nsettings.\\n4\\nTouch [Set].\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Control Panel\\n93\\n™ Changing Directly Using the Dial\\nSteps 2 to 4 can also be changed using the following operations.\\n1\\nPress one of 3421 to enable selection of items.\\n• Selected items are displayed in yellow.\\n2\\nPress 3421 to select an item.\\n• Selection is also possible by rotating \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nRotate \\n to change the settings values.\\n• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.\\nAWB\\nISO\\nAUTO\\n0\\n0\\nAFS\\nFINE\\n3:2\\nAWB\\nISO\\nAUTO\\n0\\n0\\nAFS\\nFINE\\n3:2\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Menu Operation Methods\\n94\\nMenu Operation Methods\\n≥[Reset]: 99\\nIn this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and \\nperforming camera customizations.\\nMenu operations can be performed using the cursors, joystick, dial, or by \\ntouch.\\nConfiguration and operation parts of the menu\\nThe menu can be operated by pressing 21 to move between menu screens.\\nUse the operation parts indicated below to operate the main tab, the sub tab, the page \\ntab, and menu items without moving to the corresponding menu levels.\\n• You can also operate by touching the icons, menu items, and setting items.\\n(A) Main tab ([Q] button)\\n(B) Sub tab (\\n)\\n(C) Menu item (\\n)\\n(D) Page tab (\\n)\\n(E) Setting item\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Menu Operation Methods\\n95\\n1\\nDisplay the menu.\\n≥Press \\n.\\n2\\nSelect a main tab.\\n≥Press 34 to select a main tab and then press 1.\\n≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating \\n to select \\nthe main tab and then pressing \\n or \\n.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Menu Operation Methods\\n96\\n3\\nSelect a sub tab.\\n≥Press 34 to select a sub tab and then press 1.\\n≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating \\n to select \\nthe sub tab and then pressing \\n or \\n.\\n• If there are page tabs (D), then after the page tabs have finished switching, \\nthe next sub tab is switched to.\\n4\\nSelect a menu item.\\n≥Press 34 to select a menu item and then press 1.\\n≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating \\n to select \\nthe menu item and then pressing \\n or \\n.\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Menu Operation Methods\\n97\\n5\\nSelect a setting item and then confirm your selection.\\n≥Press 34 to select a setting item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating \\n to select \\nthe setting item and then pressing \\n or \\n.\\n6\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n≥You can also close the menu by pressing [\\n] several times.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Menu Operation Methods\\n98\\n™ Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings\\nIf you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting item is selected, a \\ndescription about the item is displayed on the screen.\\n™ Grayed Out Menu Items\\nMenu items that cannot be set are displayed grayed out.\\nIf you press \\n or \\n while a grayed out menu item is selected, the \\nreason why it cannot be set is displayed.\\n• The reason why a menu item cannot be set may not be displayed depending on the \\nmenu item.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Menu Operation Methods\\n99\\n[Reset]\\nReturn each of the following settings to the default setting:\\n• Recording settings\\n• Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])\\n• Setup and custom settings (other than [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Reset]\\n• If the setup and custom settings are reset, the [Playback] menu is also reset.\\n• If the setup and custom settings are reset, [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer] \\nin the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu/[Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu is also \\nreturned to the default setting.\\n• The folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.\\n• List of default settings and settings that can be reset (ÎList of Default Settings/\\nCustom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 750)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Entering Characters\\n100\\nEntering Characters\\nFollow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.\\n1\\nEnter characters.\\n≥Press 3421 to select characters and then press \\n or \\n \\nuntil the character to enter is displayed. (Repeat this)\\n• To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate \\n or \\n to the right to \\nmove the entry position cursor.\\n• If you select an item and press \\n or \\n, you can perform the following \\noperations:\\n– [\\n]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower \\ncase characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)\\n– [ ] ]: Enter a blank\\n– [Delete]: Delete a character\\n– [\\n]: Move the entry position cursor to the left\\n– [\\n]: Move the entry position cursor to the right\\n• When entering a password, (A) shows the number of characters you have \\nentered and the number of characters you can enter.\\n2\\nComplete entering.\\n≥Select [Set] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode\\n101\\nIntelligent Auto Mode\\nThe [iA] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings \\nautomatically selected by the camera.\\nThe camera detects the scene to set the optimal recording settings \\nautomatically to match the subject and recording conditions.\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [iA].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode\\n102\\n2\\nAim the camera at the subject.\\n≥When the camera detects the scene, the recording mode icon \\nchanges.\\n(Automatic Scene Detection)\\n3\\nAdjust the focus.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon lights.\\n(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)\\n• [\\n] of the AF mode works and the AF area is displayed aligned to any \\nhumans.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode\\n103\\n4\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully to take pictures.\\n≥Press the video rec. button to record videos.\\n• Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from \\nappearing dark when there is a backlight.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode\\n104\\n™ Types of Automatic Scene Detection\\n*1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] in the [Photo] ([Focus]) menu is set to \\n[HUMAN] or [FACE/EYE].\\n*2 Detected when [Detecting Subject] in the [Photo] ([Focus]) menu is set to \\n[ANIMAL+HUMAN].\\n*3 Detected when using an external flash.\\nTaking pictures\\nRecording video\\ni-Portrait*1\\n3\\n3\\ni-Portrait & Animal*2\\n3\\n3\\ni-Scenery\\n3\\n3\\ni-Macro\\n3\\n3\\ni-Night Portrait*3\\n3\\ni-Night Scenery\\n3\\ni-Food\\n3\\ni-Sunset\\n3\\ni-Low Light\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n• If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [\\n] (standard setting).\\n• Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the \\nrecording conditions.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode\\n105\\n™ AF Mode\\nChanging the AF mode.\\n• Each press of [\\n] changes the AF mode.\\n• The mode can also be changed by touching the screen or pressing and holding the \\njoystick.\\n• [AF Detection Setting] is fixed to [ON].\\n• The [Detecting Subject] setting is maintained for any recording mode other than [iA] \\nmode. (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168)\\n[\\n]/[\\n]/[\\n] ([Full Area AF])\\nThe camera detects a person’s face, eyes, and body (entire body or upper half of the \\nbody) and the body of animals, and adjusts the focus.\\n• You can switch the human, animal, or eye to be focused by either touching the white \\nAF area or moving the joystick 3421.\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode\\n106\\n[\\n] ([Tracking])\\nWhen the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of the \\nsubject, maintaining focusing.\\nAim the AF area over the subject and then press and hold the shutter button \\nhalfway.\\n• The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway or fully.\\n™ Flash\\nWhen recording using a flash, the camera switches to the appropriate flash \\nmode for the recording conditions.\\nWhen Slow Sync. ([\\n], [\\n]), be careful with regard to camera shake \\nbecause the shutter speed becomes slow.\\n• For information about AF modes (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168, [Tracking]: 171)\\n• For information about external flashes (ÎUsing an External Flash (Optional): \\n330)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions\\n107\\nRecording Using Touch Functions\\n≥Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 107\\n≥Touch AE: 110\\nTouch AF/Touch Shutter\\nTouch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the \\nshutter, etc.\\n• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.\\nSet [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. \\n(Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions\\n108\\n1\\nTouch [\\n].\\n2\\nTouch the icon.\\n≥The icon switches each time you touch it.\\n (Touch AF)\\nFocus on the touched position.\\n (Touch Shutter)\\nRecord with focus on the touched position.\\n (OFF)\\n3\\n(When set to anything other than OFF) Touch the \\nsubject.\\nAF\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions\\n109\\n• When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then disappears.\\n• For information about operations to move the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: \\n181)\\n• It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position:\\n(ÎFocus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 186)\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions\\n110\\nTouch AE\\nThis function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.\\nWhen a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to \\nmatch the face.\\n1\\nTouch [\\n].\\n2\\nTouch [\\n].\\n≥The Touch AE settings screen appears.\\n• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.\\nSet [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. \\n(Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\nAE\\nAF\\n\\n\\nBasic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions\\n111\\n3\\nTouch the subject to which you wish to adjust the \\nbrightness.\\n• To return the position to which to adjust the brightness to the center, touch \\n[Reset].\\n4\\nTouch [Set].\\n™ How to Disable Touch AE\\nTouch [\\n].\\n• When the following function is being used, Touch AE is not available:\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n• You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position you \\ntouch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):\\n(ÎFocus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 186)\\nュリヴヱハ\\n6HW\\n5HVHW\\n\\n\\n112\\nTaking Pictures\\nThese are the basic operations and settings for taking pictures.\\n≥Basic Picture Operations: 113\\n≥[Aspect Ratio]: 116\\n≥[Picture Size]: 118\\n≥[Picture Quality]: 120\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations\\n113\\nBasic Picture Operations\\n1\\nSelect the recording mode ([iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]).\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations\\n114\\n2\\nAdjust the focus.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway (press it gently).\\n≥The aperture value (A) and shutter speed (B) are displayed.\\n(When the correct exposure cannot be obtained, the indications \\nblink in red.)\\n≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon (C) lights.\\n(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)\\n• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [AF ON].\\n(C)\\nF3.5\\nF3.5\\nF3.5\\n60\\n60\\n60\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations\\n115\\n3\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully (press it further).\\n• Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review] of the \\n[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu. You can also change the picture \\ndisplay duration to your preferred setting. (Î[Auto Review]: 552)\\n• With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is \\nbrought into focus.\\nIf you set [Focus/Shutter Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu \\nto [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a picture even when \\nthe subject is not in focus. (Î[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 540)\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio]\\n116\\n[Aspect Ratio]\\nYou can select the image aspect ratio.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Aspect Ratio]\\n[4:3]\\nAspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor\\n[3:2]\\nAspect ratio of a standard film camera\\n[16:9]\\nAspect ratio of a 16:9 TV\\n[1:1]\\nSquare aspect ratio\\n[65:24]\\n65:24 panoramic aspect ratio\\n[2:1]\\n2:1 panoramic aspect ratio\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio]\\n117\\n• [65:24] and [2:1] aspect ratios are not available when using the following \\nfunctions:\\n– [iA] mode\\n– Taking burst pictures\\n– [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– [Stop Motion Animation]\\n– High Resolution Mode\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n• When using APS-C lenses, [65:24] and [2:1] are not available.\\n• A frame for trimming (cropping) can be displayed on the recording screen:\\n(Î[Frame Marker]: 405)\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – [Picture Size]\\n118\\n[Picture Size]\\nSets the picture’s image size. The image size varies depending on the \\n[Aspect Ratio] or the lens used.\\nWhen an APS-C lens is used, the image area switches to the one for \\nAPS-C, thereby narrowing the angle of view.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Picture Size]\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – [Picture Size]\\n119\\n• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] is set, the [M] and [S] image sizes are indicated with [\\n].\\n[Aspect \\nRatio]\\n[Picture Size]\\nWhen using full-frame lenses\\nWhen using APS-C lenses\\n[4:3]\\n[L] (21.5M)\\n5328×4000\\n[L] (9.5M)\\n3536×2656\\n[M] (10.5M)\\n3792×2848\\n[M] (5M)\\n2560×1920\\n[S] (5.5M)\\n2688×2016\\n[S] (2.5M)\\n1840×1376\\n[3:2]\\n[L] (24M)\\n6000×4000\\n[L] (10.5M)\\n3984×2656\\n[M] (12M)\\n4272×2848\\n[M] (5.5M)\\n2880×1920\\n[S] (6M)\\n3024×2016\\n[S] (3M)\\n2064×1376\\n[16:9]\\n[L] (20M)\\n6000×3368\\n[L] (9M)\\n3984×2240\\n[M] (10M)\\n4272×2400\\n[M] (4.5M)\\n2880×1624\\n[S] (5M)\\n3024×1704\\n[S] (2M)\\n1920×1080\\n[1:1]\\n[L] (16M)\\n4000×4000\\n[L] (7M)\\n2656×2656\\n[M] (8M)\\n2848×2848\\n[M] (3.5M)\\n1920×1920\\n[S] (4M)\\n2016×2016\\n[S] (2M)\\n1376×1376\\n[65:24]\\n[L] (13M)\\n6000×2208\\n[2:1]\\n[L] (18M)\\n6000×3000\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:\\n– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])\\n– High Resolution mode\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – [Picture Quality]\\n120\\n[Picture Quality]\\nSet the compression rate used for storing pictures.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Picture Quality]\\n[FINE]\\nJPEG images that give priority to image quality.\\nFile format: JPEG\\n[STD.]\\nJPEG images of standard image quality.\\nThis is useful for increasing the number of recordable pictures without changing the \\npicture size.\\nFile format: JPEG\\n[RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]\\nThis records RAW and JPEG images ([FINE] or [STD.]) simultaneously.\\nFile format: RAW+JPEG\\n[RAW]\\nThis records RAW images.\\nFile format: RAW\\n\\n\\nTaking Pictures – [Picture Quality]\\n121\\nNote on RAW\\nRAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed on the \\ncamera.\\nPlayback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated \\nsoftware.\\nThe color depth of RAW images recorded with this camera is 14 bits. This is limited \\nto 12 bits during burst recording, however.\\n• You can process RAW images on the camera. (Î[RAW Processing]: 482)\\n• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to \\nprocess and edit RAW files on a PC. (ÎSILKYPIX Developer Studio SE: 674)\\n• RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [3:2] aspect ratio.\\n• When you delete an image recorded with [RAW+FINE] or [RAW+STD.] on the \\ncamera, both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Picture Quality] is not available:\\n– High Resolution mode\\n• You can assign the function that records a RAW image and a JPEG image \\nsimultaneously once only to an Fn button:\\n(Î[1 Shot RAW+JPG]: 509)\\n• Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]:\\n(Î[Color Space]: 538)\\n\\n\\n122\\nRecording Videos\\nThese are the basic operations and settings for recording videos.\\n• Please also refer to the following chapters for more detailed information about \\nrecording videos:\\n– Video Settings: 349\\n– Special Video Recording: 409\\n– HDMI Output (Video): 451\\n≥Basic Video Operations: 123\\n≥[System Frequency]: 130\\n≥[Rec. File Format]: 132\\n≥[Rec Quality]: 133\\n≥[Image Area of Video]: 144\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – Basic Video Operations\\n123\\nBasic Video Operations\\nIt is possible to record video with a maximum resolution of 6K (5952×3968) \\non this camera.\\nIt also supports switching of the system frequency and 2 types of recording \\nfile format; MP4 and MOV.\\n[\\n] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode) \\nare recording modes specifically for video.\\nIn the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick \\nmotion video by changing the frame rate.\\n1\\nSelect the recording mode.\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – Basic Video Operations\\n124\\n2\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the video rec. button (A).\\n• Release the video rec. button right after you press it.\\n3\\nStop recording.\\n≥Press the video rec. button (A) again.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – Basic Video Operations\\n125\\n™ Screen Displays While Video Recording\\nThe live view angle of view changes to the angle of view for video \\nrecording, and video recording time (B) and elapsed recording time (C) are \\ndisplayed.\\n• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.\\n• The recording state indication (D) and card access indication (E) turn red while \\nvideos are being recorded.\\n• If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF, \\npress the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.\\n24m59s\\n24m59s\\n24m59s\\n3s\\n3s\\n3s\\n(D)\\n(C)\\n(E)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – Basic Video Operations\\n126\\n™ Exposure Control While Video Recording\\nVideos will be recorded using the aperture value, shutter speed, ISO \\nsensitivity, and Dual Native ISO settings below.\\nRecording \\nmode\\nAperture value/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity/Dual Native \\nISO setting\\n[iA]\\nThe camera automatically makes the settings to suit the scene. \\n(ÎTypes of Automatic Scene Detection: 104)\\n[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]\\nThe settings vary depending on the [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] \\nin the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu. The default setting is \\n[ON]. (Î[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 538)\\n[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.\\n[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.\\n[\\n]/[S&Q]\\nRecords with manually set values.\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – Basic Video Operations\\n127\\n™ Size Interval for Dividing Files\\nA new file will be created to continue recording if the continuous recording \\ntime or the file size exceeds the following conditions.\\n(A) Using an SDXC memory card\\n(B) Using an SDHC memory card\\n[Rec. File \\nFormat]\\n[Rec \\nQuality]\\nCard \\nused\\nFile division\\nContinuous \\nrecording time\\nFile size\\n[MP4]\\n[FHD]\\n(A)\\n30 minutes\\n4 GB\\n(B)\\n[4K]\\n(A)\\n3 hours 4 minutes\\n96 GB\\n(B)\\n30 minutes\\n4 GB\\n[MOV]\\nAll\\n(A)\\n3 hours 4 minutes\\n192 GB\\n(B)\\n30 minutes\\n4 GB\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – Basic Video Operations\\n128\\n• If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during video \\nrecording, that operation sound may be recorded.\\n• The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to video.\\n• If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button to end recording bothers \\nyou, try the following:\\n– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the \\nvideo using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] ([Edit Image]) menu.\\n– Use the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) for recording.\\n• Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a while \\nafter video recording. This is not a malfunction.\\n• Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may occur \\nwhere image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not displayed \\ncorrectly, or playback is not possible, for example.\\nIf you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.\\n• Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:\\n– [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– [Stop Motion Animation]\\n• For information about the high temperature display\\nWhen the temperature of the camera rises, [\\n] appears blinking on the screen. \\nIf you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot \\nbe used is displayed on the screen and recording and HDMI output will be \\nstopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the message indicating that \\nthe camera can be used again. When the message indicating that it can be used \\nagain is displayed, turn the camera off then on again.\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – Basic Video Operations\\n129\\n• You can set the temperature during video recording at which the camera \\nautomatically stops recording:\\n(Î[Thermal Management]: 579)\\n• You can switch the recording screen display to suit video recording just as with \\nthe [\\n] mode:\\n(Î[Video-Priority Display]: 566)\\n• You can display a red frame on the recording screen that indicates that video is \\nbeing recorded:\\n(Î[Red REC Frame Indicator]: 566)\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [System Frequency]\\n130\\n[System Frequency]\\nThis changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played \\nback with the camera.\\nThe default setting is for the system frequency to be set to the TV \\nbroadcast system for the region where the camera was purchased.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [System Frequency]\\n[59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\nSystem frequency for regions using the NTSC broadcasting system\\n[50.00Hz (PAL)]\\nSystem frequency for regions using the PAL broadcasting system\\n[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]\\nSystem frequency for producing cinema film\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [System Frequency]\\n131\\n• After changing the setting, turn the camera off and on.\\n• If you record using a system frequency that differs from the broadcasting system \\nof your region, it may not be possible for you to properly play back videos on your \\nTV.\\nWe recommend using the setting as it was at the time of purchase if you are \\nunsure about broadcasting systems or if you will not be involved in producing \\ncinema film.\\n• After changing the setting, it is recommended to insert another card and format it \\nwith this camera.\\n– Make the [System Frequency] setting the same for when you are recording and \\nplaying back.\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec. File Format]\\n132\\n[Rec. File Format]\\nSets the recording file format of videos to be recorded.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Rec. File Format]\\n[MP4]\\nThis file format is suitable for playback on PCs.\\n[MOV]\\nThis file format is suitable for image editing.\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n133\\n[Rec Quality]\\nSets the image quality of videos to be recorded.\\nThe image qualities you can select depend on the recording mode, \\n[System Frequency], and [Rec. File Format] settings.\\nThe [Image Area of Video] setting items you can select depend on the [Rec \\nQuality] settings.\\n[Rec Quality] settings can also be made using [Filtering] (Î[Filtering]: 141) \\nto display only items that meet your conditions and [add to list] (Î[add to \\nlist]: 142) to register recording qualities you use often.\\n• The above shows some of the recording qualities available.\\nC4K (17:9)/APS-C\\n4K/FHD (16:9)/APS-C\\n3.3K(4:3)/APS-C\\nC4K30p/25p/24p (17:9)/Full\\n5.9K (16:9)/Full\\n6K (3:2)/Full\\n4K30p/25p/24p, FHD (16:9)/Full\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n134\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Rec Quality]\\n• To record video with a bit rate of 72 Mbps or more, you require an SD card with the \\ncorresponding Speed Class.\\n• For information about the cards that can be used (ÎSD Cards That Can Be Used \\nwith This Camera: 25)\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n135\\n™ [Rec. File Format]: [MP4]\\n• YUV, Bit value, Image compression:\\n– [10bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP\\n– [8bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 8 bit, Long GOP\\n• Audio format: AAC (2ch)\\n(A) Recording frame rate\\n(B) Bit rate (Mbps)\\n(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[Image Area of Video]\\nResolution Aspect \\nratio\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\nFULL\\nAPS-C\\n[4K/10bit/100M/60p]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n59.94p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n[4K/10bit/72M/30p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n72\\nHEVC\\n[4K/8bit/100M/30p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[4K/10bit/72M/24p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n72\\nHEVC\\n[4K/8bit/100M/24p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n59.94p\\n28\\nAVC\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n20\\nAVC\\n[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n24\\nAVC\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[Image Area of Video]\\nResolution Aspect \\nratio\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\nFULL\\nAPS-C\\n[4K/10bit/100M/50p]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n50.00p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n[4K/10bit/72M/25p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n72\\nHEVC\\n[4K/8bit/100M/25p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n50.00p\\n28\\nAVC\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n20\\nAVC\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n136\\n™ [Rec. File Format]: [MOV]\\n• YUV, Bit value, Image compression:\\n– [422/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, Long GOP\\n– [420/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP\\n• Audio format: LPCM (4ch)*1\\n*1 Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks \\nof the video.\\n: Only available in Creative Video mode.\\n(A) Recording frame rate\\n(B) Bit rate (Mbps)\\n(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[Image Area of \\nVideo]\\nResolution Aspect \\nratio\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\nFULL APS-C\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L]*2\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3968\\n3:2\\n29.97p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3968\\n3:2\\n23.98p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L]*2\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3136\\n17:9\\n29.97p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3136\\n17:9\\n23.98p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]*2\\n3\\n3\\n5888×3312\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n5888×3312\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n47.95p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n47.95p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n29.97p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496\\n4:3\\n29.97p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496\\n4:3\\n23.98p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496\\n4:3\\n23.98p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n137\\n[C4K/60p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n59.94p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[C4K/60p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n59.94p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[C4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n47.95p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[C4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n47.95p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[C4K/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n29.97p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[C4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n29.97p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[C4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n23.98p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[C4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n23.98p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[4K/60p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n59.94p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[4K/60p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n59.94p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n47.95p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n47.95p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[4K/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/120p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n119.88p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[FHD/120p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n119.88p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/60p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n59.94p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/60p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n59.94p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n47.95p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n47.95p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n29.97p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n23.98p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n138\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[Image Area of \\nVideo]\\nResolution Aspect \\nratio\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\nFULL APS-C\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L]*2\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3968\\n3:2\\n25.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L]*2\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3136\\n17:9\\n25.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]*2\\n3\\n3\\n5888×3312\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n50.00p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n50.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n25.00p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n25.00p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[C4K/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n50.00p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[C4K/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n50.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[C4K/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n25.00p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[C4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n25.00p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[4K/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n50.00p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[4K/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n50.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[4K/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/100p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n100.00p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[FHD/100p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n100.00p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n50.00p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n50.00p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n25.00p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n139\\n*2 When [Thermal Management] is set to [STANDARD], recording stops once the \\ncontinuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes. (Î[Thermal Management]: 579)\\n[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[Image Area of \\nVideo]\\nResolution Aspect \\nratio\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\nFULL APS-C\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3968\\n3:2\\n24.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n5952×3136\\n17:9\\n24.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n5888×3312\\n16:9\\n24.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n48.00p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n48.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n24.00p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3328×2496 \\n4:3\\n24.00p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[C4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n48.00p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[C4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n48.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[C4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n24.00p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[C4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n4096×2160\\n17:9\\n24.00p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n48.00p\\n200\\nAVC\\n[4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n48.00p\\n200\\nHEVC\\n[4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n24.00p\\n150\\nAVC\\n[4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3840×2160\\n16:9\\n24.00p\\n150\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n48.00p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n48.00p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n[FHD/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n24.00p\\n100\\nAVC\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n1920×1080\\n16:9\\n24.00p\\n100\\nHEVC\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n140\\n• In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution:\\n– 6K (5952×3968) video: 6K video\\n– 5.9K (5888×3312) video: 5.9K video\\n– 3.3K (3328×2496) video: 3.3K video\\n– C4K (4096×2160) video: C4K video\\n– 4K (3840×2160) video: 4K video\\n– Full High Definition (1920×1080) video: FHD video\\n• Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed \\nautomatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video recording \\ntime is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.\\n• 4:2:2, 10-bit videos are intended for editing on a video production PC.\\n• You can register a combination of [System Frequency], [Rec. File Format], \\n[Image Area of Video], and [Rec Quality] to My List. (Î[add to list]: 142)\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n141\\n™ [Filtering]\\nWhen [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV], you can specify items such as \\nframe rate, number of pixels (resolution), and compression format (YUV, \\nbit value, image compression), and just display recording qualities that \\nmeet those conditions.\\n1\\nIn the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [DISP.].\\n2\\nPress 34 to select a setting item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Settings: [Frame Rate]/[Resolution]/[Codec]\\n3\\nPress 34 to select the filtering conditions and then press \\n or \\n.\\n4\\nPress [DISP.] to confirm the setting.\\n• You are returned to the [Rec Quality] setting screen.\\nClearing the filtering conditions\\nSelect [ANY] in Step 3.\\n• The filtering conditions are also cleared when you do the following:\\n– Change the [Rec. File Format]\\n– Change the [System Frequency]\\n– Select a recording quality from [Rec Quality (My List)]\\n• When you change recording quality using a filter, the current filtering conditions \\nare stored.\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n142\\n™ [add to list]\\nSelect a recording quality and register it in My List. The recording quality \\nyou register can be set in [Rec Quality (My List)].\\nIn the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [Q].\\n• The following settings are also registered at the same time:\\n– [System Frequency]\\n– [Rec. File Format]\\n– [Image Area of Video]\\nSetting or deleting in My List\\n1\\nSelect [Rec Quality (My List)].\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec Quality (My List)]\\n2\\nPress 34 to select a setting item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• You cannot select setting items that have different system frequencies.\\n• To delete from My List, select the item and press [Q].\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Rec Quality]\\n143\\nSetting from the control panel\\nIt is possible to display the My List of recording qualities from the control panel in \\n[\\n]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] is set.\\nTouch the recording quality item.\\n• When already registered in My List, the [Rec Quality (My List)] setting screen is \\ndisplayed.\\nWhen not yet registered, the [Rec Quality] setting screen is displayed.\\n• [Rec Quality (My List)] and [Rec Quality] switch each time you press the [DISP.] \\nbutton.\\n• The next time the setting screen is displayed, the screen last used is displayed.\\n• Up to 12 types of recording quality can be registered.\\n0\\nFPS\\n30\\nF3.5\\n1/60\\n100\\nAWB\\nIRIS\\nSHUTTER\\nISO\\nWB\\nPHOTO STYLE\\nFULL\\n4K 29.97p\\n420/10-L\\nMOV\\nAUTO\\n-2\\n-36\\n-12\\n-6\\n-24\\n0\\n-6\\nCH2\\nCH1\\nTC\\nDF 00:00:00.00\\n48kHz/24bit\\n24m59s\\n24m59s\\nOFF\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Image Area of Video]\\n144\\n[Image Area of Video]\\nSet the image area during video recording. The angle of view differs \\ndepending on the image area. Narrowing the image area allows you to \\nachieve a telescopic effect without image deterioration.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Image Area of Video]\\n[FULL]\\nRecords using a range corresponding to the full-frame lens image circle.\\n[APS-C]\\nRecords using a range corresponding to the APS-C lens image circle.\\n[PIXEL/PIXEL]\\nRecords with one pixel on the sensor, which is equal to one pixel of the video.\\nRecords a range corresponding to the resolution range in [Rec Quality]. (Î[Rec \\nQuality]: 133)\\n\\n\\nRecording Videos – [Image Area of Video]\\n145\\n• The [Image Area of Video] settings you can select differ depending on the [Rec \\nQuality] setting. (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n• It is not possible to set to [FULL] in the following case.\\n– When using APS-C lenses\\nImage area (Ex.: FHD video)\\n(A) Angle of view: Wide/Telescopic effect: Not possible\\n(B) Angle of view: Narrow/Telescopic effect: Possible\\nFULL\\nAPS-C\\nPIXEL/PIXEL\\nFULL\\nAPS-C\\nPIXEL/PIXEL\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\n146\\nFocus / Zoom\\nSmoother focusing is possible by selecting the focus mode and AF mode \\nmost suited to the recording conditions and the subject.\\n• This camera supports phase detection AF and contrast AF.\\n≥Selecting the Focus Mode: 147\\n≥Using AF: 149\\n≥Selecting the AF Mode: 165\\n≥AF Area Operations: 181\\n≥Record Using MF: 190\\n≥Recording with Zoom: 197\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode\\n147\\nSelecting the Focus Mode\\nSelect the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.\\nIt is also possible to customize the AF tracking features with [AFC]. (Î[AF \\nCustom Setting(Photo)]: 154)\\nSet the focus mode lever.\\n[S] ([AFS])\\nThis is suitable for recording still subjects.\\nWhen the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses once.\\nThe focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.\\n[C] ([AFC])\\nThis is suitable for recording moving subjects.\\nWhile the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly adjusted according \\nto the movement of the subject.\\n• This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement \\nprediction)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode\\n148\\n[MF]\\nManual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid activating AF. \\n(ÎRecord Using MF: 190)\\n• In the following cases, [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the shutter button is \\npressed halfway:\\n– [\\n] mode\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n– During video recording\\n– In low light situations\\n• When the following functions are being used, [AFC] switches to [AFS]:\\n– High Resolution mode\\n– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n149\\nUsing AF\\n≥[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 154\\n≥[Focus Limiter]: 157\\n≥[AF Assist Light]: 159\\n≥[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 160\\n≥[AF Micro Adjustment]: 161\\nAF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.\\nSelect the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and \\nscene.\\n1\\nSet the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].\\n≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147)\\n2\\nSelect the AF mode.\\n≥Press [\\n] to display the AF mode selection screen, and set \\nusing \\n or \\n. (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\n• In [iA] mode, each press of [\\n] switches between [\\n] and [\\n]. (ÎAF \\nMode: 105)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n150\\n3\\nPress the shutter button halfway.\\n≥The AF operates.\\nFocus\\nIn focus\\nNot in focus\\nFocus icon (A)\\nLights\\nBlinking\\nAF area (B)\\nGreen\\nRed\\nAF beep\\nTwo beeps\\n—\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n151\\nLow illumination AF\\n• In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus icon \\nis indicated as [\\n].\\n• Achieving focus may take more time than usual.\\nStarlight AF\\n• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF, then \\nStarlight AF will be activated.\\nWhen focus is achieved, the focus icon will display [\\n], and the AF area will be \\ndisplayed on the area in focus.\\n• Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.\\n™ [AF ON] button\\nYou can also activate AF by pressing [AF ON].\\nLOW\\nSTAR\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n152\\n• Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF \\nmode\\n– Fast-moving subjects\\n– Extremely bright subjects\\n– Subjects without contrast\\n– Subjects recorded through windows\\n– Subjects near shiny objects\\n– Subjects in very dark locations\\n– When recording subjects both distant and near\\n• When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFC], it may \\ntake some time for the camera to focus:\\n– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end\\n– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by\\n• If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that \\ncase, re-adjust the focus.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n153\\n• You can restrict the range for AF to work:\\n(Î[Focus Limiter]: 157)\\n• When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:\\n(Î[Quick AF]: 544)\\n• You can change the settings so that AF does not function when the shutter button \\nis pressed halfway:\\n(Î[Half-Press Shutter]: 544)\\n• The AF beep volume and sound can be changed:\\n(Î[Beep]: 583)\\n• You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects \\nclose by to an Fn button.\\nThis function is useful when the camera mistakenly focuses on the background:\\n(Î[AF-ON : Near Shift]: 510)\\n• You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects far \\naway to an Fn button.\\nThis function is useful when taking pictures through fences or nets:\\n(Î[AF-ON : Far Shift]: 510)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n154\\n[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]\\nYou can select features of AF operation when taking pictures with [AFC] \\nthat are appropriate for the subject and scene.\\nEach of these features can be further customized.\\n1\\nSet the focus mode to [AFC].\\n≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147)\\n2\\nSet [AF Custom Setting(Photo)].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]\\n[Set 1]\\nBasic general-purpose setting.\\n[Set 2]\\nSuggested for situations where the subject moves at a constant speed in one \\ndirection.\\n[Set 3]\\nSuggested when the subject moves randomly, and other objects may be in the \\nscene.\\n[Set 4]\\nSuggested for situations where the speed of the subject changes significantly.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n155\\n™ Adjusting AF Custom Settings\\n1\\nPress 21 to select the AF Custom setting type.\\n2\\nPress 34 to select items and press 21 to adjust.\\n• A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].\\n• To reset settings to the default, press [Q].\\n3\\nPress \\n or \\n.\\n[AF Sensitivity]\\nSets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.\\n[+]\\nWhen the distance to the subject changes drastically, \\nthe camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can \\nbring different subjects into focus one after another.\\n[−]\\nWhen the distance to the subject changes drastically, \\nthe camera waits for a short period of time before \\nre-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the \\nfocus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for \\nexample, an object moves across the image.\\n[AF Area \\nSwitching \\nSensitivity]\\nSets the sensitivity for switching the AF area to match subject \\nmovement.\\n(When AF mode is set to Full Area AF)\\n[+]\\nWhen the subject moves out of the AF area, the camera \\nimmediately switches the AF area to keep the subject in \\nfocus.\\n[−]\\nThe camera switches the AF area at a gradual pace. \\nEffects caused by a slight movement of the subject or by \\nobstacles in front of the camera will be minimized.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n156\\n[Moving Subject \\nPrediction]\\nSets the tracking method for changes in the speed of subject \\nmovement.\\n• At larger setting values, the camera tries to maintain focus by \\nresponding even to sudden movements of the subject. \\nHowever, the camera becomes more sensitive to slight \\nmovements of the subject, so focusing may become unstable.\\n[0]\\nThis is suited to a subject with minimal changes in \\nspeed.\\n[+1]\\nThese are suited to a subject that changes its speed.\\n[+2]\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n157\\n[Focus Limiter]\\nYou can restrict the range for AF to work.\\nThe focusing speed of AF increases when you limit the range where AF \\nworks.\\n1\\nSet the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].\\n≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147)\\n2\\nSet [Focus Limiter].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Focus Limiter]\\n[ON]\\nEnables the following settings.\\n[OFF]\\nDisables the following settings.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n158\\n[SET]\\n1\\nUse the same procedure as MF (ÎRecord Using MF: 190) to check the \\nfocus, then press [WB] or [ISO] to set the range of operation for AF.\\n• This can also be set by touching [Limit1]/[Limit2].\\n• [Limit1]/[Limit2] can be set from either.\\n2\\nPress \\n or \\n to confirm the setting.\\n• Press [DISP.] to return the operation range to the default setting.\\n• This can be set when using an L-Mount lens with a focus ring.\\n• It cannot be set if the focusing distance range selector switch of the lens has \\nbeen used to limit the operation range.\\n• The setting values are reset when the lens is replaced.\\n• When [Focus Limiter] is working, [\\n]/[\\n] is displayed on the screen.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Focus Limiter] is not available:\\n– [AF+MF]\\n∞10\\n(m)\\n5\\n3\\n2\\n1.5\\n1\\n0.5 0.1\\n1\\n2\\nLimit1\\nLimit2\\nWB\\nISO\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n159\\n[AF Assist Light]\\nWhen recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light turns on when \\nyou press the shutter button halfway, making it easier for the camera to \\nfocus.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [AF Assist Light]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• The effective range of the AF assist light is different depending on the lens used.\\n– When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is attached and at wide-angle end.\\nApprox. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)\\n– When the interchangeable lens (S-S50) is attached.\\nApprox. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)\\n• Remove the lens hood.\\n• The AF assist light may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus \\nwhen a lens with large diameter is used.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n160\\n[1-Area AF Moving Speed]\\nSets the speed when moving a single AF area.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [1-Area AF Moving Speed]\\nSettings: [FAST]/[NORMAL]\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n161\\n[AF Micro Adjustment]\\nYou can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with \\nphase detection AF.\\n• There is normally no need to adjust the focus point. Adjust only when necessary. \\nIf you adjust on a lens that has a correct focus point, there is a risk that the \\ncamera will not be able to record with the appropriate focus point.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n162\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [AF Micro Adjustment]\\n[ALL]\\nAdjust uniformly for all lenses.\\nUsed in cases such as when you have attached lenses that are not registered in \\n[ADJUST BY LENS].\\n[ADJUST BY LENS]\\nAdjust each lens separately and register the adjustment values on the camera.\\nWhen a registered lens is attached, the adjusted value is recalled when it is set in \\n[ADJUST BY LENS].\\n• When using a zoom lens, you can adjust the focus point individually at the \\nwide-angle end and the telephoto end.\\n• If the lens has already been registered, the adjustment value is overwritten.\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n163\\n™ Registering the Adjusted Value\\n1\\nSelect [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [DISP.].\\n2\\n(When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Register the lens.\\n• Press [DISP.] and select [Yes] to register.\\n• If the lens is already registered, the screen moves to the one in Step 3.\\n3\\n(When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Select [Wide Adjustment] or [Tele \\nAdjustment].\\n• Press 34 to select, and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• When using a prime lens, [Adjustment] is displayed.\\n4\\nAdjust the focus point.\\n• Press 21 to adjust the focus point and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• You can also adjust by rotating \\n, \\n, or \\n.\\n• The focus point is moved backward when adjusted with the [+] side. The focus \\npoint is moved forward when adjusted with the [−] side.\\n5\\nRecord and repeat Step 4 until the suitable focus point is reached.\\n• Check the set focus point in an image recorded with [AFC] of the [Focus/\\nShutter Priority] set to [FOCUS] and with the focus mode set to [AFC]. \\n(Î[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 540)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Using AF\\n164\\n™ Initializing\\nRegistered lens information and adjusted values are initialized.\\n1\\nSelect [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [Q].\\n2\\nSelect [Yes] to initialize.\\n• We recommend making the adjustments in the same environment that will be \\nused for recording.\\n• We recommend using a tripod when adjusting.\\n• You can register a maximum of 40 lenses in [ADJUST BY LENS]. When the \\nupper limit is exceeded, already registered lens information is overwritten.\\n• When a teleconverter is used when adjusted with [ADJUST BY LENS], the \\ncombination of the lens and teleconverter is registered.\\n• The focus point for the wide-angle end and the telephoto end cannot be \\nindividually adjusted in [ALL].\\n• The registration numbers and lens names registered in [ADJUST BY LENS] are \\nentered automatically and cannot be changed.\\n• Irrespective of the [ALL]/[ADJUST BY LENS] selection, all of the registered lens \\ninformation and adjusted values in [AF Micro Adjustment] are initialized.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n165\\nSelecting the AF Mode\\n≥Automatic Detection: 168\\n≥[Tracking]: 171\\n≥[Full Area AF]: 172\\n≥[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone]: 175\\n≥[1-Area+]/[1-Area]: 177\\n≥[Pinpoint]: 179\\nSelect the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.\\nIn an AF mode other than Pinpoint, you can automatically focus by \\ndetecting humans and animals.\\n1\\nPress [\\n].\\n≥The AF mode selection screen appears.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n166\\n2\\nSelect the AF mode.\\n≥Press 21 to select an item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by pressing [\\n].\\n[Tracking]\\n(Î[Tracking]: 171)\\n[Full Area AF]\\n(Î[Full Area AF]: 172)\\n[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]\\n(Î[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]: 175)\\n[Zone]\\n(Î[Zone]: 176)\\n[1-Area+]\\n(Î[1-Area+]: 177)\\n[1-Area]\\n(Î[1-Area]: 177)\\n[Pinpoint]\\n(Î[Pinpoint]: 179)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n167\\n• In [Time Lapse Shot], [\\n] cannot be used.\\n• When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [\\n] is not available.\\n• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [\\n]:\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [\\n]:\\n– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])\\n• You can set the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection \\nscreen:\\n(Î[Show/Hide AF Mode]: 542)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n168\\nAutomatic Detection\\nWhen automatic detection is enabled, humans and animals are detected \\nand the camera automatically focuses.\\nYou can set the target for detection.\\n1\\nSet [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [AF Detection Setting] ¨ [ON]\\n• You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic \\ndetection [ON]/[OFF].\\n2\\nSelect [Detecting Subject].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Detecting Subject]\\n• It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection \\nscreen.\\n[HUMAN]\\nDetects human faces, eyes, and bodies.\\n• [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.\\n[FACE/EYE]\\nDetects only human faces and eyes.\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the AF mode icon.\\n[ANIMAL+HUMAN]\\nDetects humans and animals.\\nAnimals that can be detected are birds, canines (including wolves, etc.), and \\nfelines (including lions, etc.).\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the AF mode icon.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n169\\n™ When [\\n]\\nWhen the camera detects a person’s face (A)/(B) or body or an animal’s \\nbody (C), an AF area is displayed.\\nIf multiple subjects are detected, multiple AF areas are also displayed, and \\nyou can select the subject you want to focus on from amongst these.\\nYellow\\nAF area to be brought into focus.\\nThe camera selects this automatically.\\n• Eye detection works only for the eyes inside the yellow frame (A).\\nWhite\\nDisplayed when multiple subjects are detected.\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n170\\n™ When [\\n], [\\n], [\\n], [\\n], or [\\n]\\nIf even part of a human or animal enters the AF area, these are \\nautomatically detected and focused.\\n• If eyes are detected inside the AF area, eye detection (D) works.\\nIt is not possible to change the eye to focus on.\\n• [AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [\\n].\\n• When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought \\ninto focus.\\nThe exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [\\n])\\n• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.\\n• The camera can detect a combined total of up to 3 human and animal bodies.\\n• Automatic detection may not be available due to the camera settings.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Detecting Subject] is fixed to [FACE/\\nEYE]:\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n• You can make it so the metering range for automatic exposure is not prioritized \\non the face and eyes when automatic detection works:\\n(Î[Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 536)\\n• You can make the cross for face/eye detection disappear:\\n(Î[Eye Detection Display]: 543)\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n171\\n[Tracking]\\nWhen the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of \\nthe subject, maintaining focusing.\\nStart tracking.\\n≥Aim the AF area over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.\\nThe camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed \\nhalfway or pressed fully.\\n• If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.\\n• When set to [AFS], the focus will be on the AF area position. Tracking will not work.\\n• How to manipulate the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n• In [\\n]/[S&Q] mode and while recording video, tracking will continue even if \\nthe shutter button is released.\\nTo cancel tracking, press \\n or \\n, or touch [\\n].\\nTracking is also available with [AFS].\\n• When automatic detection is working, the detected subject is tracked.\\n• Set [Metering Mode] to [\\n] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.\\n• [\\n] may not be available due to the camera settings.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n172\\n[Full Area AF]\\nThe camera selects the most optimal AF area to focus. \\nWhen multiple AF areas are selected, all selected AF areas will be brought \\ninto focus.\\nWhen the focus mode is set to [AFC], you can ensure that the focus stays \\non the subject by recording while keeping the subject within the Full Area \\nAF area.\\n™ Specify the Person, Animal, or Eye to Bring into Focus\\nWhen automatic detection is [ON], multiple subjects are detected.\\nWhen the person or animal to be brought into focus is shown using the \\nwhite AF area, you can change this to a yellow AF area.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n173\\n≥Touch operations\\nTouch the person, animal or eye indicated with the white AF area.\\n• The AF area will change to yellow.\\n• To cancel the setting, touch [\\n].\\n≥Operations with the joystick\\nTilt the joystick to 3421.\\n• Each tilt to 3421 switches the person, animal or eye to be brought into focus.\\n• To cancel the setting, press \\n.\\n≥Button operations\\n1\\nPress 4 in the AF mode selection screen.\\n2\\nPress 3421 to move the position of the AF area.\\n3\\nWhen the white AF area changes to yellow, press \\n.\\n• To cancel the setting, press \\n.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n174\\n™ Setting the AF Area in Any Position\\nThe [\\n] AF area can be set in any position.\\n≥Touch operations\\nTouch any position on the recording screen and then touch [Set].\\n• Touch [\\n] to return to [\\n].\\n≥Operations with the joystick\\nPress and hold the joystick.\\n• The [\\n] AF area is set in the center of the screen.\\n• Either press and hold the joystick again or press \\n to return to [\\n].\\n≥Button operations\\n1\\nPress 4 in the AF mode selection screen.\\n2\\nPress 3421 to move the AF area, and then press \\n to confirm.\\n• Press \\n again to return to [\\n].\\n• You can move and change the size of the set AF area:\\n(ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n175\\n[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/\\n[Zone]\\n[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]\\nWithin the full area, vertical and horizontal zones can be focused.\\nHorizontal pattern\\nVertical pattern\\n• To switch between the horizontal pattern and vertical pattern, press 3421 in the \\nAF area setting screen.\\n• How to manipulate the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n176\\n[Zone]\\nWithin the full area, a central oval zone can be focused.\\n• How to manipulate the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n• [\\n] changes to [\\n] in the following cases:\\n– During video recording\\n– [\\n] mode\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n177\\n[1-Area+]/\\n[1-Area]\\n[1-Area+]\\nEmphasis within a single AF area can be focused.\\nEven when the subject moves out of the single AF area, the subject \\nremains focused in a supplementary AF area (E).\\n• Effective when recording moving subjects that are difficult to track with [\\n].\\n[1-Area]\\nSpecify the point to be brought into focus.\\n(E)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n178\\nA dot (F) is displayed on the recording screen when a single AF area is \\nreduced to the minimum size. The AF area can be set on the location \\nwhere the dot is displayed.\\n• How to manipulate the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n• It is not possible to reduce a single AF area to the minimum when using the \\nfollowing function:\\n– During video recording\\n– [\\n] mode\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n– [Ex. Tele Conv.]\\n• Change the movement speed of a single AF area:\\n(Î[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 160)\\n(F)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n179\\n[Pinpoint]\\nYou can achieve a more precise focus on a small point.\\nIf you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the \\nfocus will be enlarged.\\n• The enlarged screen is displayed when you set an AF area.\\n• How to manipulate the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n• When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [\\n] is not available.\\n• Automatic detection does not work in [\\n].\\n• When the following functions are being used, [\\n] switches to [\\n]:\\n– During video recording\\n– [\\n] mode\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode\\n180\\nOperations on the Magnification Window\\n• You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.\\n• You can also take a picture by touching [\\n].\\nButton \\noperations\\nTouch \\noperations\\nDescription of operation\\n3421\\nTouch\\nMoves [+].\\n• Positions can be moved to the diagonal \\ndirections using the joystick.\\nPinch out/\\npinch in\\nEnlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.\\n—\\nEnlarges/reduces the screen.\\nSwitches magnification window (windowed \\nmode/full screen mode).\\n[DISP.]\\n[Reset]\\nQuits the enlarged display.\\n• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:\\n(Î[Pinpoint AF Setting]: 543)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n181\\nAF Area Operations\\n≥Move the Position of the AF Area: 181\\n≥Changing the Size of the AF Area: 184\\n≥Resetting the AF Area: 185\\n≥Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 186\\n≥Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad: 187\\n≥[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 189\\nMove the Position of the AF Area\\n™ Touch operations\\nWith the default settings, focus is on the point touched when you touch the \\nscreen. (Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\nTouch the recording screen.\\n• The AF area setting screen is displayed.\\nThe AF area is set when you either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway.\\n• You can optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position. (ÎFocus on \\nand Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 186)\\n• You can focus on the touched position and release the shutter. (ÎTouch AF/\\nTouch Shutter: 107)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n182\\n™ Operations with the joystick\\nWith the default settings, the AF area can be manipulated with the joystick. \\n(Î[Joystick Setting]: 550)\\nTilt the joystick in the recording screen.\\n• The AF area setting screen is displayed.\\nThe AF area is set when you either press \\n or press the shutter button halfway.\\n• Pressing \\n enables switching between the default and set AF area positions.\\nIn [\\n], this operation displays the enlarged screen.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n183\\n™ Button operations\\n1\\nPress 4 in the AF mode selection screen.\\n• The AF area setting screen is displayed.\\n2\\nPress 3421 to move the position of the AF area.\\n• The AF area is set when you either press \\n or press the shutter button \\nhalfway.\\n• When [Metering Mode] is [\\n], the metering target also moves together with the \\nAF area.\\n• You can set the AF area to loop when moved:\\n(Î[Looped Focus Frame]: 545)\\n• You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement \\nscreens to an Fn button:\\n(Î[Focus Area Set]: 510)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n184\\nChanging the Size of the AF Area\\n™ Touch operations\\nPinch out/pinch in the AF area in the AF area setting screen.\\n• Either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.\\n™ Dial Operations\\nRotate \\n, \\n, or \\n.\\n• Either press \\n or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.\\n• In [\\n], [\\n], and [\\n], the size of the AF area cannot be changed.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n185\\nResetting the AF Area\\n™ Touch operations\\nTouch [Reset] in the AF area setting screen.\\n• The first touch returns the AF area position to the center. The second touch returns \\nthe AF area size to the default.\\n™ Button operations\\nPress [DISP.] in the AF area setting screen.\\n• The first press returns the AF area position to the center. The second press returns \\nthe AF area size to the default.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n186\\nFocus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched \\nPosition ([AF+AE])\\n1\\nSet [Touch AF].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Touch Settings] ¨ [Touch AF] ¨ [AF+AE]\\n2\\nTouch the subject to which you wish to adjust the \\nbrightness.\\n≥At the touched position, an AF area that works in the same way as \\n[\\n] is displayed.\\nThis places a point to adjust brightness at the center of the AF \\narea.\\n• How to manipulate the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n3\\nTouch [Set].\\n≥The [AF+AE] setting is canceled if you touch [\\n] (when [\\n] or \\n[\\n] is set: [\\n]) on the recording screen.\\n6HW\\nュリヴヱハ5HVHW\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n187\\nMoving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad\\nDuring viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the position \\nand size of the AF area.\\n1\\nSet [Touch Pad AF].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Touch Settings] ¨ [Touch Pad AF] ¨ \\n[EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]\\n2\\nMove the position of the AF area.\\n≥During viewfinder display, touch the monitor.\\n• How to manipulate the AF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\n3\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n188\\n™ Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF])\\n[EXACT]\\nMoves the AF area of the viewfinder by touching a desired position on the touch pad.\\n[OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/[OFFSET3] (upper right)/[OFFSET4] \\n(lower right)/[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6] (upper left)/[OFFSET7] (lower left)\\nMoves the AF area of the viewfinder according to the distance you drag your finger on \\nthe touch pad.\\nSelect the range to be detected with the drag operation.\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – AF Area Operations\\n189\\n[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]\\nMemorizes separate positions for AF areas for when the camera is \\nvertically aligned and for when it is horizontally aligned.\\nTwo vertical orientations, left and right, are available.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]\\n[ON]\\nMemorizes separate positions for vertical and horizontal orientations.\\n[OFF]\\nSets the same position for vertical and horizontal orientations.\\n• In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Record Using MF\\n190\\nRecord Using MF\\n≥[Focus Peaking]: 195\\nMF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.\\nUse this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance \\nbetween the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to \\nactivate AF.\\n1\\nSet the focus mode to [MF].\\n≥Set the focus mode lever. (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147)\\n2\\nSelect the focus point.\\n≥Tilt the joystick to select the focus point.\\n• To return the point to be brought into focus to the center, press [DISP.].\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Record Using MF\\n191\\n3\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press \\n.\\n≥This switches to the MF Assist screen, and shows an enlarged \\ndisplay.\\n4\\nAdjust the focus.\\n≥Rotate the focus ring.\\n• This will display the in-focus portion highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking)\\n• A recording distance guideline is displayed. (MF Guide)\\n(A) MF Assist (enlarged screen)\\n(B) Focus Peaking\\n(C) Indicator for ¶ (infinity)\\n(D) MF Guide\\nAF\\n∞10\\n(m)\\n5\\n3\\n2\\n1.5\\n1\\n0.5 0.1\\n(D)\\n(C)\\n(B)\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Record Using MF\\n192\\n5\\nClose the MF Assist screen.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n≥This operation can also be performed by pressing \\n.\\n6\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n™ Operations on the MF Assist Screen\\n• You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.\\nButton \\noperations\\nTouch \\noperations\\nDescription of operation\\n3421\\nDrag\\nMoves the enlarged display position.\\n• Positions can be moved to the diagonal \\ndirections using the joystick.\\nPinch out/\\npinch in\\nEnlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.\\n—\\nEnlarges/reduces the screen.\\nSwitches magnification window (windowed \\nmode/full screen mode).\\n[DISP.]\\n[Reset]\\nFirst time: Returns the MF Assist position to the \\ncenter.\\nSecond time: Returns the MF Assist \\nmagnification to the default setting.\\n[AF ON]\\nThe AF operates.\\nAF\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Record Using MF\\n193\\n• On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF Assist \\nscreen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the assist screen \\nwill be exited a short time after you cease the operation.\\n• You can also display the MF Assist screen by pressing the [\\n].\\n• During MF, pressing [AF ON] will activate AF.\\n• The MF Assist screen can also be displayed during video recording.\\n• The recording distance reference mark indicates the position of the imaging \\nsurface. This becomes the reference when measuring the recording distance.\\n• During video recording using the following functions, the MF Assist screen \\ncannot be displayed:\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of \\n60.00p\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Record Using MF\\n194\\n• You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:\\n(Î[Focus Peaking]: 195)\\n• You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and horizontal \\norientations:\\n(Î[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 189)\\n• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:\\n(Î[MF Assist]: 541)\\n• You can change the MF Guide display units:\\n(Î[MF Guide]: 542)\\n• You can disable focus ring operation:\\n(Î[Focus Ring Lock]: 542)\\n• You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:\\n(Î[Looped Focus Frame]: 545)\\n• The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:\\n(Î[Lens Focus Resume]: 569)\\n• The amount of focus movement can be set:\\n(Î[Focus Ring Control]: 570)\\n• You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement \\nscreens to an Fn button:\\n(Î[Focus Area Set]: 510)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Record Using MF\\n195\\n[Focus Peaking]\\nDuring MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear \\noutlines) are highlighted with color.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Focus Peaking]\\n[ON]\\nFocus Peaking display is performed.\\n[OFF]\\n—\\n[SET]\\n[Focus Peaking \\nSensitivity]\\nIf adjusted to the negative direction, portions \\nto be highlighted are reduced, allowing you \\nto achieve a more precise focus.\\n[Display Color]\\nYou can set the display color of the in-focus \\nportion.\\n[Display During \\nAFS]\\nWhen set to [ON], the Focus Peaking \\ndisplay is also possible when the shutter \\nbutton is pressed halfway in the [AFS] focus \\nmode.\\n[Display During \\nMF]\\n[While In Live View]: Focus Peaking is \\ndisplayed in the recording screen.\\n[While Live View Is Enlarged]: Focus \\nPeaking is displayed in the MF Assist screen \\nand the video enlarged display of live view \\nscreen.\\n[When Shutter Is Pressed]: When set to \\n[OFF], Focus Peaking is hidden when the \\nshutter is pressed.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Record Using MF\\n196\\n• You can display the Touch Tab (Î[Touch Settings]: 546) and then touch [\\n] \\nin [\\n] to switch [ON]/[OFF].\\n• When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Focus Peaking] is not available.\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom\\n197\\nRecording with Zoom\\n≥Extended Tele Conversion: 199\\nUse the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.\\nWhen taking pictures, use [Ex. Tele Conv.] to increase a telescopic effect \\nwithout image deterioration.\\nWhen recording videos, use [Image Area of Video] to obtain the same \\ntelescopic effect as [Ex. Tele Conv.].\\n• For details about [Image Area of Video] (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\nRotate the zoom ring.\\n(T): Telephoto\\n(W): Wide-angle\\n(W)\\n(T)\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom\\n198\\n≥The focal length is displayed on the recording screen.\\n• The focal length display can be hidden:\\n(Î[Focal Length]: 558)\\n35mm\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom\\n199\\nExtended Tele Conversion\\n[Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged \\nbeyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration in \\nimage quality.\\n• The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture \\nSize] set in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu.\\n– Set to [\\nM]: 1.4×\\n– Set to [\\nS]: 2.0× (1.9× when using APS-C lenses)\\n1\\nSet [Picture Size] to [M] or [S].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Picture Size] ¨ [M]/[S]\\n2\\nSet [Ex. Tele Conv.].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Ex. Tele Conv.]\\n[TELE CONV.]\\nFixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\nFocus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom\\n200\\n• When displaying the [Ex. Tele Conv.] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing \\n[DISP.] allows you to change the [Picture Size] setting.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available:\\n– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])\\n– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])\\n– High Resolution mode\\n\\n\\n201\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer\\nThis chapter describes functions for recording in drive mode and the image \\nstabilizer function.\\n≥Selecting the Drive Mode: 202\\n≥Taking Burst Pictures: 204\\n≥High Resolution mode: 211\\n≥Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 216\\n≥Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 223\\n≥Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 227\\n≥Recording Using the Self-timer: 229\\n≥Bracket Recording: 233\\n≥[Silent Mode]: 241\\n≥[Shutter Type]: 243\\n≥Image Stabilizer: 250\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode\\n202\\nSelecting the Drive Mode\\nYou can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the recording \\nconditions.\\nRotating the drive mode dial.\\n[\\n] (Single)\\nTakes one picture each time the shutter button is pressed.\\n[\\n]/[\\n] (Burst) (ÎTaking Burst Pictures: 204)\\nTakes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.\\n[\\n] (High Resolution mode) (ÎHigh Resolution mode: 211)\\nThis merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.\\n[\\n] (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation) (ÎRecording with Time Lapse \\nShot: 216, Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 223)\\nTakes pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation.\\n[\\n] (Self-timer) (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 229)\\nTakes pictures when the set time elapses after the shutter button is pressed.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode\\n203\\n• The detailed setting screens for each drive mode can be called up with an Fn \\nbutton:\\n[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode] ¨ [Drive Mode \\nSetting]\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures\\n204\\nTaking Burst Pictures\\nTakes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.\\nYou can select burst recording settings to suit the recording conditions, \\nincluding [H], [M], and [L] which enable burst recording with high image \\nquality, and SH burst recording which takes burst pictures at ultra high \\nspeeds using an electronic shutter.\\n1\\nSet the drive mode to [\\n] (Burst Shot 1) or [\\n] (Burst \\nShot 2).\\n≥Set the drive mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n• Configure the burst settings for each of [\\n] and [\\n].\\n2\\nSelect the burst rate.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Burst Shot Setting] ¨ [Burst Shot 1 \\nSetting]/[Burst Shot 2 Setting]\\n• With the default settings, [H] is set for [\\n] and [SH] is set for [\\n].\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures\\n205\\n[SH]\\nTakes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 30 frames/\\nsecond.\\n[H]\\nTakes high-speed burst pictures.\\n[M]\\nTakes medium-speed burst pictures.\\n[L]\\nTakes low-speed burst pictures.\\n3\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n4\\nStart recording.\\n• Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed fully.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures\\n206\\n™ Burst Rate\\n• The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture \\nSize] and focus mode.\\nMechanical \\nshutter, electronic \\nfront curtain\\nElectronic shutter\\nLive View when \\ntaking burst \\npictures\\n[SH]\\n—\\n30 frames/second\\nNone\\n[H]\\n(High speed)\\n9 frames/second \\n([AFS]/[MF])\\n7 frames/second \\n([AFC])\\n9 frames/second \\n([AFS]/[MF])\\n8 frames/second \\n([AFC])\\nNone ([AFS]/[MF])\\nAvailable ([AFC])\\n[M]\\n(Medium speed)\\n5 frames/second\\nAvailable\\n[L]\\n(Low speed)\\n2 frames/second\\nAvailable\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures\\n207\\n™ Maximum Number of Frames Recordable\\n• When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.\\nRecording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.\\n*1 Recording stops when the maximum number of frames recordable is reached.\\n*2 The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be \\ntaken until the card becomes full.\\n[Picture Quality]\\n[FINE]/[STD.]\\n[RAW+FINE]/\\n[RAW+STD.]\\n[RAW]\\n[SH]\\n200 frames*1\\n[H]\\n(High speed)\\n300 frames or \\nmore*2\\n200 frames or more*2\\n[M]\\n(Medium speed)\\n[L]\\n(Low speed)\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures\\n208\\n™ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously\\nWhen you press the shutter button halfway, the number of pictures that can \\nbe taken continuously will appear on the recording screen.\\nExample) When 20 frames: [r20]\\n• Once recording starts, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will \\ndecrease.\\n– During [H]/[M]/[L] burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst rate decreases.\\n– During SH burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst recording stops.\\n• When [r99+] is displayed on the recording screen, you can take 100 or more burst \\npictures.\\nr20\\nISO100\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures\\n209\\n™ Focus when Taking Burst Pictures\\n• When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.\\n• With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the \\nextent possible.\\n• With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.\\nFocus mode\\n[Focus/\\nShutter \\nPriority] \\n(Î[Focus/\\nShutter \\nPriority]: 540)\\n[SH]\\n[H]\\n[M]/[L]\\n[AFS]\\n[FOCUS]\\nFixed to the focus of the first frame\\n[BALANCE]\\n[RELEASE]\\n[AFC]\\n[FOCUS]\\nEstimated focus\\nNormal focus\\n[BALANCE]\\nEstimated focus\\n[RELEASE]\\n[MF]\\n—\\nFocus set with manual focus\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures\\n210\\n™ Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures\\nFocus mode\\n[SH]\\n[H]\\n[M]/[L]\\n[AFS]\\nFixed to the exposure of the first frame\\nThe exposure is \\nadjusted for each \\nframe\\n[AFC]\\nThe exposure is adjusted for each frame\\n[MF]\\nFixed to the exposure of the first frame\\n• It may take a while to save burst pictures.\\nIf you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the maximum \\nnumber of frames recordable will be reduced.\\nWhen taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.\\nNotes on SH burst recording\\n• [Shutter Type] is fixed to [ELEC.].\\n• There are limits on the shutter speed you can set during SH burst recording.\\n– [SH]: To a minimum of 1/30\\n• The aperture will be fixed during burst recording.\\n• The images recorded will be saved as a set of burst group pictures. (ÎGroup \\nImages: 478)\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode\\n211\\nHigh Resolution mode\\nThis merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.\\nThis function is suitable for recording subjects that do not move.\\nThe picture after merging can be saved in RAW or JPEG format.\\n1\\nSet the drive mode to [\\n] (High resolution).\\n≥Set the drive mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n2\\nSet the recording settings.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [High Resolution Mode Setting]\\n• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.\\n• The image stabilization function is automatically turned off.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode\\n212\\n[Picture Quality]\\nSet the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.\\n[COMBINED]/[FINE]/[RAW+FINE]/[RAW]\\n• When set to [COMBINED], recording is with the same settings as [Picture \\nQuality] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu. (However, [STD.] changes to \\n[FINE].)\\n[Picture Size]\\nSets the image size after merging.\\nWhen the [Aspect Ratio] is [4:3].\\n[XL] (85 M): 10656×8000\\n[LL] (42.5 M): 7552×5664\\nWhen the [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2].\\n[XL] (96 M): 12000×8000\\n[LL] (48 M): 8496×5664\\nWhen the [Aspect Ratio] is [16:9].\\n[XL] (81 M): 12000×6736\\n[LL] (40.5 M): 8496×4784\\nWhen the [Aspect Ratio] is [1:1].\\n[XL] (64 M): 8000×8000\\n[LL] (32 M): 5664×5664\\n• RAW images are always recorded in the [3:2] (12000×8000) aspect ratio.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode\\n213\\n[Simul Record Normal Shot]\\nSimultaneously takes pictures that are not merged when [ON] is set. The first \\npicture will be saved with [Picture Size] set to [L].\\n[Shutter Delay]\\nSets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is \\nreleased.\\n[30 SEC]/[15 SEC]/[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[1/2 SEC]/[1/4 SEC]/[1/8 \\nSEC]/[Off]\\n[Motion Blur Processing]\\nSets the correction method to use when the subject moved.\\n[MODE1]: This gives priority to High Resolution mode, therefore subject blur \\nappears as an afterimage in the picture.\\n[MODE2]: This reduces afterimage from subject blur, but cannot obtain the \\nsame High Resolution mode effect in the corrected range.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode\\n214\\n3\\nDecide on the composition and then fix the camera in \\nplace.\\n• If blurring is detected, the High Resolution mode icon (A) blinks.\\n4\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n• With the default settings, [Shutter Delay] is activated, so there will be a gap in \\ntime from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is released.\\n• The screen goes dark during recording.\\n• The recording state indication (red) (B) blinks.\\nDo not move the camera while it is blinking.\\n• You can continue recording when the merging process ends.\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode\\n215\\n• In High Resolution mode, recording will be performed using the following \\nsettings:\\n– [Shutter Type]: Fixed to [ELEC.]\\n– Minimum aperture value: F16\\n– Shutter speed: 1 second to 1/8000 of a second\\n– ISO sensitivity: Upper limit to [3200]\\n– Focus mode: [AFS]/[MF]\\n• When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as \\nfluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may change \\nor horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.\\nLowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.\\n• Devices other than this camera may not be able to play back images recorded \\nusing High Resolution mode.\\n• When using APS-C lenses, recording in High Resolution Mode is not possible.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot\\n216\\nRecording with Time Lapse Shot\\nPictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.\\nThis feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects such \\nas animals and plants.\\nThe pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be \\ncombined into a video. (ÎGroup Images: 478)\\n1\\nSet the drive mode to [\\n].\\n≥Set the drive mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n2\\nSet [Mode] to [Time Lapse Shot].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Time Lapse/Animation] ¨ [Mode] ¨ [Time \\nLapse Shot]\\n• Check that the clock is set correctly. (ÎSetting the Clock (When Turning On for \\nthe First Time): 68)\\n• For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Focus Resume] to \\n[ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot\\n217\\n3\\nSet the recording settings.\\n[Mode]\\nSwitches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.\\n[Shooting Interval Setting]\\n[ON]: Sets the interval before the next recording takes place.\\n[OFF]: Takes pictures without leaving recording intervals.\\n[Start Time]\\n[Now]: Starts recording when the shutter button is pressed fully.\\n[After 2 Seconds]: Starts recording 2 seconds after the shutter button is \\npressed fully.\\n[Start Time Set]: Starts recording at the set time.\\n[Image Count]/[Shooting Interval]\\nSets the number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken.\\nThe number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken can be \\nautomatically calculated and set. (ÎSetting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot \\nRecording: 219)\\n• [Shooting Interval] is not available when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to \\n[OFF].\\n[Exposure Leveling]\\nAdjusts the exposure automatically to prevent large changes in brightness \\nbetween adjacent frames.\\n[Create New Folder At Rec]\\n[Create a New Folder]: When set to [ON], a new folder is created each time \\nthat Time Lapse Shot recording is started.\\n[File Number Reset]: When set to [ON], the file number is reset each time a \\nnew folder is created.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot\\n218\\n4\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n5\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n• When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera will enter into sleep status until the \\nstart time is reached.\\n• During recording standby, the camera enters into sleep status when no \\noperation is performed for a certain period of time.\\n• The recording will stop automatically.\\n6\\nCreate a video. (ÎTime Lapse Shot/Stop Motion \\nAnimation Videos: 227)\\n• After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to \\nproceed to create a video.\\nEven if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in \\nthe [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. (Î[Time Lapse Video]: 496)\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot\\n219\\n™ Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot Recording\\nWhen [DISP.] is pressed in the [Image Count]/[Shooting Interval] setting \\nscreen, [Image Count] and [Shooting Interval] can be set by automatically \\ncalculating them from the frame rate, time, and recording duration of the \\nvideo to be created.\\n1\\nPress 34 to select the item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n[Production Frame Rate]\\nSets the frame rate of videos to be created.\\nIt can be set in the range between 1 fps and 99 fps.\\n[Video Length]\\nSets the playback time of videos to be created.\\nIt can be set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.\\n[Time Lapse Shooting Duration]\\nSets the Time Lapse Shot duration.\\nIt can be set in the range between 00h00m01s and 99h59m59s.\\n2\\nPress [DISP.] to confirm.\\n• The settings are reflected when you select [Yes].\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot\\n220\\n• [Image Count] can be set in the range between 1 and 9999.\\n• [Shooting Interval] is set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.\\nDecimal places are rounded down if the number is not evenly divisible.\\n• When the setting is one where recording is not possible, [Image Count] or \\n[Shooting Interval] is displayed in red letters.\\n• When [Shooting Interval Setting] is [OFF], the Time Lapse Shot settings cannot \\nbe automatically calculated.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot\\n221\\n™ Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording\\nPressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the \\ncamera.\\n• You can perform the following operations by pressing [Q] during Time Lapse Shot \\nrecording.\\n[Continue]\\nReturns to the recording. (Only during recording)\\n[Pause]\\nPauses the recording. (Only during recording)\\n[Resume]\\nResumes the recording. (Only while paused)\\n• You can also press the shutter button to resume.\\n[End]\\nStops the Time Lapse Shot recording.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot\\n222\\n• Pictures recorded to more than one card cannot be combined into a single video.\\n• The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take \\npictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.\\nFurthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.\\n• Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.\\n– When the charge on the battery runs out\\n– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]\\nYou can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or card.\\nSet the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button fully to \\nresume recording.\\n(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a \\nseparate set of group images.)\\n• [Exposure Leveling] is not available if ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO] \\nin [M] mode.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation\\n223\\nRecording with Stop Motion Animation\\nTake pictures while moving the subject little by little.\\nThe pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be \\ncombined into a stop motion video. (ÎGroup Images: 478)\\n1\\nSet the drive mode to [\\n].\\n≥Set the drive mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n2\\nSet [Mode] to [Stop Motion Animation].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Time Lapse/Animation] ¨ [Mode] ¨ [Stop \\nMotion Animation]\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation\\n224\\n3\\nSet the recording settings.\\n[Mode]\\nSwitches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.\\n[Add to Picture Group]\\nAllows you to continue recording for a set of stop motion images that have \\nalready been recorded.\\n• Select an image and proceed to Step 5.\\n[Auto Shooting]\\n[ON]: Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.\\n[OFF]: This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.\\n[Shooting Interval]\\nSets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].\\n4\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation\\n225\\n5\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n≥Take pictures repeatedly while moving the subject little by little.\\n• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them \\nas reference for the amount of movement.\\n• You can play back the recorded stop motion images by pressing [\\n] during \\nrecording.\\nPress [\\n] to delete unnecessary images.\\nTo return to the recording screen, press [\\n] again.\\n6\\nStop recording.\\n≥Press \\n and then select [Time Lapse/Animation] from the \\n[Photo] menu to stop recording.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation\\n226\\n7\\nCreate a video. (ÎTime Lapse Shot/Stop Motion \\nAnimation Videos: 227)\\n• After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to \\nproceed to create a video.\\nEven if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in \\nthe [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. (Î[Stop Motion Video]: 496)\\n• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.\\n• If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the recording \\nis displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the \\nrecording from the interruption point.\\n• The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take \\npictures at the set interval when the flash, etc. is used for recording.\\n• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one \\nthat was taken.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos\\n227\\nTime Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation \\nVideos\\nAfter performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can \\nproceed to create a video.\\n• Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.\\n– Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 216\\n– Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 223\\n• You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] (Î[Time Lapse Video]: 496) or \\n[Stop Motion Video] (Î[Stop Motion Video]: 496) in the [Playback] menu.\\n1\\nSelect [Yes] on the confirmation screen that appears \\nafter recording.\\n2\\nSet the options for creating a video.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos\\n228\\n3\\nSelect [OK].\\n≥A video will be created in the [MP4] recording file format.\\n[OK]\\nCreates a video.\\n[Rec Quality]\\nSets the video image quality.\\n[Frame Rate]\\nSets the number of frames per second.\\nThe larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.\\n[Sequence]\\n[NORMAL]: Splices pictures together in recording order.\\n[REVERSE]: Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.\\n• Videos cannot be created when the [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz \\n(CINEMA)].\\n• Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 30 minutes.\\n• In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds 4 GB:\\n– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set\\n– When an FHD [Rec Quality] is set\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer\\n229\\nRecording Using the Self-timer\\n1\\nSet the drive mode to [\\n].\\n≥Set the drive mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n2\\nSet the self-timer time. (ÎSetting the Self-timer Time: \\n231)\\n• When recording videos, set [Self Timer For Video] in [Self Timer \\nSetting] of the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu to [ON].\\n3\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n4\\nDecide on the composition and then adjust the focus.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n• The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer\\n230\\n5\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button.\\n≥After the self-timer light blinks, shooting or video recording starts.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer\\n231\\n™ Setting the Self-timer Time\\nPicture: \\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Self Timer]\\nVideo: \\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Self Timer Setting] ¨ Select [Self Timer]*\\n*\\nThis can be set by setting [Self Timer For Video] to [ON] in [Self Timer Setting] in \\nthe [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu.\\n[\\n]\\nTakes a picture after 10 seconds.\\n[\\n]\\nTakes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds.\\n(When recording video, it will be the same operation with \\n[\\n].)\\n[\\n]\\nTakes a picture after 2 seconds.\\n• This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake \\ncaused by pressing the shutter button.\\n[\\n] to [\\n]\\n(Custom)\\nTakes a picture after the time selected with [Custom Time].\\n[SET]\\n[Custom Time]\\nSets the time until recording starts.\\n[10SEC]/[9SEC]/[8SEC]/[7SEC]/[6SEC]/\\n[5SEC]/[4SEC]/[3SEC]/[2SEC]\\n[Display \\nCountdown]\\nA countdown is displayed on the recording \\nscreen when the self-timer is Custom.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer\\n232\\n• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.\\n• [Self Timer] in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu and [Self Timer] in the [Self \\nTimer Setting] ([Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu) work together.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [\\n] is not available:\\n– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ([Filter Settings])\\n– [Bracketing]\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n233\\nBracket Recording\\nWhen the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple \\nimages while automatically changing the setting value for exposure, \\naperture, focus or white balance (adjustment value or color temperature).\\n1\\nSet [Bracketing Type].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bracketing] ¨ [Bracketing Type]\\n• Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:\\n– [A] mode\\n– [M] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])\\n• White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) can be selected when the white \\nbalance is set to [\\n], [\\n], [\\n], or [\\n].\\n1\\n2\\n3\\n4\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n234\\n2\\nSet [More Settings].\\n≥For information about [More Settings], refer to page for each \\nbracketing method.\\n3\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n4\\nFocus on the subject and then take pictures.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n235\\n™ Setting Items ([Bracketing Type])\\n[\\n] (Exposure Bracket)\\nWhen the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the exposure. \\n(Î[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 237)\\n[\\n] (Aperture Bracket)\\nWhen the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the aperture \\nvalue. (Î[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 238)\\n[\\n] (Focus Bracket)\\nWhen the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the focus \\npoint. (Î[More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 239)\\n[\\n] (White Balance Bracket)\\nWhen the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three \\nimages with the different white balance adjustment values. (Î[More Settings] (White \\nBalance Bracket): 240)\\n[\\n] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature))\\nWhen the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three \\nimages with the different white balance color temperatures. (Î[More Settings] (White \\nBalance Bracket (Color Temperature)): 240)\\n[OFF]\\n™ How to Cancel Bracketing\\nSelect [OFF] in Step 1.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n236\\n• When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [65:24]/[2:1], only the Exposure Bracket can be \\nused.\\n• White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are not \\navailable when using the following functions:\\n– [iA] mode\\n– Taking burst pictures\\n– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n• Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following functions:\\n– SH burst recording\\n– [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)\\n– High Resolution mode\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n237\\n™ [More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)\\n[Step]\\nSets the image count and exposure compensation step.\\n[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record 7 images in 1 EV steps)\\n[Sequence]\\nSets the order in which images are recorded.\\n[Single Shot Setting]\\n[\\n]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is pressed.\\n[\\n]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter button is pressed once.\\n• The [BKT] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures is taken.\\n• When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure \\ncompensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected exposure \\ncompensation value.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n238\\n™ [More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)\\n[Image Count]\\n[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately setting the aperture value \\nin the sequence of one before and then one after using the initial aperture value as the \\nreference.\\n[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.\\nExample when the initial position is set to F8.0 (S-R2060)\\n(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image, (3) 3rd image ... (7) 7th image\\n4.0\\n2.8\\n5.6\\n8.0\\n11\\n16\\n22\\n(1)\\n(6)\\n(4)\\n(2)\\n(3)\\n(5)\\n(7)\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n239\\n™ [More Settings] (Focus Bracket)\\n[Step]\\nSets the focus adjustment step.\\n• The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if the initial focus point is \\nclose, and longer if it is far away.\\n[Image Count]\\nSets the image count.\\n• This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.\\nBurst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.\\n[Sequence]\\n[0/−/+]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the sequence of forward \\nand then backward using the initial focus point as the reference.\\n[0/+]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side using the initial focus \\npoint as the reference.\\nExample when [Sequence]: [0/−/+] is set\\nExample when [Sequence]: [0/+] is set\\n(A) Focus: closer\\n(B) Focus: more distant\\n(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image ... (5) 5th image ...\\n• When [Focus Limiter] is set, recording is within the set range where AF works.\\n• Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group. \\n(ÎGroup Images: 478)\\n・\\n・\\n・\\n・\\n・\\n・\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(1)\\n(3)\\n(5)\\n(2)\\n(4)\\n・\\n・\\n・\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(3)\\n(4)\\n(5)\\n(2)\\n(1)\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording\\n240\\n™ [More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)\\nRotate \\n, \\n or \\n to set the correction step and then press \\n \\nor \\n.\\nRotate to the right:\\nHorizontal direction ([A] - [B])\\nRotate to the left:\\nVertical direction ([G] - [M])\\n• The correction step can also be set by touching [\\n]/[\\n]/[\\n]/[\\n].\\n™ [More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color \\nTemperature))\\nRotate \\n, \\n or \\n to set the correction step and then press \\n \\nor \\n.\\n• The correction step can also be set by touching [\\n]/[\\n].\\nG\\nA\\nB\\nB\\nM\\n±300K\\n5500K\\n5500K\\n5500K\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]\\n241\\n[Silent Mode]\\nThis disables all operation sounds and light output at once.\\nThe audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist \\nlight will be set to forced off mode.\\n• The following settings are fixed:\\n– [Flash Mode]: [\\n] (Forced Flash Off)\\n– [AF Assist Light]: [OFF]\\n– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.]\\n– [Beep Volume]: [\\n] (OFF)\\n– [AF Beep Volume]: [\\n] (OFF)\\n– [E-Shutter Vol]: [\\n] (OFF)\\nPicture: \\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Silent Mode]\\nVideo: \\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Silent Mode]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]\\n242\\n• Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:\\n– Charging light/Network connection light\\n– Card access lights\\n– Self-timer light\\n• Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the privacy, \\nportrait, and other rights of subjects.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]\\n243\\n[Shutter Type]\\n≥[Long Exposure NR]: 247\\n≥[Min. Shutter Speed]: 248\\n≥[Shutter Delay]: 249\\nSelects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Shutter Type]\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]\\n244\\n[AUTO]\\nSwitches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording conditions and \\nshutter speed.\\n[MECH.]\\nRecords with the mechanical shutter type.\\n[EFC]\\nRecords with the electronic front curtain type.\\n[ELEC.]\\nRecords with the electronic shutter type.\\n[ELEC.+NR]\\nRecords with the electronic shutter type.\\nWhen pictures are taken at slower shutter speeds, the shutter is closed after recording \\nto perform long shutter noise reduction.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]\\n245\\n*1 This setting is available only in [M] mode.\\n*2 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone] in \\n[Beep] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. (Î[Beep]: 583)\\n• The electronic front curtain type reduces blur caused by the shutter because the \\namount of vibration from the shutter is small compared to the mechanical shutter \\ntype.\\n• The electronic shutter type allows you to record without vibration from the shutter.\\nMechanical \\nshutter type\\nElectronic front \\ncurtain type\\nElectronic shutter \\ntype\\nMechanism\\nThis type starts and \\nends exposure with \\nthe mechanical \\nshutter.\\nThis type starts \\nexposure \\nelectronically and \\nends it with the \\nmechanical shutter.\\nThis type starts and \\nends exposure \\nelectronically.\\nFlash\\n3\\n3\\n—\\nShutter speed\\n(sec.)\\n[B] (Bulb, max. \\napprox. \\n30 minutes)*1,\\n60 to 1/8000\\n[B] (Bulb, max. \\napprox. \\n30 minutes)*1,\\n60 to 1/2000\\n[B] (Bulb, max. \\napprox. \\n60 seconds)*1,\\n60 to 1/8000\\nShutter sound\\nMechanical shutter \\nsound\\nMechanical shutter \\nsound\\nElectronic shutter \\nsound*2\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]\\n246\\n• To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few seconds \\nafter the shutter button is pressed:\\n(Î[Shutter Delay]: 249)\\n• When [\\n] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic \\nshutter type.\\n• When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject may \\nappear distorted in the picture.\\n• When you record using the electronic shutter under lighting such as fluorescent \\nor LED lighting, horizontal stripes may be recorded. In such a case, lowering the \\nshutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.\\n• When using APS-C lenses, the electronic front curtain is not available.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]\\n247\\n[Long Exposure NR]\\nThe camera automatically removes noise generated when recording \\nimages with a slow shutter speed.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Long Exposure NR]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• Recording is not possible during noise reduction.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Long Exposure NR] is not \\navailable:\\n– Video recording/SH burst recording\\n– [ELEC.] (Excluding [ELEC.+NR])/[Silent Mode]\\n– High Resolution mode\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]\\n248\\n[Min. Shutter Speed]\\nSets the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Min. Shutter Speed]\\n[AUTO]\\nThe camera automatically sets the minimum shutter speed.\\n[1/8000] to [1/1]\\n• The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in recording situations \\nwhere correct exposure cannot be achieved.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]\\n249\\n[Shutter Delay]\\nTo reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur, the shutter is released \\nafter the specified time has passed since the shutter button was pressed.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Shutter Delay]\\nSettings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Shutter Delay] is not available:\\n– Video recording/SH burst recording\\n– High Resolution mode\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n250\\nImage Stabilizer\\n≥Image Stabilizer Settings: 253\\nThis camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens \\nimage stabilizer.\\nIt is compatible with the Dual I.S.2 system that is an effective combination \\nof the 2 image stabilizers.\\nFurthermore, during video recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image \\nStabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n251\\nCombinations of lenses and image stabilizers (As of January 2023)\\nImage stabilizers that can be used will differ depending on the attached \\nlens.\\n• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer (Î[E-Stabilization (Video)]: 253) can be used \\nwith any lenses.\\nAttached lens\\nAvailable image \\nstabilizer\\nExample of icon\\nPanasonic lenses with image \\nstabilization function\\nBody+Lens\\n(Dual I.S.2)\\nOther manufacturers’ lenses \\nwith image stabilization \\nfunction\\nBody or Lens\\n/\\nLenses without image \\nstabilizer function\\nBody\\nLenses without function to \\ncommunicate with this \\ncamera\\nBody\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n252\\n™ Using the Image Stabilizer\\n• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to [ON].\\n• When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this camera, \\nafter turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens \\ninformation is displayed.\\nCorrectly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length be \\nset to match the attached lens.\\nSet the focal length in accordance as prompted by the message.\\nThis can also be set using the menu. (Î[Lens Information]: 258)\\n• When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon [\\n] \\nmay be displayed on the recording screen.\\nIf this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer or the Shutter \\nRemote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).\\n• We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.\\n• The image stabilizer may cause vibration or produce operational sound during \\noperation, but these are not malfunctions.\\n• When the following function is being used, the image stabilizer function is not \\navailable:\\n– High Resolution Mode\\n• When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this \\ncamera, you can hide the message asking for confirmation of the lens \\ninformation that is displayed after turning on the camera:\\n(Î[Lens Info. Confirmation]: 571)\\n• You can display the reference point and check the camera shake status:\\n(Î[I.S. Status Scope]: 560)\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n253\\nImage Stabilizer Settings\\nSet the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.\\nPicture: \\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Image Stabilizer]\\nVideo: \\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Image Stabilizer]\\n[Operation Mode]\\nSets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method (normal, \\npanning). (Î[Operation Mode]: 255)\\n[Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)]\\n[\\n] ([Body]): The in-body image stabilizer corrects for vertical, horizontal, and \\nrotational shake.\\n[\\n] ([Lens + Body (Roll)]): The in-lens image stabilizer corrects for vertical and \\nhorizontal shake, while the in-body image stabilizer corrects for rotational shake.\\n• This can be set when using other manufacturers’ lenses with an image stabilization \\nfunction.\\n[When to Activate]\\n[ALWAYS]: The image stabilizer is always operating.\\n[HALF-SHUTTER]: The image stabilizer operates when the shutter button is pressed \\nhalfway.\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\nCamera shake during video recording is corrected along the vertical, horizontal, roll, \\npitch, and yaw axes through the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic \\nimage stabilizers. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)\\n• The [\\n] on the recording screen changes to [\\n] while [E-Stabilization (Video)] \\nis functioning.\\n• The angle of view may become narrower if set to [ON].\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n254\\n[Boost I.S. (Video)]\\nIncreases the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.\\nThis effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to perform recording \\nfrom a fixed perspective. (Î[Boost I.S. (Video)]: 256)\\n[Anamorphic (Video)]\\nYou can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording. (Î[Anamorphic \\n(Video)]: 257)\\n[Lens Information]\\nWhen using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera, \\nregister the lens information in the camera. (Î[Lens Information]: 258)\\n• When the following functions are being used, [When to Activate] is fixed to \\n[ALWAYS]:\\n– [\\n] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])\\n– [\\n] mode\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n– Video recording\\n• When the following functions are being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not \\navailable:\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n255\\n™ [Operation Mode]\\nSet the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method \\n(normal, panning).\\n[Normal]\\nCorrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera shake.\\nThis function is suitable for normal recording.\\n[Panning (Auto)]\\nAutomatically detects the panning direction, and corrects vertical and horizontal \\ncamera shake.\\nThis function is suitable for panning.\\n[Panning (Left/Right)]\\nCorrects vertical camera shake.\\nThis is suitable for horizontal panning.\\n[Panning (Up/Down)]\\nCorrects horizontal camera shake.\\nThis is suitable for vertical panning.\\n[OFF]\\nTurns the image stabilization function OFF.\\n• Operation modes that can be used will differ depending on the used lenses and on \\n[Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] settings.\\n• [Panning (Auto)] is not displayed when using other manufacturers’ lenses with an \\nimage stabilization function with [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] set to [\\n]. Set to \\neither [Panning (Left/Right)] or [Panning (Up/Down)] to suit the panning direction.\\n• When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be \\nset to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to [OFF].\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Operation Mode] switches to [\\n] \\n([Normal]):\\n– [\\n] mode\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n– Video recording\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n256\\n™ [Boost I.S. (Video)]\\nIncrease the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.\\nThis effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to \\nperform recording from a fixed perspective.\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is operating, [\\n] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n• To change composition while recording, first set this to [OFF] before moving the \\ncamera.\\nTo set this to [OFF] during recording, use the Fn button. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n• Longer focal lengths will result in weaker stabilization.\\n• When [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] is set to [\\n], [Boost I.S. (Video)] is not \\navailable.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n257\\n™ [Anamorphic (Video)]\\nYou can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording.\\nSettings: \\n[\\n]([2.0×])/[\\n]([1.8×])/[\\n]([1.5×])/[\\n]([1.33×])/[\\n]([1.30×])/\\n[OFF]\\n• Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.\\n• While [Anamorphic (Video)] is functioning, the set magnification appears on the \\nimage stabilizer icons on the recording screen, as shown by [\\n] and [\\n].\\n• When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is set, [Boost I.S. (Video)] is prioritized.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Anamorphic (Video)] is fixed to [OFF]:\\n– [\\n] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])\\n• Image stabilizer functions on your lens may not work correctly. Turn off the image \\nstabilizer function on your lens if this is the case.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n258\\n™ [Lens Information]\\nRegister the information for lenses that cannot communicate with the \\ncamera.\\nMatch the in-body image stabilizer with the information of the lens you \\nregister.\\nPress 34 to select the lens information to use and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• In the default setting, the lens information for 6 lenses with a focal length of between \\n24 mm and 135 mm is registered.\\nThe lens information for up to 12 lenses can be registered.\\nRegistering, modifying, and deleting lens information\\n1\\nPress 34 to select the lens information and then press [DISP.].\\n• If lens information that has not been registered is selected, press \\n or \\n \\nto proceed to Step 3.\\n2\\nPress 34 to select [Edit], [Sorting], or [Delete] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• You can change the display order of lens information by selecting [Sorting].\\n• The lens information is deleted when you select [Delete].\\n• You cannot delete the lens information for a lens that is being used.\\n3\\nEnter the lens Information.\\n• The lens information changes if the lens information has already been \\nregistered.\\n4\\n(If lens information that has not been registered is selected) Press [DISP.] to \\nregister the lens information.\\n\\n\\nDrive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer\\n259\\n[Focal Length]\\nEnter the focal length.\\n• The live view images can be enlarged for display when you rotate \\n.\\n[I.S. Area]\\nYou can set the range of stabilisation for the image stabiliser so that vignetting does \\nnot occur due to the image stabiliser.\\n[70%]/[80%]/[90%]/[100%]\\n• Rotate \\n to select the range of stabilisation, then press \\n or \\n to confirm.\\n• When the four edges are selected by pressing 3421, the in-body image stabiliser \\nworks and you can see if there is any vignetting. If vignetting has occurred, set again \\nto a smaller range.\\n[Lens Name]\\nRegister the lens.\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• Up to a maximum of 30 characters can be entered.\\n\\n\\n260\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO \\nSensitivity\\nThis chapter describes recording modes for determining exposure and ISO \\nsensitivity.\\n≥[Metering Mode]: 261\\n≥Program AE Mode: 263\\n≥Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 267\\n≥Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 270\\n≥Manual Exposure Mode: 273\\n≥Preview Mode: 278\\n≥Exposure Compensation: 280\\n≥Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 284\\n≥ISO Sensitivity: 286\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]\\n261\\n[Metering Mode]\\nType of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Metering Mode]\\n[\\n] (Multi-metering)\\nMethod in which the most suitable exposure is measured by judging the allocation of \\nbrightness on the whole screen.\\n[\\n] (Center-weighted)\\nMethod used to perform measuring which focuses on the center of the screen.\\n[\\n] (Spot)\\nMethod used to measure the extremely small part around the spot-metering target (A).\\n• When you move the AF area, the spot metering target also moves to match.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]\\n262\\n[\\n] (Highlight-weighted)\\nMethod used to perform measuring which focuses on the highlighted parts of the \\nscreen to prevent overexposure.\\nThis is suitable for theatre photography, etc.\\n• The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:\\n(Î[Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 536)\\n• You can assign the function that records with the metering mode set to [\\n] \\n(Spot) once only to an Fn button:\\n(Î[1 Shot Spot Metering]: 509)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode\\n263\\nProgram AE Mode\\n≥Program Shift: 265\\nIn [P] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the shutter \\nspeed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.\\nYou can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed \\nand aperture values while keeping the same exposure.\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [P].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nPress the shutter button halfway.\\n≥This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the \\nrecording screen.\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode\\n264\\n• If the correct exposure is not achieved, the aperture value (A) and shutter \\nspeed (B) blink red.\\n3\\nStart recording.\\nF3.5\\n60\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode\\n265\\nProgram Shift\\nYou can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set \\nautomatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.\\nWith this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused by \\ndecreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more \\ndynamically by slowing the shutter speed.\\n1\\nPress the shutter button halfway.\\n• This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording \\nscreen. (Approx. 10 seconds)\\n2\\nRotate \\n or \\n while the values are displayed.\\n• This displays the Program Shift icon (C) on the recording screen.\\n3\\nStart recording.\\nCanceling Program Shift\\n• Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].\\n• Rotate \\n or \\n until the Program Shift icon disappears.\\nF5.6\\n30\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode\\n266\\n• Program Shift is not available when using the following function:\\n– Flash\\n• You can customize dial operations:\\n(Î[Dial Set.]: 549)\\n• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship \\nbetween aperture value and shutter speed:\\n(Î[Expo.Meter]: 558)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode\\n267\\nAperture-Priority AE Mode\\nIn [A] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value \\nbefore recording.\\nThe shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.\\nSmaller aperture values\\nIt becomes easier to defocus the background.\\nLarger aperture values\\nIt becomes easier to bring everything into focus including the background.\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode\\n268\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [A].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet the aperture value.\\n≥Rotate \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nStart recording.\\n• If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed \\nhalfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.\\nF8.0\\nF8.0\\nF8.0\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode\\n269\\n™ Depth of Field Characteristics\\nAperture value\\nSmall\\nLarge\\nFocal length of lens\\nTelephoto\\nWide-angle\\nDistance to subject\\nNear\\nMore distant\\nDepth of field\\n(area in sharp focus)\\n Shallow (narrow)\\nExample: When you want \\nto take a image with a \\ndefocused background.\\n Deep (wide)\\nExample: When you want \\nto take a image with focus \\nas far as the background.\\n• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the \\nrecording screen.\\nTo check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (ÎPreview Mode: \\n278)\\nYou can set the preview of the aperture effect to constantly operate in [A] mode \\nto check the depth of field while recording:\\n(Î[Constant Preview]: 552)\\n• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.\\nCheck the images on the playback screen.\\n• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to \\nother than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.\\n• You can customize dial operations:\\n(Î[Dial Set.]: 549)\\n• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship \\nbetween aperture value and shutter speed:\\n(Î[Expo.Meter]: 558)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode\\n270\\nShutter-Priority AE Mode\\nIn [S] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed \\nbefore recording.\\nThe aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.\\nSlower shutter speeds\\nIt becomes easier to capture motion\\nFaster shutter speeds\\nIt becomes easier to freeze motion\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode\\n271\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [S].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet the shutter speed.\\n≥Rotate \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nStart recording.\\n• If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed \\nhalfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.\\n250\\n250\\n250\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode\\n272\\n• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the \\nrecording screen.\\nTo check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (ÎPreview Mode: \\n278)\\n• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.\\nCheck the images on the playback screen.\\n• Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording \\nusing a flash. (ÎShutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 336)\\n• You can customize dial operations:\\n(Î[Dial Set.]: 549)\\n• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship \\nbetween aperture value and shutter speed:\\n(Î[Expo.Meter]: 558)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode\\n273\\nManual Exposure Mode\\n≥Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.): 276\\n≥[B] (Bulb): 277\\nIn [M] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can record by manually setting \\nthe aperture value and shutter speed.\\nIn default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].\\nAs a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture \\nvalue and shutter speed.\\nExposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to \\n[AUTO].\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [M].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode\\n274\\n2\\nSet the aperture value and shutter speed.\\n≥Rotate \\n to set the aperture value (A), and \\n to set the shutter \\nspeed (B).\\n3\\nStart recording.\\n• If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed \\nhalfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.\\nF5.6\\n30\\n30\\n30\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode\\n275\\n™ Manual Exposure Assist\\nWhen ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist \\n(example: \\n) will be displayed on the recording screen.\\nYou can check the difference between the current exposure value and the \\nstandard exposure (±0) measured by the camera.\\n• Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.\\nWe recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode\\n276\\nAvailable Shutter Speeds (Sec.)\\n• [MECH.]\\n[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/8000\\n• [EFC]\\n[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/2000\\n• [ELEC.]\\n[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/8000\\n• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the \\nrecording screen.\\nTo check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (ÎPreview Mode: \\n278)\\nYou can set the preview of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect to \\nconstantly operate in [M] mode to check the depth of field and movement of the \\nsubject while recording:\\n(Î[Constant Preview]: 552)\\n• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.\\nCheck the images on the playback screen.\\n• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to \\nother than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.\\n• Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording \\nusing a flash. (ÎShutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 336)\\n• You can customize dial operations:\\n(Î[Dial Set.]: 549)\\n• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship \\nbetween aperture value and shutter speed:\\n(Î[Expo.Meter]: 558)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode\\n277\\n[B] (Bulb)\\nIf you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb), the shutter stays open while the \\nshutter button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 30 minutes)\\nThe shutter closes when the shutter button is released.\\nUse this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record \\nimages of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.\\n• We recommend using a tripod or the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: \\noptional) during bulb recording.\\n• Bulb recording may create noticeable noise.\\nIf you are concerned about noise, we recommend that you set [Long Exposure \\nNR] (Î[Long Exposure NR]: 247) to [ON] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu \\nbefore recording.\\n• Bulb is not available when using the following functions:\\n– SH burst recording\\n– [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– [Stop Motion Animation] (when set to [Auto Shooting])\\n– High Resolution mode\\n– [Bracketing]\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode\\n278\\nPreview Mode\\nYou can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by physically \\nclosing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set for actual \\nrecording.\\nIn addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter \\nspeed at the same time.\\n• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with \\n[Preview]. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\nPress the preview button.\\n• Each press of the button switches between the effect preview screens.\\nAperture effect: OFF\\nShutter speed effect: OFF\\nª\\nAperture effect: ON\\nShutter speed effect: OFF\\nª\\nAperture effect: ON\\nShutter speed effect: ON\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode\\n279\\n• It is possible to record in preview mode.\\n• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/8000 of a second.\\n• Depending on the [Constant Preview] setting, there are preview screens that \\ncannot be displayed.\\n• You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in \\n[A]/[M] mode:\\n(Î[Constant Preview]: 552)\\n• You can assign the function that enables you to view the aperture effect just while \\nthe button is being pressed to an Fn button:\\n(Î[Preview Aperture Effect]: 513)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation\\n280\\nExposure Compensation\\n≥[i.Dynamic Range]: 283\\nYou can compensate the exposure when the standard exposure \\ndetermined by the camera is too bright or too dark.\\nYou can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of ±5 EV.\\nWhen recording videos, the range changes to ±3 EV.\\n1\\nPress [\\n].\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation\\n281\\n2\\nCompensate the exposure.\\n≥Rotate \\n, \\n, or \\n.\\n3\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n+3\\n+3\\n+1\\n+1 +2\\n+2 +3\\n+3\\n-5\\n-5 -4\\n-4 -3\\n-3 -2\\n-2 -1\\n-1\\n0\\n0\\n+5\\n+5\\n+4\\n+4\\n+1\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation\\n282\\n• In [M] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO sensitivity to \\n[AUTO].\\n• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds ±3 EV, the \\nbrightness of the recording screen will no longer change.\\nPress the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the \\nrecording screen.\\n• The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the camera.\\n• The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:\\n(Î[Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 536)\\n• You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera is \\nturned off:\\n(Î[Exposure Comp. Reset]: 538)\\n• You can change the operation of the [\\n] button:\\n(Î[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 548)\\n• Exposure Bracket can be set and flash output can be adjusted on the exposure \\ncompensation screen:\\n(Î[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 548)\\n• You can assign the function that matches the aperture value and shutter speed to \\nthe standard exposure to an Fn button:\\n(Î[One Push AE]: 509)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation\\n283\\n[i.Dynamic Range]\\nContrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference \\nbetween the background and subject is great.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [i.Dynamic Range]\\nSettings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]\\n• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording \\nconditions.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [i.Dynamic Range] is not available:\\n– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT]/[Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full \\nRange] ([Photo Style])\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)\\n284\\nLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)\\nLock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same \\nfocus and exposure settings while changing the composition.\\nThis is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or \\nthere is a backlight, for example.\\n1\\nRegister [AE LOCK], [AF LOCK], or [AF/AE LOCK] to the \\nFn button. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n• These cannot be registered to [Fn3] to [Fn7].\\n[AE LOCK]\\nThe exposure is locked.\\n[AF LOCK]\\nThe focus is locked.\\n[AF/AE LOCK]\\nBoth focus and exposure are locked.\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)\\n285\\n2\\nLock focus and exposure.\\n≥Press and hold the Fn button.\\n≥If focus is locked, then the AF lock icon (A) will be displayed.\\n≥If exposure is locked, then the AE lock icon (B) will be displayed.\\n3\\nHold the Fn button to decide on the composition and \\nthen perform recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.\\n• You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:\\n(Î[AF/AE Lock Hold]: 540)\\n• You can make fine manual adjustments to the focus during AF Lock:\\n(Î[AF+MF]: 541)\\nAFL\\nAFL\\nAEL\\nAEL\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity\\n286\\nISO Sensitivity\\n≥[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290\\n≥[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 291\\nYou can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).\\nWith the default settings, you can set 100 to 51200 in 1/3 EV increments.\\nThis camera supports Dual Native ISO which enables recording at high \\nsensitivity with reduced noise by switching the base sensitivity.\\nThe base sensitivity can also be fixed as necessary.\\n1\\nPress [ISO].\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity\\n287\\n2\\nSelect ISO sensitivity.\\n≥Rotate \\n, \\n, or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ISO].\\n3\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\nCharacteristics of the ISO Sensitivity\\nBy increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in dark places \\nto prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO sensitivities also \\nincrease the amount of noise in the recorded images.\\n100\\n100\\n200\\n200\\n40\\n40\\nAUTO\\nAUTO\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity\\n288\\n™ Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)\\n[AUTO]\\nThe ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the brightness.\\n• Taking picture: Maximum [6400]*1\\n• Video recording: Maximum [6400]*2\\n[100] to [51200]\\nThe ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.\\n• The available ISO sensitivity range changes according to the setting of [Dual Native \\nISO Setting] in the [Photo]/[Video] ([Image Quality]) menu. (Î[Dual Native ISO \\nSetting]: 290)\\n• You can extend the ISO sensitivity range in between a lower limit of [50] and an \\nupper limit of [204800] by setting [Extended ISO] (Î[Extended ISO]: 535) to [ON] in \\nthe [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu.\\n*1 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (photo)].\\n*2 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (video)].\\n• When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is \\nrestricted.\\n– High Resolution mode: Up to an upper limit of [3200]\\n– [Filter Settings]: Up to an upper limit of [6400]\\n– [Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [200]\\n(The lower limit changes to [100] when [Extended ISO] is set.)\\n– [Like709] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [100]\\n– [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [640], up to an \\nupper limit of [51200]\\n(The lower limit changes to [320] when [Extended ISO] is set.)\\n– [Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full Range] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit \\nof [400]\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity\\n289\\n• You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:\\n(Î[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 291, [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 367)\\n• You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:\\n(Î[ISO Increments]: 535)\\n• The setting range of ISO sensitivity can be extended:\\n(Î[Extended ISO]: 535)\\n• You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:\\n(Î[Min. Shutter Speed]: 248)\\n• You can change the operation of the [ISO] button:\\n(Î[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 548)\\n• You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings screen:\\n(Î[ISO Displayed Setting]: 548)\\n• You can change the units for sensitivity to dB when recording video:\\n(Î[SS/Gain Operation]: 395)\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity\\n290\\n[Dual Native ISO Setting]\\nYou can set whether to switch the base sensitivity automatically or to fix it.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Dual Native ISO Setting]\\n[AUTO]\\nThe base sensitivity is automatically switched according to the brightness.\\n• ISO sensitivity can be set within the following ranges:\\n– [AUTO] / [100] to [51200]\\n– When [Extended ISO] is set: [AUTO] / [50] to [204800]\\n[LOW]\\nSets the base sensitivity for low sensitivity.\\n• ISO sensitivity can be set within the following ranges:\\n– [AUTO] / [100] to [800]\\n– When [Extended ISO] is set: [AUTO] / [50] to [800]\\n[HIGH]\\nThe base sensitivity is automatically switched according to the brightness.\\n• ISO sensitivity can be set within the following ranges:\\n– [AUTO] / [640] to [51200]\\n– When [Extended ISO] is set: [AUTO] / [320] to [204800]\\n• [Dual Native ISO Setting] is fixed to [AUTO] in the following cases:\\n– [iA] mode\\n– High Resolution Mode (When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT])\\n\\n\\nMetering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity\\n291\\n[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]\\nSets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is \\nset to [AUTO].\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]\\n[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]\\nSets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].\\n• Set in the range between [100] and [25600].\\n[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]\\nSets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].\\n• Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and [51200].\\n\\n\\n292\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality\\nThis chapter describes functions that enable you to record images how you \\nimagine them, such as white balance and Photo Style.\\n≥White Balance (WB): 293\\n≥[Photo Style]: 301\\n≥[Filter Settings]: 314\\n≥[LUT Library]: 320\\n≥Lens Compensation: 323\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n293\\nWhite Balance (WB)\\n≥Adjusting the White Balance: 299\\nWhite balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by \\nthe light illuminating the subject.\\nIt corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the \\noverall color closer to what is seen by the eye.\\nNormally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the \\noptimal white balance.\\nSet this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you \\nexpected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.\\n1\\nPress [WB].\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n294\\n2\\nSelect the white balance.\\n≥Rotate \\n, \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by pressing [WB].\\n3\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\nAWBc\\nAWBc AWBw\\nAWBw\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nAWB\\nAWB\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n295\\n™ Setting Items (White Balance)\\n[AWB]\\nAuto\\n[AWBc]\\nAuto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)\\n[AWBw]\\nAuto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)\\n[\\n]\\nClear sky\\n[\\n]\\nCloudy sky\\n[\\n]\\nShade under a clear sky\\n[\\n]\\nIncandescent light\\n[\\n]*\\nFlash\\n[\\n] to [\\n]\\nSet mode 1 to 4 (ÎRegistering the White Set: 298)\\n[\\n] to [\\n]\\nColor temperatures 1 to 4 (ÎColor Temperature Setting: 298)\\n*\\nIt operates as [AWB] during video recording.\\n1\\n4\\n1\\n4\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n296\\n(1)\\n[AWB] will work within this range.\\n(2)\\nBlue sky\\n(3)\\nCloudy sky (Rain)\\n(4)\\nShade\\n(5)\\nSunlight\\n(6)\\nWhite fluorescent light\\n(7)\\nIncandescent light bulb\\n(8)\\nSunrise and sunset\\n(9)\\nCandlelight\\nK=Kelvin Color Temperature\\n(1)\\n(5)\\n(6)\\n(7)\\n(8)\\n(9)\\n(4)\\n(3)\\n(2)\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n297\\n• Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white balance \\nwill vary depending on the lighting type.\\nUse [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [\\n] to [\\n].\\n• The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.\\n• It is possible to temporarily lock auto white balance:\\n(Î[AWB Lock Setting]: 537)\\n• You can change the operation of the [WB] button:\\n(Î[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 548)\\n1\\n4\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n298\\n™ Registering the White Set\\nTake pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording \\nlocation to adjust the white balance until it appears white.\\n1\\nPress [WB] and then select any value from [\\n] to [\\n].\\n2\\nPress 3.\\n3\\nAim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at the center \\nof the screen and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.\\n™ Color Temperature Setting\\nSet the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.\\n1\\nPress [WB] and then select any value from [\\n] to [\\n].\\n2\\nPress 3.\\n• The color temperature setting screen is displayed.\\n3\\nPress 34 to select the color temperature and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• You can set the White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) by rotating \\n, \\n or \\n. (Î[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)): \\n240)\\n• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].\\n• In [\\n]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / \\nDisplay (Video)]) menu is set to [ON], the kelvin values are displayed on the \\nrecording screen.\\n1\\n4\\n1\\n4\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n299\\nAdjusting the White Balance\\nYou can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is not \\nproduced by the selected white balance.\\n1\\nPress [WB].\\n2\\nSelect the white balance and then press 4.\\n≥The adjustment screen is displayed.\\n3\\nAdjust the coloring.\\n2: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)\\n3: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)\\n1: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)\\n4: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)\\n• You can also make adjustments in diagonal directions by using the joystick.\\n• You can also touch the graph to make adjustments.\\n• Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted state.\\n• You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating \\n, \\n or \\n. \\n(Î[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 240)\\nG\\nM\\nA\\nB\\nB\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)\\n300\\n4\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n• When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon \\nchanges to the adjusted color.\\nAdjusting toward the [G] side will display [+], while adjusting toward the [M] side \\nwill display [−].\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n301\\n[Photo Style]\\nYou can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and \\nexpression styles.\\nThe image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.\\nYou can also apply the LUT file you have loaded in the camera and record \\npictures and videos.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Photo Style]\\n [Standard]\\nThe standard setting.\\n [Vivid]\\nA setting that produces a more vivid quality with higher saturation and contrast.\\n [Natural]\\nA setting that produces a softer quality with lower contrast.\\n [L.ClassicNeo]\\nA setting for a film-like effect that has a nostalgic, soft coloring.\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n302\\n [Flat]\\nA setting that produces a flatter image quality with lower saturation and contrast.\\n [Landscape]\\nA setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.\\n [Portrait]\\nA setting suited for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.\\n [Monochrome]\\nA monochrome setting with no color shades.\\n [L.Monochrome]\\nA monochrome setting with rich gradation and crisp black accents.\\n [L.Monochrome D]\\nA monochrome setting that creates a dynamic impression with enhanced highlights \\nand shadows.\\n [L.Monochrome S]\\nA setting for a monochrome effect with a gentle touch suited to portraits.\\n [Cinelike D2]\\nA setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve and gives priority \\nto the dynamic range.\\n• This function is suitable for video editing processes.\\n [Cinelike V2]\\nA setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve that gives priority \\nto the contrast.\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n303\\n [Like709]\\nA setting that minimizes overexposure by applying a gamma curve correction \\nequivalent to Rec.709 to perform compression (knee adjustment) of high-luminance \\nareas. (ÎRecording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 365)\\n• Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for \\nhigh-definition broadcasting.\\n [V-Log]\\nA gamma curve setting intended for post-production processing. (ÎLog Recording: \\n428)\\n• It allows you to add rich gradation to images during post-production editing.\\n [REAL TIME LUT]\\nA setting for recording images with a LUT file applied to the [V-Log] Photo Style.\\n• You can apply the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. (Î[LUT Library]: \\n320)\\n• [Vlog_709] is applied in the default setting.\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the recording screen when a LUT file has not been applied.\\nSelecting the LUT file to apply\\n1\\nPress 34 to select [LUT] and then press [\\n].\\n2\\nPress 34 to select the LUT file to apply, then press \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nPress the shutter button or video rec. button to start recording.\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n304\\n [Like2100(HLG)]*1\\nA setting used to record HLG format video. (ÎHLG Videos: 433)\\n• [Luminance Level] is fixed to [64-940].\\n [Like2100(HLG) Full Range]*1, 2\\nA setting used to record HLG format video. (ÎHLG Videos: 433)\\n• [Luminance Level] is fixed to [0-1023].\\n [MY PHOTO STYLE 1]*2 to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10]*2\\nAdjusts the image quality of Photo Style items to your preferred settings and registers \\nthese as My Photo Style items. (ÎRegistering Settings in My Photo Style: 313)\\n• Effects up to [MY PHOTO STYLE 4] are displayed with the default settings. \\nApplying a LUT file\\nWith image quality adjustments, you can apply a LUT file registered in [LUT Library]. \\n(Î[LUT Library]: 320)\\n• With My Photo Style, you can also apply LUT files to [Photo Style] other than [V-Log].\\nWhen applying a LUT file created with image editing software, select the [Photo \\nStyle] that is the same as the Photo Style used as the base when creating it.\\nWhen you select a different [Photo Style], the images may not be displayed or \\nrecorded correctly.\\n• [\\n] switches to [\\n] when [LUT] is applied in the [Photo Style] image quality \\nadjustments.\\n*1 Can only be selected when in the [\\n] mode and set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality]. \\n(Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n*2 You can set the items to display in the menu with [Show/Hide Photo Style] in \\n[Photo Style Settings]. (Î[Photo Style Settings]: 534)\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n305\\n• In [iA] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.\\n– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.\\n– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another \\nrecording mode or it is turned off.\\n– Image quality cannot be adjusted.\\n• The range of available ISO sensitivities is different when [Photo Style] is set to \\nthe following (ÎSetting Items (ISO Sensitivity): 288):\\n– [Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2]/[Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT]/\\n[Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]\\nThe range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in \\n[Dual Native ISO Setting].\\nReset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.\\n• You can set the knee mode with [Like709]. (ÎRecording While Controlling \\nOverexposure (Knee): 365)\\n• When [LUT] is set to [OFF] in the image quality adjustments of [REAL TIME \\nLUT], the [Photo Style] will operate the same as [V-Log].\\n• When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.\\n• You can make detailed Photo Style settings:\\n(Î[My Photo Style Settings]: 534)\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n306\\n™ Adjusting Image Quality\\n1\\nPress 21 to select the type of Photo Style.\\n2\\nPress 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.\\n• Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].\\n3\\nPress \\n or \\n.\\n• When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording \\nscreen is indicated with [¢].\\nSettings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)\\n[Contrast]\\nAdjusts the contrast in the image.\\n[Highlight]\\nAdjusts the brightness of bright areas.\\n[Shadow]\\nAdjusts the brightness of dark areas.\\n[Saturation]\\nAdjusts the vividness of colors.\\n[Color Tone]\\nAdjusts blue and yellow tints.\\n-5\\n-5\\n0\\n0\\n+5\\n+5\\n±0\\n±0\\n±0\\n±0\\n±0\\n6WDQGDUG\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n307\\n[Hue]\\nAssuming that the reference point is red, this rotates the hue toward violet/magenta or \\nyellow/green to adjust the coloring of the entire image.\\n[Filter Effect]\\n[Yellow]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak) Records the sky with a clear blue.\\n[Orange]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium) Records the sky with a darker \\nblue.\\n[Red]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong) Records the sky with a much darker \\nblue.\\n[Green]: Skin and lips of people appear in natural tones. Green leaves appear brighter \\nand more enhanced.\\n[Off]\\n[Grain Effect]\\n[Low]/[Standard]/[High]: Sets the grain effect level.\\n[Off]\\n[Color Noise]\\n[On]: Adds color to the grain effect.\\n[Off]\\n[Sharpness]\\nAdjusts the outlines in the image.\\n[Noise Reduction]\\nAdjusts the noise reduction effect.\\n• Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in picture resolution.\\nS\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n308\\n[Dual Native ISO Setting]*3\\nSets the Dual Native ISO. (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290)\\n[Sensitivity]*3\\nSets the ISO sensitivity. (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n[White Balance]*3\\nSets the white balance. (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)\\n• While [WB] is selected, press [\\n] to display the white balance setting screen.\\nPress [\\n] again to return to the original screen.\\n[LUT]\\nApplies the preset ([Vlog_709]) or the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. \\n(Î[LUT Library]: 320)\\n1\\nSelect either [REAL TIME LUT] or one of [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO \\nSTYLE 10] in [Photo Style].\\n2\\nPress 34 to select [LUT] and then press [\\n].\\n3\\nPress 34 to select the LUT file to apply, then press \\n or \\n.\\n*3 Available when the following is set while [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO \\nSTYLE 10] are selected:\\n[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Photo Style Settings] ¨ [My Photo Style Settings] ¨ [Add \\nEffects] ¨ [Sensitivity]/[White Balance] ¨ [ON]\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n309\\n• The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type.\\n*4 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].\\n*5 Can be set when [Photo Style] is My Photo Style.\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n([Saturation])\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n([Color Tone])\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3*4\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3*5\\n3*5\\n3*5\\n3*5\\n3*5\\n3\\nS\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n310\\n• The effects of [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] cannot be checked on the \\nrecording screen.\\n• [LUT] cannot be applied to RAW images. When [Picture Quality] is set to [RAW] \\nfor recording, a LUT file can be applied only to the live view and thumbnail \\ndisplays in the playback screen.\\n• [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] are not available when using the following \\nfunction:\\n– Video recording\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n311\\n™ Range Properties When Recording with a LUT File \\nApplied\\nThe following table shows the range properties for videos recorded with \\nLUT files applied in Photo Style:\\n[Photo Style]\\nLUT file \\napplied\\n[Luminance Level]\\nRange property\\n[REAL TIME LUT]/\\nwhen [V-Log] is \\nselected in My \\nPhoto Style\\n[Vlog_709]\\nFixed to [16-255] \\n([64-1023])\\nVideo range\\nOther than \\n[Vlog_709]\\nFixed to [0-255] \\n([0-1023])\\nFull range\\nWhen other than \\n[V-Log] is selected \\nin My Photo Style\\n[Vlog_709]\\n[0-255] ([0-1023])\\nFull range\\n[16-235] ([64-940])/\\n[16-255] ([64-1023])\\nVideo range\\nOther than \\n[Vlog_709]\\n[0-255] ([0-1023])\\nFull range\\n[16-235] ([64-940])/\\n[16-255] ([64-1023])\\nVideo range\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n312\\n• When editing video with image editing software, we recommend using LUT files \\nfor full range.\\n• When recording video with a LUT file applied with My Photo Style, we \\nrecommend setting [Luminance Level] to [0-255] ([0-1023]).\\n• Use LUT files for full range when recording pictures.\\nIf you record with a LUT file for video range applied, it may not be possible to \\nproperly display or record the images.\\n• If there is a difference between the range property of the applied LUT file and the \\nrange property of the video file, it may not be possible to generate the images \\nproperly in the image editing software.\\nWhen loading the video files into the image editing software, select the correct \\nrange setting for each video file.\\n• The results of recording images with LUT files applied with this camera and the \\nresults of applying LUT files with image editing software will not match \\ncompletely.\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]\\n313\\n™ Registering Settings in My Photo Style\\n1\\nPress 21 to select the type of Photo Style.\\n2\\nAdjust the image quality.\\n• My Photo Style displays the types of Photo Style at the top of image quality \\nadjustment.\\nSelect the base Photo Style.\\n3\\nPress [DISP.].\\n4\\n(When [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] is selected)\\nPress 34 to select [Save Current Setting] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n5\\nPress 34 to select the registration destination number and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• A confirmation screen will be displayed.\\nOn the confirmation screen, press [DISP.] to change the My Photo Style name.\\nUp to 22 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2 \\ncharacters.\\nHow to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n™ Changing the Registered Contents of My Photo Style\\n1\\nSelect any value from [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10].\\n2\\nPress [DISP.] and then set the item.\\n[Load Preset Setting]\\n[Save Current Setting]\\n[Edit Title]\\n[Restore to Default]\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]\\n314\\n[Filter Settings]\\n≥[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]: 319\\nThis mode records with additional image effects (filters).\\nYou can adjust the effect for each filter.\\nIn addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.\\n1\\nSet the [Filter Effect].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Filter Settings] ¨ [Filter Effect] ¨ \\n[SET]\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]\\n315\\n2\\nSelect the filter.\\n≥Press 34 to select, and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also select the image effect (filter) by touching the sample \\npicture.\\n• Press [DISP.] to switch the screen in the order of normal display and guide \\ndisplay.\\nThe guide display shows the description of each filter.\\n1/3\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]\\n316\\n™ Adjusting the Filter Effect\\nYou can adjust the filter effect.\\n1\\nSelect the filter.\\n2\\nOn the recording screen, press [WB].\\n3\\nRotate \\n, \\n or \\n to set.\\n• To return to the recording screen, press [WB] again.\\n• When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter icon on the recording screen is \\nindicated with [¢].\\nFilter\\nItems that can be adjusted\\n[Expressive]\\nVividness\\n[Retro]\\nColoring\\n[Old Days]\\nContrast\\n[High Key]\\nColoring\\n[Low Key]\\nColoring\\n[Sepia]\\nContrast\\n[Cross Process]\\nColoring\\n[Bleach Bypass]\\nContrast\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]\\n317\\n™ Setting a Filter with Touch Operation\\n1\\nTouch [\\n].\\n2\\nTouch the item to set.\\n[\\n]: Filter on/off\\n[\\n]: Filter\\n[\\n]: Filter effect adjustment\\n• The default settings are for the Touch Tab to not be displayed.\\nSet [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. \\n(Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\nEXPS\\nEXPS\\nEXPS\\nEXPS\\nEXPS\\nEXPS\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]\\n318\\n• White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [\\n] (Forced \\nFlash Off).\\n• The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [6400].\\n• Depending on the filter, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.\\n• [Filter Effect] is not available when using the following function:\\n– High Resolution mode\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n• When displaying the [Filter Effect] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing \\n[DISP.] displays the filter selection screen.\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]\\n319\\n[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]\\nYou can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Filter Settings] ¨ Select \\n[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following \\nfunctions:\\n– Burst recording\\n– [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– [Stop Motion Animation]\\n– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])\\n– [Bracketing]\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]\\n320\\n[LUT Library]\\nRegister LUT files to the camera to use with Photo Style and LUT View \\nAssist.\\n• The following LUT file can be used:\\n– The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM \\n3DLUT REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”\\n– The “.cube” format\\n• The “.cube” format LUT files are compatible with 2-point to 33-point 3D LUT.\\n• We recommend loading LUT files for full range onto the camera. If the range \\nproperty is different, the images may not be displayed or recorded correctly.\\n• The number of characters that can be used in a file name differs depending on \\nthe file system of the card.\\n(Use alphanumeric characters for the file name)\\nFAT32 (SD memory card/SDHC memory card): Up to 8 characters (excluding \\nextension).\\nexFAT (SDXC memory card): Up to 255 characters (including extension).\\n• Save the LUT file with a file extension of “.vlt” or “.cube” in the root directory of \\nthe card (the folder opened when the card is opened on a PC).\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]\\n321\\n1\\nInsert a card on which a LUT file is saved into the \\ncamera.\\n2\\nSelect [LUT Library].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [LUT Library]\\n3\\nSelect the registration destination.\\n≥Press 34 to select, and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥If you select a registered item, the LUT file will be registered by \\noverwriting.\\n4\\nSelect [Load].\\n≥Press \\n or \\n.\\n≥The registered LUT file is deleted when you select [Delete].\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]\\n322\\n5\\nSelect [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2].\\n≥Press \\n or \\n.\\n6\\nSelect the LUT file to load.\\n≥Press 34 to select, and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• [Vlog_709] is registered in the default setting.\\n• Up to 10 LUT files can be registered.\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation\\n323\\nLens Compensation\\n≥[Vignetting Comp.]: 323\\n≥[Color Shading Compensation]: 324\\n≥[Diffraction Compensation]: 328\\n[Vignetting Comp.]\\nWhen the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, \\nyou can record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery \\ncorrected.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Vignetting Comp.]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording \\nconditions.\\n• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Vignetting Comp.] in the [Photo] \\n([Image Quality]) menu is not available:\\n– [Ex. Tele Conv.]\\n• When the following function is being used, [Vignetting Comp.] in the [Video] \\n([Image Quality]) menu is not available:\\n– [APS-C] in [Image Area of Video] (only when using a full-frame lens), [PIXEL/\\nPIXEL]\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation\\n324\\n[Color Shading Compensation]\\nCompensate for the coloring that occurs around the screen (color shading) \\ndue to the characteristics of the lens.\\n™ When using an L-Mount lens\\nThe color shading is automatically compensated, but it is also possible to \\nmake manual fine adjustments.\\n1\\nSelect [Color Shading Compensation].\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Color Shading Compensation]\\n2\\nAdjust the red tint and blue tint.\\n• Press 34 to select [Red Tint]/[Blue Tint], then press 21 to adjust.\\n• You can also adjust by rotating \\n, \\n, or \\n.\\n3\\nPress \\n or \\n to confirm the setting.\\n• The adjusted value is not recorded.\\n±0\\n±0\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation\\n325\\n™ When Using Other Than an L-Mount Lens\\nYou can compensate for the color shading for other than L-Mount lenses \\nand register the compensation details.\\nSelect [Color Shading Compensation].\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Color Shading Compensation]\\n[MANUAL]\\nCompensate for the color shading of the attached lens.\\n1\\nPress 34 to select [MANUAL] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n2\\nPress [DISP.] to execute color shading compensation.\\n• Execute while the screen is filled with a subject that has no color variation, \\nsuch as a white or gray one.\\n• If further adjustment is required, press 4 and make fine adjustments manually.\\n3\\nPress \\n or \\n to confirm the setting.\\n• The compensation value and adjusted value are not recorded. To record them, \\npress [DISP.] in the adjustment screen and make a preset registration.\\n[PRESET]\\nCompensate for the color shading of the attached lens and make a preset registration. \\n(ÎRegistering presets: 326)\\nYou can also call up presets that have already been registered.\\n[OFF]\\nThe color shading compensation is not applied.\\n[ADJUST]\\nFine-adjust the red tint and blue tint.\\n• The adjusted value is not recorded.\\n• If a compensation value already registered in [PRESET] is adjusted, [¢] is displayed \\nnext to [PRESET].\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation\\n326\\nRegistering presets\\nYou can register up to 12 sets of compensation settings.\\n1\\nSelect [PRESET] in [Color Shading Compensation].\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Color Shading Compensation] ¨ [PRESET]\\n2\\nSelect any of [SET1] to [SET12] and press \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nSelect [Compensate/Adjust] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n4\\nPress [DISP.] while the screen is filled with a subject that has no color variation, \\nsuch as a white or gray one.\\n• Color shading compensation is executed. Press \\n or \\n.\\n• If further adjustment is required, press 4 and make fine adjustments manually.\\n5\\nSelect [Focal Length]/[Aperture] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Press 21 to select the item and then press 34 to enter the value.\\n6\\nSelect [Note] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• You can enter any information, such as a lens name, etc.\\nUp to 26 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2 \\ncharacters.\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n7\\nPress [DISP.] to register the compensation settings.\\n• When [Color Shading Compensation] is operating, [\\n] is displayed on the \\nrecording screen.\\n• If you adjust a compensation value already registered in [PRESET], [¢] is \\ndisplayed next to [\\n].\\n• Compensation values and adjusted values that have not been registered as \\npresets are cleared when you do the following:\\n– Operating the camera on/off switch\\n– Replacing the lens\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation\\n327\\nChanging and deleting presets\\n1\\nSelect [PRESET] in [Color Shading Compensation].\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Color Shading Compensation] ¨ [PRESET]\\n2\\nPress 34 to select a registered preset, then press [DISP.].\\n3\\nPress 34 to select [Edit], [Sorting], or [Delete], and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• You can change the details in the registered preset when you select [Edit]. \\n(ÎRegistering presets: 326)\\n• You can change the display order of the presets by selecting [Sorting].\\n• The preset is deleted when you select [Delete]. You cannot delete the preset \\nthat is being used.\\n• If you execute [Compensate/Adjust] from [Edit], the compensation value and \\nadjusted value are reset and you can redo color shading compensation again.\\n• The information registered in [PRESET] is returned to the default settings when \\nsetup and custom settings are reset.\\n\\n\\nWhite Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation\\n328\\n[Diffraction Compensation]\\nThe camera raises the image resolution by correcting the blurriness \\ncaused by diffraction when the aperture is closed.\\n ¨ [\\n]/[\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Diffraction Compensation]\\nSettings: [AUTO]/[OFF]\\n• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording \\nconditions.\\n• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.\\n\\n\\n329\\nFlash\\nIf you attach the Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: \\noptional) to the hot shoe, you can record using the flash.\\nFurthermore, by attaching an external flash that supports wireless flash \\nrecording, you can wirelessly control an external flash that is in a position \\nseparate from the camera.\\n• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the Flash.\\n≥Using an External Flash (Optional): 330\\n≥Setting Flash: 333\\n≥Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 342\\n\\n\\nFlash – Using an External Flash (Optional)\\n330\\nUsing an External Flash (Optional)\\n≥Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 331\\n• Remove the lens hood to prevent vignetting.\\n• Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used:\\n– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]\\n– High Resolution mode\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n– SH burst recording\\n\\n\\nFlash – Using an External Flash (Optional)\\n331\\nRemoving the Hot Shoe Cover\\nBefore attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover.\\nRefer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to \\nattach it.\\nRemove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction \\nindicated by arrow (2) while pressing it in the direction \\nindicated by arrow (1).\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n\\n\\nFlash – Using an External Flash (Optional)\\n332\\n™ Notes on Flash Recording\\n• Do not bring any object near the flash. Heat or light may cause the object to \\ndeform or discolor.\\n• If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash.\\nWhile the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing.\\n• When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only the \\nexternal flash. It may become detached.\\n• When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with \\nreversed polarity or function for communicating with a camera.\\nIt may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.\\n• Refer to the operating instructions for the external flash for details.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n333\\nSetting Flash\\n≥[Flash Mode]: 334\\n≥[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 337\\n≥[Flash Adjust.]: 339\\n≥[Flash Synchro]: 340\\n≥[Auto Exposure Comp.]: 341\\nYou can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n334\\n[Flash Mode]\\nSets the flash mode.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Flash Mode]\\n[\\n] (Forced Flash On)/[\\n] (Forced On/Red-Eye)\\nThe flash fires every time regardless of the recording conditions.\\nThis is suitable for recording when there is backlighting or under lighting such as \\nfluorescent lighting.\\n[\\n] (Slow Sync.)/[\\n] (Slow Sync./Red-Eye)\\nWhen recording images against a nightscape, this will slow the shutter speed when \\nthe flash fires to make not only the subject but also the nightscape appear brighter.\\n• Slower shutter speeds may result in blurry images. To avoid this, we recommend \\nusing a tripod.\\n[\\n] (Forced Flash Off)\\nThe flash does not fire.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n335\\n• The flash fires twice.\\nThe interval between the first and second firings is longer when [\\n] or [\\n] \\nis set. The subject should not move until the second firing has finished.\\n• [\\n] and [\\n] cannot be used when the following are set:\\n– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]\\n– [Flash Synchro]: [2ND]\\n– [Wireless]: [ON]\\n• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the \\nexternal flash.\\n• The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.\\nThe effect, which is influenced by factors such as distance to the subject and \\nwhether the subject is looking at the camera when the preliminary flash is fired, \\nmay not be very noticeable in some cases.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n336\\n™ Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode\\nThe available flash settings depend on the recording mode.\\n(3: Available, —: Not available)\\n™ Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes\\n[\\n]/[\\n]: 1/60 of a second*1 to 1/250 of a second*2\\n[\\n]/[\\n]: 1 second to 1/200 of a second\\n*1 In [S] mode, this will be 60 seconds and in [M] mode it will be [B] (Bulb).\\n*2 The maximum setting changes to 1/200 of a second in [P]/[A] modes.\\n• The guide number decreases when the shutter speed is set to 1/250 of a second.\\nRecording \\nmode\\n[\\n]\\n[\\n]\\n[\\n]\\n[\\n]\\n[\\n]\\n[P]/[A]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[S]/[M]\\n3\\n3\\n—\\n—\\n3\\n• [\\n] and [\\n] can be set in [iA] mode. In [\\n], the flash mode switches to one \\nsuited to the recording situation.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n337\\n[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]\\nYou can select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.\\n1\\nSet the [Firing Mode].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Firing Mode]\\n[TTL]\\nSets flash output to be set automatically by the camera.\\n[MANUAL]\\nSets the flash output manually.\\n• With [TTL], you can record the images you want even when recording dark \\nscenes where the flash output tends to become greater.\\n• The flash output ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on the flash icon of the recording \\nscreen.\\n• The settings made here are enabled when some flashes from other \\nmanufacturers are attached.\\nSet on the flash when a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: \\noptional) is attached.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n338\\n2\\n(When set to [MANUAL]) Select [Manual Flash Adjust.] \\nand then press \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nPress 21 to set the flash output and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n339\\n[Flash Adjust.]\\nYou can adjust the flash output when taking pictures with the flash in TTL \\noutput mode.\\n1\\nSelect [Flash Adjust.].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Flash Adjust.]\\n2\\nPress 21 to adjust the flash output and then press \\n \\nor \\n.\\n• It can be adjusted within the range of [−3 EV] to [+3 EV] in 1/3 EV steps.\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n• For information about adjusting the flash output when recording using a wireless \\nflash (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 346)\\n• [Flash Adjust.] cannot be used when the following are set:\\n– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]\\n– [Wireless]: [ON]\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n340\\n[Flash Synchro]\\nWhen a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash, \\na trail of light may appear in front of the subject.\\nIf you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a \\ntrail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately \\nbefore the shutter closes.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Flash Synchro]\\n[1ST]\\nThis is the normal method for recording with the Flash.\\n[2ND]\\nThe light source appears behind the subject and the picture becomes dynamic.\\n• When [2ND] is set, [2nd] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording screen.\\n• When [Wireless] is set to [ON], this is fixed to [1ST].\\n• The effect may not be adequately achieved at faster shutter speeds.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Setting Flash\\n341\\n[Auto Exposure Comp.]\\nAutomatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure \\ncompensation value. (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Auto Exposure Comp.]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n\\n\\nFlash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash\\n342\\nRecording Using a Wireless Flash\\nYou can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: \\noptional) to record using a wireless flash.\\nYou can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash \\nattached to the hot shoe of the camera.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash\\n343\\n™ Placing a Wireless Flash\\nPlace the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.\\nPlacement example\\nWhen (C) is placed to erase the shadow in the background of the subject that the flash \\ngroups (A) and (B) will create\\nPlacement range\\nWhen DMW-FL360L is attached\\n(D) 5 m (16 feet)\\n(E) 7 m (23 feet)\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n50°\\n50°\\n50°\\n50°\\n30°\\n30°\\n30°\\n30°\\n(D)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n(E)\\n\\n\\nFlash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash\\n344\\n1\\nAttach an external flash to the camera. (ÎRemoving the \\nHot Shoe Cover: 331)\\n2\\nSet the wireless flashes to [RC] mode and then place \\nthem.\\n• Set the channel and group for the wireless flashes.\\n• The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the camera held \\nhorizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding environment.\\n• We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.\\n• If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure.\\nYou can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lowering \\nthe output with a diffuser or similar device. (Î[Communication Light]: 348)\\n\\n\\nFlash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash\\n345\\n3\\nEnable the wireless flash function of the camera.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wireless] ¨ [ON]\\n4\\nSet [Wireless Channel].\\n• Select the same channel as on the wireless flash side.\\n5\\nSet [Wireless Setup].\\n• Set the firing mode and flash output.\\n• When [Wireless] is set, [WL] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording \\nscreen.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash\\n346\\n™ Setting Items ([Wireless Setup])\\n• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].\\n[External \\nFlash]*1\\n[Firing Mode]\\n[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the \\nflash output.\\n[AUTO]*2: Sets the flash output on the \\nexternal flash side.\\n[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the \\nexternal flash manually.\\n[OFF]: The external flash outputs only \\ncommunication light.\\n[Flash Adjust.]\\nAdjusts the flash output of the external flash \\nmanually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].\\n[Manual Flash \\nAdjust.]\\nSets the flash output of the external flash \\nwhen [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].\\n• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full \\nflash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash\\n347\\n*1 This cannot be selected when [Wireless FP] is set.\\n*2 This cannot be set when using the Flash (DMW-FL200L: optional).\\n[A Group]/\\n[B Group]/\\n[C Group]\\n[Firing Mode]\\n[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the \\nflash output.\\n[AUTO]*1: Sets the flash output on the \\nwireless flash side.\\n[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the \\nwireless flash manually.\\n[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified \\ngroup will not fire.\\n[Flash Adjust.]\\nAdjusts the flash output of the wireless flash \\nmanually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].\\n[Manual Flash \\nAdjust.]\\nSets the flash output of the wireless flash \\nwhen [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].\\n• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full \\nflash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.\\n\\n\\nFlash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash\\n348\\n™ [Wireless FP]\\nThe external flash performs FP firing (repeated high-speed firing of the \\nflash) during wireless recording, enabling recording using the Flash even \\nat fast shutter speeds.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Wireless FP]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n™ [Communication Light]\\nSet the strength of communication light.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Communication Light]\\nSettings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]\\n\\n\\n349\\nVideo Settings\\nThis chapter describes recording modes especially for videos, such as the \\nCreative Video mode and the Slow & Quick mode, and settings available \\nwhen recording videos.\\n≥Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q): 350\\n≥Using AF (Video): 358\\n≥Video Brightness and Coloring: 363\\n≥Audio Settings: 368\\n≥External Microphones (Optional): 377\\n≥XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 382\\n≥Headphones: 385\\n≥Time Code: 389\\n≥Main Assist Functions: 393\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n350\\nRecording Modes Specifically for Video \\n(Creative Video/S&Q)\\n≥Displays Suited to Video Recording: 351\\n≥Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 352\\n≥Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 356\\n[\\n] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode) \\nare recording modes specifically for video.\\nIn the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick \\nmotion video by changing the frame rate.\\nIn the recording modes specifically for video, you can start and stop video \\nrecording with the shutter button.\\nChange the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent \\noperation sounds from being recorded.\\nSettings such as exposure and white balance can be changed \\nindependent of picture taking settings.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n351\\nDisplays Suited to Video Recording\\nIn the recording screen, the following parts switch to displays suited to \\nvideo recording.\\n(1)\\nRecording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)\\n(2)\\nRecording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)/Slow & Quick setting (ÎSlow & Quick \\nVideo: 410)\\n(3)\\nImage area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\n(4)\\nVideo recording time (ÎVideo Recording Time: 744)\\n• Examples of displays at the time of purchase.\\nFor information about the icons other than those described here (ÎMonitor/\\nViewfinder Displays: 688)\\n• Even in the [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, as with the [\\n]/[S&Q] mode, you can \\nswitch to the display suited to video recording:\\n(Î[Video-Priority Display]: 566)\\n24m59s\\n100\\nF3.5\\n60\\n±0\\nAFS\\nAFS\\nFULL\\nFULL\\nMP4\\nMP4\\n4K\\n4K\\n420/8-L\\n420/8-L 29.97p\\n29.97p\\n(4)\\n(1)\\n(3)\\n(2)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n352\\nSetting the Exposure for Recording Videos\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n] or [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet the exposure mode.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Exposure Mode] ¨ [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]\\n• You can perform the same exposure operations as the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.\\n3\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n4\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button (A) or video rec. button (B).\\n5\\nStop recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button again.\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n353\\n• For information about recording slow motion video and quick motion video \\n(ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\n• You can disable the recording start/stop operations using the shutter button:\\n(Î[Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 544)\\n• You can assign the function that starts/ends video recording only in the [\\n] \\nmode to an Fn button:\\n(Î[Video Record(Creative Video)]: 512)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n354\\n™ Operations During Video Recording\\nChange the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent \\noperation sounds from being recorded.\\n1\\nTouch [\\n] or [\\n].\\n2\\nTouch an icon.\\n Aperture value\\n Shutter speed\\n Exposure compensation\\n ISO sensitivity/Gain (dB)\\n Sound recording level adjustment\\n(Î[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 372)\\n• This setting is available only in [\\n] mode.\\n Slow & Quick setting\\n(ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\n• This setting is available only in [S&Q] mode. (The setting cannot be changed \\nduring recording)\\n• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.\\nSet [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. \\n(Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\nF\\nSS\\nISO\\nGAIN\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n355\\n3\\nDrag the slide bar to set the item.\\n[\\n]/[\\n]: Changes the setting slowly.\\n[\\n]/[\\n]: Changes the setting quickly.\\n• If you touch icon (C), the screen of Step 2 is redisplayed.\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n356\\nSeparating Settings for Recording Video and \\nPictures\\nIn default settings, settings such as exposure and white balance changed \\nin [\\n]/[S&Q] mode are also reflected in picture recording in [P]/[A]/[S]/\\n[M] modes.\\nFrom the [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] menu, you can separate settings \\nfor video recording and for picture recording.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [CreativeVideo Combined Set.]\\n[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.]/[White Balance]/[Photo Style]/[Metering Mode]/[AF \\nMode]\\n[\\n]: The recording settings are linked across recording modes.\\n[\\n]: Recording settings can be separated by the [\\n]/[S&Q] mode and the [P]/[A]/\\n[S]/[M] mode.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)\\n357\\n• The [iA] mode uses the optimum recording settings for the camera automatically, \\nso the recording settings will be independent, irrespective of the settings made \\nwith this function.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Using AF (Video)\\n358\\nUsing AF (Video)\\n≥[Continuous AF]: 358\\n≥[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 360\\n≥[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 361\\n[Continuous AF]\\nYou can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Continuous AF]\\n[MODE1]\\nThe camera continues to automatically focus only during recording.\\n[MODE2]\\nThe camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording standby and \\nduring recording.\\n• This is available in [\\n]/[S&Q] mode.\\n[OFF]\\nThe camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Using AF (Video)\\n359\\n• In the [iA] mode, the camera automatically keeps focusing during recording \\nstandby, irrespective of the [Continuous AF] setting.\\n• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound \\nmay be recorded during video recording.\\nIf the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with [Continuous \\nAF] set to [OFF].\\n• If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while to \\ncome into focus.\\n• [MODE1] switches to [MODE2] when outputting via HDMI in the [\\n]/[S&Q] \\nmode.\\n• When set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Using AF (Video)\\n360\\n[AF Custom Setting(Video)]\\nYou can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using \\n[Continuous AF].\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]\\n• A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].\\n[ON]\\nEnables the following settings.\\n[OFF]\\nDisables the following settings.\\n[SET]\\n[AF Speed]\\n[+] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.\\n[−] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.\\n[AF Sensitivity]\\n[+] side: When the distance to the subject \\nchanges significantly, the camera \\nimmediately readjusts the focus.\\n[−] side: When the distance to the subject \\nchanges significantly, the camera waits for a \\nlittle before readjusting the focus.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Using AF (Video)\\n361\\n[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]\\nWhen the AF mode is [\\n], [\\n], or [\\n], or when recording with MF, the \\nfocus point can be enlarged for display.\\n(When the AF mode is [\\n] or [\\n], the center of the screen is enlarged \\nfor display.)\\nThe focus point can also be enlarged for checking when recording videos.\\n1\\nRegister [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] to the Fn button. \\n(ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n2\\nEnlarge display of the focus point.\\n≥Press the Fn button set in Step 1.\\n• The operations on the enlarged display screen are the same as the MF Assist \\nscreen operations. (ÎOperations on the MF Assist Screen: 192)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Using AF (Video)\\n362\\n• Depending on the lens used, the video enlarged display of live view screen may \\nnot be displayed.\\n• During video recording using the following functions, the video enlarged display \\nof live view screen cannot be displayed:\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of \\n60.00p\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n• You can change the display method of the enlarged display screen:\\n(Î[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 545)\\n• You can set whether to output the enlarged display to an external device \\nconnected via HDMI:\\n(ÎOutputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: 459)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring\\n363\\nVideo Brightness and Coloring\\n≥[Luminance Level]: 363\\n≥[Master Pedestal Level]: 364\\n≥Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 365\\n≥[ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 367\\n[Luminance Level]\\nYou can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.\\nYou can set to [16-235] or [16-255], the standard for video, or to [0-255], \\nwhich covers the entire range of luminance, the same as pictures.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Luminance Level]\\nSettings: [0-255]/[16-235]/[16-255]\\n• When set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality], the setting items change to [0-1023], [64-940], \\nand [64-1023].\\n• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT], this is fixed to [0-255] \\n([0-1023]).\\nHowever, even if [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT] or Photo Style is set to \\n[V-Log] in My Photo Style, if the [Vlog_709] LUT file has been applied, this is \\nfixed to [16-255] ([64-1023]).\\n• When [Photo Style] is set to [Like2100(HLG)], this is fixed to [64-940].\\n• When [Photo Style] is set to [Like2100(HLG) Full Range], this is fixed to [0-1023].\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring\\n364\\n[Master Pedestal Level]\\nYou can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images.\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n] or [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSelect [Master Pedestal Level].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Master Pedestal Level]\\n3\\nAdjust master pedestal.\\n≥Rotate \\n, \\n or \\n.\\n• Set in the range between −15 and +15.\\n• [Master Pedestal Level] is not available when using the following function:\\n– [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style])\\n10\\n10\\n5\\n-15\\n-15\\n-5\\n-5\\n-10\\n-10\\n0\\n15\\n15\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\nMPL\\n+4\\n+4\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring\\n365\\nRecording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)\\nWhen [Photo Style] is set to [Like709], you can adjust the knee so that \\nrecording can be performed with minimal overexposure.\\n1\\nSet [Photo Style] to [Like709].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Photo Style] ¨ [Like709]\\n2\\nPress [Q].\\n3\\nSelect a knee setting.\\n≥Press 21 to select a setting item.\\n$872\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring\\n366\\n[AUTO]\\nAdjusts the compression levels of high-luminance areas automatically.\\n[MANUAL]\\nYou can set the luminance where compression starts (knee master point) and \\nthe intensity of compression (knee master slope).\\nPress 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.\\n[POINT]: Master knee point\\n[SLOPE]: Master knee slope\\n• Rotate \\n to adjust the knee master point, and \\n to adjust the knee \\nmaster slope.\\n• Values within the following ranges can be set:\\n– Master knee point: 80.0 to 107.0\\n– Master knee slope: 0 to 99\\n[Off]\\n4\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press \\n or \\n.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring\\n367\\n[ISO Sensitivity (video)]\\nSets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is \\nset to [AUTO].\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n] or [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet [ISO Sensitivity (video)].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [ISO Sensitivity (video)]\\n™ Setting Items ([ISO Sensitivity (video)])\\n[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]\\nSets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].\\n• Set in the range between [100] and [25600].\\n[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]\\nSets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].\\n• Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and [51200].\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n368\\nAudio Settings\\n≥[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 369\\n≥[Mute Sound Input]: 370\\n≥[Sound Rec Gain Level]: 371\\n≥[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 372\\n≥[Sound Rec Quality]: 373\\n≥[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 374\\n≥[Wind Noise Canceller]: 375\\n≥[Audio Information]: 376\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n369\\n[Sound Rec Level Disp.]\\nThe sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Level Disp.]\\n[ON]\\nSound recording level displayed on the recording screen.\\n[OFF]\\n—\\n[SET]\\nSets the display size of sound recording level.\\n[Displaying \\nSize]\\n[LARGE]/[SMALL]\\n• When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed \\nto [ON].\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n370\\n[Mute Sound Input]\\nThis mutes audio input.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Mute Sound Input]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n371\\n[Sound Rec Gain Level]\\nThis switches the gain of audio input.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Gain Level]\\n[STANDARD]\\nThis is the standard input gain setting. (0 dB)\\n[LOW]\\nAudio input is reduced for recording in environments with loud noises. (−12 dB)\\n• When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], the sound recording gain of CH3/CH4 can be \\nadjusted. (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n• [Sound Rec Gain Level] is not available when [Mic Socket] is set to [\\n] and \\nan external audio device is connected.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n372\\n[Sound Rec Level Adj.]\\nManually adjust the sound recording level.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.]\\n• Press 21 to adjust the sound recording level and then press \\n or \\n.\\nSettings: [MUTE]/[−18dB] to [+12dB]\\n• You can adjust by 1 dB increments.\\n• This can also be set during video recording.\\n• Displayed dB values are approximate.\\n• When set to [MUTE], [\\n] is displayed in the recording screen.\\n• When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], the sound recording level of CH3/CH4 can \\nbe adjusted. (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n373\\n[Sound Rec Quality]\\nSound quality for video can be set when the [Rec. File Format] is [MOV].\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Quality]\\n[96kHz/24bit]\\nAudio is recorded using 96kHz/24bit high resolution audio.\\n• This can be set when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), Stereo \\nShotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: \\noptional) is connected. (ÎXLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 382, External \\nMicrophones (Optional): 377)\\n[48kHz/24bit]\\nAudio is recorded using 48kHz/24bit high quality audio.\\n• The setting is fixed to [48kHz/16bit] in the following case:\\n– When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MP4]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n374\\n[Sound Rec Level Limiter]\\nThe sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize sound \\ndistortion (crackling noise).\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Sound Rec Level Limiter]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n375\\n[Wind Noise Canceller]\\nThis reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while \\nmaintaining sound quality.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Wind Noise Canceller]\\n[HIGH]\\nThis effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the low-pitched sound when a \\nstrong wind is detected.\\n[STANDARD]\\nThis reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering out only wind noise.\\n[OFF]\\nTurns the function off.\\n• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.\\n• This function works only with the built-in microphone.\\nWhen an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed. \\n(ÎReduction of Wind Noise: 381)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Audio Settings\\n376\\n[Audio Information]\\nThis screen enables you to view audio settings and the status of recording \\nall at once.\\nYou can also touch the screen to change the settings.\\n• The operations on the audio information display screen are the same as the control \\npanel operations. (ÎControl Panel: 91)\\n1\\nRegister [Audio Information] to the Fn button. (ÎFn \\nButtons: 503)\\n2\\nDisplay the audio information.\\n≥Press the Fn button set in Step 1.\\n• You can also display it by touching the audio display area on the control panel \\n(Creative Video mode/Slow & Quick mode).\\n• For information about the screen (ÎAudio Information Display: 702)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – External Microphones (Optional)\\n377\\nExternal Microphones (Optional)\\n≥Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 380\\n≥Reduction of Wind Noise: 381\\nWith a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or Stereo \\nMicrophone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record higher-quality high \\nresolution audio compared to the built-in microphone.\\n• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.\\n1\\nSet the [Mic Socket] that suits the device to be \\nconnected.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Mic Socket]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – External Microphones (Optional)\\n378\\n ([Mic Input (Plug-in Power)])\\nWhen connecting an external microphone that requires a power supply from the \\ncamera [MIC] socket.\\n ([Mic Input])\\nWhen connecting an external microphone that does not require a power supply \\nfrom the camera [MIC] socket.\\n ([Line Input])\\nWhen connecting an external audio device for line output.\\n• The setting will be fixed to [\\n] when a Stereo Shotgun Microphone \\n(DMW-MS2: optional) is connected.\\n• When using [\\n], if you connect an external microphone that does not \\nrequire power supply, the connected external microphone may malfunction.\\nCheck the device before connecting.\\n2\\nSet the camera on/off switch to [OFF].\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – External Microphones (Optional)\\n379\\n3\\nConnect the external microphone to the camera and \\nthen turn on the camera.\\n• If mounting the external microphone on the camera hot shoe (A), remove the \\nhot shoe cover. (ÎRemoving the Hot Shoe Cover: 331)\\n4\\nMake settings for the sound quality of the audio to be \\nrecorded in [Sound Rec Quality] (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: \\n373).\\n• Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or \\nmore.\\n• While the external microphone is connected, [\\n] is displayed on the screen.\\n• When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.] \\nautomatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.\\n• When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by holding \\nthe external microphone. It may become detached.\\n• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.\\n• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – External Microphones (Optional)\\n380\\nSetting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: \\nOptional)\\nWhen using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you \\ncan set the microphone sound pickup range.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Special Mic.]\\n[STEREO]\\nPicks up sound over a wide area.\\n[SHOTGUN]\\nHelps prevent picking up background noise, and records sound from a specific \\ndirection.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – External Microphones (Optional)\\n381\\nReduction of Wind Noise\\nThis reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Wind Cut]\\nSettings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]\\n• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)\\n382\\nXLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)\\n≥[4ch Mic Input]: 384\\nBy attaching an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), you can \\nuse a commercially available XLR microphone to enable the recording of \\nsuperior-quality high-res audio and 4-channel audio. (Î[4ch Mic Input]: \\n384)\\n(A) Hot shoe\\n(B) Commercially available XLR microphone\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn off the camera, and remove the hot shoe cover. (ÎRemoving the Hot Shoe \\nCover: 331)\\n(B)\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)\\n383\\n1\\nAttach the XLR Microphone Adaptor to the hot shoe, \\nand then turn on the camera.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]\\n• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] \\nautomatically turns [ON].\\n[ON]\\nRecords audio using the XLR microphone.\\n[OFF]\\nRecords audio using the built-in microphone of the camera.\\n2\\nMake settings for the sound quality of the audio to be \\nrecorded in [Sound Rec Quality] (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: \\n373).\\n• While an XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [\\n] is displayed on the screen.\\n• When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to [ON] and [4ch Mic Input] is [OFF], the \\nfollowing settings are fixed:\\n– [Sound Rec Level Limiter]: [OFF]\\n– [Wind Noise Canceller]: [OFF]\\n– [Sound Output]: [REC SOUND]\\n• When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to [ON] and [4ch Mic Input] is [OFF], \\n[Sound Rec Gain Level] and [Sound Rec Level Adj.] are not available.\\n• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [Sound Rec Level Disp.] \\nautomatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.\\n• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, do not carry the camera by \\nholding the XLR Microphone Adaptor. It may become detached.\\n• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.\\n• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the XLR Microphone Adaptor.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)\\n384\\n[4ch Mic Input]\\nTo record 4-channel audio, use a commercially available XLR microphone \\nconnected to an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) together \\nwith the built-in microphone.\\nBy combining a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or a \\nStereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) instead of using the built-in \\nmicrophone, it is also possible to record 4-channel 96 kHz/24-bit \\nhigh-resolution audio. (ÎExternal Microphones (Optional): 377)\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [4ch Mic Input]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], it is displayed as [4ch] on the screen.\\n• The audio from the XLR microphone is recorded to CH1/CH2, and the audio from \\nthe built-in microphone or external microphone is recorded to CH3/CH4.\\n• 4-channel audio is output to external devices connected via HDMI when [4ch Mic \\nInput] is set to [ON].\\n• This cannot be set when [Rec. File Format] is [MP4].\\n• This cannot be set when [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is [OFF].\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Headphones\\n385\\nHeadphones\\n≥[Sound Monitoring Channel]: 387\\nYou can record videos while monitoring their sound by connecting \\ncommercially available headphones to the camera.\\n• Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.\\n• When headphones are connected, beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter \\nsounds are muted.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Headphones\\n386\\n™ Switching the Sound Output Method\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Sound Output]\\n[REALTIME]\\nAudio without time lag.\\nIt may differ from the sound recorded in videos.\\n[REC SOUND]\\nAudio to be recorded in videos.\\nOutput sound may be delayed from actual sound.\\n™ Adjusting the Headphone Volume\\nConnect the headphones and rotate \\n.\\n: Reduces the volume.\\n: Increases the volume.\\nTo adjust the volume using the menu:\\n1\\nSelect [Headphone Volume].\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Headphone Volume]\\n2\\nPress 34 to adjust the headphone volume and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• It can be adjusted in a range of [0] to [LEVEL15].\\n• The setting is fixed to [REC SOUND] in the following case:\\n– When using an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional)\\n(When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF])\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Headphones\\n387\\n[Sound Monitoring Channel]\\nYou can set the audio channel output to the headphones when recording.\\nFor information about the audio channel settings during playback \\n(Î[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: 584)\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Sound Monitoring Channel]\\n[CH1/CH2]\\nOutputs CH1 (L)/CH2 (R).\\n[CH3/CH4]\\nOutputs CH3 (L)/CH4 (R).\\n[CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4]\\nOutputs CH1+CH2 (L)/CH3+CH4 (R).\\n[CH1]\\nOutputs CH1.\\n[CH2]\\nOutputs CH2.\\n[CH3]\\nOutputs CH3.\\n[CH4]\\nOutputs CH4.\\n[CH1+CH2]\\nOutputs a mix of CH1 and CH2.\\n[CH3+CH4]\\nOutputs a mix of CH3 and CH4.\\n[CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4]\\nOutputs a mix of CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Headphones\\n388\\n• This can also be set during video recording.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Time Code\\n389\\nTime Code\\n≥Setting the Time Code: 390\\nWhen [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV], the time code is automatically \\nrecorded during video recording. If [MP4], the time code is not recorded.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Time Code\\n390\\nSetting the Time Code\\nSets the recording, display, and output of the time code.\\n1\\nSet [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV]\\n2\\nSelect [Time Code].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Time Code]\\n[Time Code Display]\\nDisplays the time code on the recording screen/playback screen.\\n• During video recording using the following function, the time code count \\ncannot be displayed on the recording screen:\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate \\nof 60.00p\\n• While you are using the following functions, the time code count cannot be \\ndisplayed on the recording screen:\\n– HDMI output\\n– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone\\n– Tethered recording\\n[Count Up]\\n[REC RUN]: Counts the time code only when recording videos.\\n[FREE RUN]: Counts the time code also when video recording is stopped and \\nwhen the camera is turned off.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Count Up] is fixed to [REC RUN]:\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Time Code\\n391\\n[Time Code Value]\\n[Reset]: Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second: frame)\\n[Manual Input]: Manually input hour, minute, second and frame.\\n[Current Time]: Sets hour, minute and second to current time and sets frame to \\n00.\\n[Time Code Mode]\\n[DF]: Drop Frame. The camera modifies the difference between recorded time \\nand time code.\\n• Seconds and frames are separated by “.”. (Example: 00:00:00.00)\\n[NDF]: Non-Drop Frame. Records the time code without drop frame.\\n• Seconds and frames are separated by “:”. (Example: 00:00:00:00)\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Time Code Mode] is fixed to \\n[NDF]:\\n– [50.00Hz (PAL)]/[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] ([Synchro Scan])\\n– 47.95p or 23.98p [Rec Quality]\\n[HDMI Time Code Output]\\nTime code information is added to images output via HDMI when recording with \\nthe [\\n]/[S&Q] mode.\\n• The time code can also be output via HDMI by setting the mode dial to \\n[\\n]/[S&Q] during playback. In the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, set [Output \\nResolution(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] to [AUTO]. (Î[Output \\nResolution(Playback)]: 586)\\n• The device screen may go dark depending on the connected device.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Time Code\\n392\\n• When using the following functions, updating of the information display on the \\nscreen may get slower due to the load being placed on the internal processing in \\nthe camera, but this is not a malfunction and there will be no change to the \\nimages recorded:\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of \\n60.00p\\n– HDMI output\\n– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone\\n– Tethered recording\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n393\\nMain Assist Functions\\n≥[Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 394\\n≥[SS/Gain Operation]: 395\\n≥[WFM/Vector Scope]: 397\\n≥[Luminance Spot Meter]: 401\\n≥[Zebra Pattern]: 403\\n≥[Frame Marker]: 405\\n≥Color Bars/Test Tone: 407\\n• The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu has display assist functions \\nsuch as the center marker and safety zone marker:\\n(Î[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 563)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n394\\n[Flicker Decrease (Video)]\\nThe shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the video.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Flicker Decrease (Video)]\\n[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]\\n[OFF]\\n• This can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [ON]. (Î[Auto Exposure in \\nP/A/S/M]: 538)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n395\\n[SS/Gain Operation]\\nYou can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity) \\nvalues.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [SS/Gain Operation]\\n[SEC/ISO]\\nDisplays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in ISO.\\n[ANGLE/ISO]\\nDisplays the shutter speed in degrees and the gain in ISO.\\n• The angle can be set in a range between 11° and 358°.\\n(when [Synchro Scan] is set to [OFF])\\n[SEC/dB]\\nDisplays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in dB.\\n• 0 dB corresponds to either of the following ISO sensitivity values.\\n– When [Dual Native Gain Setting] is set to [AUTO] or [LOW]: [100]\\n– When [Dual Native Gain Setting] is set to [HIGH]: [640]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n396\\n™ Setting Range for Gain (Sensitivity)\\nWhen [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], gain (sensitivity) can be set \\nin the following ranges.\\n• When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], menu names change as shown \\nbelow:\\n– [Dual Native ISO Setting] ¨ [Dual Native Gain Setting]\\n– [ISO Sensitivity (video)] ¨ [Gain Setting]\\n– [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] ¨ [Auto Gain Lower Limit Setting]\\n– [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] ¨ [Auto Gain Upper Limit Setting]\\n– [Extended ISO] ¨ [Extended Gain Setting]\\n– [ISO Displayed Setting] ¨ [Gain Displayed Setting]\\n[Dual Native Gain \\nSetting]\\n[Extended Gain \\nSetting]\\nSetting Range for Gain \\n(Sensitivity)\\n[AUTO]\\n[OFF]\\n[AUTO], [0dB] to [+54dB]\\n[ON]\\n[AUTO], [−6dB] to [+66dB]\\n[LOW]\\n[OFF]\\n[AUTO], [0dB] to [+18dB]\\n[ON]\\n[AUTO], [−6dB] to [+18dB]\\n[HIGH]\\n[OFF]\\n[AUTO], [0dB] to [+38dB]\\n[ON]\\n[AUTO], [−6dB] to [+50dB]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n397\\n[WFM/Vector Scope]\\nThis displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording \\nscreen. You can change the size of the waveform display.\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n] or [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet [WFM/Vector Scope].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [WFM/Vector Scope]\\n[WAVE]\\nDisplays a waveform.\\n[VECTOR]\\nDisplays the vector scope.\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n398\\n3\\nSelect the position to display.\\n≥Press 3421 to select and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.\\n• You can also move using touch operations.\\n• You can rotate \\n to change the size of the waveform.\\n• To return the waveform or vector scope position back to the center, press \\n[DISP.]. With waveform, pressing [DISP.] once again returns the size to the \\ndefault setting.\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n399\\n™ Screen Displays\\nWaveform\\n• The waveform displayed on the camera indicates the luminance as values based on \\nthe conversions below:\\n0 % (IRE*): Luminance value 16 (8 bit)\\n100 % (IRE*): Luminance value 235 (8 bit)\\n*\\nIRE: Institute of Radio Engineers\\n(A) 109 % (IRE) (Dotted line)\\n(B) 100 % (IRE)\\n(C) 50 % (IRE)\\n(D) 0 % (IRE)\\n(E) −4 % (IRE) (Dotted line)\\n(F) The range between 0 % and 100 % shows dotted lines at intervals of 10 %.\\nDisplay example)\\n(A)\\n(F)\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n400\\nVector scope\\n(G) R (Red)\\n(H) YL (Yellow)\\n(I) G (Green)\\n(J) MG (Magenta)\\n(K) B (Blue)\\n(L) CY (Cyan)\\nDisplay example)\\n• When you assign the function to an Fn button, you can switch between \\ndisplaying and hiding these during recording of video. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n• You can also change the position by dragging on the recording screen.\\n• The waveform and vector scope are not output through HDMI.\\n(J)\\n(K)\\n(L)\\n(G)\\n(H)\\n(I)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n401\\n[Luminance Spot Meter]\\nSpecify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small \\narea.\\n1\\nSet [Luminance Spot Meter].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Luminance Spot Meter] ¨ [ON]\\n2\\nSelect the position where you want to measure the \\nluminance.\\n≥Press 3421 to select and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.\\n• You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording \\nscreen.\\n• To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].\\n(M) Luminance value\\n65%\\n65%\\n65%\\n(M)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n402\\n™ Measurement Range\\nMeasuring is possible in the range −7 % to 109 % (IRE).\\n• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT], this can be measured with \\n“Stop” units.\\n(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n403\\n[Zebra Pattern]\\nParts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.\\nYou can also set the base value and the breadth of the range so that the \\nstripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of brightness you \\nspecify.\\n[ZEBRA1]\\n[ZEBRA2]\\n[ZEBRA1+2]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n404\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Zebra Pattern]\\n™ When [BASE/RANGE] Was Selected with [SET]\\nCentered on the brightness set with [Base Level], parts with the brightness \\nin the range set in [Range] are displayed with the stripes.\\n≥[Base Level] can be set in the range between 0 % and 109 % (IRE).\\n≥[Range] can be set in the range between ±1 % and ±10 % (IRE).\\n• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT], these are set at “Stop” units.\\n(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))\\n[ZEBRA1]\\nParts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with \\n[ZEBRA1] stripes.\\n[ZEBRA2]\\nParts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with \\n[ZEBRA2] stripes.\\n[ZEBRA1+2]\\nBoth [ZEBRA1] and [ZEBRA2] are displayed.\\n[OFF]\\n—\\n[SET]\\nSets the base brightness.\\n[Zebra 1]\\n[50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]\\n[Zebra 2]\\n[50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]\\n• [ZEBRA1+2] cannot be selected while you are setting [BASE/RANGE].\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n405\\n[Frame Marker]\\nA frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen. This \\nallows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be achieved \\nwith trimming (cropping) in post-processing.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Frame Marker]\\n[ON]\\nDisplays the Video Frame Marker on the recording screen.\\n[OFF]\\n—\\n[SET]\\n[Frame Aspect]\\nSets the aspect ratio of the Video Frame \\nMarker.\\n[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/\\n[4:3]/[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/[9:16]/[CUSTOM]\\n[Frame Color]\\nSets the color of the Video Frame Marker.\\n[Frame Mask]\\nSets the opacity of the outside of the Video \\nFrame Marker.\\n[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n406\\n™ When [CUSTOM] Is Selected with [Frame Aspect] in [SET]\\nYou can freely set the aspect ratio of the frame.\\n≥Press 3421 to move the center position.\\n• Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.\\n• You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording screen.\\n≥Set the height of the frame with [\\n], and the width with [\\n].\\n• You can also pinch out/pinch in the frame to change the size.\\n(N) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)\\n(O) Height and width of the frame\\n• The aspect ratio can be set in the range between 1 % to 100 %.\\n• The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.\\nThe second press returns the frame size to the default.\\nX,Y=(±0,±0)\\n13%\\n13%\\n(N)\\n(O)\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n407\\nColor Bars/Test Tone\\nThe color bars are displayed on the recording screen.\\nA test tone is output while the color bars are being displayed.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Color Bars]\\nSettings: [SMPTE]/[EBU]/[ARIB]\\n• To end the display, press \\n.\\n[SMPTE]\\n[EBU]\\n[ARIB]\\n\\n\\nVideo Settings – Main Assist Functions\\n408\\n™ Adjusting the Test Tone\\nThere are 4 levels ([−12dB], [−18dB], [−20dB], and [MUTE]) of test tone to \\nselect.\\nRotate \\n, \\n or \\n to select the test tone level.\\n• The color bars and test tone will be recorded on the video if video recording is \\nstarted while the color bars are being displayed.\\n• The brightness and coloring that appear on the camera’s monitor or viewfinder \\nmay differ from those that appear on another device such as an external monitor.\\n\\n\\n409\\nSpecial Video Recording\\nThis chapter describes advanced video recording applications such as \\nslow motion/quick motion video and Log recording.\\n≥Slow & Quick Video: 410\\n≥High Frame Rate Video: 417\\n≥[Focus Transition]: 419\\n≥[Live Cropping]: 424\\n≥Log Recording: 428\\n≥HLG Videos: 433\\n≥Anamorphic Recording: 437\\n≥[Synchro Scan]: 441\\n≥[Loop Recording (video)]: 443\\n≥[Segmented File Recording]: 445\\n≥List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: \\n446\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video\\n410\\nSlow & Quick Video\\nIn the [S&Q] mode, the camera records at a different frame rate to the \\nrecording frame rate, enabling the creation of slow motion video and quick \\nmotion video in the MOV format.\\nSlow Motion Video (Overcrank Recording)\\nSet a number of frames that is higher than the recording frame rate of the [Rec \\nQuality].\\nFor example: When recording at 60 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed \\nis halved.\\nQuick Motion Video (Undercrank Recording)\\nSet a number of frames that is lower than the recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].\\nFor example: When recording at 15 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed \\nis doubled.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video\\n411\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n• [Rec. File Format] changes to [MOV].\\n2\\nSelect a recording quality with which you can record \\nSlow & Quick video.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec Quality]\\n• Items available for recording with Slow & Quick video are indicated as [S&Q \\navailable].\\n• Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video (Î List of \\nRecording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 446)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video\\n412\\n3\\nSet the frame rate.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Slow & Quick Setting]\\n≥Rotate \\n, \\n or \\n to select a numeric value, then press \\n \\nor \\n.\\n• You can set a frame rate in the following ranges:\\n– C4K/4K video: 1 fps to 60 fps\\n– FHD video: 1 fps to 180 fps\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video\\n413\\n™ Frame Rate Combinations and Playback Speeds\\nFrame \\nrate\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\nC4K/29.97p\\n4K/29.97p\\nC4K/23.98p\\n4K/23.98p\\nFHD/59.94p\\nFHD/29.97p\\nFHD/23.98p\\n1 fps\\n30× Quick\\n24× Quick\\n60× Quick\\n30× Quick\\n24× Quick\\n2 fps\\n15× Quick\\n12× Quick\\n30× Quick\\n15× Quick\\n12× Quick\\n5 fps\\n6× Quick\\n4.8× Quick\\n12× Quick\\n6× Quick\\n4.8× Quick\\n10 fps\\n3× Quick\\n2.4× Quick\\n6× Quick\\n3× Quick\\n2.4× Quick\\n15 fps\\n2× Quick\\n1.6× Quick\\n4× Quick\\n2× Quick\\n1.6× Quick\\n30 fps\\n1× Normal\\n1.25× Slow\\n2× Quick\\n1× Normal\\n1.25× Slow\\n60 fps\\n2× Slow\\n2.5× Slow\\n1× Normal\\n2× Slow\\n2.5× Slow\\n100 fps\\n1.67× Slow\\n3.33× Slow\\n4.17× Slow\\n120 fps\\n2× Slow\\n4× Slow\\n5× Slow\\n150 fps\\n2.5× Slow\\n5× Slow\\n6.25× Slow\\n180 fps\\n3× Slow\\n6× Slow\\n7.5× Slow\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video\\n414\\nFrame \\nrate\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\nC4K/25.00p\\n4K/25.00p\\nFHD/50.00p\\nFHD/25.00p\\n1 fps\\n25× Quick\\n50× Quick\\n25× Quick\\n2 fps\\n12.5× Quick\\n25× Quick\\n12.5× Quick\\n5 fps\\n5× Quick\\n10× Quick\\n5× Quick\\n10 fps\\n2.5× Quick\\n5× Quick\\n2.5× Quick\\n15 fps\\n1.67× Quick\\n3.33× Quick\\n1.67× Quick\\n30 fps\\n1.2× Slow\\n1.67× Quick\\n1.2× Slow\\n60 fps\\n2.4× Slow\\n1.2× Slow\\n2.4× Slow\\n100 fps\\n2× Slow\\n4× Slow\\n120 fps\\n2.4× Slow\\n4.8× Slow\\n150 fps\\n3× Slow\\n6× Slow\\n180 fps\\n3.6× Slow\\n7.2× Slow\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video\\n415\\nFrame \\nrate\\n[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]\\nC4K/24.00p\\n4K/24.00p\\nFHD/24.00p\\n1 fps\\n24× Quick\\n24× Quick\\n2 fps\\n12× Quick\\n12× Quick\\n5 fps\\n4.8× Quick\\n4.8× Quick\\n10 fps\\n2.4× Quick\\n2.4× Quick\\n15 fps\\n1.6× Quick\\n1.6× Quick\\n30 fps\\n1.25× Slow\\n1.25× Slow\\n60 fps\\n2.5× Slow\\n2.5× Slow\\n100 fps\\n4.17× Slow\\n120 fps\\n5× Slow\\n150 fps\\n6.25× Slow\\n180 fps\\n7.5× Slow\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video\\n416\\n™ Shutter Speeds When Recording Slow & Quick Video\\nWhen recording Slow & Quick video, the minimum shutter speed changes \\ndepending on the frame rate of [Slow & Quick Setting].\\nFrame rate\\nMinimum shutter speed\\n[AFS]/[AFC]\\n[MF]\\n1 fps\\n1/30 of a second\\n1 second\\n2 fps\\n1/2 of a second\\n5 fps\\n1/5 of a second\\n10 fps\\n1/10 of a second\\n15 fps\\n1/15 of a second\\n30 fps\\n1/30 of a second\\n60 fps\\n1/60 of a second\\n1/60 of a second\\n100 fps\\n1/100 of a second\\n1/100 of a second\\n120 fps\\n1/125 of a second\\n1/125 of a second\\n150 fps\\n1/160 of a second\\n180 fps\\n1/200 of a second\\n• Audio will not be recorded during Slow & Quick recording.\\n• When the resolution is set to C4K/4K [Rec Quality], [Image Area of Video] is fixed \\nto [APS-C].\\n• When the resolution is set to FHD [Rec Quality], [PIXEL/PIXEL] in [Image Area of \\nVideo] cannot be selected.\\n• The mode switches to MF when you set to a frame rate of 150 fps or more.\\n(The camera automatically focuses when [AF ON] is pressed, but only before \\nstarting recording.)\\n• The angle of view is reduced when you set the frame rate to 180 fps.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video\\n417\\nHigh Frame Rate Video\\n[MOV] video with high frame rates can be recorded to cards. By converting \\nit with the compatible software, it is possible to produce slow motion video.\\nAudio recording, not possible in the Slow & Quick mode, also becomes \\npossible.\\n1\\nSet [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV]\\n2\\nSelect a recording quality for high frame rate video.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec Quality]\\n• The following recording qualities are available in [\\n] mode:\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate \\nof 60.00p\\n• By filtering the [Rec Quality] by the frame rate, you can display just those \\nrecording qualities that match the frame rate conditions. (Î[Filtering]: 141)\\n• Recording Qualities for High Frame Rate Video (ÎList of Recording Qualities \\nThat Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 446)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video\\n418\\n™ Shutter Speeds When Recording High Frame Rate Video\\nWhen recording high frame rate video, the minimum shutter speed \\nchanges depending on the recording frame rate of the video.\\n*\\nCan be set in [M] mode ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is set to [OFF]) or [\\n] mode \\n([Exposure Mode] is set to [M])\\nRecording frame rate of the video\\nMinimum shutter speed\\n[AFS]/[AFC]\\n[MF]\\n47.95p\\n1/30 of a second\\n1/2 of a second*\\n48.00p\\n1/25 of a second\\n100.00p\\n1/100 of a second\\n119.88p\\n1/125 of a second\\n• When outputting via HDMI, the resolution and frame rate may be \\ndown-converted for output. \\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Focus Transition]\\n419\\n[Focus Transition]\\nSmoothly transitions the focus position from the current position to a \\nposition registered in advance.\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSelect [Focus Transition].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Focus Transition]\\n• If the [Please set the focus position.] message is displayed, press either \\n \\nor \\n.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Focus Transition]\\n420\\n3\\nSet focus positions.\\n≥Check the focus using the same procedure as MF (ÎRecord \\nUsing MF: 190), and then press [WB], [ISO], and [\\n] to set focus \\npositions.\\n≥You can also touch [POS1] to [POS3] to set focus positions.\\n4\\nRegister the focus positions.\\n≥Press \\n or \\n to register the focus positions.\\n5\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the video rec. button.\\n• The advanced setting screen is displayed when you press [DISP.] before \\nrecording. (ÎSetting Items ([Focus Transition]): 422)\\n• If you have enabled [Focus Transition Rec], Focus Transition will start when \\nyou start recording a video.\\n∞10\\n(m)\\n5\\n3\\n2\\n1.5\\n1\\n0.5 0.1\\n1\\n2\\n3\\nPOS1\\nPOS2\\nPOS3\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Focus Transition]\\n421\\n6\\nStart Focus Transition.\\n≥Press 21 to select [1], [2], or [3], and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• When [Focus Transition Wait] is set, Focus Transition starts after the set time \\nhas elapsed.\\n(A) Current focus position\\n(B) Registered focus position\\n7\\nEnd Focus Transition.\\n≥Press [Q].\\n8\\nStop recording.\\n≥Press the video rec. button once again.\\n∞10\\n(m)\\n5\\n3\\n2\\n1.5\\n1\\n0.5 0.1 1 2 3\\n1\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Focus Transition]\\n422\\n™ Setting Items ([Focus Transition])\\n[Focus Position Setting]\\nRegisters focus positions.\\n[Focus Transition Speed]\\nSets the moving speed of focus.\\n• Moving speed: [SH] (fast) to [SL] (slow)\\n[Focus Transition Rec]\\nStarts Focus Transition when recording starts.\\n• Select the position registered with [Focus Position Setting].\\n[Focus Transition Wait]\\nSets the wait time before the start of Focus Transition.\\n• The recording screen is displayed when you press [\\n].\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Focus Transition]\\n423\\n• Maintain the same distance to the subject after setting focus positions.\\n• The moving speed of focus varies depending on the lens being used.\\n• The moving speed of focus slows as it approaches the closest focusing distance \\nof the lens or infinity.\\n• While using [Focus Transition], it is not possible to focus on anything other than \\none of the registered focus positions.\\n• Any of the operations below will clear the focus position settings.\\n– Operating the camera on/off switch\\n– Zoom operation\\n– Switching the focus mode\\n– Switching the recording mode\\n– Replacing the lens\\n• When the following function is being used, [Focus Transition] is not available:\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n• [Focus Transition] cannot be used when using an interchangeable lens that does \\nnot support the focus mode [AFC].\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Live Cropping]\\n424\\n[Live Cropping]\\nBy cropping a part of the image from the image displayed in the live view, it \\nis possible to record 4K/FHD video that incorporates panning and zooming \\nwith the camera staying in a fixed position.\\nPan\\nZoom in\\n• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Live Cropping]\\n425\\n1\\nSet the mode dial to [\\n].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSelect a recording quality with which you can record \\n[Live Cropping] video.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec Quality]\\n• A recording quality with which you can record [Live Cropping] video (Î List of \\nRecording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 446)\\n3\\nSet the time for panning or zooming.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Live Cropping] ¨ [40SEC]/[20SEC]\\n• If you have selected a recording quality where Live Cropping recording is not \\navailable, the camera switches to a recording quality where recording is \\npossible.\\n4\\nSet the cropping start frame.\\n≥Select the range to be cropped and press \\n or \\n.\\n(A) Cropping start frame\\nュリヴヱハ5HVHW\\n6HW\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Live Cropping]\\n426\\n5\\nSet the cropping end frame.\\n≥Select the range to be cropped and press \\n or \\n.\\n• To redo the settings for the position and size of the start frame and the end \\nframe, press 2.\\n(B) Cropping end frame\\n6\\nStart Live Cropping recording.\\n≥Press the video rec. button.\\n• When the set operating time has elapsed, recording automatically ends.\\nTo end recording midway, press the video rec. button again.\\n(C) Elapsed recording time\\n(D) Set operating time\\nュリヴヱハ5HVHW\\n6HW\\n(B)\\n7s\\n7s\\n7s\\n20s\\n20s\\n20s\\n(C)\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Live Cropping]\\n427\\n™ Operations for Setting the Cropping Frame\\nButton \\noperation\\nTouch \\noperation\\nDescription of operation\\n3421\\nTouch\\nMoves the frame.\\n / \\nPinch out/\\npinch in\\nEnlarges/reduces the frame in small steps.\\nEnlarges/reduces the frame.\\n[DISP.]\\n[Reset]\\nStart frame: Returns the frame position and size \\nto the default settings.\\nEnd frame: Cancels the settings for the position \\nand size of the frame.\\n / \\n[Set]\\nConfirms the frame position and size.\\n• The AF mode switches to [\\n] and automatic detection (face/eye detection) \\nstarts working. (You cannot specify the face or eye to bring into focus)\\n• Brightness measurements and focusing are performed within the cropping frame. \\nTo lock the focus point, set [Continuous AF] to [OFF], or set the focus mode to \\n[MF].\\n• [Metering Mode] will be [\\n] (multi-metering).\\n• [Image Area of Video] is fixed to [FULL]. However, the setting is fixed to [APS-C] \\nin the following case:\\n– When a 59.94p or 50.00p [Rec Quality] is set\\n• A 4K [Rec Quality] cannot be set when using an APS-C lens.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Log Recording\\n428\\nLog Recording\\n≥[V-Log View Assist]: 432\\nSetting [Photo Style] to [V-Log] enables Log recording.\\nImages finished with rich gradation can be created through post-production \\nprocessing.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Photo Style] ¨ Select [V-Log]\\n• Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).\\nYou can download LUT file from the following support site:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html\\n(English only)\\n9\\u0010/RJ\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Log Recording\\n429\\n™ ISO Sensitivity When [V-Log] Is Set\\nThe lower limit of available ISO sensitivity is [640] (when [Extended ISO] is \\nset: [320]), and the upper limit is [51200].\\n• The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in \\n[Dual Native ISO Setting].\\n• Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Log Recording\\n430\\n™ Exposure When [V-Log] Is Set\\nThe [V-Log] curve characteristics comply with “V-Log/V-Gamut \\nREFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”. When set to [V-Log], the standard \\nexposure when gray with a reflectance ratio of 18 % is imaged is IRE 42 %.\\n• When luminance is to be displayed by “Stop” units, this camera calculates IRE 42 % \\nto “0 Stop”.\\nWhen [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]\\nReflectance ratio \\n(%)\\nIRE (%)\\nStop\\n10 bit code \\nvalue\\n12 bit code \\nvalue\\n0\\n7.3\\n—\\n128\\n512\\n(1)\\n18\\n42\\n0.0\\n433\\n1732\\n(2)\\n90\\n61\\n2.3\\n602\\n2408\\n-8\\n-8\\n-7\\n-7\\n-6\\n-6\\n-5\\n-5\\n-4\\n-4\\n-3\\n-3\\n-2\\n-2\\n-1\\n-1\\n0\\n0\\n1\\n1\\n2\\n2\\n3\\n3\\n4\\n4\\n5\\n5\\n6\\n6\\n7\\n7\\n8\\n8\\n（Stop）\\n（Stop）\\n（10 bit code value）\\n（10 bit code value）\\n0\\n64\\n64\\n128\\n128\\n192\\n192\\n256\\n256\\n320\\n320\\n384\\n384\\n448\\n448\\n512\\n512\\n576\\n576\\n640\\n640\\n704\\n704\\n768\\n768\\n832\\n832\\n896\\n896\\n960\\n960\\n1024\\n1024\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Log Recording\\n431\\n• Luminance can be checked by “Stop” units:\\n(Î[Luminance Spot Meter]: 401, [Zebra Pattern]: 403)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Log Recording\\n432\\n[V-Log View Assist]\\nWhen [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], the recording screen and images \\noutput via HDMI will darken. Using [V-Log View Assist] means you can \\nshow images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder and output \\nthem via HDMI. \\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [V-Log View Assist]\\n[LUT Select]\\nSelects the LUT file to apply from a preset ([Vlog_709]) or LUT files registered in [LUT \\nLibrary]. (Î[LUT Library]: 320)\\n[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]\\nDisplays the images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera.\\n[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]\\nApplies LUT file to images output over HDMI.\\n• When applying the LUT file, [LUT] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)]/[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] are not available when \\n[LUT] is applied in the [Photo Style] image quality adjustments.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – HLG Videos\\n433\\nHLG Videos\\n≥[HLG View Assist]: 436\\nRecord videos with the wide dynamic range of the HLG format. You can \\nrecord in very bright light where overexposure can occur or in dark areas \\nwhere underexposure can occur, maintaining the rich yet subtle colors you \\ncan see with your naked eye.\\nYou can view the video that you record by outputting via HDMI to devices \\n(TVs, etc.) that support the HLG format, or playing back directly on \\nsupporting devices.\\n• “HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma)” is an international standard (ITU-R BT.2100) HDR \\nformat.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – HLG Videos\\n434\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n] or [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSelect a recording quality with which you can record \\nHLG video.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec Quality]\\n• Items available for recording with HLG video are indicated as [HLG available].\\n• Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video (ÎList of \\nRecording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 446)\\n3\\nSet [Photo Style] to [Like2100(HLG)] or [Like2100(HLG) \\nFull Range].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Photo Style] ¨ [Like2100(HLG)]/\\n[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]\\n±0\\n±0\\n/LNH\\u0015\\u0014\\u0013\\u0013\\u000b+/*\\f\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – HLG Videos\\n435\\n™ ISO Sensitivity When [Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) \\nFull Range] Is Set\\nThe lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [400].\\n• The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in \\n[Dual Native ISO Setting].\\n• Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.\\n• The monitor and viewfinder on this camera do not support display of HLG format \\nimages.\\nWith [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) \\nmenu, you can display the images converted for monitoring on the monitor/\\nviewfinder of this camera. (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n• HLG images are shown dark on devices that do not support the HLG format. \\nWith [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) \\nmenu, you can set the conversion method for images displayed for monitoring. \\n(Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – HLG Videos\\n436\\n[HLG View Assist]\\nAt recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted \\ncolor gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs \\nthese over HDMI.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [HLG View Assist] ¨ [Monitor] or \\n[HDMI]\\n[AUTO]*\\nConverts images before outputting them via HDMI while applying the effect of \\n[MODE2]. This conversion setting works only when the camera is connected to a \\ndevice that does not support HDR (HLG format).\\n[MODE1]\\nConverts with an emphasis on bright areas such as sky.\\n• [MODE1] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n[MODE2]\\nConverts with an emphasis on the brightness of a main subject.\\n• [MODE2] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n[OFF]\\nDisplays without converting color gamut and brightness.\\n• HLG images appear darker on devices that do not support the HLG format.\\n*\\nCan only be set while [HDMI] is selected.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording\\n437\\nAnamorphic Recording\\n≥[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 439\\nFrom a variety of different video formats (recording qualities), you can \\nselect and record with a recording quality that suits anamorphic recording.\\nDuring anamorphic recording, it is also possible to display desqueezed \\nimages and the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing. It is \\nalso possible to switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic \\nrecording.\\n• For information about image stabilizers suited to anamorphic recording \\n(Î[Anamorphic (Video)]: 257)\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording\\n438\\n1\\nSet [Rec. File Format].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec. File Format]\\n2\\nSelect a recording quality suited to anamorphic \\nrecording.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec Quality]\\n• The following recording qualities are available in [\\n] mode:\\n– [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate \\nof 60.00p\\n• When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV], by filtering [Rec Quality] by the \\nnumber of pixels, you can display just those recording qualities with \\nresolutions and aspect ratios that meet the conditions. (Î[Filtering]: 141)\\n• This camera is not compatible with desqueeze editing of video recorded with \\nanamorphic recording. Use compatible software.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording\\n439\\n[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]\\nDisplay the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the \\nanamorphic lens on this camera.\\nUsing the [Frame Marker], it is also possible to superimpose on display the \\nframe of the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing. \\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n] or [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]\\n[\\n] ([2.0×])\\n[\\n] ([1.8×])\\n[\\n] ([1.5×])\\n[\\n] ([1.33×])\\n[\\n] ([1.30×])\\n[OFF]\\n• Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording\\n440\\n3\\nSet [Frame Marker].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Frame Marker] (Î[Frame Marker]: 405)\\n• Images output via HDMI are not desqueezed.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Synchro Scan]\\n441\\n[Synchro Scan]\\nFine-adjust the shutter speed to reduce flickering and horizontal stripes.\\nThe shutter speed set in Synchro Scan is saved separately from the \\nshutter speed used for normal recording.\\nIn the Synchro Scan setting screen you can call up the current shutter \\nspeed for normal recording and adjust it.\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n] or [S&Q].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet the exposure mode to [S] or [M].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Exposure Mode] ¨ [S]/[M]\\n3\\nSet [Synchro Scan].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Synchro Scan] ¨ [ON]\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Synchro Scan]\\n442\\n4\\nSet the shutter speed.\\n≥Rotate \\n, \\n or \\n to select a numeric value, then press \\n \\nor \\n.\\n• You can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording by pressing \\n[DISP.].\\n• Adjust the shutter speed while looking at the screen so that flickering and \\nhorizontal stripes will be minimized.\\n• When you set [Synchro Scan] to [ON], the available shutter speed range \\nbecomes narrower.\\n&XUUHQW\\u0003VKXWWHU\\u0003VSHHG\\nュリヴヱハ\\n60.1\\n60.1\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Loop Recording (video)]\\n443\\n[Loop Recording (video)]\\nRecording continues until the card becomes full, while dividing videos into \\nshort periods.\\nWhen the card becomes full, recording continues while deleting the old \\ndata.\\nThis is a convenient function for recording over long periods that might \\nexceed the capacity of the card.\\n• Recording and deleting occur at the same time, so you will need a card with a \\nwriting speed equivalent to double the bit rate of the recording quality used for \\nrecording.\\nIf the writing speed on the card is insufficient, recording may stop.\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Loop Recording (video)]\\n444\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [\\n].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSet [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV]\\n3\\nSet [Loop Recording (video)].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Loop Recording (video)] ¨ [ON]\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n• When the recording fills the card to capacity, loop recording starts and video \\nrecording time is no longer displayed.\\n• Make sure the camera does not turn off during recording.\\n• Loop recording cannot start if there is insufficient available capacity on the card.\\n• When the recording time exceeds 12 hours, recording continues with data being \\ndeleted in order from the point where recording started.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Loop Recording (video)] is not \\navailable:\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – [Segmented File Recording]\\n445\\n[Segmented File Recording]\\nTo avoid video loss due to unforeseen interruptions to the power supply, \\nrecorded video is segmented at set intervals while being recorded.\\n• The segmented videos are saved as one group image. (ÎGroup Images: 478)\\n1\\nSet [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Rec. File Format] ¨ [MOV]\\n2\\nSet [Segmented File Recording].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Segmented File Recording] ¨ [10MIN.]/\\n[5MIN.]/[3MIN.]/[1MIN.]\\n• When the following function is being used, [Segmented File Recording] is not \\navailable:\\n– [Loop Recording (video)]\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded\\n446\\nList of Recording Qualities That Enable \\nSpecial Videos to be Recorded\\n: Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video\\n: Recording qualities for High Frame Rate video\\n: Recording qualities that enable use of [Live Cropping]\\n: Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video\\n™ [Rec. File Format]: [MP4]\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[4K/10bit/100M/60p]\\n3\\n[4K/10bit/72M/30p]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/8bit/100M/30p]\\n3\\n[4K/10bit/72M/24p]\\n3\\n[4K/8bit/100M/24p]\\n[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]\\n3\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]\\n3\\n[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]\\nS&Q\\nHFR\\nLive Crop\\nHLG\\nS&Q\\nHFR\\nLive Crop\\nHLG\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded\\n447\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\n™ [Rec. File Format]: [MOV]\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[4K/10bit/100M/50p]\\n3\\n[4K/10bit/72M/25p]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/8bit/100M/25p]\\n3\\n[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]\\n3\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]\\n3\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n3\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n3\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n3\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n3\\n[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/60p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/60p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[C4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[C4K/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\nS&Q\\nHFR\\nLive Crop\\nHLG\\nS&Q\\nHFR\\nLive Crop\\nHLG\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded\\n448\\n[C4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/60p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[4K/60p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/120p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/120p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/60p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/60p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/30p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/30p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded\\n449\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n3\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n3\\n[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[4K/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[4K/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/100p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/100p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/50p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/50p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/25p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/25p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nS&Q\\nHFR\\nLive Crop\\nHLG\\n\\n\\nSpecial Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded\\n450\\n[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n3\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n3\\n[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[C4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[C4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n[C4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/48p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/48p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/24p/422/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nS&Q\\nHFR\\nLive Crop\\nHLG\\n\\n\\n451\\nHDMI Output (Video)\\nYou can record while outputting the camera images to an external monitor \\nor external recorder connected with an HDMI cable.\\n• HDMI output control differs between during recording and during playback.\\nFor HDMI output settings during playback (Î[HDMI Connection]: 586)\\n≥Connecting HDMI Devices: 452\\n≥HDMI Output Image Quality: 453\\n≥HDMI Output Settings: 456\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices\\n452\\nConnecting HDMI Devices\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn off the camera and the external monitor/external recorder.\\nConnect the camera and an external monitor or external \\nrecorder with a commercially available HDMI cable.\\n(A) HDMI socket (Type A)\\n(B) External monitor\\n(C) External recorder\\n• Use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) \\nlong).\\n• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.\\n(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)\\n• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality\\n453\\nHDMI Output Image Quality\\n≥Images Output via HDMI: 453\\nImages Output via HDMI\\nThe images output via HDMI during recording differ depending on the \\nrecording mode.\\n™ [\\n]/[S&Q] Mode\\nAspect ratio, resolution, and frame rate output is according to the [Rec \\nQuality] settings in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu.\\nThe YUV and bit value are output with YUV changed to 4:2:2 as shown \\nbelow.\\nIf the connected device is not compatible with the output system, output \\nchanges to match the connected device.\\n• Video with a resolution exceeding 4K is output as C4K/4K resolution.\\n• When set to a [Rec Quality] for high frame rate video, the resolution and frame rate \\nmay be down-converted for output.\\nRecording to card\\nHDMI output\\n4:2:2 10 bit\\n4:2:2 10 bit\\n4:2:0 10 bit\\n4:2:2 10 bit\\n4:2:0 8 bit\\n4:2:2 8 bit\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality\\n454\\n™ [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] Mode\\nOutput is the same as [\\n]/[S&Q] mode during video recording.\\nOutput is with a 16:9 aspect ratio during recording standby. Resolution, \\nframe rate, YUV, and bit value output matches the connected device.\\n• When set to a [Rec Quality] other than 16:9 or 17:9, bands are added to the \\nimages and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.\\n• When set to any [Aspect Ratio] other than 16:9, bands are added to the images \\nand they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality\\n455\\n™ Notice Regarding HDMI Output\\n• It may take some time for the output method to change.\\n• When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a \\ntime lag.\\n• Beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted during HDMI \\noutput.\\n• When you check the image and audio from the TV connected to the camera, the \\nmicrophone of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV, \\nproducing an abnormal sound (audio feedback).\\nIf this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the volume on the TV.\\n• Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.\\n• For information about the high temperature display (ÎFor information about \\nthe high temperature display: 128)\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings\\n456\\nHDMI Output Settings\\n≥Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI: 457\\n≥Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder: 458\\n≥Outputting Audio via HDMI: 459\\n≥Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: 459\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings\\n457\\nOutputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI\\nOutput the camera information display to an external device connected by \\nHDMI.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [Info \\nDisplay]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display] \\nis set to [ON]:\\n– Information is not displayed on the recording screen of the camera.\\n– [Touch Tab] is not available.\\n• There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display] \\nis set to [ON] and then a Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone or tethered \\nrecording is attempted:\\n– Information is not displayed on the recording screen of the camera.\\n– Some information is not displayed on the recording screens output to external \\ndevices.\\n– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]/[Touch Tab]/[Histogram]/[Luminance Spot Meter]/\\n[WFM/Vector Scope] are not available.\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings\\n458\\nOutputting Control Information to an External \\nRecorder\\nRecording start and stop control information is output to an external \\nrecorder connected by HDMI.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [HDMI \\nRecording Control]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n• [HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to [ON] \\nin [\\n]/[S&Q] mode. (Î[HDMI Time Code Output]: 391)\\n• Control information is output when pressing the video rec. button or shutter button, \\neven if the video cannot be recorded (such as when there is no card inserted into the \\ncamera).\\n• Only compatible external devices can be controlled.\\n\\n\\nHDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings\\n459\\nOutputting Audio via HDMI\\nOutput audio to an external device connected by HDMI.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [Sound \\nOutput (HDMI)]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\nOutputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via \\nHDMI\\nOutput the enlarged screens from [MF Assist] or [Enlarged Live \\nDisplay(Video)] to an external device connected by HDMI.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [HDMI Rec Output] ¨ Select [Enlarged \\nLive Display]\\n[MODE1]\\nEnlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording.\\n[MODE2]\\nEnlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording and during \\nvideo recording.\\n• The resolution and frame rate of the video output via HDMI will be FHD/60p or less.\\n[OFF]\\nEnlarged display of live view is not output.\\n• When the monitor/viewfinder of the camera is displaying the enlarged display, the \\ncamera information display is not output via HDMI.\\n\\n\\n460\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images\\nThis chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.\\n• Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or edited \\ncorrectly on this camera.\\n≥Playing Back Pictures: 461\\n≥Playing Back Videos: 463\\n≥Switching the Display Mode: 472\\n≥Group Images: 478\\n≥Deleting Images: 480\\n≥[RAW Processing]: 482\\n≥[Playback] Menu: 491\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures\\n461\\nPlaying Back Pictures\\n1\\nDisplay the playback screen.\\n≥Press [\\n].\\n2\\nSelect a picture.\\n≥Select the pictures by pressing 21.\\n≥You can move continuously through images by pressing and \\nholding 21.\\n≥You can also select by rotating \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also move through images by dragging the screen \\nhorizontally.\\n(A) Card slot\\n(A)\\n1/999\\n1/999\\n1/999\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures\\n462\\n3\\nStop playback.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n≥You can also stop playback by pressing [\\n].\\n™ Switching the Card to Display\\nYou can switch the card displayed just by pressing [\\n] during playback.\\n• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with \\n[Card Slot Change]. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n1\\nPress [\\n].\\n2\\nPress 34 to select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF) and \\n“Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan \\nElectronics and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA).\\nThe camera cannot play back files that do not comply with the DCF standard.\\nExif is a file format for pictures which allows recording information, etc. to be \\nadded.\\n• You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn \\nbutton:\\n(Î[Rec / Playback Switch]: 512, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 515)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n463\\nPlaying Back Videos\\n≥Video Repeat Playback: 467\\n≥Extracting a Picture: 469\\n≥[Video Divide]: 470\\n1\\nDisplay the playback screen.\\n≥Press [\\n].\\n2\\nSelect a video.\\n• For information about how to select images (ÎPlaying Back Pictures: 461)\\n• The [\\n] video icon is displayed for a video.\\n• The video recording time is displayed on the screen.\\nExample) When 8 minutes 30 seconds: 8m30s\\n• h: hour, m: minute, s: second\\n(A) Video recording time\\n8m30s\\n8m30s\\n8m30s\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n464\\n3\\nPlay back the video.\\n≥Press 3.\\n≥You can also start playback by touching [\\n] at the center of the \\nscreen.\\n(B) Elapsed playback time\\n(C) Playback bar\\n4\\nStop playback.\\n≥Press 4.\\n00:05:50\\n00:05:50\\n00:05:50\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n(B)\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n465\\n™ Operations During Video Playback\\nButton \\noperations\\nTouch \\noperations\\nDescription of operation\\n3\\n/\\nPlays/pauses.\\n4\\n—\\nStops.\\n2\\n—\\nPerforms fast-rewind playback.\\n• If you press 2 again, the fast-rewind speed \\nincreases.\\nPerforms frame-by-frame rewinding (while \\npaused).\\n1\\n—\\nPerforms fast-forward playback.\\n• If you press 1 again, the fast-forward speed \\nincreases.\\nPerforms frame-by-frame forwarding (while \\npaused).\\n—\\nSelects the frame to display.\\n/\\nExtracts a picture (while paused). (ÎExtracting a \\nPicture: 469)\\n—\\nReduces the volume.\\nIncreases the volume.\\n6DYH\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n466\\n• The camera can play back videos in MP4 and MOV formats.\\n• Video recorded with a [System Frequency] setting that is different to the current \\none cannot be played back.\\n• If the reading speed of the card is slow, playback may pause or it may not be \\npossible to play back smoothly.\\n• You can set the operation for when playback of video finishes:\\n(Î[Behavior After Video Playback]: 495)\\n• You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn \\nbutton:\\n(Î[Rec / Playback Switch]: 512, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 515)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n467\\nVideo Repeat Playback\\nYou can play back a part of a video repeatedly.\\n1\\nDisplay the screen for setting the part to repeat.\\n≥Press [Q] while paused.\\n≥The screen for setting the part to repeat is also displayed when you \\ntouch [Repeat Playback] while paused.\\n2\\nSet the position to start the repeat.\\n≥Press 21 to select the start position and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by rotating \\n, \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also select the start position by touching the playback bar.\\n3\\nSet the position to end the repeat.\\n≥Set using the same procedure as 2.\\n• The position cannot be set if the position to start the repeat and the position to \\nend the repeat are too close.\\n00:05:50\\n00:05:50\\n00:05:50\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n468\\n4\\nStart playback.\\n• The operations during repeat playback are the same as “Operations During \\nVideo Playback”. (ÎOperations During Video Playback: 465)\\n• End repeat playback by pressing 4 to stop playback or by pressing [Q] while \\npaused.\\n• Repeat playback is not possible if the recording time is short.\\n• The positions set for the repeated part may shift from the position where the \\nvideo is paused.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n469\\nExtracting a Picture\\nExtract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.\\n1\\nPause playback at the position you wish to extract a \\npicture.\\n≥Press 3.\\n• To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward \\nframe-by-frame).\\n2\\nSave the picture.\\n≥Press \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also save the picture by touching [Save].\\n• The picture created from the video is saved with a [FINE] picture quality.\\nThe picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Rec Quality].\\n• The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than normal.\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture \\ncreated from a video.\\n00:06:10\\n00:06:10\\n00:06:10\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n470\\n[Video Divide]\\nDivide a recorded video into two.\\n1\\nSelect [Video Divide].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Video Divide]\\n2\\nSelect and play the image.\\n≥Press 21 to select an image and then press \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nPause playback at the position you wish to divide.\\n≥Press 3.\\n• To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (frame-by-frame rewind or \\nframe-by-frame forward).\\n• Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been divided. \\nCarefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.\\n• Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide process. \\nThe images may be lost.\\n00:06:10\\n00:06:10\\n00:06:10\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n00:08:30\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos\\n471\\n4\\nDivide the video.\\n≥Press \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also divide the video by touching [Divide].\\n• Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.\\n• Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.\\n• [Video Divide] cannot be used on images recorded using [Segmented File \\nRecording].\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode\\n472\\nSwitching the Display Mode\\n≥Enlarged Display: 473\\n≥Thumbnail Screen: 475\\n≥Calendar Playback: 477\\nYou can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display \\nand switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once \\n(multi-playback).\\nYou can also switch to calendar display to show images of a selected \\nrecording date.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode\\n473\\nEnlarged Display\\nPlayback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).\\nEnlarging the playback screen.\\n≥Rotate \\n to the right.\\n≥The playback screen is enlarged in the order of 2× \\n 4× \\n 8× \\n \\n16×.\\n• Rotating \\n to the left returns to the previous display size.\\n• Enlarged display to 16× is not possible with FHD video or with pictures extracted \\nfrom FHD video.\\n2.0X\\n2.0X\\n2.0X\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode\\n474\\n™ Operations During Enlarged Display\\nButton \\noperations\\nTouch \\noperations\\nDescription of operation\\n—\\nEnlarges/reduces the screen.\\n—\\nPinch out/\\npinch in\\nEnlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.\\n3421\\nDrag\\nMoves the enlarged display position.\\nPositions can be moved to the diagonal \\ndirections using the joystick.\\n/\\n—\\nForwards or rewinds images while maintaining \\nthe same zoom magnification and zoom position.\\n• You can display the point focused with AF. You can enlarge the display from that \\npoint:\\n(Î[Magnify from AF Point]: 494)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode\\n475\\nThumbnail Screen\\n1\\nSwitch to thumbnail display.\\n≥Rotate \\n to the left.\\n≥The display is switched in the order of 12-image screen \\n \\n30-image screen.\\n• Rotating \\n to the left during 30-image screen display switches to calendar \\ndisplay. (ÎCalendar Playback: 477)\\n• Rotating \\n to the right returns to the previous display.\\n• You can also switch the display by touching an icon.\\n[\\n]: 1-image screen\\n[\\n]: 12-image screen\\n[\\n]: 30-image screen\\n[\\n]: Calendar (ÎCalendar Playback: 477)\\n(A) Card slot\\n2\\nSelect an image.\\n≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press \\n or \\n.\\nCAL\\n(A)\\n1/999\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode\\n476\\n• When you press [\\n] while a thumbnail is being displayed, you can switch to \\nthe card being displayed.\\n• You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.\\n• Images indicated with [\\n] cannot be played back.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode\\n477\\nCalendar Playback\\n1\\nSwitch to calendar playback.\\n≥Rotate \\n to the left.\\n≥The display is switched in the order of thumbnail screen \\n(12 images) \\n Thumbnail screen (30 images) \\n Calendar \\nplayback.\\n• Rotating \\n to the right returns to the previous display.\\n2\\nSelect the recording date.\\n≥Press 3421 to select a date and then press \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nSelect an image.\\n≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Rotating \\n to the left returns to calendar playback.\\n• The card to display cannot be switched during calendar display.\\n• The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December \\n2099.\\n2\\n1\\n1\\n9\\n8\\n7\\n6\\n5\\n4\\n3\\n16\\n15\\n14\\n13\\n12\\n11\\n10\\n23\\n22\\n21\\n20\\n19\\n26\\n18\\n17\\nSUN\\nSAT\\nFRI\\nTHU\\nWED\\nTUE\\nMON\\n25\\n24\\n31\\n202312\\n29\\n28\\n27\\n30\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Group Images\\n478\\nGroup Images\\nImages recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Shooting are \\nhandled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted and edited on \\na group basis.\\n(For example, if you delete a group image, all images in the group are \\ndeleted.)\\nYou can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.\\n™ Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera\\nGroup images recorded with SH burst recording.\\nGroup images recorded with Focus Bracket.\\nGroup images recorded with Time Lapse Shot.\\nGroup images recorded with Stop Motion Shooting.\\nGroup images recorded with [Segmented File Recording].\\n1/999\\n1/999\\n1/999\\n\\u001a\\u0018\\u0003SLF\\u0011\\n\\u001a\\u0018\\u0003SLF\\u0011\\n\\u001a\\u0018\\u0003SLF\\u0011\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Group Images\\n479\\n™ Playing and Editing the Images in a Group One by One\\nOperations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are \\navailable with images in groups just as with normal playback.\\n1\\nSelect the group image in the playback state. (ÎPlaying Back Pictures: 461)\\n2\\nPress 4 to display the images in the group.\\n• You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.\\n3\\nPress 21 to select an image.\\n• To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 or touch [\\n] again.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images\\n480\\nDeleting Images\\n1\\nPress [\\n] in playback state.\\n• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the \\nimages before deletion.\\n• You can only delete the images in the card of the selected card slot.\\n• If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images\\n481\\n2\\nPress 34 to select the deletion method and then press \\n or \\n.\\n[Delete Single]\\nDeletes the selected image.\\n[Delete Multi]\\nSelecting and deleting multiple images.\\n1\\nPress 3421 to select the image to delete and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• [\\n] is displayed for the selected image.\\n• If you press \\n or \\n again, the selection is canceled.\\n• Up to 100 images can be selected.\\n2\\nPress [DISP.] to delete the selected image.\\n• To switch the card selected for deleting images, press [\\n] and then select the \\ncard slot.\\n• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time to \\ndelete them.\\n• You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation screen \\nwhen deleting:\\n(Î[Delete Confirmation]: 501)\\n• All images on the card can be deleted:\\n(Î[Delete All Images]: 501)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n482\\n[RAW Processing]\\nThis processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves \\nthem in JPEG format.\\n1\\nSelect [RAW Processing].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [RAW Processing]\\n2\\nSelect the RAW image.\\n≥Press 21 to select an image and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• When group images are selected, press 4 and then select an image in the \\ngroup.\\nPress 4 again to return to the normal selection screen.\\n• The settings from the time of recording are reflected in displayed images.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n483\\n3\\nSelect a setting item.\\n≥Press 34 to select an item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n4\\nChange the setting.\\n≥Rotate \\n, \\n, or \\n.\\n• The image can be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.\\n5\\nConfirm the setting.\\n≥Press \\n or \\n.\\n≥The screen of Step 3 reappears.\\nTo set another item, repeat Steps 3 to 5.\\n+1\\n+1\\n+2\\n+2\\n-2\\n-2\\n-1\\n-1\\n0\\n0\\nDISP.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n484\\n6\\nSave the image.\\n≥Press 34 to select [Begin Processing] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n485\\n™ Setting Items ([RAW Processing])\\n[Begin Processing]\\nSaves the image.\\n[White Balance]\\nSelects and adjusts the white balance.\\nSelecting the item with [\\n] enables processing with the same setting as at the time \\nof recording.\\n• If you press 4 in the [White Balance] selection screen, the white balance adjustment \\nscreen appears. (ÎAdjusting the White Balance: 299)\\n• If you press 3 while [\\n] to [\\n] is selected, the color temperature setting \\nscreen appears. (ÎColor Temperature Setting: 298)\\n[Brightness correction]\\nCorrects the brightness.\\n• The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the effect of exposure compensation \\nduring recording.\\n[Photo Style] (Î[Photo Style]: 301)\\nSelects a Photo Style.\\n• If you press [Q] while [Like709] is selected, the knee setting screen appears. \\n(ÎRecording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 365)\\n• You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded with [V-Log]. You cannot select \\n[V-Log] for images not recorded with [V-Log].\\n• You cannot select a Photo Style other than [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2] for images \\nrecorded with [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2]. You cannot select [Cinelike D2] or \\n[Cinelike V2] for images not recorded with Photo Style [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2].\\n• [REAL TIME LUT] cannot be selected. The Photo Style is fixed to [V-Log] for images \\nrecorded with [REAL TIME LUT].\\n1\\n4\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n486\\n[i.Dynamic Range]\\nSelects the setting of [i.Dynamic Range].\\n[Contrast]\\nAdjusts the contrast.\\n[Highlight]\\nAdjusts the brightness of bright portions.\\n[Shadow]\\nAdjusts the brightness of dark portions.\\n[Saturation]/[Color Tone]\\nAdjusts the saturation or color tone.\\n[Hue]\\nAdjusts the hue.\\n[Filter Effect]\\nSelects filter effects.\\n[Grain Effect]\\nSelects a grain effect setting.\\n[Color Noise]\\nAdds color to the grain effect.\\n[Noise Reduction]\\nSets noise reduction.\\n[Sharpness]\\nAdjusts the sharpness.\\nS\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n487\\n[LUT]\\nSelects the LUT file registered in [LUT Library]. (Î[LUT Library]: 320)\\n[More Settings]\\n[Revert To Original]: Returns the settings to the ones from the time of recording.\\n[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]. (Î[Color \\nSpace]: 538)\\n[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.\\n[Destination Card Slot]: You can select the card slot to which to save images \\nprocessed with RAW. When [AUTO] is selected, the image is saved to the same card \\nslot as the RAW format image to be processed.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n488\\n• The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style].\\n*\\nCan be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n([Saturation])\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n([Color Tone])\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3*\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nS\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n489\\n™ Displaying a Comparison Screen\\nYou can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images \\nwith the applied setting value side by side.\\n1\\nPress [DISP.] in the screen of Step 4.\\n• The image with the current setting (A) is displayed at the center.\\n• Touching the image with the current setting enlarges it.\\nTouching [\\n] returns to the original display.\\n• A comparison screen cannot be displayed while [Noise Reduction] or \\n[Sharpness] is selected.\\n2\\nRotate \\n, \\n, or \\n to change the setting.\\n3\\nPress \\n or \\n to confirm the setting.\\nDISP.\\n0\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]\\n490\\n• It may take a while for the comparison screen to be displayed.\\n• RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [L] size of \\n[3:2].\\n(However, RAW images recorded in High Resolution mode are recorded in the \\n[XL] size of [3:2])\\n• With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle of \\nview of [Ex. Tele Conv.] from the time of recording.\\n• [Picture Quality] is processed as [FINE] with this function.\\n• The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX \\nDeveloper Studio” software do not completely match.\\n• RAW processing is not possible while you are using the following function:\\n– HDMI output\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n491\\n[Playback] Menu\\n≥How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 491\\n≥[Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 493\\n≥[Playback] ([Process Image]): 496\\n≥[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 497\\n≥[Playback] ([Edit Image]): 498\\n≥[Playback] ([Others]): 501\\nHow to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu\\nFollow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.\\n• Images are displayed separately by card slot.\\n• You can only select images on one card at a time.\\n™ When [Single] Has Been Selected\\n1\\nPress 21 to select the image.\\n2\\nPress \\n or \\n.\\n• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the setting is \\ncanceled when \\n or \\n is pressed again.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n492\\n™ When [Multi] Has Been Selected\\nWhen you press [\\n], the card that is displayed is switched.\\n1\\nPress 3421 to select the image and then press \\n or \\n (repeat).\\n• The setting is canceled when \\n or \\n is pressed again.\\n2\\nPress [DISP.] to execute.\\nWhen [Protect] is selected\\nPress 3421 to select the image, and then press \\n or \\n to set (repeat).\\n• The setting is canceled when \\n or \\n is pressed again.\\n3\\n2\\n1\\n6\\n5\\n4\\n2.\\nュリヴヱハ\\n3\\n2\\n1\\n6\\n5\\n4\\n6HW\\u0012&DQFHO\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n493\\n[Playback] ([Playback Mode])\\n[Playback Mode]\\n[Slide Show]\\n`: Default settings\\n`[Normal Play] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]\\nFilters the type of images to play back.\\n• When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to \\ndisplay, then press [DISP.].\\n[All] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]\\nSelects image types and plays them back at regular intervals in order.\\n• When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to \\ndisplay, then press [DISP.].\\n[Start]: Starts slide show playback.\\n[Duration]: Sets repeat playback.\\n[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.\\nOperations during slide show\\n3: Plays/pauses (You can also perform the same operation by touching [\\n] or \\n[\\n])\\n2: Move to the previous image\\n1: Move to the next image\\n4: Ends the slide show\\n: Adjusts the volume\\n• When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n494\\n[Rotate Disp.]\\n[Picture Sort]\\n[Magnify from AF Point]\\n[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nAutomatically displays pictures vertically if they were recorded when holding the \\ncamera vertically.\\n[FILE NAME] / `[DATE/TIME]\\nThis sets the order in which the camera displays images during playback.\\n[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.\\n[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.\\n• If you insert another card, it may take some time to read all data, therefore pictures \\nmay not be displayed in the set order.\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nDisplays the point focused with AF.\\nEnlarges the AF focus location when enlarging the image.\\n• The center of the image is enlarged for RAW images recorded in the High \\nResolution mode or when the image is not focused.\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nWhen playing back images recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log], this displays \\nthe images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder.\\n• This functions in tandem with [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] in [V-Log View Assist] in \\nthe [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n495\\n[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]\\n[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]\\n[Behavior After Video Playback]\\n[MODE1] / `[MODE2] / [OFF]\\nAt recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and \\nbrightness for display.\\n• This functions in tandem with [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] \\n([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / `[OFF]\\nThis displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic \\nlens on this camera.\\n• This is linked with [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] under the [Custom] ([Monitor / \\nDisplay (Video)]) menu. (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 439)\\n`[End Playback] / [Pause At Last Frame]\\nSets the operation for when playback of video finishes.\\n[End Playback]: Ends video playback and returns to the image selection screen.\\n[Pause At Last Frame]: Does not end video playback, but pauses on the final \\nframe. To end video playback, press 4.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n496\\n[Playback] ([Process Image])\\n[RAW Processing]\\n[Time Lapse Video]\\n[Stop Motion Video]\\nProcesses pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves them in JPEG \\nformat.\\n(Î[RAW Processing]: 482)\\nThis creates videos from group images recorded with [Time Lapse Shot].\\n1\\nPress 21 to select a [Time Lapse Shot] group and then press \\n or \\n.\\n2\\nSelect the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video. \\n(ÎTime Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 227)\\n• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Time Lapse Video] is \\nnot available.\\nThis creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop Motion Animation].\\n1\\nPress 21 to select the Stop Motion Animation group and then press \\n or \\n.\\n2\\nSelect the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video. \\n(ÎTime Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 227)\\n• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Stop Motion Video] is \\nnot available.\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n497\\n[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])\\n[Protect]\\n[Rating]\\n[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]\\nYou can set protection for images so that they will not be deleted by mistake.\\nHowever, if you format the card, the protected images will also be deleted.\\n• For information about how to select images (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the \\n[Playback] Menu: 491)\\n• Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled on a device other than \\nthis camera.\\n[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]\\nIf you set any of the five different rating levels for images, you can do the following:\\n• Deleting all images except for those with ratings.\\n• Use the file details view on a PC, etc., to check the rating level. (JPEG images \\nonly)\\n1\\nSelect an image. (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 491)\\n2\\nPress 21 to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps 1 and 2.\\n• To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n498\\n[Playback] ([Edit Image])\\n[Resize]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Single] / [Multi]\\nReduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as different images to \\nenable them to be easily used for web pages or sent as email attachments.\\n• For information about how to select images (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the \\n[Playback] Menu: 491)\\n– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image, press 34 to select the \\nsize, then press \\n or \\n.\\n– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images, press 34 to select the \\nsize, then press \\n or \\n.\\n• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].\\n• The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.\\n• [Resize] is not available for images recorded using the following functions:\\n– Video recording\\n– Group images\\n– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])\\n– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])\\n– Pictures created from [C4K] video\\n– [S] ([Picture Size])\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n499\\n[Rotate]\\n[Video Divide]\\nRotate images manually in 90o steps.\\n[\\n]: Rotates 90o clockwise.\\n[\\n]: Rotates 90o counter-clockwise.\\n• For information about how to select images (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the \\n[Playback] Menu: 491)\\n• When [Rotate Disp.] is [OFF], [Rotate] is not available.\\nDivide a recorded video into two.\\n(Î[Video Divide]: 470)\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n500\\n[Copy]\\n[Copy Direction]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[Select Copy] / [Copy All in Folder] / [Copy All in Card]\\nYou can copy the images in one of the cards to the other card.\\n• Copied images will be saved in a new folder.\\n[Select Copy]: Copies selected images.\\n1\\nSelect the folder containing the images to copy.\\n2\\nSelect the images. (ÎHow to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 491)\\n[Copy All in Folder]: Copies all images in a folder.\\n1\\nSelect the folder to copy.\\n2\\nCheck the images to be copied and then press \\n or \\n to execute \\ncopying.\\n[Copy All in Card]: Copies all images in the card.\\nUsing the Fn button to copy images\\nIf you press the Fn button with [Copy] assigned while playing back images one at a \\ntime, the image currently being played back will be copied to the other card. (ÎFn \\nButtons: 503)\\n• Select the copy destination folder from the following options. In the case of group \\nimages, [Create a New Folder] is selected automatically.\\n[Same Folder Number as Source]: Copies to a folder with the same name as the \\nfolder of the image to be copied.\\n[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number \\nand then copies the image to it.\\n[Select Folder]: Selects a folder to store the image and then copies the image to \\nit.\\n• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Select Copy].\\n• The [Protect] setting is not copied.\\n• Copying may take a while.\\n• When using the following combinations of cards, video copying is not available:\\n– Copying from an SDXC memory card to an SD/SDHC memory card\\n\\n\\nPlaying Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu\\n501\\n[Playback] ([Others])\\n[Delete Confirmation]\\n[Delete All Images]\\n`: Default settings\\n[\\\"Yes\\\" first] / `[\\\"No\\\" first]\\nThis sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation \\nscreen for deleting an image is displayed.\\n[\\\"Yes\\\" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.\\n[\\\"No\\\" first]: [No] is highlighted first.\\n`[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]\\nDeleting all images in a card.\\n• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the \\nimages before deletion.\\n• If you select [Delete All Non-rating], all images except those with a rating set are \\ndeleted.\\n• [Delete All Images] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play].\\n\\n\\n502\\nCamera Customization\\nThis chapter describes the customization function with which you can \\nconfigure the camera to your preferred settings.\\nIt also describes the [Custom] menu where you can make advanced \\nsettings for the camera operations and screen displays, and the [Setup] \\nmenu where you can make basic settings for the camera.\\n≥Fn Buttons: 503\\n≥[Dial Operation Switch]: 518\\n≥Quick Menu Customization: 521\\n≥Custom Mode: 528\\n≥[Custom] Menu: 533\\n≥[Setup] Menu: 572\\n≥My Menu: 594\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n503\\nFn Buttons\\n≥Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 506\\n≥Use the Fn Buttons: 517\\nYou can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons. Additionally, you \\ncan register other functions to specialized buttons such as [WB] button, in \\nthe same way as with the Fn buttons.\\nDifferent functions can be set for both during recording and playback.\\n™ Fn Button Default Settings\\n(1)\\n(10)\\n(9)\\n(2)(3)(4)\\n(7)\\n(6)\\n(8)\\n(5)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n504\\nFn buttons\\n[Setting in REC mode]\\n[Setting in PLAY mode]\\n(1)\\n[Fn2]\\n[Preview]\\n[No Setting]\\n(2)\\n[WB]\\n[White Balance]\\n[No Setting]\\n(3)\\n[ISO]\\n[Sensitivity]\\n[No Setting]\\n(4)\\n[\\n]\\n[Exposure Comp.]\\n[No Setting]\\n(5)\\nVideo rec. \\nbutton\\n[Video Record]\\n[Video Record]\\n(6)\\n[LVF]\\n[LVF/Monitor Switch]\\n[LVF/Monitor Switch]\\n(7)\\n[\\n]\\n[AF Mode]\\n[Card Slot Change]\\n(8)\\n[AF ON]\\n[AF-ON]\\n[Rating¿3]\\n(9)\\n[Q]\\n[Q.MENU]\\n[Send Image (Smartphone)]\\n(10)\\n[Fn1]/[\\n]/\\n[\\n]\\n[Level Gauge]\\n• Cannot be used as Fn \\nbuttons during playback.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n505\\nFn buttons\\n[Setting in REC mode]\\n[Setting in PLAY mode]\\n(11)\\n[Fn3]\\n[Wi-Fi]\\n• Cannot be used as Fn \\nbuttons during playback.\\n[Fn4]\\n[Histogram]\\n[Fn5]\\n[Boost I.S. (Video)]\\n[Fn6]\\n[Off (Disable Press and \\nHold)]\\n[Fn7]\\n[Off (Disable Press and \\nHold)]\\n(12)\\n[No Setting]\\n(13)\\n[No Setting]\\nFn4\\nFn4\\nFn4\\nFn3\\nFn3\\nFn3\\nFn7\\nFn7\\nFn7\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nFn6\\nFn6\\nFn6\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nFn5\\nFn5\\nFn5\\n(11)\\n(13)\\n(12)\\nFn13\\nFn15\\nFn12\\nFn16\\nFn14\\nFn9\\nFn8\\nFn10\\nFn11\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n506\\nRegister Functions to the Fn Buttons\\n1\\nSelect [Fn Button Set].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode]/\\n[Setting in PLAY mode]\\n2\\nSelect the button.\\n≥Press 34 to select the button and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by rotating \\n or \\n.\\n• Press [DISP.] to change the page.\\n• With default settings, [Fn12] to [Fn16] on the joystick cannot be used.\\nWhen using functions, set the [Joystick Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) \\nmenu to [Fn]. (Î[Joystick Setting]: 550)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n507\\n3\\nFind the function to register.\\n≥Rotate \\n to select the sub tab where the function to register is \\ncategorized (ÎSetting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC \\nmode]): 509, Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY \\nmode]): 515) and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing \\n34 or rotating \\n, and then pressing 1.\\n≥Switch the [1] to [3] tabs by pressing [Q].\\n4\\nRegister the function.\\n≥Press 34 to select a function and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by rotating \\n or \\n.\\n• Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.\\n• Depending on the button, some functions cannot be registered.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n508\\n• You can also touch [\\n] on the control panel (ÎControl Panel: 696) to display \\nthe screen in Step2.\\n• You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in \\nStep4.\\n(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the \\nbutton type.)\\n• You can assign a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens:\\n(Î[Lens Fn Button Setting]: 569)\\nFn\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n509\\n™ Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode])\\n[1] tab\\n[Image Quality]\\n• [Exposure Comp.] (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)\\n• [Dual Native ISO Setting] (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290)\\n• [Sensitivity] (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n• [White Balance] (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)\\n• [Photo Style] (Î[Photo Style]: 301)\\n• [Apply LUT]\\n– Applies the LUT file that was set in [LUT] with either [REAL TIME LUT] or [MY \\nPHOTO STYLE]. (ÎAdjusting Image Quality: 306)\\n• [Metering Mode] (Î[Metering Mode]: 261)\\n• [Aspect Ratio] (Î[Aspect Ratio]: 116)\\n• [Picture Quality] (Î[Picture Quality]: 120)\\n• [Picture Size] (Î[Picture Size]: 118)\\n• [1 Shot Spot Metering]\\n– Records with the metering mode set to [\\n] (Spot metering) once only. \\n(Î[Metering Mode]: 261)\\n• [Long Exposure NR] (Î[Long Exposure NR]: 247)\\n• [Min. Shutter Speed] (Î[Min. Shutter Speed]: 248)\\n• [1 Shot RAW+JPG]\\n– Records a RAW image and a JPEG image simultaneously once only. (Î[Picture \\nQuality]: 120)\\n• [i.Dynamic Range] (Î[i.Dynamic Range]: 283)\\n• [Color Shading Compensation] (Î[Color Shading Compensation]: 324)\\n• [Filter Effect] (Î[Filter Settings]: 314)\\n• [One Push AE]\\n– Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to the settings suited for the standard \\nexposure determined by the camera. (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)\\n• [Touch AE] (ÎTouch AE: 110)\\n• [AWB Lock] (Î[AWB Lock Setting]: 537)\\n• [Exposure Mode] (ÎSetting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 352)\\n• [Synchro Scan] (Î[Synchro Scan]: 441)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n510\\n[Focus/Shutter]\\n• [AF Mode] (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\n• [AF Detection Setting] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168)\\n• [Detecting Subject] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168)\\n• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 154)\\n• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 360)\\n• [Focus Limiter] (Î[Focus Limiter]: 157)\\n• [Focus Limiter Range Set] (Î[Focus Limiter]: 157)\\n• [Focus Peaking] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195)\\n• [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195)\\n• [1-Area AF Moving Speed] (Î[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 160)\\n• [Focus Ring Lock] (Î[Focus Ring Lock]: 542)\\n• [AE LOCK] (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 284)\\n• [AF LOCK] (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 284)\\n• [AF/AE LOCK] (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 284)\\n• [AF-ON] (Î[AF ON] button: 151)\\n• [AF-ON : Near Shift]\\n– AF operates giving priority to close-up subjects. (ÎUsing AF: 149)\\n• [AF-ON : Far Shift]\\n– AF operates giving priority to distant subjects. (ÎUsing AF: 149)\\n• [Focus Area Set]\\n– Displays the AF area/MF Assist movement screens. (ÎAF Area Operations: 181, \\nOperations on the MF Assist Screen: 192)\\n• [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] (Î[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 361)\\n[Flash]\\n• [Flash Mode] (Î[Flash Mode]: 334)\\n• [Flash Adjust.] (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 339)\\n• [Wireless Flash Setup] (ÎRecording Using a Wireless Flash: 342)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n511\\n[Others (Photo)]\\n• [Drive Mode Setting] (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n• [Bracketing] (ÎBracket Recording: 233)\\n• [Silent Mode] (Î[Silent Mode]: 241)\\n• [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 255)\\n• [Shutter Type] (Î[Shutter Type]: 243)\\n• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (ÎExtended Tele Conversion: 199)\\n[2] tab\\n[Image Format]\\n• [Rec. File Format] (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)\\n• [Rec Quality] (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n• [Rec Quality (My List)] (ÎSetting or deleting in My List: 142)\\n• [Slow & Quick Setting] (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\n• [Time Code Display] (ÎTime Code: 389)\\n[Audio]\\n• [Audio Information] (Î[Audio Information]: 376)\\n• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 369)\\n• [Mute Sound Input] (Î[Mute Sound Input]: 370)\\n• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] (Î[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 372)\\n• [Sound Rec Quality] (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373)\\n• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] (Î[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 374)\\n• [4ch Mic Input] (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n• [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (ÎXLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 382)\\n• [Sound Monitoring Channel] (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel]: 387)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n512\\n[Others (Video)]\\n• [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 255)\\n• [E-Stabilization (Video)] (Î[E-Stabilization (Video)]: 253)\\n• [Boost I.S. (Video)] (Î[Boost I.S. (Video)]: 254)\\n• [Image Area of Video] (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\n• [Focus Transition] (Î[Focus Transition]: 419)\\n• [Live Cropping] (Î[Live Cropping]: 424)\\n[Operation]\\n• [Q.MENU] (ÎQuick Menu: 89)\\n• [Rec / Playback Switch]\\n– Switches to the playback screen. (ÎPlaying Back Pictures: 461, Playing Back \\nVideos: 463)\\n• [Video Record] (ÎBasic Video Operations: 123)\\n• [Video Record(Creative Video)]\\n– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [\\n] mode. (ÎSetting the \\nExposure for Recording Videos: 352)\\n• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (ÎSwitching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)\\n• [Operation Lock]\\n– A certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation to be disabled in \\n[Operation Lock Setup]. (Î[Operation Lock Setup]: 547)\\n• [Dial Operation Switch] (ÎTemporarily Change Dial Operation: 520)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n513\\n[Monitor / Display]\\n• [Preview] (ÎPreview Mode: 278)\\n• [Preview Aperture Effect]\\n– The aperture effect can be previewed while the Fn button is being pressed. \\n(ÎPreview Mode: 278)\\n• [Constant Preview] (Î[Constant Preview]: 552)\\n• [Level Gauge] (Î[Level Gauge]: 561)\\n• [Histogram] (Î[Histogram]: 553)\\n• [Luminance Spot Meter] (Î[Luminance Spot Meter]: 401)\\n• [Frame Marker] (Î[Frame Marker]: 405)\\n• [Photo Grid Line] (Î[Photo Grid Line]: 554)\\n• [Live View Boost] (Î[Live View Boost]: 554)\\n• [Monochrome Live View] (Î[Monochrome Live View]: 564)\\n• [Night Mode] (Î[Night Mode]: 555)\\n• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]\\n– Switches the displayed monitor or viewfinder display style. (Î[LVF/Monitor Disp. \\nSet]: 556)\\n• [Video-Priority Display] (Î[Video-Priority Display]: 566)\\n• [Zebra Pattern] (Î[Zebra Pattern]: 403)\\n• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 432)\\n• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 432)\\n• [LUT Select] (Î[LUT Select]: 432)\\n• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n• [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n• [Sheer Overlay] (Î[Sheer Overlay]: 559)\\n• [I.S. Status Scope] (Î[I.S. Status Scope]: 560)\\n• [WFM/Vector Scope] (Î[WFM/Vector Scope]: 397)\\n• [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 439)\\n• [Color Bars] (ÎColor Bars/Test Tone: 407)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n514\\n[3] tab\\n[Lens / Others]\\n• [Focus Ring Control] (Î[Focus Ring Control]: 570)\\n• [AF Micro Adjustment] (Î[AF Micro Adjustment]: 161)\\n• [Lens Information] (Î[Lens Information]: 258)\\n[Card/File]\\n• [Destination Card Slot]\\n– Changes the priority of cards for recording. This can be used if [Double Card Slot \\nFunction] (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 574) is set to [Relay Rec].\\n[IN/OUT]\\n• [Wi-Fi] (ÎWi-Fi / Bluetooth: 610)\\n• [Fan Mode] (Î[Fan Mode]: 568)\\n[Setting]\\n• [Save to Custom Mode] (ÎRegistering Instant Customization: 529)\\n[Others]\\n• [No Setting]\\n– Set when not using as an Fn button.\\n• [Off (Disable Press and Hold)]\\n– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not \\ndisplayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.\\n• [Restore to Default]\\n– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (ÎFn Button Default Settings: 503)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n515\\n™ Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode])\\n[1] tab\\n[Playback Mode]\\n• [Magnify from AF Point] (Î[Magnify from AF Point]: 494)\\n• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 494)\\n• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 495)\\n• [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 439)\\n[Process Image]\\n• [RAW Processing] (Î[RAW Processing]: 482)\\n[Add/Delete Info.]\\n• [Delete Single] (ÎDeleting Images: 480)\\n• [Protect] (Î[Protect]: 497)\\n• [Rating¿1] (Î[Rating]: 497)\\n• [Rating¿2] (Î[Rating]: 497)\\n• [Rating¿3] (Î[Rating]: 497)\\n• [Rating¿4] (Î[Rating]: 497)\\n• [Rating¿5] (Î[Rating]: 497)\\n[Edit Image]\\n• [Copy] (Î[Copy]: 500)\\n[Operation]\\n• [Rec / Playback Switch]\\n– Switches to the recording screen. (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113, Basic Video \\nOperations: 123)\\n• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (ÎSwitching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)\\n• [Video Record] (ÎBasic Video Operations: 123)\\n• [Video Record(Creative Video)]\\n– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [\\n] mode. (ÎSetting the \\nExposure for Recording Videos: 352)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n516\\n[Monitor / Display]\\n• [Night Mode] (Î[Night Mode]: 555)\\n[Card/File]\\n• [Card Slot Change] (ÎSwitching the Card to Display: 462)\\n[IN/OUT]\\n• [Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: 584)\\n• [Wi-Fi] (ÎWi-Fi / Bluetooth: 610)\\n• [Fan Mode] (Î[Fan Mode]: 568)\\n• [Send Image (Smartphone)] (ÎSending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone \\nwith Simple Operations: 626)\\n• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)\\n• [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n[2] tab\\n[Others]\\n• [No Setting]\\n– Set when not using as an Fn button.\\n• [Off (Disable Press and Hold)]\\n– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not \\ndisplayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.\\n• [Restore to Default]\\n– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (ÎFn Button Default Settings: 503)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Fn Buttons\\n517\\nUse the Fn Buttons\\nDuring recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions \\nregistered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the \\nfunctions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].\\n1\\nPress the Fn button.\\n2\\nSelect a setting item.\\n≥Press 21 to select a setting item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by rotating \\n, \\n or \\n.\\n• Display and selection methods of a setting item differ depending on the menu \\nitem.\\n™ Use [Fn3] to [Fn7] (Touch Icons)\\nDuring recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.\\n1\\nTouch [\\n].\\n2\\nTouch one of [Fn3] to [Fn7].\\n• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] \\nin [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\nFn4\\nFn4\\nFn4\\nFn3\\nFn3\\nFn3\\nFn7\\nFn7\\nFn7\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nFn6\\nFn6\\nFn6\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nFn5\\nFn5\\nFn5\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]\\n518\\n[Dial Operation Switch]\\n≥Register Functions to the Dials: 518\\n≥Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 520\\nThis temporarily changes the functions operated with \\n (front dial) and \\n (rear dial).\\nRegister Functions to the Dials\\n1\\nSelect [Dial Operation Switch Setup].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Dial Set.] ¨ [Dial Operation Switch Setup] \\n¨ [\\n]/[\\n]\\n2\\nRegister the function.\\n≥Press 34 to select a function and then press \\n or \\n.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]\\n519\\n™ Functions That Can Be Registered\\n• [Exposure Comp.] (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)\\n• [Sensitivity]*1 (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n• [White Balance]*2 (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)\\n• [Photo Style] (Î[Photo Style]: 301)\\n• [Aspect Ratio] (Î[Aspect Ratio]: 116)\\n• [i.Dynamic Range] (Î[i.Dynamic Range]: 283)\\n• [Filter Effect] (Î[Filter Settings]: 314)\\n• [AF Mode] (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\n• [Flash Mode] (Î[Flash Mode]: 334)\\n• [Flash Adjust.] (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 339)\\n*1\\n default setting\\n*2\\n default setting\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]\\n520\\nTemporarily Change Dial Operation\\n1\\nSet [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (ÎFn \\nButtons: 503)\\n2\\nSwitch dial operation.\\n≥Press the Fn button set in Step 1.\\n≥A guide will display the functions registered to \\n and \\n.\\n• If no operations are performed, then several seconds later, the guide \\ndisappears.\\n3\\nSet the registered function.\\n≥Rotate \\n or \\n while the guide is displayed.\\n4\\nConfirm your selection.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\nISO\\nISO\\nISO\\nISO\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nAWBc\\nAWBc AWBw\\nAWBw\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nWB\\nAWB\\nAWB\\nISO\\nISO\\nISO\\nISO\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Quick Menu Customization\\n521\\nQuick Menu Customization\\n≥Register to the Quick Menu: 521\\nYou can change Quick menu items depending on the recording mode.\\nAdditionally, you can change the items to display on the Quick menu and \\ntheir order to suit your preferences.\\nFor information about Quick menu operation methods (ÎQuick Menu: 89)\\nRegister to the Quick Menu\\nChange the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.\\nThese can be set separately for [\\n]/[S&Q] mode (Video) and for other \\nrecording modes (Photo).\\n1\\nSelect [Q.MENU Settings].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Q.MENU Settings] ¨ [Item Customize \\n(Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]\\n2\\nSelect the item position (1 to 12).\\n≥Press 3421 to select the position and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by rotating \\n.\\n≥Directions on the diagonal can also be selected using the joystick.\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Quick Menu Customization\\n522\\n3\\nFind the function to register.\\n≥Rotate \\n to select the sub tab where the function to register is \\ncategorized (ÎMenu Items That Can Be Registered: 523) and \\nthen press \\n or \\n.\\n≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing \\n34 or rotating \\n, and then pressing 1.\\n≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [2].\\n4\\nRegister menu items.\\n≥Press 34 to select an item and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Selection is also possible by rotating \\n or \\n.\\n• Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Quick Menu Customization\\n523\\n™ Menu Items That Can Be Registered\\n[1] tab\\n[Image Quality]\\n• [Exposure Comp.] (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)\\n• [Dual Native ISO Setting] (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290)\\n• [Sensitivity] (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n• [White Balance] (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)\\n• [Photo Style] (Î[Photo Style]: 301)\\n• [Metering Mode] (Î[Metering Mode]: 261)\\n• [Aspect Ratio] (Î[Aspect Ratio]: 116)\\n• [Picture Quality] (Î[Picture Quality]: 120)\\n• [Picture Size] (Î[Picture Size]: 118)\\n• [Long Exposure NR] (Î[Long Exposure NR]: 247)\\n• [Min. Shutter Speed] (Î[Min. Shutter Speed]: 248)\\n• [i.Dynamic Range] (Î[i.Dynamic Range]: 283)\\n• [Color Shading Compensation] (Î[Color Shading Compensation]: 324)\\n• [Filter Effect] (Î[Filter Settings]: 314)\\n• [Exposure Mode] (ÎSetting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 352)\\n• [Synchro Scan] (Î[Synchro Scan]: 441)\\n[Focus/Shutter]\\n• [AF Mode] (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\n• [AF Detection Setting] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168)\\n• [Detecting Subject] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168)\\n• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 154)\\n• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 360)\\n• [Focus Peaking] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195)\\n• [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195)\\n• [1-Area AF Moving Speed] (Î[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 160)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Quick Menu Customization\\n524\\n[Flash]\\n• [Flash Mode] (Î[Flash Mode]: 334)\\n• [Flash Adjust.] (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 339)\\n• [Wireless Flash Setup] (ÎRecording Using a Wireless Flash: 342)\\n[Others (Photo)]\\n• [Drive Mode Setting] (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\n• [Bracketing] (ÎBracket Recording: 233)\\n• [Silent Mode] (Î[Silent Mode]: 241)\\n• [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 255)\\n• [Shutter Type] (Î[Shutter Type]: 243)\\n• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (ÎExtended Tele Conversion: 199)\\n[Image Format]\\n• [Rec. File Format] (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)\\n• [Rec Quality] (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n• [Rec Quality (My List)] (Î[add to list]: 142)\\n• [Slow & Quick Setting] (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\n• [Time Code Display] (ÎTime Code: 389)\\n[Audio]\\n• [Audio Information] (Î[Audio Information]: 376)\\n• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 369)\\n• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] (Î[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 372)\\n• [Sound Rec Quality] (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373)\\n• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] (Î[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 374)\\n• [4ch Mic Input] (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n• [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (ÎXLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 382)\\n• [Sound Monitoring Channel] (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel]: 387)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Quick Menu Customization\\n525\\n[Others (Video)]\\n• [Image Stabilizer] (Î[Operation Mode]: 255)\\n• [E-Stabilization (Video)] (Î[E-Stabilization (Video)]: 253)\\n• [Boost I.S. (Video)] (Î[Boost I.S. (Video)]: 254)\\n• [Image Area of Video] (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\n• [Focus Transition] (Î[Focus Transition]: 419)\\n• [Live Cropping] (Î[Live Cropping]: 424)\\n[2] tab\\n[Monitor / Display]\\n• [Constant Preview] (Î[Constant Preview]: 552)\\n• [Level Gauge] (Î[Level Gauge]: 561)\\n• [Histogram] (Î[Histogram]: 553)\\n• [Luminance Spot Meter] (Î[Luminance Spot Meter]: 401)\\n• [Frame Marker] (Î[Frame Marker]: 405)\\n• [Photo Grid Line] (Î[Photo Grid Line]: 554)\\n• [Live View Boost] (Î[Live View Boost]: 554)\\n• [Monochrome Live View] (Î[Monochrome Live View]: 564)\\n• [Night Mode] (Î[Night Mode]: 555)\\n• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (Î[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 556)\\n• [Video-Priority Display] (Î[Video-Priority Display]: 566)\\n• [Zebra Pattern] (Î[Zebra Pattern]: 403)\\n• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 432)\\n• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 432)\\n• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n• [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n• [Sheer Overlay] (Î[Sheer Overlay]: 559)\\n• [I.S. Status Scope] (Î[I.S. Status Scope]: 560)\\n• [WFM/Vector Scope] (Î[WFM/Vector Scope]: 397)\\n• [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 439)\\n• [Color Bars] (ÎColor Bars/Test Tone: 407)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Quick Menu Customization\\n526\\n[Lens / Others]\\n• [Focus Ring Control] (Î[Focus Ring Control]: 570)\\n• [Lens Information] (Î[Lens Information]: 258)\\n[Card/File]\\n• [Destination Card Slot] (ÎSwitching the Card to Display: 462)\\n[IN/OUT]\\n• [Wi-Fi] (ÎWi-Fi / Bluetooth: 610)\\n• [Fan Mode] (Î[Fan Mode]: 568)\\n[Others]\\n• [No Setting]\\n– Set when not using.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Quick Menu Customization\\n527\\n™ Quick Menu Detailed Settings\\nChange the appearance of the Quick menu and the operation of \\n \\nduring menu display.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Q.MENU Settings]\\n[Layout Style]\\nChanges the appearance of the Quick menu.\\n[MODE1]: Displays the live view and the menu simultaneously.\\n[MODE2]: Displays the menu in full screen.\\n[Front Dial Assignment]\\nChanges the operation of \\n in the Quick menu.\\n[Item]: Selects menu items.\\n[Value]: Selects setting values.\\n[Item Customize (Photo)]\\nCustomizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M].\\n[Item Customize (Video)]\\nCustomizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [\\n]/[S&Q].\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Custom Mode\\n528\\nCustom Mode\\n≥Register in Custom Mode: 529\\n≥Using Custom Mode: 531\\n≥Calling Up Settings: 532\\nRecording modes and menu settings that match your preferences can be \\nregistered in Custom mode. You can use registered settings by switching \\nthe mode dial to [C1] to [C3] modes.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Custom Mode\\n529\\nRegister in Custom Mode\\nYou can register the currently set information of the camera.\\nAt the time of purchase, the default settings of the [P] mode menus are \\nregistered with all Custom modes.\\n1\\nSet to recording mode and menu settings of the state \\nyou wish to save.\\n2\\nSelect [Save to Custom Mode].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Save to Custom Mode]\\n3\\nRegister.\\n≥Select the save-to number and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• A confirmation screen will be displayed. Press [DISP.] to change the Custom \\nmode name.\\nHow to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n™ Registering Instant Customization\\nWhen you press the Fn button registered with [Save to Custom Mode] in \\nthe recording standby screen, you can quickly register the current \\nrecording settings in the Custom mode. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n• You cannot register [iA] mode in Custom mode.\\n• List of settings that can be registered in Custom mode (ÎList of Default Settings/\\nCustom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 750)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Custom Mode\\n530\\n™ Custom Mode Detailed Settings\\nYou can create additional Custom mode sets, and how long to retain \\ntemporarily changed settings details.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Custom Mode Settings]\\n[Limit No. of Custom Mode]\\nSets the number of Custom modes that can be registered in [C3].\\nA maximum of 10 sets can be registered; 3 sets are available as default settings.\\n[Edit Title]\\nChanges the Custom mode name.\\nA maximum of 22 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two \\ncharacters.\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n[How to Reload Custom Mode]\\nSets the timing at which to return the settings that were changed temporarily while the \\nCustom mode was being used to their registered settings.\\n[Change Recording Mode]/[Return from Sleep Mode]/[Turn the Power ON]\\n[Select Loading Details]\\nSets the types of settings to call up with [Load Custom Mode].\\n[F / SS / ISO Sensitivity]: Enables calling up of aperture value, shutter speed, and \\nISO sensitivity settings.\\n[White Balance]: Enables calling up of white balance settings.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Custom Mode\\n531\\nUsing Custom Mode\\nSet the recording mode to [C1] to [C3].\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n≥If [C3], the last-used Custom mode will be called up.\\n™ [C3] Custom Mode Selection\\n1\\nSet the recording mode to [C3].\\n2\\nPress \\n.\\n• The Custom mode selection menu appears.\\n3\\nPress 34 to select the Custom mode and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• The selected Custom mode icon will be displayed on the recording screen.\\n™ Changing Registered Details\\nRegistered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings \\ntemporarily with the mode dial set to [C1] to [C3].\\nTo change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Save to Custom \\nMode] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – Custom Mode\\n532\\nCalling Up Settings\\nCall up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode \\nand overwrite the current settings with these.\\n1\\nSet to the recording mode to be used.\\n≥Set the mode dial. (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n2\\nSelect [Load Custom Mode].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Load Custom Mode]\\n3\\nSelect the Custom mode to call up.\\n≥Select the Custom mode and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Calling up of Custom modes is not possible between those created from [P]/[A]/\\n[S]/[M] modes and those created from [\\n]/[S&Q] mode.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n533\\n[Custom] Menu\\n≥[Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 534\\n≥[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 540\\n≥[Custom] menu ([Operation]): 546\\n≥[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]): 552\\n≥[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 563\\n≥[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 567\\n≥[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 569\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n534\\n[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])\\n[Photo Style Settings]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Show/Hide Photo Style]\\n[Vivid] / [Natural] / [L.ClassicNeo] / \\n[Flat] / [Landscape] / [Portrait] / \\n[L.Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome D] / \\n[L.Monochrome S] / [Cinelike D2] / \\n[Cinelike V2] / [Like709] / [V-Log] / \\n[REAL TIME LUT] / [Like2100(HLG)] / \\n[Like2100(HLG) Full Range] / [MY \\nPHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO \\nSTYLE 10]\\nSets Photo Style items to be displayed on the menu.\\n[My Photo Style Settings]\\n[Add Effects]\\n[Load Preset Setting]\\nEnables detailed image quality adjustment settings for My Photo Style.\\n[Add Effects]: Enables [Dual Native ISO Setting], [Sensitivity], and [White Balance] \\nsettings in image quality adjustment.\\n[Load Preset Setting]: Sets the timing at which image quality adjustment values \\nchanged in My Photo Style are returned to their registered state.\\n[Reset Photo Style]\\nReturns details changed in [Photo Style] and [Photo Style Settings] to their default \\nsettings.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n535\\n[LUT Library]\\n[ISO Increments]\\n[Extended ISO]\\n`[Vlog_709] / [Set1] to [Set10]\\nRegisters LUT files to the camera.\\n(Î[LUT Library]: 320)\\n`[1/3 EV] / [1 EV]\\nChanges the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment values.\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nExtends the setting range of ISO sensitivity.\\n• The extendible range depends on the [Dual Native ISO Setting] (Î[Dual Native \\nISO Setting]: 290).\\n– When set to [AUTO]: Lower limit can be extended to [50] and the upper limit can \\nbe extended to [204800]\\n– When set to [LOW]: Lower limit can be extended to [50]\\n– When set to [HIGH]: Lower limit can be extended to [320] and the upper limit can \\nbe extended to [204800]\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n536\\n[Exposure Offset Adjust.]\\n[Face Priority In Multi Metering]\\n[Multi Metering]\\n[−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV])\\n[Center Weighted]\\n[−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV])\\n[Spot]\\n[−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV])\\n[Highlight Weighted]\\n[−1EV] to [+1EV] (`[±0EV])\\nAdjusts the exposure level that is the standard exposure for each setting item of \\n[Metering Mode].\\nAdds the adjustment value from this function to the exposure compensation value \\n(ÎExposure Compensation: 280) when recording.\\n• For video recording, it is not possible to add an adjustment value of a range that \\nexceeds ±3 EV.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nWhen [Metering Mode] is set to [\\n] (Multi-metering), the metering range for \\nautomatic exposure is prioritized on the face and eyes.\\nWhen set to [OFF], the change to exposure caused by the [FACE/EYE] automatic \\ndetection function can be avoided.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n537\\n[AWB Lock Setting]\\n[Operation Syncs With Shutter]\\n[WHILE PRESSING] / [DURING BURST \\nSHOOTING] / `[OFF]\\n[Lock Hold With Fn Button]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nFixes the white balance while you are pressing the shutter button or the Fn button \\nwhen white balance is auto ([AWB]/[AWBc]/[AWBw]).\\nThis prevents the white balance from changing unintentionally while pressing the \\nshutter button halfway, during burst recording, or while recording videos.\\n[Operation Syncs With Shutter]\\n[WHILE PRESSING]: Fixes white balance while pressing the shutter button \\n(including while pressing halfway or during burst recording).\\n[DURING BURST SHOOTING]: Fixes white balance during burst recording.\\n[OFF]: White balance is not fixed.\\n[Lock Hold With Fn Button]\\n[ON]: When you press the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white balance \\nis fixed. Press again to cancel the lock.\\n[OFF]: While you are pressing the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white \\nbalance is fixed.\\n• [AWBL] is displayed on the screen while white balance is locked.\\n• [Operation Syncs With Shutter] does not work in [\\n]/[S&Q] mode.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n538\\n[Color Space]\\n[Exposure Comp. Reset]\\n[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]\\n`[sRGB] / [AdobeRGB]\\nThis sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of the recorded images on \\nthe screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.\\n[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar devices.\\n[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as \\nprofessional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than \\nsRGB.\\n• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.\\n• When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [sRGB]:\\n– Video recording\\n– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style])\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThis resets the exposure value when you change the recording mode or turn off the \\ncamera.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nSelects the setting method for aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity \\nwhen recording video in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.\\n[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.\\n[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n539\\n[CreativeVideo Combined Set.]\\n[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[White Balance]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[Photo Style]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[Metering Mode]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[AF Mode]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\nContent set in [\\n] mode can be separated from when taking pictures.\\n(ÎSeparating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 356)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n540\\n[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter])\\n[Focus/Shutter Priority]\\n[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]\\n[AF/AE Lock Hold]\\n`: Default settings\\n[AFS]\\n`[FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE]\\n[AFC]\\n[FOCUS] / `[BALANCE] / [RELEASE]\\nThis sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF.\\n[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.\\n[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing \\nand shutter release timing.\\n[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThis stores separate AF area positions (MF positions for MF Assist) for when the \\ncamera is held vertically and when it is held horizontally.\\n(Î[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 189)\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThis sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.\\nTurning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the button until it is pressed \\nagain.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n541\\n[AF+MF]\\n[MF Assist]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nWhen the focus mode is set to [AFS], you can fine-adjust the focus manually during \\nAF Lock.\\n• When the shutter button is pressed halfway\\n• When [AF ON] is pressed\\n• When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE LOCK]\\n[Focus Ring]\\n(When an interchangeable lens with a \\nfocus ring is attached)\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[AF Mode]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Press Joystick]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[MF Assist Display]\\n[FULL] / `[PIP]\\nThis sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).\\n[Focus Ring]: The screen is enlarged by focusing with the lens.\\n[AF Mode]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [\\n].\\n[Press Joystick]: Press the joystick to enlarge the display. (if [Joystick Setting] is \\nset to [D.FOCUS Movement]) (Î[Joystick Setting]: 550)\\n[MF Assist Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode) of \\nMF Assist (enlarged screen).\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n542\\n[MF Guide]\\n[Focus Ring Lock]\\n[Show/Hide AF Mode]\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / [OFF]\\n*\\nDefault setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the \\ncamera was purchased.\\nDuring MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording distance, is displayed on \\nthe screen. You can select from meters or feet for the display unit.\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThis disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the focus.\\n• [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked.\\n[Tracking]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Full Area AF]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Zone]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[1-Area+]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Pinpoint]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nSets the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection screen.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n543\\n[Pinpoint AF Setting]\\n[Shutter AF]\\n[Eye Detection Display]\\n[Pinpoint AF Time]\\n[LONG] / `[MID] / [SHORT]\\n[Pinpoint AF Display]\\n[FULL] / `[PIP]\\nChanges enlarged screen settings displayed when AF mode is [\\n].\\n[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter \\nbutton is pressed halfway.\\n[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode) \\nof the enlarged screen.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nThis adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nWhen set to [OFF], you can make the cross for eye/face detection disappear when \\nfocus is aligned by pressing the shutter button halfway, etc.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n544\\n[Half-Press Shutter]\\n[Assign REC to Shutter Button]\\n[Quick AF]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nYou can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nUse the shutter button for the start/stop operation of video recording in the [\\n] \\nmode.\\nThe start/stop operation of video recording using the shutter button can be disabled \\nwhen set to [OFF].\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nWhen the amount of camera shake becomes small, the camera will automatically \\nadjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is \\npressed.\\n• The battery will drain faster than usual.\\n• This function is not available in the following cases:\\n– In preview mode\\n– In low light situations\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n545\\n[Eye Sensor AF]\\n[Looped Focus Frame]\\n[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nWhen looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor operates, then AF will \\nfunction.\\n• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in low light situations.\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nWhen moving the AF area, MF Assist, or video enlarged display of live view, this \\nenables looping from one edge to the opposite edge of the screen.\\n[Keep Enlarged Display]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[PIP Display]\\n[FULL] / `[PIP]\\nSets the operation of the function for enlarging the video live view (Î[Enlarged Live \\nDisplay(Video)]: 361).\\n[Keep Enlarged Display]\\n[ON]: Enlarges display after releasing the Fn button until the button is pressed \\nagain.\\n[OFF]: Enlarges display just while the Fn button is being pressed.\\n[PIP Display]\\nSets the way the enlarged screen is displayed (full screen mode/windowed mode).\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n546\\n[Custom] menu ([Operation])\\n[Q.MENU Settings]\\n[Touch Settings]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Layout Style]\\n`[MODE1] / [MODE2]\\n[Front Dial Assignment]\\n[Item] / `[Value]\\n[Item Customize (Photo)]\\n[Item Customize (Video)]\\nCustomizes the Quick menu.\\n(ÎQuick Menu Customization: 521)\\n[Touch Screen]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Touch Tab]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[Touch AF]\\n`[AF] / [AF+AE]\\n[Touch Pad AF]\\n[EXACT] / [OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7] / \\n`[OFF]\\nEnables touch operation on the monitor display.\\n[Touch Screen]: All touch operations.\\n[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [\\n] on the right side of the screen.\\n[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a touched subject. \\nAlternatively, operation to optimize both the focus and brightness ([AF+AE]). \\n(ÎFocus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 186)\\n[Touch Pad AF]: Touch pad operation during viewfinder display. (ÎMoving the AF \\nArea Position with the Touch Pad: 187)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n547\\n[Operation Lock Setup]\\n[Fn Button Set]\\n[Cursor]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[Joystick]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[Touch Screen]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[Dial]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\n[DISP. Button]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\nThis sets the control functions to be disabled with the Fn button [Operation Lock]. \\n(Only for recording screen)\\n[Cursor]: Cursor buttons, [MENU/SET] button, and \\n[Joystick]: Joystick\\n[Touch Screen]: Touch screen\\n[Dial]: \\n, \\n, and \\n[DISP. Button]: [DISP.] button\\n[Setting in REC mode]\\n[Setting in PLAY mode]\\nRegisters a function to the Fn button.\\n(ÎRegister Functions to the Fn Buttons: 506)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n548\\n[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]\\n[ISO Displayed Setting]\\n[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]\\n[WHILE PRESSING] / [AFTER PRESSING1] / `[AFTER PRESSING2]\\nThis sets the operation to be performed when [WB] (White balance), [ISO] (ISO \\nsensitivity) or [\\n] (Exposure compensation) is pressed.\\n[WHILE PRESSING]: Allows you to change the setting while pressing and holding \\nthe button. Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to return to the \\nrecording screen.\\n[AFTER PRESSING1]: Press the button to change settings. Press the button again \\nto confirm the settings value, and to return to the recording screen.\\n[AFTER PRESSING2]: Press the button to change settings. Each press of the \\nbutton switches the settings value. (Except that of exposure compensation) To \\nconfirm your selection and return to the recording screen, press the shutter button \\nhalfway.\\n[Front/Rear Dials]\\n`[\\n/\\n] / [\\n/\\n] / [OFF/\\n] /\\n[\\n/\\n] / [\\n/OFF]\\nThis sets the operations of the dials in the setting screen for ISO sensitivity.\\nAssigning [\\n] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting].\\n[Cursor Buttons (Up/Down)]\\n[\\n] / `[OFF]\\nThis sets the operations of the 34 buttons in the exposure compensation screen.\\nAssigning [\\n] lets you set exposure bracketing.\\n[Front/Rear Dials]\\n`[\\n/\\n] / [\\n/\\n] / [OFF/\\n] /\\n[\\n/\\n] / [\\n/OFF]\\nThis sets the operations of the dials in the exposure compensation screen.\\nAssigning [\\n] lets you adjust flash output.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n549\\n[Dial Set.]\\n[Assign Dial (F/SS)]\\n`[SET1] / [SET2] / [SET3] / [SET4] / \\n[SET5]\\nSets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.\\n: Program Shift, F: Aperture value, SS: Shutter speed\\n[P]\\n[A]\\n[S]\\n[M]\\n[SET1]\\nF\\nSS\\nF\\nF\\nSS\\nSS\\n[SET2]\\n—\\nF\\n—\\nF\\n—\\nSS\\nSS\\n[SET3]\\n—\\n—\\nSS\\nSS\\nF\\n—\\nF\\n[SET4]\\n—\\n—\\n—\\nF\\nF\\nSS\\nSS\\n[SET5]\\nF\\nSS\\nF\\n—\\n—\\n—\\nSS\\n[Rotation (F/SS)]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n]\\nChanges the rotational directions of the dials for aperture value and shutter speed \\nadjustment.\\n[Control Dial Assignment]\\n`[\\n] ([Headphone Volume]) /\\n[\\n/\\n] ([Exposure / Aperture]) /\\n[\\n] ([Exposure Comp.]) /\\n[\\n] ([Sensitivity]) /\\n[\\n] ([Focus Frame Size])\\nSets the function to be assigned to \\n on the recording screen.\\n[\\n/\\n]: In [M] mode, this assigns the operation to adjust the aperture value. In \\nother than [M] mode, this assigns the operation of exposure compensation.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n550\\n[Joystick Setting]\\n[Exposure Comp.]\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / `[OFF]\\nAssigns exposure compensation to \\n or \\n. (Except in [M] mode)\\n• The [Assign Dial (F/SS)] setting takes priority.\\n[Dial Operation Switch Setup]\\n[\\n]\\n[\\n]\\nIn the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the functions to be registerd \\ntemporarily to \\n or \\n. (ÎRegister Functions to the Dials: 518)\\n[Rotation (Menu Operation)]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n] / \\n[\\n] / [\\n]\\nChanges the rotational direction of the dials when operating menus.\\n`[D.FOCUS Movement] / [Fn] / [MENU] / [OFF]\\nSets the joystick movement on the recording screen.\\n[D.FOCUS Movement]: Moves the AF area and MF Assist. (ÎAF Area Operations: \\n181, Record Using MF: 190)\\n[Fn]: Operates as Fn buttons.\\n[MENU]: Operates as \\n. Operations that can be performed by moving the \\njoystick are disabled.\\n[OFF]: Disables the joystick.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n551\\n[Video Rec. Button (Remote)]\\nYou can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter Remote \\nControl (optional).\\n(ÎShutter Remote Control (Optional): 684)\\n• [Video Record] is registered in the default setting.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n552\\n[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)])\\n[Auto Review]\\n[Constant Preview]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Duration Time (photo)]\\n[HOLD] / [5SEC] to [0.5SEC] / `[OFF]\\n[Playback Operation Priority]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThis displays an image immediately after it is recorded.\\n[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when taking pictures.\\n[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON], you can toggle the \\nplayback screen during Auto Review, or delete pictures.\\n• If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image recorded stays displayed \\nuntil the shutter button is pressed halfway.\\n[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[SET]\\n[Effect]\\n[Preview While MF Assist]\\nYou can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in [A]/\\n[M] mode.\\nYou can also confirm the shutter speed at the same time when in [M] mode.\\n• You can set the combination of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect in \\n[Effect].\\n• Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when [Preview While MF Assist] is \\nset to [ON].\\n• The preview of the shutter speed effect does not work when using a flash.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n553\\n[Histogram]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThis displays the histogram.\\nTurning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.\\nPress 3421 to set the position.\\nPositions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.\\n• You can also move the position by dragging the histogram on the recording \\nscreen.\\n• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis, and the \\nnumber of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.\\nBy looking at the distribution of the graph, you can determine the current \\nexposure.\\n(A) Dark\\n(B) Bright\\n• When the recorded image and the histogram do not match each other under the \\nfollowing conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange:\\n– During exposure compensation\\n– When the flash fires\\n– When the standard exposure is not achieved, such as in low light situations.\\n• When the following function is being used, the [Histogram] is not available:\\n– [WFM/Vector Scope]\\n• The histogram is an approximation in the recording mode.\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n554\\n[Photo Grid Line]\\n[Live View Boost]\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / `[OFF]\\nSets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording screen.\\nWhen using [\\n], you can press 3421 to set the position.\\nPositions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.\\n• When using [\\n], you can also drag [\\n] on the grid lines on the recording \\nscreen to move the position.\\n[MODE1] / [MODE2] / `[OFF]\\n[SET]\\n[P/A/S/M] / `[M]\\nDisplays the screen brighter to make it easier to check subjects and compositions \\neven in low-light environment.\\n[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a soft display.\\n[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to image visibility.\\n• You can change the recording mode in which [Live View Boost] works by using \\n[SET].\\n• This mode does not affect recorded images.\\n• Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the recorded image.\\n• This function does not work in the following cases:\\n– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is pressed halfway, for \\nexample)\\n– When recording a video\\n– When using [Filter Settings]\\n– When displaying the shutter speed effect of [Constant Preview]\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n555\\n[Night Mode]\\n[Monitor]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[LVF]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nDisplays the monitor and viewfinder in red.\\nIn dark environments, this reduces brightness of the screen that can make the \\nsurroundings difficult to see.\\nYou can also set the luminance of the red display.\\n1\\nPress 3421 to select [ON] on the monitor or viewfinder (LVF).\\n2\\nPress [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment screen.\\n• Display the monitor to adjust the monitor, and display the viewfinder to adjust \\nthe viewfinder.\\n3\\nPress 21 to adjust luminance and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• This effect is not applied to images output via HDMI.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n556\\n[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]\\n[LVF Disp. Set]\\n[\\n] / `[\\n]\\n[Monitor Disp. Set]\\n[\\n] / `[\\n]\\nSelects whether to show the live view without covering the information display, or to \\ndisplay over the entire screen.\\n[\\n]: Scales down images slightly so you can better review the composition of the \\nimages.\\n[\\n]: Scales images to fill the entire screen so you can see their details.\\n• You can assign the function that switches the currently displayed monitor or \\nviewfinder display style to an Fn button. (Î[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 513)\\n999\\n±0\\nAFS\\nAFS\\nL\\nFINE\\n999\\n±0\\nL\\nAFS\\nAFS\\nFINE\\nISO\\nAUTO\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n557\\n[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)]\\n`[AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]\\n[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]\\n`[AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]\\nYou can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of the \\nmonitor during recording.\\n[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)]\\n[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips horizontally according to the angle to which \\nthe monitor is opened or closed.\\n[ON]: The screen is flipped horizontally all the time.\\n[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.\\n[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]\\n[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips vertically according to the angle to which the \\nmonitor is rotated.\\n[ON]: The screen is flipped vertically all the time.\\n[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.\\n• The settings for this function are not reflected in the playback screen.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n558\\n[Expo.Meter]\\n[Focal Length]\\n[Blinking Highlights]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThis displays the exposure meter.\\n• Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting \\naperture, and setting shutter speed.\\n• If no operations are performed for a certain period of time, the exposure meter \\ndisappears.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nDisplays the focal length on the recording screen during zoom control.\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nOverexposed areas appear blinking in black and white during Auto Review or \\nplayback.\\n• The display without the highlights is added to the display shown when [DISP.] is \\npressed in the playback screen.\\nUse this to delete the highlight display. (ÎPlayback Screen: 88)\\nF5.6\\n30\\nSS\\nSS\\nF\\n125\\n60\\n30\\n15\\n8\\n5.6\\n4.0\\n8.0\\n11\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n559\\n[Sheer Overlay]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[SET]\\n[Transparency]\\n[Image Select]\\n[Reset at Power Off]\\n[Disp. Image (shutter-press)]\\nA picture that has been recorded or an image extracted from a video is overlayed on \\nthe recording screen.\\n1\\nUse [Image Select] and select a picture or video to display.\\n• Press 21 to select a picture or video and then press \\n or \\n to \\nconfirm.\\n2\\n(When a video is selected) Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a \\npicture.\\n• Press 3 to pause playback.\\n• To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward \\nframe-by-frame).\\n3\\n(When a video is selected) Set a picture.\\n• Press \\n or \\n.\\n• If you set [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] to [OFF], [Sheer Overlay] is canceled while \\nthe shutter button is being pressed halfway or pressed fully.\\n• The picture extracted from video is saved.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Sheer Overlay] is not available:\\n– Video recording\\n– [Stop Motion Animation]\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n560\\n[I.S. Status Scope]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nDisplays a reference point (C) on the recording screen in order to let you check for \\ncamera shake.\\n• [I.S. Status Scope] does not work in the following cases:\\n– When [Operation Mode] in [Image Stabilizer] is set to [OFF]\\n– When the O.I.S. switch on the lens is [OFF]\\n• When the following function is being used, [I.S. Status Scope] is not available:\\n– Video recording\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n561\\n[Level Gauge]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nDisplays the level gauge which is useful in correcting camera tilt.\\n(D) Horizontal\\n(E) Vertical\\n(F) Green (no tilt)\\n• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. ±1o.\\n• When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level gauge \\nmay not be displayed correctly.\\n• You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level Gauge \\nAdjust.] in the [Setup] ([Monitor / Display]) menu. (Î[Level Gauge Adjust.]: 582)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n(F)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n562\\n[Luminance Spot Meter]\\n[Framing Outline]\\n[Show/Hide Monitor Layout]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nSpecify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small area.\\n(Î[Luminance Spot Meter]: 401)\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nDisplays the outline for the live view.\\n[Control Panel]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Black Screen]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nDisplays the control panel and black screen when switching between displays using \\n[DISP.] button. (ÎRecording Screen: 86)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n563\\n[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)])\\n[V-Log View Assist]\\n[HLG View Assist]\\n[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]\\n`: Default settings\\n[LUT Select]\\n[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nYou can show images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder, or output them \\nvia HDMI.\\n(Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)\\n[Monitor]\\n[MODE1] / `[MODE2] / [OFF]\\n[HDMI]\\n`[AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]\\nAt recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted color \\ngamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs these over \\nHDMI.\\n(Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / `[OFF]\\nThis displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic \\nlens on this camera.\\n(Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 439)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n564\\n[Monochrome Live View]\\n[Center Marker]\\n[Safety Zone Marker]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nYou can display the recording screen in black and white.\\n• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the output image will not be \\ndisplayed in black and white.\\n• [Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night Mode] is used.\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / `[OFF]\\nThe center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].\\nThe shape of the marker can be changed.\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / `[OFF]\\n[SET]\\n[Size]\\n[95%]\\n`[90%]\\n[80%]\\nThis displays the safety zone, which shows a guide to the area that would be shown \\non a household TV, on the recording screen.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n565\\n[Frame Marker]\\n[Zebra Pattern]\\n[WFM/Vector Scope]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[SET]\\n[Frame Aspect]\\n[Frame Color]\\n[Frame Mask]\\nA frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.\\n[Frame Aspect] can also be customized.\\n(Î[Frame Marker]: 405)\\n[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] / [ZEBRA1+2] / `[OFF]\\n[SET]\\n[Zebra 1]\\n[Zebra 2]\\nParts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.\\n(Î[Zebra Pattern]: 403)\\n[WAVE] / [VECTOR] / `[OFF]\\nThis displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording screen.\\n(Î[WFM/Vector Scope]: 397)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n566\\n[Color Bars]\\n[Video-Priority Display]\\n[Red REC Frame Indicator]\\n[SMPTE] / [EBU] / [ARIB]\\nThe color bars are displayed on the recording screen.\\n(ÎColor Bars/Test Tone: 407)\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nWhen in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, switch the recording screen display and the \\ncontrol panel to suit video recording, as with the [\\n]/[S&Q] mode.\\nThe playback screen also switches to a display that prioritizes video.\\n• When set to a setting where video recording is not available, [Video-Priority \\nDisplay] is fixed to [OFF].\\n• [Video-Priority Display] works only during video recording when using the following \\nfunctions:\\n– [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– [Stop Motion Animation]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nA red frame is displayed on the recording screen that indicates that video is being \\nrecorded.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n567\\n[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])\\n[HDMI Rec Output]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Info Display] (ÎOutputting the Camera \\nInformation Display via HDMI: 457)\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[HDMI Recording Control] (ÎOutputting \\nControl Information to an External \\nRecorder: 458)\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\n[Sound Output (HDMI)] (ÎOutputting \\nAudio via HDMI: 459)\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Enlarged Live Display] (ÎOutputting the \\nEnlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: \\n459)\\n[MODE1] / [MODE2] / `[OFF]\\nSets HDMI output during recording.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n568\\n[Fan Mode]\\n[AUTO1] / `[AUTO2] / [FAST] / [NORMAL] / [SLOW] / [OFF]\\nSets fan operation.\\n[AUTO1]: The camera switches [SLOW]/[NORMAL] automatically according to the \\ntemperature of the camera. This setting prioritizes controlling rises in temperature in \\nthe camera.\\n[AUTO2]: The camera switches [OFF]/[SLOW]/[NORMAL] automatically according \\nto the temperature of the camera.\\n[FAST]: The fan operates constantly at fast speed.\\n[NORMAL]: The fan operates constantly at a standard speed.\\n[SLOW]: The fan operates constantly at low speed.\\n[OFF]: The fan does not operate.\\n• [OFF] can be set when in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] mode.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [SLOW] is not available.\\nWhen the following functions are used while set to [SLOW], the setting switches to \\n[AUTO1]:\\n– [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of \\n60.00p\\n– [Slow & Quick Setting] exceeding a frame rate of 60 fps\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n569\\n[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others])\\n[Lens Focus Resume]\\n[Lens Fn Button Setting]\\n`: Default settings\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nThe camera saves the focus position when you turn it off.\\n`[Focus Stop] / [AF Mode] / [AF Detection Setting] / [Detecting Subject] / [Focus \\nRing Lock] / [AE LOCK] / [AF LOCK] / [AF/AE LOCK] / [AF-ON] / [AF-ON : Near \\nShift] / [AF-ON : Far Shift] / [Focus Area Set] / [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] / \\n[Image Stabilizer] / [Preview] / [Preview Aperture Effect] / [No Setting] / [Off (Disable \\nPress and Hold)] / [Restore to Default]\\nRegister a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens.\\n• When [Focus Stop] is set, focus is fixed while the focus button is being pressed.\\n• When using an interchangeable lens that has a switch for the image stabilizer \\n(normal/panning), [Image Stabilizer] in [Lens Fn Button Setting] is not available.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n570\\n[Focus Ring Control]\\n[AF Micro Adjustment]\\n`[NON-LINEAR] / [LINEAR]\\n[SET]\\n[90°] to [1080°] (`[300°]) / [Maximum]\\nSets the amount of movement for focusing using the focus ring. (When using \\nsupported lenses)\\n[NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according to rotation speed of the \\nfocus ring.\\n[LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according to the rotational angle of \\nthe focus ring.\\n• When using lenses equipped with focus clutch mechanisms, set the lens to AF \\nand the camera to MF.\\n[SET]: Sets the rotational angle of the focus ring for when [LINEAR] is selected.\\n• Angles that cannot be set with the attached lens are not displayed.\\n[ALL] / [ADJUST BY LENS] / `[OFF]\\nYou can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with phase \\ndetection AF.\\n(Î[AF Micro Adjustment]: 161)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Custom] Menu\\n571\\n[Lens Information]\\n[Lens Info. Confirmation]\\n[Vertical Position Info (Video)]\\n[Lens1] to [Lens12] (`[Lens1])\\nWhen using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera, \\nregister the lens information in the camera.\\n• This is linked with [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer] under the [Photo] \\n([Others (Photo)]) menu. (Î[Lens Information]: 258)\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nWhen you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function with \\nthis camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens information is displayed \\nwhen you turn on the camera.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nYou can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information \\nduring video recording.\\n[ON]: Records vertical orientation information. Videos recorded with the camera held \\nvertically will be automatically played back vertically on the PC, smartphone, etc. \\nduring playback.\\n[OFF]: Does not record vertical orientation information.\\n• On the playback screen of the camera, only the thumbnail display is played in \\nvertical orientation.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n572\\n[Setup] Menu\\n≥[Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 573\\n≥[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 578\\n≥[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 583\\n≥[Setup] menu ([Setting]): 588\\n≥[Setup] menu ([Others]): 590\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n573\\n[Setup] menu ([Card/File])\\n[Card Format]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]\\nFormats the card (initialization).\\nFormat the cards with the camera before use.\\n• When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased and \\ncannot be restored.\\nSave a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.\\n• Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.\\n• Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.\\n• If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with the \\ncamera.\\n• You can format the card while keeping the camera settings information stored on \\nthe card. (Î[Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 589)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n574\\n[Double Card Slot Function]\\n[Recording Method]\\n`[\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n]\\nThis sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.\\n[Relay Rec]: Selects the priority of card slots for recording.\\n[Destination Card Slot]: [\\n]/[\\n]\\nRelays recording to the card in the other card slot after the first card runs out of free \\nspace.\\n• You can assign the function that changes the card which is prioritized for recording \\nto an Fn button. (Î[Destination Card Slot]: 514)\\n[Backup Rec]: Records the same images to both cards simultaneously.\\n[Allocation Rec]: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for \\ndifferent image formats.\\n[JPEG Destination]/[RAW Destination]/[Video Destination]\\nNotes about relay recording\\n• The following video cannot be continued to be recorded on another card:\\n– [Loop Recording (video)]\\nNotes about Backup Recording\\n• We recommend using cards with the same Speed Class rating and capacity.\\nIf the card Speed Class or capacity is insufficient when video recording, recording \\nto both cards stops.\\n• Backup recording is not available with the following video. They can only be \\nrecorded on a single card:\\n– [Loop Recording (video)]\\n• When using the following combinations of cards, backup recording for videos is \\nnot available:\\n– SD/SDHC memory cards and SDXC memory cards\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n575\\n[Folder / File Settings]\\n[Select Folder] / [Create a New Folder] / [File Name Setting]\\nSet the folder and file name where to save the images.\\nFolder name\\n(1)\\nFolder number (3 numeric characters, 100 to 999)\\n(2)\\n5-character user-defined segment\\nFile name\\n(3)\\nColor space ([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)\\n(4)\\n3-character user-defined segment\\n(5)\\nFile number (4 numeric characters, 0001 to 9999)\\n(6)\\nExtension\\n[Select Folder]: Selects a folder for storing images.\\n• When [Double Card Slot Function] is set to [Allocation Rec], [Select Folder (Slot \\n1)] and [Select Folder (Slot 2)] will be displayed.\\n[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.\\n• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the folder \\nnumber is displayed.\\n[OK]:\\nIncrements the folder number without changing the 5-character user-defined \\nsegment ((2) above).\\n[Change]:\\nChanges the 5-character user-defined segment ((2) above). This will also increment \\nthe folder number.\\n100ABCDE\\n(1)\\n(2)\\nPABC0001.JPG\\n(3)\\n(5)\\n(6)\\n(4)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n576\\n[File Name Setting]\\n[Folder Number Link]:\\nUses the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above) to set the folder number \\n((1) above).\\n[User Setting]:\\nChanges the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above).\\n• Follow the steps on “Entering Characters” when the character entry screen is \\ndisplayed. (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\nAvailable characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ]\\n• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.\\n• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of \\nrecording.\\nIf you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file number \\nwill be assigned.\\n• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be \\ncreated automatically when the next file is saved:\\n– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.\\n– The file number reaches 9999.\\n• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the \\nway up to 999.\\nWe recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.\\n• [Select Folder] is not available when [Backup Rec] in [Double Card Slot Function] \\nis being used.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n577\\n[File Number Reset]\\n[Copyright Information]\\n[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]\\nRefresh the folder number within the DCIM folder and reset the file number to 0001.\\n• When the folder number reaches 999, the file number cannot be reset.\\nWe recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.\\n• To reset the folder number to 100:\\n1\\nPerform [Card Format] to format the card. (Î[Card Format]: 573)\\n2\\nPerform [File Number Reset] to reset the file number.\\n3\\nSelect [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.\\n[Artist]\\n[ON] / `[OFF] / [SET]\\n[Copyright Holder]\\n[ON] / `[OFF] / [SET]\\n[Display Copyright Info.]\\nRecords the names of the artist and the copyright holder in the image Exif data.\\n• You can register names from [SET] in [Artist] and [Copyright Holder].\\nHow to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• Up to 63 characters may be entered.\\n• You can confirm registered copyright information in [Display Copyright Info.].\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n578\\n[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display])\\n[Power Save Mode]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Sleep Mode]\\n[10MIN.] / `[5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / \\n[OFF]\\n[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\n[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]\\n`[5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF]\\n[Power Save LVF Shooting]\\n[Time to Sleep]\\n[Method of Activation]\\nThis is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or \\nturn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time.\\n(Î[Power Save Mode]: 53)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n579\\n[Thermal Management]\\n[Monitor Frame Rate]\\n[Recording Max Temperature]\\n[HIGH] / `[STANDARD]\\nThis sets the temperature during video recording at which the camera automatically \\nstops recording.\\nWhen set to [HIGH], recording continues even if the camera temperature rises.\\n[Recording Max Temperature]\\n[HIGH]: Sets the temperature at which recording is stopped due to the camera \\ntemperature rising to a higher temperature.\\n• You can record for a longer time, but the camera body will become hot.\\nUse a tripod, etc., because recording with a handheld camera for long periods can \\ncause low temperature burns.\\n[STANDARD]: Recording stops when the camera temperature rises.\\n• Set to [STANDARD] when recording with a handheld camera.\\n• When recording with the 6K/30p (6K/25p) or 5.9K/30p (5.9K/25p) recording \\nquality, recording stops once the continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes.\\n[30fps] / `[60fps]\\nSets the display speed for live view on the monitor when recording pictures.\\n[30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.\\n[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Monitor Frame Rate] is not available:\\n– HDMI output\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n580\\n[LVF Frame Rate]\\n[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]\\n`[60fps] / [120fps]\\nSets the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when recording pictures.\\n[60fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.\\n[120fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.\\n• [LVF120] is displayed on the viewfinder when it is displayed at [120fps].\\n• When set to [120fps], the images in the viewfinder will not be as smooth as with \\n[60fps], but there will be no change to the images recorded.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [LVF Frame Rate] is not available:\\n– HDMI output\\n– While connected to Wi-Fi\\n[Brightness] / [Contrast] / [Saturation] / [Red Tint] / [Blue Tint]\\nThis adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of the monitor/viewfinder.\\n1\\nPress 34 to select the setting item, and press 21 to adjust.\\n2\\nPress \\n or \\n to confirm the setting.\\n• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the \\nviewfinder is in use.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n581\\n[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]\\n`[AUTO] / [−3] to [+3]\\nAdjusts monitor/viewfinder luminance.\\n[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is \\naround the camera.\\n• Adjusts the monitor luminance when displaying the monitor, and the viewfinder \\nluminance when displaying the viewfinder.\\n• When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to positive side, the usage \\nperiod will shorten.\\n• When [Night Mode] is being used, [Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] are not \\navailable.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n582\\n[Eye Sensor]\\n[Level Gauge Adjust.]\\n[Sensitivity]\\n`[HIGH] / [LOW]\\nThis will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.\\n[LVF/Monitor Switch]\\n`[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic \\nviewfinder/monitor switching) / [LVF] \\n(viewfinder) / [MON] (monitor)\\nThis will set the method for switching between the viewfinder and monitor.\\n• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will also \\nswitch.\\n[Adjust.]\\nHold the camera in a horizontal position, and press \\n or \\n. The level gauge \\nwill be adjusted.\\n[Level Gauge Value Reset]\\nRestores the default level gauge setting.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n583\\n[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT])\\n[Beep]\\n[Headphone Volume]\\n`: Default settings\\n[Beep Volume]\\n[\\n] (High) / `[\\n] (Low) / [\\n] (Off)\\n[AF Beep Volume]\\n[\\n] (High) / `[\\n] (Low) / [\\n] (Off)\\n[AF Beep Tone]\\n`[\\n] (Pattern 1) / [\\n] (Pattern 2) / \\n[\\n] (Pattern 3)\\n[E-Shutter Vol]\\n[\\n] (High) / `[\\n] (Low) / [\\n] (Off)\\n[E-Shutter Tone]\\n`[\\n] (Pattern 1) / [\\n] (Pattern 2) / \\n[\\n] (Pattern 3)\\nSets the beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds.\\n[0] to [LEVEL15] (`[LEVEL3])\\nAdjusts the volume when headphones are connected.\\n(ÎAdjusting the Headphone Volume: 386)\\n• This functions in tandem with [Headphone Volume] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n584\\n[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]\\n[Wi-Fi]\\n[Bluetooth]\\n`[COMBINED WITH REC] / [CH1/CH2] / [CH3/CH4] / [CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4] / \\n[CH1] / [CH2] / [CH3] / [CH4] / [CH1+CH2] / [CH3+CH4] / [CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4]\\nDuring video playback, this selects the audio channel output to the speaker on the \\ncamera or the headphones.\\nFor information about output audio (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel]: 387)\\n[COMBINED WITH REC]: Outputs audio with the same settings as [Sound \\nMonitoring Channel] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.\\n• You cannot change settings during video playback.\\n• The L channel and R channel are mixed for audio output from the camera’s \\nspeaker.\\n[Wi-Fi Function] (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 620, Wi-Fi \\nConnections: 649)\\n[Wi-Fi Setup] (Î[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 661)\\n[Bluetooth] (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n[Send Image (Smartphone)] (ÎUsing the menu to transfer easily: 627)\\n[Remote Wakeup] (Î[Remote Wakeup]: 641)\\n[Returning from Sleep Mode] (ÎShortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]: \\n634)\\n[Auto Transfer] (Î[Auto Transfer]: 637)\\n[Location Logging] (Î[Location Logging]: 639)\\n[Auto Clock Set] (Î[Auto Clock Set]: 643)\\n[Wi-Fi network settings]\\n[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point. Wireless access points \\nused to connect the camera to Wi-Fi networks will be registered automatically.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n585\\n[USB]\\n[Battery Use Priority]\\n[USB Mode]\\n`[\\n] [Select on connection] / [\\n] \\n[PC(Storage)] / [\\n] [PC(Tether)]\\nThis sets the communication method to be used when the USB connection cable is \\nconnected.\\n[\\n] [Select on connection]: Select this setting to select the USB communication \\nsystem when connecting to another device. (ÎUSB port: 665)\\n[\\n] [PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC. \\n(ÎImporting Images to a PC: 670)\\n[\\n] [PC(Tether)]: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with \\n“LUMIX Tether”. (ÎTethered Recording: 676)\\n[USB Power Supply]\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nProvides power from the USB connection cable.\\n• Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor is \\nconnected.\\n[BODY] / `[BG]\\nSelects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both the camera \\nand the Battery Grip.\\n(ÎSelecting Battery Usage Priority: 682)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n586\\n[HDMI Connection]\\n[Output Resolution(Playback)]\\n`[AUTO] / [C4K/60p] / [C4K/50p] / [C4K/\\n30p] / [C4K/25p] / [C4K/24p] / [4K/60p] / \\n[4K/50p] / [4K/30p] / [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] / \\n[1080/120p] / [1080/100p] / [1080p] / \\n[1080i] / [720p] / [576p] / [480p]\\nSets the HDMI output resolution for playback.\\n[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected external device. When \\nplaying back pictures, output is at a maximum resolution of 8K.\\n• The items you can select depend on the [System Frequency] setting.\\n• If no image appears on the external device with [AUTO], switch to a setting other \\nthan [AUTO] to set a format supported by your external device.\\n(Please also refer to the operating instructions for the external device.)\\n• It may not be possible to play back video, depending on the external device \\nconnected.\\n[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nImages with LUT (Look-Up Table) file applied are output when you play back videos \\nrecorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log].\\n• This is linked with [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] in [V-Log View Assist] under the \\n[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n587\\n[Network Connection Light]\\n[HLG View Assist (HDMI)]\\n`[AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]\\nAt recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and \\nbrightness for display.\\n• This is linked with [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] under the [Custom] ([Monitor / \\nDisplay (Video)]) menu. (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n[VIERA Link (CEC)]\\n[ON] / `[OFF]\\nYou can use the device remote control to operate the camera when it is connected to \\na VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable.\\n(ÎUsing VIERA Link: 668)\\n[Background Color(Playback)]\\n[\\n] / `[\\n]\\nSets the color of the bands displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of \\nimages output on an external device.\\n• We recommend setting to [\\n] to prevent burn-in on the screen of the output \\ndestination.\\n[Photo Luminance Level]\\n[0-255] / `[16-255]\\nSets the level of luminance when outputting pictures to external devices.\\n`[ON] / [OFF]\\nThis will turn on the network connection light.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n588\\n[Setup] menu ([Setting])\\n[Save to Custom Mode]\\n[Load Custom Mode]\\n[Custom Mode Settings]\\n[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]\\nYou can register the currently set information of the camera.\\n(ÎRegister in Custom Mode: 529)\\n[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]\\nCalls up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode and \\noverwrites the current settings with these.\\n(ÎCalling Up Settings: 532)\\n[Limit No. of Custom Mode]\\n[Edit Title]\\n[How to Reload Custom Mode]\\n[Select Loading Details]\\nSets the ease of use of Custom mode.\\n(ÎCustom Mode Detailed Settings: 530)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n589\\n[Save/Restore Camera Setting]\\n[Reset]\\n[Save] / [Load] / [Delete] / [Keep Settings While Format]\\nSaves the camera’s settings information to the card.\\nSaved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the same \\nsettings on multiple cameras.\\n[Save]: Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.\\n• If saving new data, then select [New File], and if overwriting an existing file, select \\nthat existing file.\\n• When [New File] is selected, a screen to select the file name to save as is \\ndisplayed.\\n[OK]:\\nSaves using the file name on the screen.\\n[Change the file name]:\\nChanges the file name and saves the file.\\n• Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, up to \\n8 characters\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n[Load]: Loads the settings information on the card and copies it to the camera.\\n[Delete]: Deletes settings information on the card.\\n[Keep Settings While Format]: When formatting the card, formats the card while \\nkeeping camera settings information stored on the card.\\n• Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.\\n• Up to 10 instances of settings information can be saved on one card.\\n• List of functions for which saving of settings information is possible (ÎList of \\nDefault Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 750)\\nReturns the camera to its default settings.\\n(Î[Reset]: 99)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n590\\n[Setup] menu ([Others])\\n[Clock Set]\\n[Time Zone]\\nSets the date and time.\\n(ÎSetting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 68)\\nSets the time zone.\\nPress 21 to select the time zone and then press \\n or \\n to confirm.\\n(A) Current time\\n(B) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)\\n• If you are using Daylight Savings [\\n], press 3. (The time will move forward \\nby 1 hour.)\\nTo return to the normal time, press 3 again.\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n591\\n[System Frequency]\\n[Pixel Refresh]\\n[59.94Hz (NTSC)] / [50.00Hz (PAL)] / [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]\\n*\\nDefault setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the \\ncamera was purchased.\\nThis changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played back \\nwith the camera.\\n(Î[System Frequency]: 130)\\nThis optimizes the image sensor and image processing.\\n• The image sensor and image processing are optimized when the camera is \\npurchased. Use this function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get \\nrecorded.\\n• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n592\\n[Sensor Cleaning]\\n[Language]\\nDust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the \\nimage sensor is performed.\\n• You can use this function when the dust is particularly noticeable.\\n• Turn the camera off and on when finished.\\nThis set the language displayed on the screen.\\n• If you set a different language by mistake, select [\\n] from the menu icons to set \\nthe desired language.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – [Setup] Menu\\n593\\n[Firmware Version]\\n[Approved Regulations]\\n[Firmware Update] / [Software info]\\nYou can check the firmware versions of the camera and lens.\\nIn addition, you can update the firmware, and display information about the camera \\nsoftware.\\n[Firmware Update]: Updates firmware.\\n1\\nDownload the firmware. (ÎFirmware of Your Camera/Lens: 18)\\n2\\nSave the firmware to the root directory of the card (the first folder that appears \\nwhen you access the card on your PC), and then insert the card into the \\ncamera.\\n3\\nSelect [Firmware Update], press \\n or \\n, and then select [Yes] to update \\nthe firmware.\\n[Software info]: Displays information about the camera software.\\n• When a supported optional item (XLR Microphone Adaptor, etc.) is attached to the \\ncamera, you can also check its firmware version.\\nDisplays the certification number for radio regulations.\\n*\\nDepending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not \\ndisplayed due to differences in specifications.\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – My Menu\\n594\\nMy Menu\\n≥Registration in My Menu: 594\\n≥Edit My Menu: 595\\nRegister frequently-used menus in My Menu.\\nA maximum of 23 items can be registered.\\nRegistered menus can be called up from [\\n] to [\\n].\\nRegistration in My Menu\\n1\\nSelect [Add].\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Add]\\n2\\nRegister.\\n≥Select the menu to register and then press \\n or \\n.\\n™ Calling up My Menu\\nCall up the menus registered in My Menu.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n]/[\\n]/[\\n] ¨ Registered menus\\n\\n\\nCamera Customization – My Menu\\n595\\nEdit My Menu\\nYou can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary \\nmenus.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [\\n]\\n[Add]\\nSelects and registers the menus to be displayed in My Menu.\\n[Sorting]\\nChanges the order of My Menu.\\nSelect the menu to change, then set the destination.\\n[Delete]\\nDeletes menus that are registered to My Menu.\\n[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.\\n[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.\\n[Display from My Menu]\\nDisplays My Menu first when displaying a menu.\\n[ON]: Displays My Menu.\\n[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.\\n\\n\\n596\\nList of Menu\\nCamera customization and many function settings are performed with \\nmenus on this camera.\\nThis chapter introduces all of the menu items in a list format.\\n≥[Photo] menu: 597\\n≥[Video] menu: 599\\n≥[Custom] menu: 602\\n≥[Setup] menu: 606\\n≥[My Menu]: 608\\n≥[Playback] menu: 609\\n• For information about menu operation methods (ÎMenu Operation Methods: 94)\\n• Refer to the “Materials” chapter for the following lists:\\n– List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 750\\n– List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 774\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Photo] menu\\n597\\n[Photo] menu\\n[Image Quality]\\n≥[Photo Style] (Î[Photo Style]: 301) \\n≥[Metering Mode] (Î[Metering Mode]: 261) \\n≥[Aspect Ratio] (Î[Aspect Ratio]: 116)\\n≥[Picture Quality] (Î[Picture Quality]: 120)\\n≥[Picture Size] (Î[Picture Size]: 118)\\n≥[High Resolution Mode Setting] (ÎHigh Resolution mode: 211)\\n≥[Long Exposure NR] (Î[Long Exposure NR]: 247)\\n≥[Dual Native ISO Setting] (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290) \\n≥[ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (Î[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 291)\\n≥[Min. Shutter Speed] (Î[Min. Shutter Speed]: 248)\\n≥[i.Dynamic Range] (Î[i.Dynamic Range]: 283) \\n≥[Vignetting Comp.] (Î[Vignetting Comp.]: 323) \\n≥[Color Shading Compensation] (Î[Color Shading Compensation]: 324) \\n≥[Diffraction Compensation] (Î[Diffraction Compensation]: 328) \\n≥[Filter Settings] (Î[Filter Settings]: 314) \\n[Focus]\\n≥[AF Detection Setting] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168) \\n≥[Detecting Subject] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168) \\n≥[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 154)\\n≥[Focus Limiter] (Î[Focus Limiter]: 157) \\n≥[AF Assist Light] (Î[AF Assist Light]: 159) \\n≥[Focus Peaking] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195) \\n≥[1-Area AF Moving Speed] (Î[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 160) \\n: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings \\nare synchronized.\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Photo] menu\\n598\\n[Flash]\\n≥[Flash Mode] (Î[Flash Mode]: 334)\\n≥[Firing Mode] (Î[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 337)\\n≥[Flash Adjust.] (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 339)\\n≥[Flash Synchro] (Î[Flash Synchro]: 340)\\n≥[Manual Flash Adjust.] (Î[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 337)\\n≥[Auto Exposure Comp.] (Î[Auto Exposure Comp.]: 341)\\n≥[Wireless] (ÎRecording Using a Wireless Flash: 342)\\n≥[Wireless Channel] (ÎRecording Using a Wireless Flash: 342)\\n≥[Wireless FP] (Î[Wireless FP]: 348)\\n≥[Communication Light] (Î[Communication Light]: 348)\\n≥[Wireless Setup] (ÎSetting Items ([Wireless Setup]): 346)\\n[Others (Photo)]\\n≥[Bracketing] (ÎBracket Recording: 233)\\n≥[Silent Mode] (Î[Silent Mode]: 241) \\n≥[Image Stabilizer] (ÎImage Stabilizer: 250) \\n≥[Burst Shot Setting] (ÎTaking Burst Pictures: 204)\\n≥[Shutter Type] (Î[Shutter Type]: 243)\\n≥[Shutter Delay] (Î[Shutter Delay]: 249)\\n≥[Ex. Tele Conv.] (ÎExtended Tele Conversion: 199)\\n≥[Time Lapse/Animation] (ÎRecording with Time Lapse Shot: 216, \\nRecording with Stop Motion Animation: 223)\\n≥[Self Timer] (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 229) \\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Video] menu\\n599\\n[Video] menu\\n[Image Quality]\\n≥[Exposure Mode] (ÎSetting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 352)\\n≥[Photo Style] (Î[Photo Style]: 301) \\n≥[Metering Mode] (Î[Metering Mode]: 261) \\n≥[Dual Native ISO Setting] (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290) \\n≥[ISO Sensitivity (video)] (Î[ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 367)\\n≥[Synchro Scan] (Î[Synchro Scan]: 441)\\n≥[Flicker Decrease (Video)] (Î[Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 394)\\n≥[Master Pedestal Level] (Î[Master Pedestal Level]: 364)\\n≥[SS/Gain Operation] (Î[SS/Gain Operation]: 395)\\n≥[i.Dynamic Range] (Î[i.Dynamic Range]: 283) \\n≥[Vignetting Comp.] (Î[Vignetting Comp.]: 323) \\n≥[Color Shading Compensation] (Î[Color Shading Compensation]: 324) \\n≥[Diffraction Compensation] (Î[Diffraction Compensation]: 328) \\n≥[Filter Settings] (Î[Filter Settings]: 314) \\n[Image Format]\\n≥[Rec. File Format] (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)\\n≥[Image Area of Video] (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\n≥[Rec Quality] (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n≥[Rec Quality (My List)] (Î[add to list]: 142)\\n≥[Slow & Quick Setting] (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\n≥[Time Code] (ÎSetting the Time Code: 390)\\n≥[Luminance Level] (Î[Luminance Level]: 363)\\n: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings \\nare synchronized.\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Video] menu\\n600\\n[Focus]\\n≥[AF Detection Setting] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168) \\n≥[Detecting Subject] (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168) \\n≥[AF Custom Setting(Video)] (Î[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 360)\\n≥[Focus Limiter] (Î[Focus Limiter]: 157) \\n≥[Continuous AF] (Î[Continuous AF]: 358)\\n≥[AF Assist Light] (Î[AF Assist Light]: 159) \\n≥[Focus Peaking] (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195) \\n≥[1-Area AF Moving Speed] (Î[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 160) \\n[Audio]\\n≥[Sound Rec Level Disp.] (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 369)\\n≥[Mute Sound Input] (Î[Mute Sound Input]: 370)\\n≥[Sound Rec Gain Level] (Î[Sound Rec Gain Level]: 371)\\n≥[Sound Rec Level Adj.] (Î[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 372)\\n≥[Sound Rec Quality] (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373)\\n≥[Sound Rec Level Limiter] (Î[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 374)\\n≥[Wind Noise Canceller] (Î[Wind Noise Canceller]: 375)\\n≥[Wind Cut] (ÎReduction of Wind Noise: 381)\\n≥[Mic Socket] (ÎExternal Microphones (Optional): 377)\\n≥[Special Mic.] (ÎSetting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: \\nOptional): 380)\\n≥[4ch Mic Input] (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n≥[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (ÎXLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 382)\\n≥[Sound Output] (ÎSwitching the Sound Output Method: 386)\\n≥[Headphone Volume] (ÎAdjusting the Headphone Volume: 386)\\n≥[Sound Monitoring Channel] (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel]: 387)\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Video] menu\\n601\\n[Others (Video)]\\n≥[Silent Mode] (Î[Silent Mode]: 241) \\n≥[Image Stabilizer] (ÎImage Stabilizer: 250) \\n≥[Self Timer Setting] (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 229) \\n≥[Focus Transition] (Î[Focus Transition]: 419)\\n≥[Loop Recording (video)] (Î[Loop Recording (video)]: 443)\\n≥[Segmented File Recording] (Î[Segmented File Recording]: 445)\\n≥[Live Cropping] (Î[Live Cropping]: 424)\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Custom] menu\\n602\\n[Custom] menu\\n[Image Quality] (Î[Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 534)\\n≥[Photo Style Settings] (Î[Photo Style Settings]: 534)\\n≥[LUT Library] (Î[LUT Library]: 320)\\n≥[ISO Increments] (Î[ISO Increments]: 535)\\n≥[Extended ISO] (Î[Extended ISO]: 535)\\n≥[Exposure Offset Adjust.] (Î[Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 536)\\n≥[Face Priority In Multi Metering] (Î[Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 536)\\n≥[AWB Lock Setting] (Î[AWB Lock Setting]: 537)\\n≥[Color Space] (Î[Color Space]: 538)\\n≥[Exposure Comp. Reset] (Î[Exposure Comp. Reset]: 538)\\n≥[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] (Î[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 538)\\n≥[CreativeVideo Combined Set.] (Î[CreativeVideo Combined Set.]: 539)\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Custom] menu\\n603\\n[Focus/Shutter] (Î[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 540)\\n≥[Focus/Shutter Priority] (Î[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 540)\\n≥[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (Î[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 540)\\n≥[AF/AE Lock Hold] (Î[AF/AE Lock Hold]: 540)\\n≥[AF+MF] (Î[AF+MF]: 541)\\n≥[MF Assist] (Î[MF Assist]: 541)\\n≥[MF Guide] (Î[MF Guide]: 542)\\n≥[Focus Ring Lock] (Î[Focus Ring Lock]: 542)\\n≥[Show/Hide AF Mode] (Î[Show/Hide AF Mode]: 542)\\n≥[Pinpoint AF Setting] (Î[Pinpoint AF Setting]: 543)\\n≥[Shutter AF] (Î[Shutter AF]: 543)\\n≥[Eye Detection Display] (Î[Eye Detection Display]: 543)\\n≥[Half-Press Shutter] (Î[Half-Press Shutter]: 544)\\n≥[Assign REC to Shutter Button] (Î[Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 544)\\n≥[Quick AF] (Î[Quick AF]: 544)\\n≥[Eye Sensor AF] (Î[Eye Sensor AF]: 545)\\n≥[Looped Focus Frame] (Î[Looped Focus Frame]: 545)\\n≥[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] (Î[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 545)\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Custom] menu\\n604\\n[Operation] (Î[Custom] menu ([Operation]): 546)\\n≥[Q.MENU Settings] (Î[Q.MENU Settings]: 546)\\n≥[Touch Settings] (Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\n≥[Operation Lock Setup] (Î[Operation Lock Setup]: 547)\\n≥[Fn Button Set] (Î[Fn Button Set]: 547)\\n≥[WB/ISO/Expo. Button] (Î[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 548)\\n≥[ISO Displayed Setting] (Î[ISO Displayed Setting]: 548)\\n≥[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (Î[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 548)\\n≥[Dial Set.] (Î[Dial Set.]: 549)\\n≥[Joystick Setting] (Î[Joystick Setting]: 550)\\n≥[Video Rec. Button (Remote)] (Î[Video Rec. Button (Remote)]: 551)\\n[Monitor / Display (Photo)] (Î[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display \\n(Photo)]): 552)\\n≥[Auto Review] (Î[Auto Review]: 552)\\n≥[Constant Preview] (Î[Constant Preview]: 552)\\n≥[Histogram] (Î[Histogram]: 553)\\n≥[Photo Grid Line] (Î[Photo Grid Line]: 554)\\n≥[Live View Boost] (Î[Live View Boost]: 554)\\n≥[Night Mode] (Î[Night Mode]: 555)\\n≥[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (Î[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 556)\\n≥[Expo.Meter] (Î[Expo.Meter]: 558)\\n≥[Focal Length] (Î[Focal Length]: 558)\\n≥[Blinking Highlights] (Î[Blinking Highlights]: 558)\\n≥[Sheer Overlay] (Î[Sheer Overlay]: 559)\\n≥[I.S. Status Scope] (Î[I.S. Status Scope]: 560)\\n≥[Level Gauge] (Î[Level Gauge]: 561)\\n≥[Luminance Spot Meter] (Î[Luminance Spot Meter]: 562)\\n≥[Framing Outline] (Î[Framing Outline]: 562)\\n≥[Show/Hide Monitor Layout] (Î[Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 562)\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Custom] menu\\n605\\n[Monitor / Display (Video)] (Î[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display \\n(Video)]): 563)\\n≥[V-Log View Assist] (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 563)\\n≥[HLG View Assist] (Î[HLG View Assist]: 563)\\n≥[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: \\n563)\\n≥[Monochrome Live View] (Î[Monochrome Live View]: 564)\\n≥[Center Marker] (Î[Center Marker]: 564)\\n≥[Safety Zone Marker] (Î[Safety Zone Marker]: 564)\\n≥[Frame Marker] (Î[Frame Marker]: 565)\\n≥[Zebra Pattern] (Î[Zebra Pattern]: 565)\\n≥[WFM/Vector Scope] (Î[WFM/Vector Scope]: 565)\\n≥[Color Bars] (Î[Color Bars]: 566)\\n≥[Video-Priority Display] (Î[Video-Priority Display]: 566)\\n≥[Red REC Frame Indicator] (Î[Red REC Frame Indicator]: 566)\\n[IN/OUT] (Î[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 567)\\n≥[HDMI Rec Output] (Î[HDMI Rec Output]: 567)\\n≥[Fan Mode] (Î[Fan Mode]: 568)\\n[Lens / Others] (Î[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 569)\\n≥[Lens Focus Resume] (Î[Lens Focus Resume]: 569)\\n≥[Lens Fn Button Setting] (Î[Lens Fn Button Setting]: 569)\\n≥[Focus Ring Control] (Î[Focus Ring Control]: 570)\\n≥[AF Micro Adjustment] (Î[AF Micro Adjustment]: 161)\\n≥[Lens Information] (Î[Lens Information]: 571)\\n≥[Lens Info. Confirmation] (Î[Lens Info. Confirmation]: 571)\\n≥[Vertical Position Info (Video)] (Î[Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 571)\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Setup] menu\\n606\\n[Setup] menu\\n[Card/File] (Î[Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 573)\\n≥[Card Format] (Î[Card Format]: 573)\\n≥[Double Card Slot Function] (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 574)\\n≥[Folder / File Settings] (Î[Folder / File Settings]: 575)\\n≥[File Number Reset] (Î[File Number Reset]: 577)\\n≥[Copyright Information] (Î[Copyright Information]: 577)\\n[Monitor / Display] (Î[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 578)\\n≥[Power Save Mode] (Î[Power Save Mode]: 578)\\n≥[Thermal Management] (Î[Thermal Management]: 579)\\n≥[Monitor Frame Rate] (Î[Monitor Frame Rate]: 579)\\n≥[LVF Frame Rate] (Î[LVF Frame Rate]: 580)\\n≥[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder] (Î[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]: 580)\\n≥[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] (Î[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF \\nLuminance]: 581)\\n≥[Eye Sensor] (Î[Eye Sensor]: 582)\\n≥[Level Gauge Adjust.] (Î[Level Gauge Adjust.]: 582)\\n[IN/OUT] (Î[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 583)\\n≥[Beep] (Î[Beep]: 583)\\n≥[Headphone Volume] (Î[Headphone Volume]: 583)\\n≥[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: \\n584)\\n≥[Wi-Fi] (Î[Wi-Fi]: 584)\\n≥[Bluetooth] (Î[Bluetooth]: 584)\\n≥[USB] (Î[USB]: 585)\\n≥[Battery Use Priority] (Î[Battery Use Priority]: 585)\\n≥[HDMI Connection] (Î[HDMI Connection]: 586)\\n≥[Network Connection Light] (Î[Network Connection Light]: 587)\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Setup] menu\\n607\\n[Setting] (Î[Setup] menu ([Setting]): 588)\\n≥[Save to Custom Mode] (Î[Save to Custom Mode]: 588)\\n≥[Load Custom Mode] (Î[Load Custom Mode]: 588)\\n≥[Custom Mode Settings] (Î[Custom Mode Settings]: 588)\\n≥[Save/Restore Camera Setting] (Î[Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 589)\\n≥[Reset] (Î[Reset]: 589)\\n[Others] (Î[Setup] menu ([Others]): 590)\\n≥[Clock Set] (Î[Clock Set]: 590)\\n≥[Time Zone] (Î[Time Zone]: 590)\\n≥[System Frequency] (Î[System Frequency]: 591)\\n≥[Pixel Refresh] (Î[Pixel Refresh]: 591)\\n≥[Sensor Cleaning] (Î[Sensor Cleaning]: 592)\\n≥[Language] (Î[Language]: 592)\\n≥[Firmware Version] (Î[Firmware Version]: 593)\\n≥[Approved Regulations] (Î[Approved Regulations]: 593)*\\n*\\nDepending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not \\ndisplayed due to differences in specifications.\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [My Menu]\\n608\\n[My Menu]\\n[Page 1] (ÎMy Menu: 594)\\n[Page 2] (ÎMy Menu: 594)\\n[Page 3] (ÎMy Menu: 594)\\n[Edit My Menu] (ÎEdit My Menu: 595)\\n≥[Add]\\n≥[Sorting]\\n≥[Delete]\\n≥[Display from My Menu]\\n\\n\\nList of Menu – [Playback] menu\\n609\\n[Playback] menu\\n[Playback Mode] (Î[Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 493)\\n≥[Playback Mode] (Î[Playback Mode]: 493)\\n≥[Slide Show] (Î[Slide Show]: 493)\\n≥[Rotate Disp.] (Î[Rotate Disp.]: 494)\\n≥[Picture Sort] (Î[Picture Sort]: 494)\\n≥[Magnify from AF Point] (Î[Magnify from AF Point]: 494)\\n≥[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 494)\\n≥[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (Î[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 495)\\n≥[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: \\n495)\\n≥[Behavior After Video Playback] (Î[Behavior After Video Playback]: 495)\\n[Process Image] (Î[Playback] ([Process Image]): 496)\\n≥[RAW Processing] (Î[RAW Processing]: 496)\\n≥[Time Lapse Video] (Î[Time Lapse Video]: 496)\\n≥[Stop Motion Video] (Î[Stop Motion Video]: 496)\\n[Add/Delete Info.] (Î[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 497)\\n≥[Protect] (Î[Protect]: 497)\\n≥[Rating] (Î[Rating]: 497)\\n[Edit Image] (Î[Playback] ([Edit Image]): 498)\\n≥[Resize] (Î[Resize]: 498)\\n≥[Rotate] (Î[Rotate]: 499)\\n≥[Video Divide] (Î[Video Divide]: 499)\\n≥[Copy] (Î[Copy]: 500)\\n[Others] (Î[Playback] ([Others]): 501)\\n≥[Delete Confirmation] (Î[Delete Confirmation]: 501)\\n≥[Delete All Images] (Î[Delete All Images]: 501)\\n\\n\\n610\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth\\nThis chapter explains the Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth® functions of the camera.\\n• This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.\\n≥Connecting to a Smartphone: 612\\n≥Operating the Camera with a Smartphone: 628\\n≥Sending Images from the Camera to a PC: 645\\n≥Wi-Fi Connections: 649\\n≥Send Settings and Selecting Images: 659\\n≥[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 661\\n™ Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions\\n(A) Network connection light\\nLight (blue)\\nMonitor\\nOperation\\nLit\\nThe Wi-Fi function is set to on, or there is a \\nconnection.\\nThe Bluetooth function is set to on, or there \\nis a connection.\\nBlinking\\nWhen image data is sent using a camera \\noperation.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth\\n611\\n• Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception while \\nsending images.\\n• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.\\n• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information \\nsecurity.\\n• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending \\nimages.\\n• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or \\nmaintain communication with other devices.\\n(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)\\n• Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions.\\nIf the connection is terminated while sending images, images with missing parts \\nmay be sent.\\n• You can set so that the network connection light does not turn on:\\n(Î[Network Connection Light]: 587)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n612\\nConnecting to a Smartphone\\n≥Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 613\\n≥Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 614\\n≥Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 620\\n≥Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple \\nOperations: 626\\nConnect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” \\n(below: “LUMIX Sync”) smartphone app installed.\\nUse “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n613\\nInstalling “LUMIX Sync”\\n“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.\\n1\\nConnect the smartphone to a network.\\n2\\n(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.\\n(iOS) Select “App Store”.\\n3\\nEnter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the \\nsearch box.\\n4\\nSelect and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” \\n.\\nSupported OS\\nAndroid™: Android 8 or higher\\niOS: iOS 13 or higher\\n• Use the latest version.\\n• Supported OSs are current as of January 2023 and are subject to change.\\n• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to operate.\\n• The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.\\nFor information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/\\n(English only)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n614\\nConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth \\nConnection)\\nFollow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a \\nsmartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.\\nWhen pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the \\nsmartphone via Wi-Fi.\\n• For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.\\nFor information about connecting for the second and subsequent times \\n(ÎConnecting to a Paired Smartphone: 618)\\nSupported smartphones\\nAndroid™: Android 7 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding those that \\ndo not support Bluetooth Low Energy)\\niOS: iOS 12 or higher\\n• Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n615\\n1\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n≥A message regarding device (camera) registration is displayed. \\nSelect [Next].\\n• If you have closed the message, select [\\n], then register the camera using \\n[Camera registration (pairing)].\\n2\\nCheck the content in the displayed guide and select \\n[Next] until the screen to register the camera is \\ndisplayed.\\nLUMIX Sync\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n616\\nOperating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.\\n3\\nSet the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [SET] ¨ \\n[Pairing]\\n≥The camera enters pairing standby state and the device name (A) \\nis displayed.\\n4\\nOn the smartphone, select the camera’s device name.\\n• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is \\ndisplayed, select [Join].\\n(A)\\nXXXXXXXXXXXX\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n617\\n5\\nWhen a message indicating that device registration is \\ncomplete, select [OK].\\n≥A Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone \\nwill be made.\\n™ End Bluetooth Connection\\nTo terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the \\ncamera.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ Select [OFF]\\n• The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.\\n• During Bluetooth connection, [\\n] is displayed in the recording screen.\\nWhen the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with \\nthe smartphone, [\\n] appears translucent.\\n• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.\\nIf you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will \\nbe deleted from the oldest first.\\n• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be \\ndeleted.\\nOK\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n618\\n™ Connecting to a Paired Smartphone\\nConnect paired smartphones using the following procedure.\\n1\\nEnable the Bluetooth function of the camera.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [ON]\\n2\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for \\ncameras, close the message.\\n3\\nSelect [\\n].\\n4\\nSelect [Bluetooth Setup].\\n5\\nTurn Bluetooth ON.\\n6\\nFrom [Registered camera(s)] items, select the camera’s device name.\\n• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect \\nto one smartphone at a time.\\n• When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the \\nsmartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the \\ncamera being detected correctly.\\nLUMIX Sync\\nBluetooth\\nXXXXXXXX\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n619\\n™ Canceling Pairing\\n1\\nCancel the pairing setting of the camera.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [SET] ¨ [Delete]\\n2\\nSelect the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.\\n• Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.\\n• When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network \\nsettings, the information for registered devices is deleted.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n620\\nConnecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])\\nUse Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.\\nWith default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible \\nwithout entering a password.\\nYou can also use password authentication for enhanced connection \\nsecurity.\\n• A third party may be able to intercept your transmissions if you do not use password \\nauthentication. When recording or transmitting important images, we recommend \\nusing password authentication. (ÎUsing Password Authentication to Connect: 622)\\n1\\nSet the camera to Wi-Fi connection standby status.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New \\nConnection] ¨ [Control With Smartphone]\\n≥The SSID (B) of the camera is displayed on the screen.\\n• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned \\nwith [Wi-Fi]. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n2\\nIn the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi \\nfunction ON.\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n621\\n3\\nSelect the SSID displayed on the camera.\\n4\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n5\\n(At the first connection) Confirm the device name \\ndisplayed on the camera and then select [Yes].\\n• When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed, the \\ncamera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].\\nIf there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using either \\nQR code or manual password input to connect with password authentication. \\n(ÎUsing Password Authentication to Connect: 622)\\n• When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:\\n– [Auto Transfer]\\nWi-Fi\\nWi-Fi\\nXXXXXXXX\\ni\\ni\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n622\\n™ Using Password Authentication to Connect\\nYou can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password \\nauthentication through either QR code or manual input.\\nScanning QR code to connect\\n1\\nSet [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON].\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] ¨ [Wi-Fi Password] ¨ [ON]\\n2\\nDisplay the QR code (C).\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New Connection] ¨ \\n[Control With Smartphone]\\n• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned \\nwith [Wi-Fi]. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n• Press \\n or \\n to enlarge the QR code.\\n3\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for \\ncameras, close the message.\\n4\\nSelect [\\n].\\n5\\nSelect [Wi-Fi connection].\\n6\\nSelect [QR code].\\n7\\nScan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using “LUMIX Sync”.\\n• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is \\ndisplayed, select [Join].\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n623\\nManually entering a password to connect\\n1\\nDisplay the screen in Step 2 (ÎScanning QR code to connect: 622).\\n2\\nIn the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.\\n3\\nOn the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the SSID (D) displayed on the camera.\\n4\\n(At the first connection) Enter the password (D) displayed on the camera.\\n5\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\nWi-Fi\\nWi-Fi\\nXXXXXXXX\\ni\\ni\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n624\\n™ Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings\\nWhen connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct], \\nfollow the steps below:\\n1\\nDisplay the connection method setting screen for the camera.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New Connection] ¨ \\n[Control With Smartphone]\\n2\\nPress [DISP.].\\nConnecting via network\\n1\\nSelect [Via Network] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Connect the camera to a wireless access point. (Î[Via Network]: 650)\\n2\\nIn the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.\\n3\\nConnect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is \\nconnected to.\\n4\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\nConnecting directly\\n1\\nSelect [Direct] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Select [WPS Connection] to connect the camera to a smartphone. (Î[Direct]: \\n654)\\n2\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n625\\n™ Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection\\nTo end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow \\nthe steps below.\\n1\\nPress the shutter button halfway to put the camera in recording mode.\\n2\\nTerminate the Wi-Fi connection.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Yes]\\n• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned \\nwith [Wi-Fi]. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n3\\nOn the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n626\\nSending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone \\nwith Simple Operations\\nYou can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by \\npressing [Q] during playback.\\nYou can also use the menu to connect easily.\\n• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with \\n[Send Image (Smartphone)]. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\nGetting started:\\n• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (ÎInstalling “LUMIX Sync”: 613)\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n• Press [\\n] on the camera to display the playback screen.\\nSend a single image\\n1\\nPress 21 to select the image.\\n2\\nPress [Q].\\n3\\nSelect [Single Select].\\n• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (ÎImage Send Settings: \\n659)\\n4\\nOn the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).\\n• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone\\n627\\nSend multiple images\\n1\\nPress [Q].\\n2\\nSelect [Multi Select].\\n• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (ÎImage Send Settings: \\n659)\\n3\\nSelect the images and then transfer.\\n21: Select images\\n or \\n: Set/Cancel\\n[DISP.]: Transfer\\n4\\nOn the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).\\n• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.\\n™ Using the menu to transfer easily\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Send Image (Smartphone)]\\nSettings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]\\n• If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press \\n or \\n to \\nexecute.\\n• If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”. (ÎSend \\nmultiple images: 627)\\n• It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.\\n• Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:\\n– [MOV] videos\\n• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to \\ncomplete.\\n• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is \\ncompleted, then sending will not restart.\\n• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:\\n– [Auto Transfer]\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n628\\nOperating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n≥[Remote shooting]: 630\\n≥[Shutter Remote Control]: 632\\n≥[Import images]: 635\\n≥[Auto Transfer]: 637\\n≥[Location Logging]: 639\\n≥[Remote Wakeup]: 641\\n≥[Auto Clock Set]: 643\\n≥[Camera settings copy]: 644\\nThis explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.\\nFunctions described in this document with the (\\n) symbol require \\na smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.\\nBluetooth\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n629\\n™ Home Screen\\nWhen you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.\\n(A)\\n: App settings (ÎConnecting to a Paired Smartphone: 618, Using Password \\nAuthentication to Connect: 622, [Remote Wakeup]: 641)\\nThis allows connection settings, camera power operations, and displays Help.\\n(B)\\n: [Import images] (Î[Import images]: 635)\\n(C)\\n: [Remote shooting] (Î[Remote shooting]: 630)\\n(D)\\n: [Shutter Remote Control] (Î[Shutter Remote Control]: 632)\\n(E)\\n: [Others] ([Camera settings copy]) (Î[Camera settings copy]: 644)\\nLUMIX Sync\\n(A)\\n(C)\\n(E)\\n(B)\\n(D)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n630\\n[Remote shooting]\\nYou can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while \\nviewing the live view images from the camera.\\nGetting started:\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth \\nConnection): 614, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 620)\\n• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n1\\nSelect [\\n] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.\\n• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is \\ndisplayed, select [Join].\\n2\\nStart recording.\\n• The recorded image is saved on the camera.\\n(F) Takes a picture\\n(G) Starts/ends the video recording\\n• When used in combination with [Auto Transfer], it is possible to automatically \\ntransfer the remotely recorded images to a smartphone. (Î[Auto Transfer]: 637)\\n• Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.\\n(F)\\n(G)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n631\\n™ Operation Method During Remote Recording\\nSet either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be \\nused during remote recording.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] ¨ Select [Priority of \\nRemote Device]\\n[Camera]\\nOperation is possible on both the camera and the smartphone.\\n• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.\\n[Smartphone]\\nOperation is possible only on the smartphone.\\n• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.\\n• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on the \\nscreen, and select [End].\\n• The default setting is [Camera].\\n• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n632\\n[Shutter Remote Control]\\nYou can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.\\nGetting started:\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n1\\nSelect [\\n] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home \\nscreen.\\n2\\nStart recording.\\nStarts/ends the video recording\\nTakes a picture\\n• Bulb Recording: 633\\nBluetooth\\nLOCK\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n633\\n™ Bulb Recording\\nThe shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is \\nuseful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.\\nGetting started:\\n• Set the camera to [M] mode. (ÎManual Exposure Mode: 273)\\n• Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb). (Î[B] (Bulb): 277)\\n1\\nTouch [\\n] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).\\n2\\nRemove your finger from [\\n] to end recording.\\n• Slide [\\n] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked \\nin a fully-pressed state.\\n(Slide [\\n] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to \\nend recording)\\n• During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry \\nout Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n634\\n™ Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]\\nYou can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep \\nMode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.\\nGetting started:\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n• Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON]. (Î[Remote Wakeup]: 641)\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ Select [Returning from Sleep Mode]\\n [Import / Remote Priority]\\nShortens the time to return when using [Import images] or [Remote shooting].\\n[Remote Shutter Priority]\\nShortens the time to return when using [Shutter Remote Control].\\n• To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera, set \\n[Bluetooth] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu as follows, then connect via Bluetooth:\\n– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON] (Î[Remote Wakeup]: 641)\\n– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] (Î[Auto Transfer]: 637)\\n• The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n635\\n[Import images]\\nTransfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via \\nWi-Fi.\\nGetting started:\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth \\nConnection): 614, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 620)\\n• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n1\\nSelect [\\n] ([Import images]) in the home screen.\\n• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is \\ndisplayed, select [Join].\\n2\\nSelect the image to transfer.\\n• You can switch the card displayed by touching (H).\\n(H)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n636\\n3\\nTransfer the image.\\n≥Select [\\n].\\n• If the image is a video, you can play it back by touching [\\n] at the center of \\nthe screen.\\n• When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted using \\n“LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the actual video \\nrecording.\\nDepending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image quality \\nmay deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture playback.\\n• It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.\\n• Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:\\n– [MOV] videos\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n637\\n[Auto Transfer]\\nYou can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they \\nare taken.\\nGetting started:\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n1\\nEnable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Auto Transfer] ¨ [ON]\\n• If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate \\nthe Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.\\n2\\nOn the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or \\n[Join] (for iOS devices).\\n• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.\\n3\\nCheck the send settings on the camera and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (ÎImage Send Settings: 659)\\n• Automatic image transfer is possible when [\\n] is displayed on the camera \\nrecording screen.\\nBluetooth\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n638\\n4\\nRecord with the camera.\\n• [\\n] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being \\nsent.\\n™ To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Auto Transfer] ¨ Select [OFF]\\n≥A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi \\nconnection.\\n• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the camera \\nautomatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth when you turn \\non the camera.\\nStart up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.\\n• Images are not transferred while the recording screen of the camera is displayed \\non the smartphone in [Remote shooting].\\n• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.\\n• If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is \\ninterrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.\\n– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no \\nlonger be possible.\\n– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.\\n• Images recorded with the following function cannot be transferred automatically:\\n– Video recording\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n639\\n[Location Logging]\\nThe smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth, \\nand the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location \\ninformation.\\nGetting started:\\n• Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n1\\nEnable [Location Logging] on the camera.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Location Logging] ¨ [ON]\\n• The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded \\nand [\\n] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.\\n2\\nRecord images with the camera.\\n• Location information will be written to the recorded images.\\nBluetooth\\nGPS\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n640\\n• When [\\n] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information \\ncannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.\\nSmartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a \\nbuilding, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide \\nview of the sky to improve positioning performance.\\nIn addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.\\n• Images with location information are indicated with [\\n].\\n• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the \\nsubject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.\\n• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.\\nGPS\\nGPS\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n641\\n[Remote Wakeup]\\nEven when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start \\nthe camera and record images, or check the recorded images.\\nGetting started:\\n1\\nConnect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n2\\nEnable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Remote Wakeup] ¨ [ON]\\n3\\nSet the camera on/off switch to [OFF].\\n4\\nOn the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.\\n™ Turning On the Camera\\nSelect [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.\\n• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed, \\nselect [Join].\\n• The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.\\n™ Turning Off the Camera\\n1\\nSelect [\\n] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.\\n2\\nSelect [Turn off the camera].\\n3\\nSelect [Power OFF].\\nBluetooth\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n642\\n• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], images recorded while remote operation is \\nrunning are automatically transferred to a smartphone.\\nIf [Power OFF] is selected while there are still unsent images, sending is \\nresumed when the camera is next turned on.\\n• When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to work \\neven if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n643\\n[Auto Clock Set]\\nSynchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those \\nof a smartphone.\\nGetting started:\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\nEnable [Auto Clock Set] on the camera.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Auto Clock Set] ¨ [ON]\\nBluetooth\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone\\n644\\n[Camera settings copy]\\nThis saves the camera’s settings information to the smartphone.\\nSaved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the \\nsame settings on multiple cameras.\\nGetting started:\\n• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\n1\\nSelect [\\n] ([Others]) ¨ [\\n] ([Camera settings copy]) \\nin the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.\\n2\\nSave or load settings information.\\n• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to \\noperate the “LUMIX Sync”.\\n• Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.\\n• When transferring settings information, a Wi-Fi connection is automatically \\ncreated.\\n(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is \\ndisplayed, select [Join].\\n• You can save or load the settings information of items that are the same as those \\nin [Save/Restore Camera Setting] under the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu. (ÎList of \\nDefault Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 750)\\nBluetooth\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC\\n645\\nSending Images from the Camera to a PC\\nSend recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn on the PC.\\n• Create a destination folder for images.\\n• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting, \\nchange the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. (Î[PC \\nConnection]: 661)\\n™ Create a Destination Folder for Images\\nWhen using Windows (Example for Windows 10)\\n1\\nSelect the destination folder and then right-click.\\n2\\nSelect [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.\\nWhen using Mac (Example for macOS 10.15)\\n1\\nSelect the destination folder and then click the items in the following order.\\n[File] ¨ [Get Info]\\n2\\nEnable folder sharing.\\nSupported OS\\nWindows: Windows 11, Windows 10\\nMac: macOS 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.6, 12.0 to 12.5\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC\\n646\\n1\\nSelect the method for sending images on the camera.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New \\nConnection] ¨ [Send Images to PC While Recording]/[Send \\nImages Stored in the Camera to PC]\\n2\\nConnect the camera and PC by Wi-Fi.\\n≥Select [Via Network] (Î[Via Network]: 650) or [Direct] (Î[Direct]: \\n654), and then connect.\\n3\\nEnter the computer name of the PC you want to connect \\nto (for Mac, the NetBIOS name).\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to \\n32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.\\nA destination folder may not be created if the account name includes \\nnon-alphanumeric characters.\\n• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank \\ncharacter), etc., it may not be recognized.\\nIn that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or \\nless alphanumeric characters.\\n• Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for detailed \\nsetting procedures.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC\\n647\\n4\\nSelect a folder for storing images.\\n• Folders sorted by sent date will be created in the selected folder, and images \\nwill be saved there.\\n5\\nCheck the send settings and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (ÎImage Send Settings: 659)\\n6\\n(When [Send Images to PC While Recording] is \\nselected) Take pictures.\\n• [\\n] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being \\nsent.\\n• To end the connection, follow the steps below:\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Yes]\\n(When [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC] is \\nselected) Select an image. (ÎSelecting Images: 660)\\n• To end the connection, select [Exit].\\n• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you \\nset on your PC.\\n• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the \\nPC may not be possible.\\n• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to \\ncomplete.\\n• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is \\ncompleted, then sending will not restart.\\n• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:\\n– [Auto Transfer]\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC\\n648\\n™ Images That Can be Sent\\nThe images that can be sent depend on the method used for sending \\nthem.\\nImages that can be sent\\n[Send Images to PC While Recording]\\n[Send Images Stored in the Camera to \\nPC]\\nJPEG/RAW\\nJPEG/RAW/MP4/MOV\\n• Depending on the OS version, these may not be displayed correctly.\\n• Sending may not be possible depending on your device.\\n• It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this \\ncamera, or images edited or processed on a PC.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n649\\nWi-Fi Connections\\n≥[Via Network]: 650\\n≥[Direct]: 654\\n≥Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings: 656\\n≥Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]: 658\\nWhen [New Connection] has been selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of \\nthe [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, select the connection method from either [Via \\nNetwork] or [Direct] to connect.\\nOn the other hand, when you use [Select a destination from History] or \\n[Select a destination from Favorite], the camera connects to the selected \\ndevice with the previously-used settings.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n650\\n[Via Network]\\nConnect the camera and destination device through the wireless access \\npoint.\\nSelect the method for connecting to a wireless access point.\\nSettings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN code)]/[From List] (Î[WPS \\n(Push-Button)]: 651, [WPS (PIN code)]: 651, [From List]: 652)\\n• After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the \\npreviously-used wireless access point.\\nTo change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and \\nchange the connection destination.\\n• Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n651\\n™ [WPS (Push-Button)]\\nPress the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a connection.\\nPress the wireless access point WPS button until it switches to WPS \\nmode.\\nExample)\\n™ [WPS (PIN code)]\\nEnter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.\\n1\\nOn the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are connecting to.\\n2\\nEnter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access \\npoint.\\n3\\nPress \\n or \\n of the camera.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n652\\n™ [From List]\\nSearches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this.\\n1\\nSelect the wireless access point you are connecting to.\\n• Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point search again.\\n• If no wireless access point is found (ÎConnecting by Manual Input: 653)\\n2\\n(If network authentication is encrypted) Enter the encryption key.\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n653\\n™ Connecting by Manual Input\\n1\\nIn the screen in Step 1 of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. (Î[From List]: 652)\\n2\\nEnter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and then \\nselect [Set].\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n3\\nSelect the network authentication.\\n[WPA3-SAE]/[WPA2-PSK]/[WPA2/WPA-PSK]\\nSupported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]\\n[No Encryption]\\n4\\n(When other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key and then \\nselect [Set].\\n• Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of the \\nwireless access point you are using.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n654\\n[Direct]\\nDirectly connect the camera and the destination device.\\nSelect the method for connecting with the destination device.\\n[WPS Connection]\\n[WPS (Push-Button)]: Press the WPS button on the destination device to connect.\\n• On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend the connection wait time.\\n[WPS (PIN code)]: Enter the PIN code into the camera, and connect.\\n[Manual Connection]\\nSearch for the camera on the destination device to connect.\\n1\\nSelect the network authentication.\\n[WPA3]/[WPA3/WPA2]\\n• If [Wi-Fi Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], this is not displayed if the \\nconnected device is [Smartphone].\\n2\\nEnter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the device.\\n• If [Wi-Fi Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], the password is not displayed if \\nthe connected device is [Smartphone].\\nSelect the SSID to establish a connection. (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n([Wi-Fi connection]): 620)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n655\\n• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be connected.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n656\\nConnect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings\\nUse the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as \\npreviously.\\n1\\nDisplay the Wi-Fi connection history.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a \\ndestination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]\\n2\\nSelect the History item to connect to.\\n• Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the connection history.\\n™ Register to Favorite\\nYou can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.\\n1\\nDisplay the Wi-Fi connection history.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a destination \\nfrom History]\\n2\\nSelect the History item to register and then press 1.\\n3\\nEnter a registration name and then select [Set].\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated \\nas two characters.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n657\\n™ Editing Items Registered in Favorite\\n1\\nDisplay items registered to Favorite.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a destination \\nfrom Favorite]\\n2\\nSelect the History item to edit in Favorite and then press 1.\\n[Remove from Favorite]\\n[Change the Order in Favorite]\\nSpecify the destination location of the desired item to change the display order.\\n[Change the Registered Name]\\nEnter characters to change the registered name.\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register \\nfrequently-used connection settings to Favorite.\\n• When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network \\nsettings, the content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.\\n• If the device you want to connect to (PC, etc.) is connected to a wireless access \\npoint other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using \\n[Direct].\\nChange the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the \\naccess point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New \\nConnection] and reconnect the devices. (ÎSending Images from the Camera to \\na PC: 645)\\n• It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are connected. \\nIn these cases, connect using [New Connection].\\n• When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:\\n– [Auto Transfer]\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections\\n658\\nFn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]\\nYou can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button \\nassigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi. (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n[Terminate the Connection]\\nTerminates the Wi-Fi connection.\\n[Change the Destination]\\nTerminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select a different Wi-Fi connection.\\n[Change Settings for Sending Images]\\nSets the image size, file format, and other items for sending recorded images. \\n(ÎImage Send Settings: 659)\\n[Register the Current Destination to Favorite]\\nRegisters the current connection destination or method so that you can easily connect \\nwith the same connection settings next time.\\n[Network Address]\\nDisplays the MAC address and IP address of the camera. (Î[Network Address]: 662)\\n• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may \\nnot be able to perform some of these operations.\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images\\n659\\nSend Settings and Selecting Images\\n≥Image Send Settings: 659\\n≥Selecting Images: 660\\nImage Send Settings\\nSet the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the \\ndestination device.\\n1\\nAfter Wi-Fi connection, the send settings confirmation \\nscreen will be displayed, so press [DISP.].\\n2\\nChange the send settings.\\n[Size]\\nResize the image to send.\\n[Original]/[Change] ([L], [M], [S], or [VGA])\\n[File Format]\\nSets the file format of images to send.\\n[JPG]/[RAW+JPG]/[RAW]\\n• This setting is possible when the destination supports the sending of RAW \\nimages from this camera. (ÎImages That Can be Sent: 648)\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images\\n660\\nSelecting Images\\nWhen sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC], select the \\nimages using the following procedure.\\n1\\nSelect [Single Select] or [Multi Select].\\n2\\nSelect the image.\\n[Single Select] setting\\n1\\nPress 21 to select an image.\\n2\\nPress \\n or \\n.\\n[Multi Select] setting\\n1\\nPress 3421 to select an image and then press \\n or \\n. (Repeat this)\\n• To cancel the setting, press \\n or \\n again.\\n• Images are displayed separately by card slot.\\nTo switch the card to display, press [\\n].\\n• Selecting images at once is possible only for the images in a single card.\\n2\\nPress [DISP.] to execute.\\n3\\n2\\n1\\n6\\n5\\n4\\n2.\\nュリヴヱハ\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu\\n661\\n[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu\\nThis configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.\\nThe settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.\\nDisplaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.\\n≥\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup]\\n[Priority of Remote Device]\\nThis sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used \\nduring remote recording. (ÎOperation Method During Remote Recording: 631)\\n[Wi-Fi Password]\\nYou can use a password to connect for enhanced security. (ÎUsing Password \\nAuthentication to Connect: 622)\\n[PC Connection]\\nYou can set the workgroup.\\nTo send images to a PC, you need to connect to the same workgroup as the \\ndestination PC.\\n(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)\\n• To change the workgroup name, press \\n or \\n and enter the new workgroup \\nname.\\nHow to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].\\n\\n\\nWi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu\\n662\\n[Device Name/Password]\\nYou can change the camera name (SSID) and password.\\n• Press [DISP.] to change the device name and password.\\nHow to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n• The number of characters you can enter is a maximum of 32 for the device name \\nand between 8 and 63 for the password.\\n[Wi-Fi Function Lock]\\nTo prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to \\nprotect personal information in the camera and included with images, protect the Wi-Fi \\nfunction with a password.\\n[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.\\n• How to enter characters (ÎEntering Characters: 100)\\n[Cancel]: Cancel the password.\\n• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the Wi-Fi \\nfunction.\\n• If you forget your password, you can use [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu to \\nreset the network settings and thereby reset the password.\\n[Network Address]\\nDisplays the MAC address and IP address of the camera.\\n• When the following function is being used, [Network Address] is not available:\\n– Tethered recording\\n\\n\\n663\\nConnecting to Other Devices\\nThis chapter describes connections with other devices, for example, HDMI \\ndevices, such as TVs, and PCs.\\nConnect using either the HDMI socket or the USB port on the camera.\\n≥Connecting: 664\\n≥Viewing on a TV: 666\\n≥Importing Images to a PC: 670\\n≥Storing on a Recorder: 675\\n≥Tethered Recording: 676\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Connecting\\n664\\nConnecting\\nHDMI socket\\nConnect the camera and HDMI device (TV, etc.) with a \\ncommercially available HDMI cable.\\n• Use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) \\nlong).\\n• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.\\n(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)\\n• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Connecting\\n665\\nUSB port\\nUse a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC \\nor recorder.\\n• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV\\n666\\nViewing on a TV\\nYou can connect the camera to a TV or external monitor to view recorded \\npictures and videos.\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn off the camera and TV.\\n1\\nConnect the camera and TV with a commercially \\navailable HDMI cable. (ÎHDMI socket: 664)\\n2\\nTurn on the TV.\\n3\\nSwitch the TV input to HDMI input.\\n4\\nTurn on the camera.\\n5\\nDisplay the playback screen.\\n≥Press [\\n].\\n≥The recorded images are displayed on the camera and TV.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV\\n667\\n• With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the \\nconnected TV.\\nThe output resolution can be changed in [Output Resolution(Playback)]. \\n(Î[Output Resolution(Playback)]: 586)\\n• Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and \\nbottom or the left and right of images.\\nYou can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI \\nConnection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. (Î[Background Color(Playback)]: \\n587)\\n• HDMI output is not possible if you connect a USB connection cable at the same \\ntime while [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)].\\n• The audio of video recorded with [4ch Mic Input] set to [ON] cannot be output to \\nan external device connected via HDMI if the device is not compatible with \\n4-channel audio or high-resolution audio.\\n• Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or \\nbottom cut off.\\n• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV\\n668\\n™ Using VIERA Link\\nVIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your \\nremote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera \\nhas been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI \\ncable for automatic linked operations.\\n(Not all operations are possible.)\\n1\\nConnect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link using a \\ncommercially available HDMI cable. (ÎHDMI socket: 664)\\n2\\nTurn on the camera.\\n3\\nTurn on the VIERA Link.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [HDMI Connection] ¨ [VIERA Link (CEC)] ¨ [ON]\\n4\\nDisplay the playback screen.\\n• Press [\\n].\\n• The recorded images are displayed on the TV. (The monitor and viewfinder of \\nthe camera will turn off.)\\n5\\nOperate with the remote control for the TV.\\nPower off link\\nIf you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.\\nAutomatic input switching\\nIf you turn on the camera and then press [\\n], the input of the TV automatically \\nswitches to input to which this camera is connected.\\nFurthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.\\n(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)\\n• To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.\\nFor the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV\\n669\\n• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function \\nusing the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification. \\nLinked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies \\nare not guaranteed.\\n• The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for \\nPanasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible with \\nPanasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.\\n• Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC\\n670\\nImporting Images to a PC\\n≥Copying Images to a PC: 671\\n≥Installing Software: 674\\nIf you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to \\nthe PC.\\nYou will need to use software that is compatible with the recorded video \\nformat in order to play back or edit video on the PC.\\nYou can also use software for processing and editing RAW images. \\n(ÎInstalling Software: 674)\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC\\n671\\nCopying Images to a PC\\nAfter connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging \\nfiles and folders on this camera to the PC.\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn on the camera and PC.\\n1\\nConnect the camera and PC with the USB connection \\ncable. (ÎUSB port: 665)\\n2\\nPress 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥Windows: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].\\n≥Mac: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.\\n3\\nDrag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.\\n• The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which \\ncan detect mass storage devices.\\nSupported OS\\nWindows: Windows 11, Windows 10\\nMac: macOS 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.6, 12.0 to 12.5\\n• Mac:\\nSupported by “Final Cut Pro X”.\\nFor details on “Final Cut Pro X”, please contact Apple Inc.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC\\n672\\n™ Folder Structure Inside Card\\n(A) The camera’s setup information\\n(B) Images\\n(C) Folder number\\n(D) JPG: JPEG format pictures\\nRW2: RAW format pictures\\nMP4: MP4 videos\\nMOV: MOV videos\\n(E) File number\\n(F) Color space\\nP: sRGB\\n_: AdobeRGB\\nCAMSET\\nAD_LUMIX\\nDCIM\\n(A)\\n100XXXXX\\nPXXX0001.JPG\\n(B)\\n(D)\\n(E)\\n(F)\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC\\n673\\n• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera \\nwill be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection \\nscreen being displayed. (Î[USB Mode]: 585)\\n• Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.\\n• After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely \\nremove the USB connection cable on the PC.\\n• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing \\nthe card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC\\n674\\nInstalling Software\\nInstall the software to process and edit RAW images.\\n™ SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE\\nThis software processes and edits RAW images.\\nEdited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be \\ndisplayed on a PC.\\nCheck the following site and then download and install the software:\\nhttp://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/\\nOperating environment\\n≥Supported OS\\nWindows: Windows 11, Windows 10, Windows 8.1 (64 bit)\\nMac: macOS 10.13 to 10.15, 11, 12\\n• For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the \\nHelp or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support site.\\n• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.\\n• Supported OSs are current as of January 2023 and are subject to change.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Storing on a Recorder\\n675\\nStoring on a Recorder\\nBy connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD \\nrecorder, you can store the pictures and videos.\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn on the camera and recorder.\\n• Insert a card into card slot 1.\\n1\\nConnect the camera and recorder with the USB \\nconnection cable. (ÎUSB port: 665)\\n2\\nPress 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n3\\nOperate the recorder to store the images.\\n• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera \\nwill be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB Mode] selection \\nscreen being displayed. (Î[USB Mode]: 585)\\n• Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.\\n• Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your recorder.\\n• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing \\nthe card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.\\n• For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions for \\nthe recorder.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording\\n676\\nTethered Recording\\n≥Installing Software: 677\\n≥Operating the Camera from a PC: 678\\nIf you install the “LUMIX Tether” camera control software on your PC, you \\ncan connect the camera to the PC via USB and then control the camera \\nfrom the PC and record while checking the live view on the PC screen \\n(tethered recording).\\nIn addition, you can output via HDMI to an external monitor or TV during \\ntethered recording.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording\\n677\\nInstalling Software\\n™ “LUMIX Tether”\\nThis software is for controlling the camera from a PC.\\nIt allows you to change various settings and to record remotely and then \\nsave the images to the PC.\\nCheck the following site and then download and install the software:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html\\n(English only)\\nOperating environment\\n≥Supported OS\\nWindows: Windows 11, Windows 10 (64 bit)\\nMac: macOS 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.6, 12.0 to 12.5\\n≥Interface\\nUSB port (SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1))\\n• Supported OSs are current as of January 2023 and are subject to change.\\n• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.\\n• For how to operate the software, refer to the operation guide for “LUMIX Tether”.\\n\\n\\nConnecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording\\n678\\nOperating the Camera from a PC\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn on the camera and PC.\\n• Install “LUMIX Tether” on PC.\\n1\\nConnect the camera and PC with the USB connection \\ncable. (ÎUSB port: 665)\\n2\\nPress 34 to select [PC(Tether)] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n≥[\\n] is displayed on the camera’s screen.\\n3\\nUse “LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.\\n• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Tether)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera \\nwill be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection \\nscreen being displayed. (Î[USB Mode]: 585)\\n• The Wi-Fi/Bluetooth functions are not available while there is a PC connection \\nwith [PC(Tether)].\\n\\n\\n679\\nMaterials\\nThis chapter describes procedures to try when there is a problem and \\nprovides information about the specifications for your reference.\\n≥Digital Camera Accessory System: 680\\n≥Using Optional Accessories: 681\\n≥Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 688\\n≥Message Displays: 709\\n≥Troubleshooting: 713\\n≥Cautions for Use: 728\\n≥Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time \\nwith the Battery: 738\\n≥Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with \\nCards: 743\\n≥List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: \\n750\\n≥List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 774\\n≥Specifications: 781\\n≥Trademarks and Licenses: 799\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Digital Camera Accessory System\\n680\\nDigital Camera Accessory System\\n(Product numbers correct as of January 2023.)\\n*1 Supplied with an AC adaptor, an AC cable/AC mains lead and a USB connection \\ncable.\\n*2 The AC Adaptor (optional) can only be used with the designated Panasonic DC \\nCoupler (optional).\\nThe AC Adaptor (optional) cannot be used by itself.\\n• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.\\n• For lens-related optional accessories such as compatible lenses and filters, refer to \\nour catalogs/website, etc.\\n• For the latest information on optional accessories, refer to our catalogs/website, etc.\\nProduct name\\nProduct number\\nBattery Pack\\nDMW-BLK22\\nBattery Charger*1\\nDMW-BTC15\\nAC Adaptor*2\\nDMW-AC10\\nDC Coupler*2\\nDMW-DCC17\\nBattery Grip\\nDMW-BGS5\\nFlash\\nDMW-FL580L, DMW-FL360L, \\nDMW-FL200L\\nLED Video Light\\nVW-LED1\\nStereo Shotgun Microphone\\nDMW-MS2\\nStereo Microphone\\nVW-VMS10\\nXLR Microphone Adaptor\\nDMW-XLR1\\nShutter Remote Control\\nDMW-RS2\\nTripod Grip\\nDMW-SHGR1\\nShoulder Strap\\nDMW-SSTG9\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Using Optional Accessories\\n681\\nUsing Optional Accessories\\n≥Battery Grip (Optional): 682\\n≥Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 684\\n≥Tripod Grip (Optional): 686\\n≥AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 687\\n• For information on the external flash (ÎUsing an External Flash (Optional): 330)\\n• For information on the external microphone (ÎExternal Microphones (Optional): \\n377)\\n• For information on the XLR Microphone Adaptor (ÎXLR Microphone Adaptor \\n(Optional): 382)\\n• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Using Optional Accessories\\n682\\nBattery Grip (Optional)\\nWhen mounted on the camera, the Battery Grip (DMW-BGS5: optional) \\nimproves ease of operation and grip when the camera is held vertically.\\nAlso, inserting a battery into the Battery Grip provides a stable supply of \\npower even for long periods of recording.\\n• The Battery Grip is dust and splash resistant.\\n• The joystick on the camera body is able to be moved in 8 directions (up, down, left, \\nright, and diagonally), whereas the joystick on the Battery Grip can be moved in only \\n4 directions (up, down, left, and right).\\n™ Selecting Battery Usage Priority\\nSelects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both \\nthe camera and the Battery Grip.\\nGetting started:\\n• Turn the camera off, and remove the cover for the battery grip connector.\\n1\\nAttach the Battery Grip to the camera.\\n2\\nTurn on the camera.\\n3\\nSet the battery use priority.\\n•\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [Battery Use Priority]\\n[BODY]: The battery in the camera is used first.\\n[BG]: The battery in the Battery Grip is used first.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Using Optional Accessories\\n683\\n• When the battery in the Battery Grip is used, [\\n] is displayed on the \\nscreen.\\n• You can register functions of your choice to the [Fn] button on the Battery Grip. \\n(ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\n• The [WB] button, [ISO] button, [\\n] button, [AF ON] button, and joystick each \\nwork the same as the buttons and joystick on the camera body.\\n• Refer to the operating instructions for the Battery Grip for details.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Using Optional Accessories\\n684\\nShutter Remote Control (Optional)\\nYou can connect the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) to use \\nthe camera as follows:\\n• Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake\\n• Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and burst recording\\n• Start/end the video recording\\n• Using the functions registered in the video rec. button of the Shutter Remote Control\\n™ Registering Functions to the Video Rec. Button\\nYou can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter \\nRemote Control.\\nThe functions that can be registered are the same as the functions that can \\nbe registered to the Fn buttons for recording (ÎSetting Items ([Fn Button \\nSet]/[Setting in REC mode]): 509).\\n[Video Record] is registered in the default setting.\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select [Video Rec. Button (Remote)]\\n• Register functions using the same operations as [Fn Button Set]. (ÎRegister \\nFunctions to the Fn Buttons: 506)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Using Optional Accessories\\n685\\n• Always use a genuine Panasonic Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).\\n• Refer to the operating instructions for the Shutter Remote Control for details.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Using Optional Accessories\\n686\\nTripod Grip (Optional)\\nAttach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional) to use it as a grip for \\nrecording while walking, a tripod, or a Shutter Remote Control.\\n• Connect the grip cable to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera.\\n• Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional).\\n• The [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] menu does not work with the Tripod Grip.\\n• Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.\\n• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Tripod Grip.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Using Optional Accessories\\n687\\nAC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)\\nWith an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler \\n(DMW-DCC17: optional), you can perform recording and playback without \\nworrying about the remaining battery charge.\\n• Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set.\\nThey cannot be used independently of one another.\\n• When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC Coupler cover opens, so the \\nstructure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.\\nDo not allow sand, dust and water droplets to adhere to or enter the camera.\\nAfter use, confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the DC Coupler cover, \\nthen firmly close the cover.\\n• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC \\nCoupler.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n688\\nMonitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n≥Recording Screen: 688\\n≥Playback Screen: 704\\n• The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set to \\n[\\n].\\nRecording Screen\\n(1)\\n \\n \\n \\nFlash mode (Î[Flash Mode]: 334)\\n \\nFlash setting (Î[Flash Synchro]: 340, Recording Using a \\nWireless Flash: 342)\\nAWBc AWBw\\n \\n \\n \\n \\n \\n2500K\\nWhite balance (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)/\\nColor Temperature (ÎColor Temperature Setting: 298)\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n(3)\\n(4)\\n(5)\\n(6)\\nFn7\\nFn7\\nFn4\\nFn4\\nFn3\\nFn3\\nFn5\\nFn5\\nFn6\\nFn6\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nOFF\\nISO\\nSS\\nF\\nEXPS\\nEXPS\\nISO\\nSS\\nF\\nAWB\\nBKT\\nAEL\\nBKT\\nAFS\\nAFS\\n999\\nISO100\\nF3.5\\n60\\n24m59s\\n24m59s\\nGPS\\nAPS-C\\nL\\nFINE\\nRAW+\\n+1/3\\nWL\\n1\\n1\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n689\\nWhite Balance Bracket, White Balance Bracket (Color \\nTemperature) (Î[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 240)\\n \\nAdjusting the white balance (ÎAdjusting the White Balance: \\n299)\\nAWB lock setting (Î[AWB Lock Setting]: 537)\\nPhoto Style (Î[Photo Style]: 301)\\nFilter setting (Î[Filter Settings]: 314)/\\nFilter effect adjustment (ÎAdjusting the Filter Effect: 316)\\nLUT View Assist (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)\\nHLG View Assist (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n \\n \\nPicture quality (Î[Picture Quality]: 120), Picture size (Î[Picture \\nSize]: 118)\\nExtended Tele Conversion (ÎExtended Tele Conversion: 199)\\nRecording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)/\\nRecording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n \\nRecording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)/\\nRecording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n59.94p\\n60/59.94p\\nRecording frame rate (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)/\\nSlow & Quick setting (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\nElectronic shutter (Î[Shutter Type]: 243)\\n \\n \\nFocus mode (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147, Record Using \\nMF: 190)\\n \\nFocus Limiter (Î[Focus Limiter]: 157)\\nFocus Bracket (Î[More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 239)\\nAFL\\nAF Lock (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 284)\\nBKT\\nAWB\\nAWB\\nAWB\\nAWBL\\nEXPS\\nMOV\\n4K 420/10-L\\nAFS AFC MF\\nAFS\\nBKT\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n690\\nMFL\\nFocus ring lock (Î[Focus Ring Lock]: 542)\\nFocus Peaking (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195)\\nFULL APS-C \\nImage area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\n \\n \\n \\n \\n \\nAF mode (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\n \\n \\nAF detection setting (ÎAutomatic Detection: 168)\\n \\n \\n \\n \\nDrive mode (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\nConnected to Wi-Fi (ÎChecking operation of the Wi-Fi and \\nBluetooth functions: 610)\\nConnected to Bluetooth (ÎConnecting to a Smartphone \\n(Bluetooth Connection): 614)\\nGPS\\nLocation logging (Î[Location Logging]: 639)\\n \\n \\nImage stabilizer (ÎImage Stabilizer: 250)\\nCamera shake alert (ÎUsing the Image Stabilizer: 252)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n691\\n(2)\\n(3)\\nSelf-timer (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 229)\\nSilent mode (Î[Silent Mode]: 241)\\nAPS-C \\nImage area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\nAnamorphic Desqueeze Display (Î[Anamorphic Desqueeze \\nDisplay]: 439)\\nOverlay indication (Î[Sheer Overlay]: 559)\\nLUT View Assist (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)\\nLoop recording (Î[Loop Recording (video)]: 443)\\nColor shading compensation (Î[Color Shading Compensation]: \\n324)\\n \\nBuilt-in microphone, External microphone (Î[Sound Rec Level \\nDisp.]: 369, External Microphones (Optional): 377)\\n \\nSound recording quality/XLR microphone adaptor setting \\n(Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373, XLR Microphone Adaptor \\n(Optional): 382)\\n4ch microphone input (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n \\nSound recording level limiter (Î[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 374)\\nMute (Î[Mute Sound Input]: 370)\\nSound recording level (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 369)\\nExposure meter (Î[Expo.Meter]: 558)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n692\\n(4)\\n(5)\\nHistogram (Î[Histogram]: 553)\\nAF area (ÎAF Area Operations: 181)\\nSpot metering target (Î[Metering Mode]: 261)\\nCenter marker (Î[Center Marker]: 564)\\nSelf-timer (ÎRecording Using the Self-timer: 229)\\nOperation lock (Î[Operation Lock Setup]: 547)\\n24m59s\\nElapsed recording time (ÎBasic Video Operations: 123)\\nTime code (ÎTime Code: 389)\\nImage being sent (Î[Auto Transfer]: 637)\\n¥\\nFocus (turns green) (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113)/\\nRecording state (turns red) (ÎHigh Resolution mode: 211, Basic \\nVideo Operations: 123)\\nFocus (in low light AF situations) (ÎLow illumination AF: 151)\\nFocus (Starlight AF) (ÎStarlight AF: 151)\\nFlash adjustment (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 339)\\n \\n \\n \\n \\n \\n \\n \\nRecording mode (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\nProgram Shift (ÎProgram Shift: 265)\\nLOW\\nSTAR\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n693\\n \\n \\n \\nMetering mode (Î[Metering Mode]: 261)\\nAE Lock (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 284)\\n60\\nShutter speed (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113)\\nF3.5\\nAperture value (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113)\\nAperture Bracket (Î[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 238)\\nExposure compensation value (ÎExposure Compensation: \\n280)\\nExposure Bracket (Î[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 237)\\nManual Exposure Assist (ÎManual Exposure Assist: 275)\\nISO sensitivity (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)/\\nDual Native ISO setting (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290)\\n \\nCard access indication (turns red) (ÎBasic Video Operations: \\n123)\\nCard slot (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)/\\nDouble card slot function (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 574)\\n \\nNo card\\n \\nCard full\\n999\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken (ÎNumber of Pictures \\nThat Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 743)\\nr20\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken continuously (ÎNumber of \\nPictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 208)\\n24m59s\\nVideo recording time (ÎVideo Recording Time: 744)\\nBattery indication (ÎPower Indications: 51)\\nPower supply (ÎUsing the Camera While Supplying It with \\nPower (Supplying Power/Charging): 49)\\nBattery Grip (ÎBattery Grip (Optional): 682)\\nAE\\nAEL\\nF3.5\\nBKT\\nBKT\\n+1/3\\nISO100\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n694\\n(6)\\nTouch Tab (Î[Touch Settings]: 546)\\nTemperature rise warning icon (ÎRecording: 714)\\nFan error warning icon (ÎOthers: 727)\\nFn button (ÎUse [Fn3] to [Fn7] (Touch Icons): 517)\\nTouch AF, Touch Shutter (ÎTouch AF/Touch Shutter: 107)\\nExposure compensation (ÎExposure Compensation: 280)\\nTouch AE (ÎTouch AE: 110)\\nFocus Peaking (Î[Focus Peaking]: 195)\\nFn3\\nAE\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n695\\n (ÎSetting a Filter with Touch Operation: 317)/\\n/\\n (ÎOperations During \\nVideo Recording: 354)\\nFilter effect adjustment (ÎAdjusting the Filter Effect: 316)\\nFilter on/off (ÎSetting a Filter with Touch Operation: 317)\\nEXPS\\nFilter setting (Î[Filter Settings]: 314)\\nF\\nAperture value (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 354)\\nSS\\nShutter speed (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 354)\\nExposure compensation (ÎOperations During Video Recording: \\n354)\\nISO\\nISO sensitivity (ÎOperations During Video Recording: 354)\\nSound recording level adjustment (ÎOperations During Video \\nRecording: 354)\\nSlow & Quick setting (ÎOperations During Video Recording: \\n354)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n696\\n™ Control Panel\\n(1)\\n(2)\\nRecording mode (ÎSelecting the Recording Mode: 75)\\n1/60\\nShutter speed (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113)\\nF3.5\\nAperture value (ÎBasic Picture Operations: 113)\\nBattery indication (ÎPower Indications: 51)/\\nPower supply (ÎPower Supply: 48)\\nBattery indication (battery grip) (ÎPower Indications: 51)\\nISO sensitivity (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)/\\nDual Native ISO setting (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290)\\nExposure compensation value (ÎExposure Compensation: \\n280)/\\nManual Exposure Assist (ÎManual Exposure Assist: 275)\\nFlash setting (Î[Flash Adjust.]: 339, [Flash Synchro]: 340, \\nRecording Using a Wireless Flash: 342)/\\nFlash mode (Î[Flash Mode]: 334)\\nF3.5\\n1/60\\n999\\n999\\nAWB\\nFn\\n0\\n0\\n0\\nISO\\n100\\nAFS\\nFINE\\n3:2\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n(3)\\n(4)\\nISO\\n100\\n0\\n0\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n697\\n(3)\\nDrive mode (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: 202)\\nFocus mode (ÎSelecting the Focus Mode: 147, Record Using \\nMF: 190)\\nAF mode (ÎSelecting the AF Mode: 165)\\nFINE\\nPicture quality (Î[Picture Quality]: 120)\\nAPS-C \\nImage area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)/\\nRecording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)/\\nRecording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n30fps\\nPicture size/Aspect ratio (Î[Picture Size]: 118)\\nSlow & Quick setting (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\n \\nWi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (ÎChecking operation of the \\nWi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 610)\\nFn button settings (ÎFn Buttons: 503)\\nAFS\\nL\\n3:2\\nFn\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n698\\n(4)\\nPhoto Style (Î[Photo Style]: 301)\\nAWB\\nWhite balance (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)\\ni.Dynamic Range (Î[i.Dynamic Range]: 283)\\nMetering mode (Î[Metering Mode]: 261)\\nCard slot (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)/\\nDouble card slot function (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 574)\\nNo card\\nCard full\\n999\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken (ÎNumber of Pictures \\nThat Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 743)\\nr20\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken continuously (ÎNumber of \\nPictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 208)\\nR24m59s\\nVideo recording time (ÎVideo Recording Time: 744)\\n----\\nNo card\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n699\\n™ Control Panel (Creative Video Mode/Slow & Quick Mode)\\n(1)\\n(2)\\nFrame rate (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)/\\nSlow & Quick setting (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\nShutter speed (ÎShutter-Priority AE Mode: 270)\\nAperture value (ÎAperture-Priority AE Mode: 267)\\nExposure mode (ÎSetting the Exposure for Recording Videos: \\n352)\\nExposure compensation value (ÎExposure Compensation: \\n280)/\\nManual Exposure Assist (ÎManual Exposure Assist: 275)\\nImage area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\nTime code (ÎTime Code: 389)\\nRecording state (ÎScreen Displays While Video Recording: \\n125)\\nFULL\\nFPS\\n30\\nF3.5\\n1/60\\n100\\nAWB\\nIRIS\\nSHUTTER\\nISO\\nWB\\nPHOTO STYLE\\nTC\\nDF 00:00:00:00 REC\\n11 3\\n4K 29.97p\\n420/10-L\\nMOV\\n24m59s\\n24m59s\\nAUTO\\nCH1\\n-2\\n-36\\n-12\\n-6\\n-24\\n0\\nCH2\\n-6\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n(4)\\n(3)\\n(5)\\nOFF\\n48kHz/24bit\\nFPS\\n60\\nSHUTTER\\n1/60\\nIRIS\\nF3.5\\n00:00:00:00\\nTC \\nDF\\nREC\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n700\\n(3)\\n(4)\\nRecording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)/\\nRecording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\nCard slot (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)/\\nDouble card slot function (Î[Double Card Slot Function]: 574)\\nVideo recording time (ÎVideo Recording Time: 744)\\n \\nWi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (ÎChecking operation of the \\nWi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 610)\\nFan operating mode (Î[Fan Mode]: 568)\\nBattery indication (ÎPower Indications: 51)/\\nPower supply (ÎUsing the Camera While Supplying It with \\nPower (Supplying Power/Charging): 49)\\nBattery indication (battery grip) (ÎPower Indications: 51)\\n \\nBuilt-in microphone, External microphone (Î[Sound Rec Level \\nDisp.]: 369, External Microphones (Optional): 377)\\n \\nSound recording quality/XLR microphone adaptor setting \\n(Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373, XLR Microphone Adaptor \\n(Optional): 382)\\n4ch microphone input (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n \\nSound recording level limiter (Î[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 374)\\nMute (Î[Mute Sound Input]: 370)\\nSound recording level (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 369)\\n4K 29.97p\\n420/10-L\\nMOV\\n24m59s\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n701\\n(5)\\nISO sensitivity (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)/\\nDual Native ISO setting (Î[Dual Native ISO Setting]: 290)\\nPhoto Style (Î[Photo Style]: 301)/\\nLUT View Assist (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)/\\nHLG View Assist (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\nWhite balance (ÎWhite Balance (WB): 293)\\n100\\nISO\\nAUTO\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n702\\n™ Audio Information Display\\n(1)\\n \\nBuilt-in microphone, External microphone (Î[Sound Rec Level \\nDisp.]: 369, External Microphones (Optional): 377)\\n \\nSound recording quality/XLR microphone adaptor setting \\n(Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373, XLR Microphone Adaptor \\n(Optional): 382)\\n4ch microphone input (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\n \\nSound recording level limiter (Î[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 374)\\nMute (Î[Mute Sound Input]: 370)\\nSound recording level (Î[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 369)\\nEXT. GAIN\\n96kHz/24bit\\nOFF\\nCH1/CH2\\nAudio Quality\\nMute\\n4ch MIC Input\\nMonitor CH\\nMonitor\\nCH1\\n-2\\n-36\\n-12\\n-6\\n-24\\n0\\nCH2\\n-6\\nCH3\\n-2\\n-36\\n-12\\n-6\\n-24\\n0\\nCH4\\n-6\\nON\\n4ch/96kHz/24bit\\nSTD.\\nREALTIME\\n(1)\\n(2)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n703\\n(2)\\nSound recording gain switch (Î[Sound Rec Gain Level]: 371)\\nSound input mute (Î[Mute Sound Input]: 370)\\nSound recording quality (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373)\\n4ch microphone input (Î[4ch Mic Input]: 384)\\nSound monitoring (ÎHeadphones: 385)\\nSound monitoring channel (Î[Sound Monitoring Channel]: 387)\\nEXT.GAIN\\nSTD.\\nMute\\nOFF\\nAudio Quality\\n96kHz/24bit\\n4ch MIC Input\\nON\\nMonitor\\nREALTIME\\nMonitor CH\\nCH1/CH2\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n704\\nPlayback Screen\\n(1)\\nPlayback mode (Î[Playback Mode]: 493)\\nRecording date and time (ÎSetting the Clock (When Turning On \\nfor the First Time): 68)\\nCard slot (ÎSwitching the Card to Display: 462)\\n¿3\\nRating (Î[Rating]: 497)\\nVideo playback (ÎPlaying Back Videos: 463)\\nProtected picture (Î[Protect]: 497)\\nGPS\\nLocation logging (Î[Location Logging]: 639)\\nObtaining information\\n2023.12.1  10:00\\n100-0001\\n1/999\\n8m30s\\nISO100\\nF3.5\\n60\\n±0\\n3\\nGPS\\nL\\nFINE\\n(4)\\n(1)\\n(5)\\n(2)\\n(3)\\n2023.12. 1 10:00\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n705\\n(2)\\n100-0001\\nFolder/file number (Î[Folder / File Settings]: 575)\\n1/999\\nImage number/Total number of images\\nNumber of group images/\\nNumber of files\\n8m30s\\nVideo recording time (ÎPlaying Back Videos: 463)\\nSlow & Quick video (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\nLoop recording (Î[Loop Recording (video)]: 443)\\nLUT View Assist (Î[V-Log View Assist]: 432)\\nHLG View Assist (Î[HLG View Assist]: 436)\\n\\u001c\\u0003SLF\\u0011\\n\\u001c\\u0003ILOHV\\nXXs\\nXXmXXs\\nXXmXXs\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n706\\n(3)\\n(4)\\n(5)\\nPlayback (video) (ÎPlaying Back Videos: 463)\\n \\n \\nGroup images (ÎGroup Images: 478)\\nTime code (ÎTime Code: 389)\\nSound recording quality (Î[Sound Rec Quality]: 373)\\n \\nRecording file format (Î[Rec. File Format]: 132)/\\nRecording quality (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n59.94p\\n60/59.94p\\nFrame rate (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)/\\nSlow & Quick setting (ÎSlow & Quick Video: 410)\\nFULL APS-C \\nImage area of video (Î[Image Area of Video]: 144)\\n \\nWi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (ÎChecking operation of the \\nWi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 610)\\nSilent mode (Î[Silent Mode]: 241)\\nRecording information\\nBattery indication (ÎPower Indications: 51)\\nPower supply (ÎUsing the Camera While Supplying It with \\nPower (Supplying Power/Charging): 49)\\nBattery Grip (ÎBattery Grip (Optional): 682)\\nMOV\\n4K 420/10-L\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n707\\nDetailed information display\\n(1)\\nCard slot (ÎInserting Cards (Optional): 56)\\n(2)\\nRecording date and time (ÎSetting the Clock (When Turning On for the First \\nTime): 68)\\n(3)\\nFolder/file number (Î[Folder / File Settings]: 575)\\n(4)\\nRecording information (basic)\\n(5)\\nRecording information (advanced)\\nHistogram display\\n100\\n100-0001\\nISO\\nISO\\n0\\nF3.5\\n60\\n2023.12.  1 10:00\\nsRGB\\n1/5\\nFINE\\nAFS\\n5500\\n0\\nSTD.\\nL\\n3:2\\n1\\n(1)\\n(5)\\n(4)\\n(3)\\n(2)\\n2/5\\nR\\nY\\nB\\nG\\n100\\n100-0001\\nISO\\nISO\\n0\\nF3.5\\n60\\n2023.12.  1 10:00\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays\\n708\\nPhoto Style display\\nWhite balance display\\nLens information display\\n(6)\\nThe focal length corresponding to the angle of view when using a full-frame lens \\nwith the [Aspect Ratio] set to [3:2]\\n3/5\\n100\\n100-0001\\nISO\\nISO\\n0\\nF3.5\\n60\\n2023.12.  1 10:00\\n100\\n100-0001\\nISO\\nISO\\n0\\nF3.5\\n60\\n2023.12.  1 10:00\\n4/5\\n5500K\\n1\\nG\\nM\\nA\\nB\\n5/5\\n100\\n100-0001\\nISO\\nISO\\n0\\nF3.5\\n60\\n2023.12.  1 10:00\\n(6)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Message Displays\\n709\\nMessage Displays\\nMeanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and \\nresponse methods.\\n™ Card\\n[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]\\n• It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.\\nEither insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting. \\n(Î[Card Format]: 573)\\n[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]\\n• Use a card compatible with the camera. (ÎMemory Cards That Can Be Used: 24)\\n[Insert memory card again.]/[Try another card]\\n• Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.\\n• Insert a different card.\\n[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]\\n• Failure to read or write data.\\nTurn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.\\n• The card may be broken.\\n• Insert a different card.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Message Displays\\n710\\n[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing \\nspeed of the card]\\n• The card does not meet the writing speed requirements for recording.\\nUse a card of a supported Speed Class. (ÎSD Cards That Can Be Used with This \\nCamera: 25)\\n• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified \\nSpeed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow.\\nWe recommend backing up data, and formatting. (Î[Card Format]: 573)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Message Displays\\n711\\n™ Lens\\n[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button \\nwhile lens is attached.]\\n• Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release \\nbutton. (ÎAttaching a Lens: 60)\\nTurn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.\\n[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached \\ncorrectly.]\\n• Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and \\nthe camera body using a dry cotton swab.\\nAttach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the \\ndealer.\\n™ Battery\\n[This battery cannot be used]\\n• Use a genuine Panasonic battery.\\nIf this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact \\nthe dealer.\\n• If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.\\n[The life span of this battery is starting to decline and should be \\nconsidered for replacement. To maintain reliability refrain from \\nusing this battery.]\\n• The battery has deteriorated. Try not to use that battery.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Message Displays\\n712\\n™ Others\\n[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be \\ndeleted]\\n• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.\\nBack up any necessary data before formatting the card. (Î[Card Format]: 573)\\n[A folder cannot be created]\\n• The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot \\nbe created.\\nAfter formatting the card, execute [File Number Reset] in the [Setup] ([Card/File]) \\nmenu. (Î[File Number Reset]: 577)\\n[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]\\n• Turn off and on the camera.\\nIf the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.\\n[The fan is not functioning correctly.]\\n• The fan has stopped. Turn off and on the camera. If the fan does not work after \\nturning the camera off and then on again, consult the dealer.\\n• The temperature of the camera will rise if you continue to use the camera with the \\nfan stopped. Do not use over long periods of time.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n713\\nTroubleshooting\\n≥Power, Battery: 713\\n≥Recording: 714\\n≥Video: 719\\n≥Playback: 720\\n≥Monitor/Viewfinder: 721\\n≥Flash: 722\\n≥Wi-Fi Function: 723\\n≥TV, PC: 726\\n≥Others: 727\\nFirst, try out the following procedures.\\nIf the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting \\n[Reset] (Î[Reset]: 99) on the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.\\nPower, Battery\\nThe camera turns off automatically.\\n• [Power Save Mode] is enabled. (Î[Power Save Mode]: 53)\\nThe battery becomes flat too quickly.\\n• When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.\\nTurn the camera off frequently such as by using [Power Save Mode] (Î[Power Save \\nMode]: 53).\\n• When [Continuous AF] is set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster. Battery \\nconsumption can be reduced by setting to [MODE1] or [OFF]. (Î[Continuous AF]: \\n358)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n714\\nRecording\\nRecording stops before finishing. Cannot record. Cannot use \\nsome functions.\\n• The temperature of the camera rises more readily in the following circumstances: \\nwhen the ambient temperature is high, during continuous use such as when \\nrecording high-definition video or outputting via HDMI. When the temperature of the \\ncamera rises, [\\n] appears blinking on the screen. If you continue to use the \\ncamera, a message indicating that the camera cannot be used is displayed on the \\nscreen and recording and HDMI output will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool \\ndown and for the message indicating that the camera can be used again. When the \\nmessage indicating that it can be used again is displayed, turn the camera off then \\non again.\\n*\\nWhen recording with the camera mounted on a tripod, etc., you can set the \\ntemperature at which recording is stopped to a higher temperature. (Î[Thermal \\nManagement]: 579)\\nCannot record images. The shutter will not operate immediately \\nwhen the shutter button is pressed.\\n• If [Focus/Shutter Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until \\nfocus is achieved. (Î[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 540)\\nThe recorded image is whitish.\\n• Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or \\nsimilar.\\nIf the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry \\ncloth.\\nFor information about how to clean the image sensor (ÎDirt on the Image Sensor: \\n729)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n715\\nThe recorded image is too bright or dark.\\n• Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (ÎLocking Focus and \\nExposure (AF/AE Lock): 284)\\nMultiple images are recorded at once.\\n• When drive mode is set to [\\n] (Burst Shot 1) or [\\n] (Burst Shot 2), pressing \\nand holding the shutter button will take burst pictures. (ÎSelecting the Drive Mode: \\n202)\\n• When [Bracketing] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images \\nwhile automatically changing the settings. (ÎBracket Recording: 233)\\nThe subject is not focused properly.\\n• Confirm the following details:\\n– Is the subject outside of the focus range?\\n– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? (Î[Shutter AF]: 543)\\n– Is [Focus/Shutter Priority] set to [RELEASE]? (Î[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 540)\\n– Is AF Lock (ÎLocking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 284) set where it is not \\nappropriate?\\n– Is [Focus Limiter] set to [ON]? (Î[Focus Limiter]: 157)\\n– Is [AF Micro Adjustment] set? (Î[AF Micro Adjustment]: 161)\\nCannot focus or zoom with the lens.\\n• Confirm the following details:\\n– Is [Focus Ring Lock] set to [ON]? (Î[Focus Ring Lock]: 542)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n716\\nThe recorded image is blurred. The image stabilizer is not \\neffective.\\n• The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not \\nwork properly when recording in dark places.\\nIn these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.\\nThe recorded image looks rough. Noise appears on the picture.\\n• Try the following:\\n– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each \\nitem other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (ÎAdjusting Image \\nQuality: 306)\\n– Set [Long Exposure NR] to [ON]. (Î[Long Exposure NR]: 247)\\n• When the camera is used continuously, the temperature inside the camera may rise \\nand this may cause lower image quality. We recommend turning off the camera \\nwhenever you are not actually recording.\\nThe subject appears distorted on the image.\\n• When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject \\nmay appear distorted in the picture:\\n– [ELEC.]\\n– Video recording\\nThis is a characteristic of the CMOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera, \\nand is not a malfunction.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n717\\nStriping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent \\nor LED lighting.\\n• This is characteristic of CMOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors.\\nThis is not a malfunction.\\n• When using the electronic shutter (Î[Shutter Type]: 243), lowering the shutter \\nspeed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.\\n• If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording video, this can be \\nmitigated by fixing the shutter speed.\\nEither set [Flicker Decrease (Video)] (Î[Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 394), or fix the \\nshutter speed with the [\\n]/[S&Q] mode (ÎRecording Modes Specifically for \\nVideo (Creative Video/S&Q): 350).\\nStripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.\\n• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.\\nDecrease the ISO sensitivity. (ÎISO Sensitivity: 286)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n718\\nThe brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from \\nthe actual scene.\\n• When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the \\nshutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.\\nThese are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a \\nmalfunction.\\n• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting \\nsuch as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen \\nbrightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.\\nBright spot not in subject is recorded.\\n• Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.\\nPerform [Pixel Refresh]. (Î[Pixel Refresh]: 591)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n719\\nVideo\\nCannot record videos.\\n• Try again after either returning the [System Frequency] to the original setting or \\ninserting another card.\\n• When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after \\nturning on the camera.\\nIn videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded. \\nThe recorded audio is very quiet.\\n• Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and \\nfocus actions may be recorded in videos.\\nYou can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF] \\n(Î[Continuous AF]: 358).\\n• Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.\\nAn operation sound is recorded in a video.\\n• We recommend setting the [\\n]/[S&Q] mode and recording with touch operation if \\nyou are bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (ÎOperations \\nDuring Video Recording: 354)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n720\\nPlayback\\nCannot play back. There are no recorded pictures.\\n• Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.\\n• Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal \\nPlay]. (Î[Playback Mode]: 493)\\n• Videos recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back.\\nReturn the [System Frequency] setting to the one you used during the recording. \\n(Î[System Frequency]: 130)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n721\\nMonitor/Viewfinder\\nThe monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.\\n• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] \\n(Î[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]: 54) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.\\n• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display \\nmay switch to the viewfinder display.\\nIt may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may \\nchange significantly for an instant.\\n• This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject \\nbrightness changes, making the lens aperture change.\\nThis is not a malfunction.\\nUnevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the viewfinder.\\n• The viewfinder of the camera is built with OLED components. Screen burn-in may \\noccur on the screen/viewfinder when a same image is displayed for a long period of \\ntime, but it does not affect the recorded images.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n722\\nUpdating of the information display on the screen is sometimes \\nslow.\\n• When using functions that put a burden on processing in the camera, updating of the \\ninformation display on the screen may get slower, but this is not a malfunction. There \\nwill be no change to the images recorded.\\nFunctions that put a burden on processing in the camera:\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of \\n60.00p\\n– HDMI output\\n– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone\\n– Tethered recording\\nInformation displays that may get updated slower:\\n– [Time Code Display]\\n– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]\\n– [Luminance Spot Meter], etc.\\nFlash\\nThe flash does not fire.\\n• The flash does not fire when using the following functions:\\n– Video recording\\n– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]\\n– High Resolution mode\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n723\\nWi-Fi Function\\nA Wi-Fi connection cannot be established. Radio waves get \\ndisconnected. Wireless access point is not displayed.\\nGeneral tips for using a Wi-Fi connection\\n• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.\\n• Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens \\nand cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.\\nUse the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.\\n• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or \\nmaintain communication with other devices.\\n(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)\\n• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely \\naffected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.\\nMove the camera away from the metal surface.\\nWireless access point\\n• Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.\\n• Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.\\n– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.\\n– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.\\n• Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even \\nthough it is present.\\n– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.\\n– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically, \\nmanually set the channel supported by the camera.\\n– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.\\nEnter the SSID, and then connect. (ÎConnecting by Manual Input: 653)\\n• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically \\ndisconnected after specific time has passed.\\nReconnect the connection again.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n724\\nCannot connect with a wireless access point.\\n• The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.\\nCheck the authentication type and encryption key. (ÎConnecting by Manual Input: \\n653)\\n• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access \\npoint.\\nCheck the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as \\nwell as the status of other wireless devices.\\nWi-Fi connection on an iOS device fails.\\n• Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera.\\nIf you still cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen \\nof the smartphone to connect.\\nIf the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera, then perform the Bluetooth \\nconnection settings again.\\nWi-Fi connection with a smartphone is not possible.\\n• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the \\ncamera.\\nWhen trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize \\nthe user name and password, and connection is not possible.\\n• Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local \\naccount/Microsoft account).\\nEnsure you use the local account user name and password.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n725\\nThe PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The \\ncamera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.\\n• At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of \\n“WORKGROUP”.\\nIf you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.\\nIn the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC \\nto which to connect. (Î[PC Connection]: 661)\\n• Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.\\n• When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably from \\nthose of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending on the \\nOS.\\nTransmission of the image fails midway. Some images cannot be \\ntransmitted.\\n• Is the size of the image too large?\\n– Reduce the image size at [Size] (Î[Size]: 659), and then send.\\n– Transmit after dividing the video with [Video Divide] (Î[Video Divide]: 470).\\n• File format of the video that can be sent differs depending on the destination. \\n(ÎImages That Can be Sent: 648)\\nI have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.\\n• In the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu, [Reset], reset network settings. (Î[Reset]: 99)\\nHowever, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n726\\nTV, PC\\nThe TV images are displayed with gray bands.\\n• Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], gray bands may be displayed on the top and \\nbottom or the left and right of the images. You can change the band color in \\n[Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. \\n(Î[Background Color(Playback)]: 587)\\nImages cannot be imported even when connected to a PC.\\n• Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. (Î[USB Mode]: 585)\\n• Turn the camera off and on.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Troubleshooting\\n727\\nOthers\\n[\\n] is displayed on the screen.\\n• The fan has stopped. Turn off and on the camera. If the fan does not work after \\nturning the camera off and then on again, consult the dealer.\\n• The temperature of the camera will rise if you continue to use the camera with the \\nfan stopped. Do not use over long periods of time.\\nWhen the camera is shaken, a rattling sound is heard from the \\ncamera.\\n• The sound is caused by the in-body stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.\\nThere is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on \\nor off, or when the camera is swung. There is a sound from the \\nlens when recording.\\n• This is the sound of the internal lenses moving or the aperture operating. It is not a \\nmalfunction.\\nAn unreadable language was selected by mistake.\\n• Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:\\n ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ [\\n] ¨ Select desired language (Î[Language]: 592)\\nThe camera becomes warm.\\n• The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but this \\ndoes not indicate a problem with performance or quality.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n728\\nCautions for Use\\n™ The Camera\\nKeep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic \\nequipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).\\n• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may \\nbe disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.\\n• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely \\naffecting the pictures and/or sound.\\n• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic \\nfields created by speakers or large motors.\\n• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures \\nand/or sound.\\n• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning \\nproperly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then \\nreinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.\\nDo not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.\\n• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/\\nor sound may be adversely affected.\\nAlways use the supplied cords and cables.\\nIf you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables \\nsupplied with them.\\nDo not extend the cords or the cables.\\nDo not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.\\n• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be \\ndamaged and the surface finish may peel off.\\nDo not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in \\ncontact with the camera for a long period of time.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n729\\n™ Cleaning\\nBefore cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler, \\nand disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe \\nthe camera with a dry, soft cloth.\\n• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung \\nwet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.\\n• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to \\nclean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel \\noff.\\n• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.\\n™ Dirt on the Image Sensor\\nIf dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the \\nrecording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the \\nrecorded picture.\\nTo prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid \\nchanging the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a \\nlens when storing the camera.\\nRemove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.\\nDust reduction function\\nThe camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust \\nthat have affixed to the front of the image sensor.\\nIf the dirt is particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] ([Others]) menu, \\nperform [Sensor Cleaning]. (Î[Sensor Cleaning]: 592)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n730\\nRemoving dirt on the image sensor\\nThe image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the \\nfollowing when you do have to clean it yourself.\\n• Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.\\nDo not blow the dust off with excessive power.\\n• Do not put the blower further inside than the lens mount.\\nThe blower can scratch the image sensor if it touches.\\n• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.\\n• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or \\nPanasonic.\\n™ Cleaning the Viewfinder\\nIf the viewfinder becomes dirty, blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder \\nusing a commercially available blower, then lightly wipe with a soft dry \\ncloth.\\n• The eye cup cannot be removed, so make sure it does not come loose when \\ncleaning the viewfinder.\\n• If the eye cup accidentally gets removed, consult the dealer or Panasonic.\\n™ Monitor/Viewfinder\\n• Do not push hard on the monitor.\\nThis may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.\\n• Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder \\nscreen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light \\nconstantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen. \\nThis is not a malfunction.\\nThough the monitor/viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled \\nprecision technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.\\nThe spots will not be recorded on images on a card.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n731\\n™ Lens\\n• When using this lens, take care not to drop, bump, or apply undue force to it.\\nDoing so may cause malfunction or damage to this lens and the digital \\ncamera.\\n• Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.\\nThe concentrated light may cause fire or damage.\\n• Images may be affected by dust, dirt, and soiling (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) on the \\nlens surface.\\nBefore and after recording, use a blower to blow off dust and dirt from the surface of \\nthe lens, then lightly wipe with a soft dry cloth to remove soiling.\\n• When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent \\ndust and dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.\\n• To protect the lens contact points (A), do not do the following.\\nThese may cause a malfunction.\\n– Touch the lens contact points.\\n– Soil the lens contact points.\\n– Place the lens with its mount surface facing down.\\n• To improve the dust and splash resistant performance of the interchangeable lens \\n(S-R2060/S-S50), a lens mount rubber is used in the mount.\\n– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this \\ndoes not impact performance.\\n– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n732\\n™ Battery\\nThe battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.\\nIt is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on \\nperformance increases as the temperature rises or drops.\\nDo not let the battery terminals (B) become soiled.\\n• Wipe with a dry cloth if they become soiled.\\nAlways remove the battery after use.\\n• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic objects \\n(clips, etc.) for storage or transport.\\nIf you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the \\nbattery and the contacts are deformed.\\n• Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into \\nthe camera.\\nDispose of unusable battery.\\n• The battery has a limited life.\\n• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.\\nDo not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects \\n(such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).\\n• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if \\nyou touch a battery.\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n733\\n™ AC Adaptor\\n• The charging lights may blink under the influence of static electricity or \\nelectromagnetic wave, depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon \\nhas no effects on charging.\\n• If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.\\nKeep the charger 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.\\n• During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.\\n• After use, be sure to disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet.\\n(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)\\n™ Card\\nDo not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight, \\nor areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.\\nDo not bend or drop the card.\\nDo not subject the card to strong vibration.\\n• Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.\\n• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or \\ncarrying the card.\\n• Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.\\nAdditionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n734\\n™ Personal Information\\nPersonal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.\\nWe recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password and \\nWi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. (Î[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: \\n661)\\n• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as \\nrecording dates and times, and location information.\\nDisclaimer\\n• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to \\nerroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other \\nhandlings.\\nPlease note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or \\nindirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal \\ninformation.\\nWhen requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera\\n• After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including \\npersonal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have \\nregistered or saved within the camera with [Reset] (Î[Reset]: 99).\\n• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (Î[Reset]: 99)\\n• Remove the card from the camera.\\n• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.\\n• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above \\noperations are not possible due to malfunction.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n735\\nPoints to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card\\nFormat or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management \\ninformation, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.\\nWe recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC \\ndata deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/\\ntransferring the card.\\nYou are responsible for handling of data on cards.\\n™ When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time\\n• Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.\\nIf the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable \\neven after charging.\\n• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.\\n(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended \\nhumidity: 40 %RH to 60 %RH)\\n• If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged \\nonce per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then \\nstored again.\\n• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a \\ncloset or a cabinet.\\n• Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long \\nperiod of time.\\n™ Image Data\\n• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to \\ninappropriate handling.\\nPanasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n736\\n™ Tripod\\n• Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.\\n• When using a tripod, removal of the battery may not be possible.\\n• Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera, \\nor cause the rating label to come off.\\n• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod.\\n™ Shoulder Strap\\n• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the \\ncamera by the shoulder strap.\\nHold the camera and the lens when carrying them.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Cautions for Use\\n737\\n™ Wi-Fi Function\\nUse the camera as a wireless LAN device.\\nWhen using devices or computer systems that require more reliable security than \\nwireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety \\ndesigns and defects for the systems used.\\nPanasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the \\ncamera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.\\nUse of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in \\ncountries where it is sold.\\nThere is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in \\ncountries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for \\nany violations.\\nThere is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be \\nintercepted.\\nPlease note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be \\nintercepted by a third party.\\nDo not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity \\nor interference.\\n• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, \\nsuch as near microwave ovens.\\nThese may cause the interruption of the radio waves.\\n• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones \\nthat use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both \\ndevices.\\nDo not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use.\\nWhen using Wi-Fi, wireless networks (SSID) that you are not allowed to use may be \\ndisplayed, but you should not connect to these as it may be viewed as unauthorized \\naccess.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery\\n738\\nNumber of Pictures That Can Be Taken and \\nAvailable Recording Time with the Battery\\nListed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time \\nlengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.\\n• The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera & \\nImaging Products Association) standards.\\n• Using a Panasonic SDXC memory card.\\n• The values listed are approximate.\\n™ Recording Pictures (When Using the Monitor)\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-S50) is used\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken\\n370\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken\\n370\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery\\n739\\n™ Recording Pictures (When Using the Viewfinder)\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-S50) is used\\n• The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time to Sleep] in \\n[Power Save LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting] \\nfunction works as intended.\\n(Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by \\nPanasonic)\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken\\n370 (1250)\\nNumber of pictures that can be taken\\n370 (1200)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery\\n740\\n™ Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used\\n[Rec. File \\nFormat]\\n[Rec Quality]\\nContinuous available \\nrecording time \\n(minutes)\\nActual available \\nrecording time \\n(minutes)\\n[Image Area of Video]\\n[Image Area of Video]\\n[FULL] [APS-C]\\n[FULL] [APS-C]\\n[MP4]\\n[4K/10bit/100M/60p]\\n[4K/10bit/100M/50p]\\n90\\n90\\n45\\n45\\n[4K/8bit/100M/30p]\\n[4K/8bit/100M/25p]\\n110\\n100\\n100\\n55\\n50\\n50\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]\\n120\\n110\\n120\\n60\\n55\\n60\\n[MOV]\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n80\\n40\\n[4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n100\\n100\\n100\\n50\\n50\\n50\\n[FHD/30p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/25p/420/10-L]\\n110\\n110\\n120\\n55\\n55\\n60\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery\\n741\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-S50) is used\\n• Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating \\nactions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.\\n[Rec. File \\nFormat]\\n[Rec Quality]\\nContinuous available \\nrecording time \\n(minutes)\\nActual available \\nrecording time \\n(minutes)\\n[Image Area of Video]\\n[Image Area of Video]\\n[FULL] [APS-C]\\n[FULL] [APS-C]\\n[MP4]\\n[4K/10bit/100M/60p]\\n[4K/10bit/100M/50p]\\n90\\n90\\n45\\n45\\n[4K/8bit/100M/30p]\\n[4K/8bit/100M/25p]\\n110\\n100\\n100\\n55\\n50\\n50\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]\\n110\\n110\\n120\\n55\\n55\\n60\\n[MOV]\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n80\\n40\\n[4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n100\\n100\\n100\\n50\\n50\\n50\\n[FHD/30p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/25p/420/10-L]\\n110\\n100\\n110\\n55\\n50\\n55\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery\\n742\\n™ Playback (When Using the Monitor)\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used\\nWhen the interchangeable lens (S-S50) is used\\nPlayback time (minutes)\\n230\\nPlayback time (minutes)\\n230\\n• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time vary \\ndepending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.\\nFor example, these will reduce in the following case:\\n– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.\\n• If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully charged, \\nthen the battery is at the end of its service life.\\nReplace with a new battery.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards\\n743\\nNumber of Pictures That Can Be Taken and \\nVideo Recording Time with Cards\\nListed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos \\nthat can be recorded on a card.\\n• The values listed are approximate.\\n™ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken\\n• [Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE]\\n• [Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [RAW+FINE]\\n[Picture Size]\\nCard capacity\\n64 GB\\n128 GB\\n256 GB\\n512 GB\\n[L] (24M)\\n4490\\n8890\\n16880\\n34930\\n[M] (12M)\\n8230\\n16300\\n30490\\n63100\\n[S] (6M)\\n14530\\n28770\\n52510\\n108680\\n[Picture Size]\\nCard capacity\\n64 GB\\n128 GB\\n256 GB\\n512 GB\\n[L] (24M)\\n870\\n1730\\n3350\\n6930\\n[M] (12M)\\n960\\n1900\\n3670\\n7610\\n[S] (6M)\\n1010\\n2010\\n3870\\n8010\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards\\n744\\n™ Video Recording Time\\n• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.\\n• Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.\\n• [Rec. File Format]: [MP4]\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\nCard capacity\\n64 GB\\n128 GB\\n256 GB\\n512 GB\\n[4K/10bit/100M/60p]\\n[4K/8bit/100M/30p]\\n[4K/8bit/100M/24p]\\n1h25m\\n2h45m\\n5h25m\\n11h20m\\n[4K/10bit/72M/30p]\\n[4K/10bit/72M/24p]\\n1h55m\\n3h55m\\n7h35m\\n15h45m\\n[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]\\n4h55m\\n9h45m\\n19h30m\\n40h30m\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]\\n6h30m\\n13h00m\\n26h00m\\n54h00m\\n[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]\\n5h40m\\n11h25m\\n22h45m\\n47h15m\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\nCard capacity\\n64 GB\\n128 GB\\n256 GB\\n512 GB\\n[4K/10bit/100M/50p]\\n[4K/8bit/100M/25p]\\n1h25m\\n2h45m\\n5h25m\\n11h20m\\n[4K/10bit/72M/25p]\\n1h55m\\n3h55m\\n7h35m\\n15h45m\\n[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]\\n4h55m\\n9h45m\\n19h30m\\n40h30m\\n[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]\\n6h30m\\n13h00m\\n26h00m\\n54h00m\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards\\n745\\n• [Rec. File Format]: [MOV]\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\nCard capacity\\n64 GB\\n128 GB\\n256 GB\\n512 GB\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]\\n[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]\\n[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/60p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/60p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/60p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/60p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n42m00s\\n1h20m\\n2h40m\\n5h40m\\n[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]\\n[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]\\n[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]\\n[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/30p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/30p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/30p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/120p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/120p/420/10-L]\\n56m00s\\n1h50m\\n3h35m\\n7h35m\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards\\n746\\n[FHD/60p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/60p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/48p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/48p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/30p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/30p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/24p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]\\n1h25m\\n2h45m\\n5h25m\\n11h20m\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards\\n747\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\nCard capacity\\n64 GB\\n128 GB\\n256 GB\\n512 GB\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]\\n[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]\\n[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/50p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/50p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/50p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/50p/420/10-L]\\n42m00s\\n1h20m\\n2h40m\\n5h40m\\n[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]\\n[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/25p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/25p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/25p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/100p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/100p/420/10-L]\\n56m00s\\n1h50m\\n3h35m\\n7h35m\\n[FHD/50p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/50p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/25p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/25p/420/10-L]\\n1h25m\\n2h45m\\n5h25m\\n11h20m\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards\\n748\\n[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]\\n[Rec Quality]\\nCard capacity\\n64 GB\\n128 GB\\n256 GB\\n512 GB\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)\\n[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)\\n[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]\\n[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/48p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/48p/420/10-L]\\n42m00s\\n1h20m\\n2h40m\\n5h40m\\n[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]\\n[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[C4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n[C4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[4K/24p/422/10-L]\\n[4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n56m00s\\n1h50m\\n3h35m\\n7h35m\\n[FHD/48p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/48p/420/10-L]\\n[FHD/24p/422/10-L]\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]\\n1h25m\\n2h45m\\n5h25m\\n11h20m\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards\\n749\\n• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time will be \\nshorter depending on the SD card used when recording with [Segmented File \\nRecording] or [Loop Recording (video)].\\n• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, number of pictures \\nthat can be taken, video recording time vary.\\n• [9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of pictures \\nthat can be taken is 10000 or more.\\n• The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n750\\nList of Default Settings/Custom Saving/\\nSettings Available for Copying\\n: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings\\n: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom \\nmode\\n: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Photo]: \\n[Image Quality]\\n[Photo Style]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Metering Mode]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Aspect Ratio]\\n[3:2]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Picture Quality]\\n[FINE]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Picture Size]\\n[L] (24M)\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[High Resolution \\nMode Setting]\\n[Picture Quality]\\n[COMBINED]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Picture Size]\\n[XL]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Simul Record Normal \\nShot]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shutter Delay]\\n[2 SEC]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Motion Blur Processing]\\n[MODE1]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Long Exposure NR]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Dual Native ISO Setting]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Sensitivity \\n(photo)]\\n[ISO Auto Lower Limit \\nSetting]\\n[100]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Auto Upper Limit \\nSetting]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n751\\n[Min. Shutter Speed]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[i.Dynamic Range]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Vignetting Comp.]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Color Shading Compensation]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Diffraction Compensation]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Filter Settings]\\n[Filter Effect]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Simultaneous Record w/o \\nFilter]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Photo]: \\n[Focus]\\n[AF Detection Setting]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n[HUMAN]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]\\n[Set 1]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Limiter]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Assist Light]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Peaking]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[1-Area AF Moving Speed]\\n[FAST]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n752\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Photo]: \\n[Flash]\\n[Flash Mode]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Firing Mode]\\n[TTL]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Flash Adjust.]\\n[±0 EV]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Flash Synchro]\\n[1ST]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Manual Flash Adjust.]\\n[1/1]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Auto Exposure Comp.]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless Channel]\\n[1CH]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless FP]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Communication Light]\\n[HIGH]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless Setup]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n753\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Photo]: \\n[Others (Photo)]\\n[Bracketing]\\n[Bracketing Type]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[More Settings]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Silent Mode]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[Operation Mode]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Body(B.I.S.) / \\nLens(O.I.S.)]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[When to Activate]\\n[HALF-SHUTTER]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Boost I.S. (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Anamorphic (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Lens Information]\\n[Lens1]\\n3\\n3\\n[Burst Shot Setting]\\n[Burst Shot 1 Setting]\\n[H]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Burst Shot 2 Setting]\\n[SH]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shutter Type]\\n[MECH.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shutter Delay]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Ex. Tele Conv.]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Time Lapse/\\nAnimation]\\n[Mode]\\n[Time Lapse Shot]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shooting Interval Setting]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Start Time]\\n[Now]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Image Count]\\n[1]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shooting Interval]\\n[1m00s]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Exposure Leveling]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Create New Folder At \\nRec]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Self Timer]\\n[\\n] / [\\n] / [\\n] / \\n[\\n] to [\\n]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n754\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Quality]\\n[Exposure Mode]\\n[P]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Photo Style]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Metering Mode]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Dual Native ISO Setting]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Sensitivity \\n(video)]\\n[ISO Auto Lower Limit \\nSetting]\\n[100]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Auto Upper Limit \\nSetting]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Synchro Scan]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Flicker Decrease (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Master Pedestal Level]\\n[0]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SS/Gain Operation]\\n[SEC/ISO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[i.Dynamic Range]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Vignetting Comp.]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Color Shading Compensation]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Diffraction Compensation]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Filter Settings]\\n[Filter Effect]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Simultaneous Record w/o \\nFilter]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n755\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Format]\\n[Rec. File Format]\\nWhen [System \\nFrequency] is set to \\n[59.94Hz (NTSC)] or \\n[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [MP4]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nWhen [System \\nFrequency] is set to \\n[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]: \\n[MOV]\\n[Image Area of Video]\\n[FULL]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Rec Quality]\\nWhen [System \\nFrequency] is set to \\n[59.94Hz (NTSC)]: \\n[4K/8bit/100M/30p]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nWhen [System \\nFrequency] is set to \\n[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [4K/\\n8bit/100M/25p]\\nWhen [System \\nFrequency] is set to \\n[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]: \\n[4K/24p/420/10-L]\\n[Rec Quality (My List)]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Slow & Quick Setting]\\n[30fps]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Time Code]\\n[Time Code Display]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Count Up]\\n[REC RUN]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Time Code Value]\\n—\\n[Time Code Mode]\\n[DF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[HDMI Time Code Output] [OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Luminance Level]\\n[16-255]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n756\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Video]: \\n[Focus]\\n[AF Detection Setting]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n[HUMAN]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Custom \\nSetting(Video)]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Limiter]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Continuous AF]\\n[MODE1]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Assist Light]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Peaking]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[1-Area AF Moving Speed]\\n[FAST]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n757\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Video]: \\n[Audio]\\n[Sound Rec Level \\nDisp.]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Mute Sound Input]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Gain Level]\\n[STANDARD]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Level Adj.]\\n[0dB]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Quality]\\n[48kHz/24bit]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Level Limiter]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wind Noise Canceller]\\n[STANDARD]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wind Cut]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Mic Socket]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Special Mic.]\\n[STEREO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[4ch Mic Input]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Output]\\n[REALTIME]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Headphone Volume]\\n[LEVEL3]\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Monitoring Channel]\\n[CH1/CH2]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n758\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Video]: \\n[Others (Video)]\\n[Silent Mode]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[Operation Mode]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Body(B.I.S.) / \\nLens(O.I.S.)]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[When to Activate]\\n[HALF-SHUTTER]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Boost I.S. (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Anamorphic (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Lens Information]\\n[Lens1]\\n3\\n3\\n[Self Timer Setting]\\n[Self Timer]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Self Timer For Video]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Transition]\\n[Focus Position Setting]\\n—\\n[Focus Transition Speed]\\n[M]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Transition Rec]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Transition Wait]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Loop Recording (video)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Segmented File Recording]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Live Cropping]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n759\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Custom]: \\n[Image Quality]\\n[Photo Style \\nSettings]\\n[Show/Hide Photo Style]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[My Photo Style Settings]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Reset Photo Style]\\n—\\n[LUT Library]\\n[Vlog_709]\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Increments]\\n[1/3 EV]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Extended ISO]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Exposure Offset \\nAdjust.]\\n[Multi Metering]\\n[±0EV]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Center Weighted]\\n[±0EV]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Spot]\\n[±0EV]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Highlight Weighted]\\n[±0EV]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Face Priority In Multi Metering]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AWB Lock Setting]\\n[Operation Syncs With \\nShutter]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Lock Hold With Fn \\nButton]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Color Space]\\n[sRGB]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Exposure Comp. Reset]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[CreativeVideo \\nCombined Set.]\\n[F/SS/ISO/Exposure \\nComp.]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[White Balance]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Photo Style]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Metering Mode]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Mode]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n760\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Custom]: \\n[Focus/Shutter]\\n[Focus/Shutter \\nPriority]\\n[AFS]\\n[FOCUS]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AFC]\\n[BALANCE]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF/AE Lock Hold]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF+MF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[MF Assist]\\n[Focus Ring]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Mode]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Press Joystick]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[MF Assist Display]\\n[PIP]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[MF Guide]\\n[\\n] / [\\n]*1\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Ring Lock]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Show/Hide AF \\nMode]\\n[Tracking]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Full Area AF]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] [ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Zone]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[1-Area+]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Pinpoint]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Pinpoint AF \\nSetting]\\n[Pinpoint AF Time]\\n[MID]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Pinpoint AF Display]\\n[PIP]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n761\\n*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the \\ncamera was purchased.\\n[Shutter AF]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Eye Detection Display]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Half-Press Shutter]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Assign REC to Shutter Button]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Quick AF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Eye Sensor AF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Looped Focus Frame]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Enlarged Live \\nDisplay(Video)]\\n[Keep Enlarged Display]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[PIP Display]\\n[PIP]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n762\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Custom]: \\n[Operation]\\n[Q.MENU Settings]\\n[Layout Style]\\n[MODE1]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Front Dial Assignment]\\n[Value]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Item Customize (Photo)]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Item Customize (Video)]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Touch Settings]\\n[Touch Screen]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Touch Tab]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Touch AF]\\n[AF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Touch Pad AF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Operation Lock \\nSetup]\\n[Cursor]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Joystick]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Touch Screen]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Dial]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[DISP. Button]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Fn Button Set]\\n[Setting in REC mode]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Setting in PLAY mode]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]\\n[AFTER PRESSING2]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Displayed \\nSetting]\\n[Front/Rear Dials]\\n[\\n/\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Exposure Comp. \\nDisp. Setting]\\n[Cursor Buttons (Up/\\nDown)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Front/Rear Dials]\\n[\\n/\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n763\\n[Dial Set.]\\n[Assign Dial (F/SS)]\\n[SET1]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Rotation (F/SS)]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Control Dial Assignment]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Exposure Comp.]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Dial Operation Switch \\nSetup]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Rotation (Menu \\nOperation)]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Joystick Setting]\\n[D.FOCUS Movement]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Video Rec. Button (Remote)]\\n[Video Record]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n764\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Custom]: \\n[Monitor / Display (Photo)]\\n[Auto Review]\\n[Duration Time (photo)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Playback Operation \\nPriority]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Constant Preview]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Histogram]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Photo Grid Line]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Live View Boost]\\n[MODE1] / [MODE2] / \\n[OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n[M]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Night Mode]\\n[Monitor]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[LVF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[LVF/Monitor Disp. \\nSet]\\n[LVF Disp. Set]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Monitor Disp. Set]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Horizontal Image \\nFlip(Monitor)]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Vertical Image \\nFlip(Monitor)]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Expo.Meter]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focal Length]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Blinking Highlights]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sheer Overlay]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n[I.S. Status Scope]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Level Gauge]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Luminance Spot Meter]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Framing Outline]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Show/Hide Monitor \\nLayout]\\n[Control Panel]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Black Screen]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n765\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Custom]: \\n[Monitor / Display (Video)]\\n[V-Log View Assist]\\n[LUT Select]\\n[Vlog_709]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[LUT View Assist \\n(Monitor)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[HLG View Assist]\\n[Monitor]\\n[MODE2]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[HDMI]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Monochrome Live View]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Center Marker]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Safety Zone Marker]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Frame Marker]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Zebra Pattern]\\n[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] / \\n[ZEBRA1+2] / [OFF]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[WFM/Vector Scope]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Color Bars]\\n[SMPTE]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Video-Priority Display]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Red REC Frame Indicator]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n766\\n*1 The adjustment value for the focus point cannot be registered.\\n*2 The settings information cannot be loaded onto a camera different from the one \\nwhere the camera settings were saved.\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Custom]: \\n[IN/OUT]\\n[HDMI Rec Output]\\n[Info Display]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[HDMI Recording Control]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Output (HDMI)]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Enlarged Live Display]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Fan Mode]\\n[AUTO2]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Custom]: \\n[Lens / Others]\\n[Lens Focus Resume]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Lens Fn Button Setting]\\n[Focus Stop]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Ring \\nControl]\\n[NON-LINEAR] / \\n[LINEAR]\\n[NON-LINEAR]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n[300°]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Micro Adjustment]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3*1\\n3*2\\n[Lens Information]\\n[Lens1]\\n3\\n3\\n[Lens Info. Confirmation]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Vertical Position Info (Video)]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n767\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Setup]: \\n[Card/File]\\n[Card Format]\\n—\\n[Double Card Slot \\nFunction]\\n[Recording Method]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[Destination Card Slot]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[Folder / File \\nSettings]\\n[Select Folder]\\n—\\n[Create a New Folder]\\n—\\n[File Name Setting]\\n[Folder Number Link]\\n3\\n3\\n[File Number Reset]\\n—\\n[Copyright \\nInformation]\\n[Artist]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n[Copyright Holder]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n[Display Copyright Info.]\\n—\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n768\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Setup]: \\n[Monitor / Display]\\n[Power Save Mode]\\n[Sleep Mode]\\n[5MIN.]\\n3\\n3\\n[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]\\n[5MIN.]\\n3\\n3\\n[Power Save LVF \\nShooting]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Thermal \\nManagement]\\n[Recording Max \\nTemperature]\\n[STANDARD]\\n3\\n3\\n[Monitor Frame Rate]\\n[60fps]\\n3\\n3\\n[LVF Frame Rate]\\n[60fps]\\n3\\n3\\n[Monitor Settings] / [Viewfinder]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Monitor Backlight] / [LVF Luminance]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n[Eye Sensor]\\n[Sensitivity]\\n[HIGH]\\n3\\n3\\n[LVF/Monitor Switch]\\n[LVF/MON AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n[Level Gauge \\nAdjust.]\\n[Adjust.]\\n—\\n3\\n[Level Gauge Value \\nReset]\\n—\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n769\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Setup]: \\n[IN/OUT]\\n[Beep]\\n[Beep Volume]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Beep Volume]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Beep Tone]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[E-Shutter Vol]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[E-Shutter Tone]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[Headphone Volume]\\n[LEVEL3]\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]\\n[COMBINED WITH \\nREC]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wi-Fi]\\n—\\n3\\n[Bluetooth]\\n—\\n3\\n[USB]\\n[USB Mode]\\n[\\n] [Select on \\nconnection]\\n3\\n3\\n[USB Power Supply]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n[Battery Use Priority]\\n[BG]\\n3\\n3\\n[HDMI Connection]\\n[Output \\nResolution(Playback)]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[HLG View Assist (HDMI)]\\n[AUTO]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[VIERA Link (CEC)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n[Background \\nColor(Playback)]\\n[\\n]\\n3\\n3\\n[Photo Luminance Level]\\n[16-255]\\n3\\n3\\n[Network Connection Light]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n770\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Setup]: \\n[Setting]\\n[Save to Custom Mode]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Load Custom Mode]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Custom Mode \\nSettings]\\n[Limit No. of Custom \\nMode]\\n[3]\\n3\\n3\\n[Edit Title]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[How to Reload Custom \\nMode]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Select Loading Details]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Save/Restore \\nCamera Setting]\\n[Save]\\n—\\n[Load]\\n—\\n[Delete]\\n—\\n[Keep Settings While \\nFormat]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n[Reset]\\n—\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n771\\n*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the \\ncamera was purchased.\\n*2 Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not \\ndisplayed due to differences in specifications.\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Setup]: \\n[Others]\\n[Clock Set]\\n0:00:00 1/1/2023\\n[Time Zone]\\n*1\\n3\\n[System Frequency]\\n[59.94Hz (NTSC)] / \\n[50.00Hz (PAL)]*1\\n3\\n3\\n[Pixel Refresh]\\n—\\n[Sensor Cleaning]\\n—\\n[Language]\\n*1\\n3\\n3\\n[Firmware Version]\\n—\\n[Approved Regulations]*2\\n—\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n772\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[My Menu]: \\n[Edit My Menu]\\n[Add]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Sorting]\\n—\\n[Delete]\\n—\\n[Display from My Menu]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Playback]: \\n[Playback Mode]\\n[Playback Mode]\\n[Normal Play]\\n3\\n3\\n[Slide Show]\\n—\\n3\\n3\\n[Rotate Disp.]\\n[ON]\\n3\\n3\\n[Picture Sort]\\n[DATE/TIME]\\n3\\n3\\n[Magnify from AF Point]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]\\n[MODE2]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Behavior After Video Playback]\\n[End Playback]\\n3\\n3\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Playback]: \\n[Process Image]\\n[RAW Processing]\\n—\\n[Time Lapse Video]\\n—\\n[Stop Motion Video]\\n—\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying\\n773\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Playback]: \\n[Add/Delete Info.]\\n[Protect]\\n—\\n[Rating]\\n—\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Playback]: \\n[Edit Image]\\n[Resize]\\n—\\n[Rotate]\\n—\\n[Video Divide]\\n—\\n[Copy]\\n—\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Playback]: \\n[Others]\\n[Delete Confirmation]\\n[\\\"No\\\" first]\\n3\\n3\\n[Delete All Images]\\n—\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode\\n774\\nList of Functions That Can Be Set in Each \\nRecording Mode\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Photo]: \\n[Image Quality]\\n[Photo Style]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Metering Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Aspect Ratio]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Picture Quality]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Picture Size]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[High Resolution \\nMode Setting]\\n[Picture Quality]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Picture Size]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Simul Record Normal \\nShot]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shutter Delay]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Motion Blur Processing]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Long Exposure NR]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Dual Native ISO Setting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Sensitivity \\n(photo)]\\n[ISO Auto Lower Limit \\nSetting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Auto Upper Limit \\nSetting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Min. Shutter Speed]\\n3\\n3\\n[i.Dynamic Range]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Vignetting Comp.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Color Shading Compensation]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Diffraction Compensation]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Filter Settings]\\n[Filter Effect]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Simultaneous Record w/\\no Filter]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode\\n775\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Photo]: \\n[Focus]\\n[AF Detection Setting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Limiter]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Assist Light]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Peaking]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[1-Area AF Moving Speed]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Photo]: \\n[Flash]\\n[Flash Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Firing Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Flash Adjust.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Flash Synchro]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Manual Flash Adjust.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Auto Exposure Comp.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless Channel]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless FP]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Communication Light]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wireless Setup]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode\\n776\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Photo]: \\n[Others (Photo)]\\n[Bracketing]\\n[Bracketing Type]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[More Settings]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Silent Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[Operation Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Body(B.I.S.) / \\nLens(O.I.S.)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[When to Activate]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Boost I.S. (Video)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Anamorphic (Video)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Lens Information]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Burst Shot \\nSetting]\\n[Burst Shot 1 Setting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Burst Shot 2 Setting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shutter Type]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Shutter Delay]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Ex. Tele Conv.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Time Lapse/Animation]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Self Timer]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode\\n777\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Quality]\\n[Exposure Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n[Photo Style]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Metering Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Dual Native ISO Setting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Sensitivity \\n(video)]\\n[ISO Auto Lower Limit \\nSetting]\\n3\\n3\\n[ISO Auto Upper Limit \\nSetting]\\n3\\n3\\n[Synchro Scan]\\n3\\n3\\n[Flicker Decrease (Video)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Master Pedestal Level]\\n3\\n3\\n[SS/Gain Operation]\\n3\\n3\\n[i.Dynamic Range]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Vignetting Comp.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Color Shading Compensation]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Diffraction Compensation]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Filter Settings]\\n[Filter Effect]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Simultaneous Record w/\\no Filter]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode\\n778\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Format]\\n[Rec. File Format]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Image Area of Video]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Rec Quality]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Rec Quality (My List)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Slow & Quick Setting]\\n3\\n[Time Code]\\n[Time Code Display]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Count Up]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Time Code Value]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Time Code Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[HDMI Time Code \\nOutput]\\n3\\n3\\n[Luminance Level]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Video]: \\n[Focus]\\n[AF Detection Setting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Custom \\nSetting(Video)]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Limiter]\\n[OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Continuous AF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[AF Assist Light]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Peaking]\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[SET]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[1-Area AF Moving Speed]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode\\n779\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Video]: \\n[Audio]\\n[Sound Rec Level Disp.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Mute Sound Input]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Gain Level]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Level Adj.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Quality]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Rec Level Limiter]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wind Noise Canceller]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Wind Cut]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Mic Socket]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Special Mic.]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[4ch Mic Input]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Output]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Headphone Volume]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Sound Monitoring Channel]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode\\n780\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Video]: \\n[Others (Video)]\\n[Silent Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[Operation Mode]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Body(B.I.S.) / \\nLens(O.I.S.)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[When to Activate]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Boost I.S. (Video)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Anamorphic (Video)]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Lens Information]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Self Timer Setting]\\n[Self Timer]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Self Timer For Video]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Focus Transition]\\n3\\n[Loop Recording (video)]\\n3\\n[Segmented File Recording]\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n3\\n[Live Cropping]\\n3\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n781\\nSpecifications\\nThe specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.\\nDigital camera body (DC-S5M2):\\nInformation for your safety\\nType\\n≥Type\\nDigital Single Lens Mirrorless camera\\n≥Lens mount\\nLeica Camera AG L-Mount\\n≥Recording media\\nSD memory card / SDHC memory card*1 / SDXC memory card*1\\n*1 Compliant with UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3, UHS-II Video Speed Class 90\\nDouble slot recording function is available.\\nPower source:\\n9.0 V\\nPower consumption:\\n4.9 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.9 W (when playing back with the \\nmonitor)\\n[When using the interchangeable lens (S-R2060)]\\n5.0 W (when recording with the monitor), 4.0 W (when playing back with the \\nmonitor)\\n[When using the interchangeable lens (S-S50)]\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n782\\nImage sensor\\n≥Image sensor\\n35 mm full-frame (35.6 mm×23.8 mm) CMOS sensor, a total of 25,280,000 pixels, \\nprimary color filter\\n≥Effective number of pixels of the camera\\n24,200,000 pixels\\nLatitude\\n14+ stops ([V-Log])\\nRecording format for still images\\n≥File format for still images\\nJPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.31 compliant) / RAW\\n≥Picture size (pixels)\\nWhen the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]\\n[L]: 5328×4000 (3536×2656)*2\\n[M]: 3792×2848 (2560×1920)*2\\n[S]: 2688×2016 (1840×1376)*2\\nHigh Resolution mode ([XL]): 10656×8000\\nHigh Resolution mode ([LL]): 7552×5664\\nWhen the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]\\n[L]: 6000×4000 (3984×2656)*2\\n[M]: 4272×2848 (2880×1920)*2\\n[S]: 3024×2016 (2064×1376)*2\\nHigh Resolution mode ([XL]): 12000×8000\\nHigh Resolution mode ([LL]): 8496×5664\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n783\\nWhen the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]\\n[L]: 6000×3368 (3984×2240)*2\\n[M]: 4272×2400 (2880×1624)*2\\n[S]: 3024×1704 (1920×1080)*2\\nHigh Resolution mode ([XL]): 12000×6736\\nHigh Resolution mode ([LL]): 8496×4784\\nWhen the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]\\n[L]: 4000×4000 (2656×2656)*2\\n[M]: 2848×2848 (1920×1920)*2\\n[S]: 2016×2016 (1376×1376)*2\\nHigh Resolution mode ([XL]): 8000×8000\\nHigh Resolution mode ([LL]): 5664×5664\\nWhen the aspect ratio setting is [65:24]\\n[L]: 6000×2208\\nWhen the aspect ratio setting is [2:1]\\n[L]: 6000×3000\\n*2 Figures in parentheses are for APS-C lenses\\n≥Image quality for pictures\\nFine / Standard / RAW+Fine / RAW+Standard / RAW\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n784\\nRecording format for video\\n≥Video format\\nMP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)\\nMOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)\\n≥Audio compression format\\nMP4: AAC (2ch, 48 kHz/16 bit)\\nMOV: LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit)*3\\n*3 LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit and 4ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit) \\nis available for selection when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: \\noptional) is attached\\n≥System frequency\\n59.94 Hz / 50.00 Hz / 24.00 Hz\\n≥Image quality for video\\nRefer to the “[Rec Quality]” pages for information about resolution, recording frame \\nrate, and other elements of recording quality. (Î[Rec Quality]: 133)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n785\\n≥S&Q (Slow & Quick)\\n[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]\\nWhen [Image Area of Video] is set to [FULL]\\n[FHD/60p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/30p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps\\nWhen [Image Area of Video] is set to [APS-C]\\n[C4K/30p/420/10-L] / [C4K/24p/420/10-L] / [4K/30p/420/10-L] / [4K/24p/420/10-L]\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps\\n[FHD/60p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/30p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps\\n[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]\\nWhen [Image Area of Video] is set to [FULL]\\n[FHD/50p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/25p/420/10-L]*4\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps\\nWhen [Image Area of Video] is set to [APS-C]\\n[C4K/25p/420/10-L] / [4K/25p/420/10-L]\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps\\n[FHD/50p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/25p/420/10-L]*4\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps\\n[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]\\nWhen [Image Area of Video] is set to [FULL]\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps\\nWhen [Image Area of Video] is set to [APS-C]\\n[C4K/24p/420/10-L] / [4K/24p/420/10-L]\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps\\n[FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4\\nFrame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps\\n*4 There is cropping for 151 fps or more\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n786\\nViewfinder\\n≥Type\\nAspect ratio 4:3, 0.5 inches, approx. 3,680,000 dots, organic EL (OLED) live view \\nviewfinder\\n≥Field of view ratio\\nApprox. 100 %\\n≥Magnification\\nApprox. 0.78× (−1.0 m−1 50 mm at infinity, with aspect ratio set to [3:2])\\n≥Eye point\\nApprox. 21 mm (at −1.0 m−1)\\n≥Diopter adjustment range\\n−4.0 to +2.0 diopter\\n≥Eye sensor\\nYes\\nMonitor\\n≥Type\\nAspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches, approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen\\n≥Field of view ratio\\nApprox. 100 %\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n787\\nFocus\\n≥AF type\\nTTL type based on image detection (image plane phase detection AF/contrast AF)\\n≥Focus mode\\nAFS / AFC / MF\\n≥AF mode\\nTracking*5 / Full Area AF*5 / Zone (Horizontal/Vertical)*5 / Zone*5 / \\n1-Area+Supplementary*5 / 1-Area*5 / Pinpoint\\nFocus area selection is possible by touching or with the joystick\\n*5 Automatic detection (HUMAN, FACE/EYE, ANIMAL+HUMAN) can be switched \\nON/OFF\\n≥AF Micro Adjustment\\nYes (All / Adjust By Lens)\\nExposure control\\n≥Light metering system, Light metering mode\\n1728-zone metering, multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot metering / \\nhighlight-weighted metering\\n≥Metering range\\nEV 0 to EV 18 (F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)\\n≥Exposure\\nProgram AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) / Shutter-Priority AE (S) / Manual \\nExposure (M)\\n≥Exposure compensation\\n1/3 EV steps, ±5 EV\\n≥ISO sensitivity for still images (standard output sensitivity)\\nNormal: AUTO / 50*6 / 100 to 51200 / 102400*6 / 204800*6\\n[V-Log]: AUTO / 320*6 / 640 to 51200\\n*6 When [Extended ISO] is set\\n• Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n788\\n≥ISO sensitivity for video (standard output sensitivity)\\nNormal: AUTO / 50*7 / 100 to 51200 / 102400*7 / 204800*7\\n[V-Log]: AUTO / 320*7 / 640 to 51200\\nHLG: AUTO / 400 to 51200 / 102400*7 / 204800*7\\n*7 When [Extended ISO] is set\\n• Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps\\n≥Dual Native ISO setting\\nNormal:\\n[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 100 / 640 (dB display values are based on 100)\\nAUTO / 50*8 / 100 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8\\n[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 100\\nAUTO / 50*8 / 100 to 800\\n[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 640\\nAUTO / 320*8 / 640 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8\\n[V-Log]:\\n[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 640 / 4000 (dB display values are based on 640)\\nAUTO / 320*8 / 640 to 51200\\n[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 640\\nAUTO / 320*8 / 640 to 5000\\n[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 4000\\nAUTO / 2000*8 / 4000 to 51200\\nHLG:\\n[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 400 / 2500 (dB display values are based on 400)\\nAUTO / 400 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8\\n[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 400\\nAUTO / 400 to 3200\\n[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 2500\\nAUTO / 2500 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n789\\nCinelike D2/Cinelike V2:\\n[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 200 / 1250 (dB display values are based on 200)\\nAUTO / 100*8 / 200 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8\\n[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 200\\nAUTO / 100*8 / 200 to 1600\\n[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 1250\\nAUTO / 640*8 / 1250 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8\\n*8 When [Extended ISO] is set\\nImage stabilizer\\n≥Image stabilizer type\\nCompliant with Image sensor shift type, 5-axis stabilizer, Dual I.S.2\\n≥Image stabilizer effect\\nIn-body image stabilizer: 5.0 stops\\n[Focal length f=60 mm, using an interchangeable lens (S-R2060)]\\nDual I.S.2: 6.5 stops\\n[Focal length f=200 mm, using an interchangeable lens (S-E70200)]\\n(Based on the CIPA standard, Yaw/Pitch direction)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n790\\nWhite balance\\n≥White balance mode\\nAWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Flash / Set \\nmode 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4\\nAWB lock supported\\nShutter\\n≥Type\\nFocal-plane shutter\\n≥Shutter speed\\nPictures:\\nMechanical shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/8000 of a \\nsecond\\nElectronic front curtain: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/2000 of a \\nsecond\\nElectronic shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 seconds to 1/8000 of a \\nsecond\\nVideos:\\n1/25*9 of a second to 1/16000 of a second\\n*9 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in Creative Video mode and focus mode is \\nset to [MF], this can be set up to 1/2 of a second\\n≥Flash synchronization speed\\nEqual to or smaller than 1/250 of a second*10\\n*10 The guide number decreases at 1/250 of a second, only during [S]/[M] modes\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n791\\nBurst recording\\n≥Mechanical shutter / Electronic front curtain\\nHigh speed: 9 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 7 frames/second ([AFC])\\nMedium speed: 5 frames/second\\nLow speed: 2 frames/second\\n≥Electronic shutter\\n[SH]: 30 frames/second\\nHigh speed: 9 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 8 frames/second ([AFC])\\nMedium speed: 5 frames/second\\nLow speed: 2 frames/second\\n≥Maximum number of frames recordable (SH burst recording)\\n[FINE] / [STD.] / [RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.] / [RAW]: 200 frames\\n≥Maximum number of frames recordable (High speed, medium speed, low \\nspeed)\\n[FINE] / [STD.]: 300 frames or more\\n[RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.] / [RAW]: 200 frames or more\\n• Using an SDXC memory card compliant with UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3\\n(When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic)\\nZoom\\n≥Extended Tele Conversion (Picture)\\nMax. 2.0×*11 (when a picture size of [S] is selected.)\\n*11 Max. 1.9× when using APS-C lenses\\nMicrophone / Speaker\\n≥Microphone\\nStereo\\n≥Speaker\\nMonaural\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n792\\nInterface\\n≥USB\\nUSB Type-C®, SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen 2)\\nSupports USB Power Delivery (9.0 V/3.0 A)\\n≥HDMI\\nHDMI Type A\\n≥[REMOTE]\\n‰2.5 mm jack\\n≥[MIC]\\n‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack\\nMic Input (Plug-in Power) / Mic Input / Line Input (Operate the menu to switch \\nbetween these inputs)\\nStandard input level: −55 dBV (Mic Input) / −10 dBV (Line Input)\\n≥Headphones\\n‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack\\nSplash Resistant\\nYes\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n793\\nExternal dimensions / Mass (Weight)\\n≥External dimensions\\nApprox. 134.3 mm (W)×102.3 mm (H)×90.1 mm (D)\\n(5.29″ (W)×4.03″ (H)×3.55″ (D))\\n(excluding the projecting parts)\\n≥Mass (Weight)\\nApprox. 740 g/1.64 lb (camera body, with battery and one card)\\nApprox. 657 g/1.45 lb (only camera body)\\nOperating environment\\n≥Recommended operating temperature\\n0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)\\n≥Permissible relative humidity\\n10 %RH to 80 %RH\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n794\\nWi-Fi\\n≥Compliance standard\\nIEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless LAN protocol)\\n≥Frequency range used (central frequency)\\nSpecifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was \\npurchased.\\nRefer to the “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Quick Start Guide>” \\n(supplied) for details.\\n≥Encryption method\\nWi-Fi compliant WPA™/ WPA2™/ WPA3™\\n≥Access method\\nInfrastructure mode\\nBluetooth\\n≥Compliance standard\\nBluetooth v5.0, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE)\\n≥Frequency range used (central frequency)\\n2402 MHz to 2480 MHz\\nThe symbols on this product (including the accessories) represent the \\nfollowing:\\nAC\\nDC\\nClass II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n795\\n35 mm full-frame interchangeable Lens:\\nS-R2060 “LUMIX S 20-60mm F3.5-5.6”\\n≥Mount\\nLeica Camera AG L-Mount\\n≥Focal length\\nf=20 mm to 60 mm\\n≥Lens construction\\n11 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lenses, 3 ED lenses, 1 UHR lens)\\n≥Aperture type\\n9 diaphragm blades / circular aperture diaphragm\\n≥Maximum aperture\\nF3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)\\n≥Minimum aperture value\\nF22\\n≥Angle of view\\n94o (Wide) to 40o (Tele)\\n≥In focus distance\\n0.15 m (0.49 feet) to ¶ (Wide to focal length 26 mm) / 0.4 m (1.31 feet) to ¶ (Tele) \\n(from the focus distance reference line)\\n≥Maximum image magnification\\n0.43× (focal length 26 mm)\\n≥Optical Image Stabilizer\\nNo\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n796\\n≥Filter diameter\\n67 mm\\n≥Maximum diameter\\n‰77.4 mm (3.0″)\\n≥Overall length\\nApprox. 87.2 mm (3.4″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)\\n≥Mass (Weight)\\nApprox. 350 g (0.77 lb)\\n≥Dust and splash resistant\\nYes\\n≥Recommended operating temperature\\n−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)\\n≥Permissible relative humidity\\n10 %RH to 80 %RH\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n797\\n35 mm full-frame interchangeable Lens:\\nS-S50 “LUMIX S 50mm F1.8”\\n≥Mount\\nLeica Camera AG L-Mount\\n≥Focal length\\nf=50 mm\\n≥Lens construction\\n9 elements in 8 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED lens, 1 UHR lens)\\n≥Aperture type\\n9 diaphragm blades / circular aperture diaphragm\\n≥Maximum aperture\\nF1.8\\n≥Minimum aperture value\\nF22\\n≥Angle of view\\n47o\\n≥In focus distance\\n0.45 m (1.48 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line)\\n≥Maximum image magnification\\n0.14×\\n≥Optical Image Stabilizer\\nNo\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Specifications\\n798\\n≥Filter diameter\\n67 mm\\n≥Maximum diameter\\n‰73.6 mm (2.9″)\\n≥Overall length\\nApprox. 82.0 mm (3.2″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)\\n≥Dust and splash resistant\\nYes\\n≥Recommended operating temperature\\n−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)\\n≥Permissible relative humidity\\n10 %RH to 80 %RH\\n≥Mass (Weight)\\nApprox. 300 g (0.66 lb)\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Trademarks and Licenses\\n799\\nTrademarks and Licenses\\n• L-Mount is a trademark or registered trademark of Leica Camera AG.\\n• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.\\n• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo \\nare trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the \\nUnited States and other countries.\\n• USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.\\n• The USB Type-C® Charging Trident Logos are trademarks of USB Implementers \\nForum, Inc.\\n• The SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB \\nImplementers Forum, Inc.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Trademarks and Licenses\\n800\\n• QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of \\nApple Inc., used under license therefrom.\\n• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings Corporation.\\n• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the \\nUnited States and/or other countries.\\n• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the \\nUnited States and/or other countries.\\n• Apple, Final Cut Pro, Mac, and macOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of \\nApple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.\\n• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.\\n• Google, \\n  \\nAndroid \\n  \\nand \\n  \\nGoogle \\n  \\nPlay \\n  \\nare \\n  \\ntrademarks \\n  \\nof \\n  \\nGoogle \\n  \\nLLC.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Trademarks and Licenses\\n801\\n• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth \\nSIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Holdings Corporation is under \\nlicense. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.\\n• “Wi-Fi®” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.\\n• “WPA™”, “WPA2™”, and “WPA3™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.\\n• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.\\n• Other names, company names, product names mentioned in this document are \\ntrademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Trademarks and Licenses\\n802\\nThis product incorporates the following software:\\n(1)\\nthe software developed independently by or for Panasonic,\\n(2)\\nthe software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic,\\n(3)\\nthe software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL \\nV2.0),\\n(4)\\nthe software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version \\n2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or\\n(5)\\nopen source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/\\nor LGPL V2.1.\\nThe software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful, \\nbut WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of \\nMERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please refer to \\nthe detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting [MENU/SET] ¨ \\n[Setup] ¨ [Others] ¨ [Firmware Version] ¨ [Software info].\\nAt least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic will give to any third \\nparty who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more \\nthan our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete \\nmachine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0 or \\nLGPL V2.1, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof.\\nContact Information: oss-cd-request@gg.jp.panasonic.com\\nThe source code and the copyright notice are also available for free in our website \\nbelow.\\nhttps://panasonic.net/cns/oss/index.html\\nThis product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of \\na consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video \\nin compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that \\nwas encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from \\na video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be \\nimplied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, \\nL.L.C.\\nSee http://www.mpegla.com\\n\\n\\nMaterials – Trademarks and Licenses\\n803\\nDisposal of Old Equipment and Batteries\\nOnly for European Union and countries with recycling systems\\nThese symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying \\ndocuments mean that used electrical and electronic products and \\nbatteries must not be mixed with general household waste.\\nFor proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used \\nbatteries, please take them to applicable collection points in \\naccordance with your national legislation.\\nBy disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable \\nresources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health \\nand the environment.\\nFor more information about collection and recycling, please contact \\nyour local authority.\\nPenalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in \\naccordance with national legislation.\\nNote for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):\\nThis symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In \\nthis case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the \\nchemical involved.\\n\\n\\nF-1\\nFirmware Update\\n≥Firmware Ver. 1.1: F-3\\n≥Firmware Ver. 2.0: F-6\\n≥Firmware Ver. 2.2: F-27\\n≥Firmware Ver. 3.0: F-38\\nA firmware update has been made available to improve camera \\ncapabilities and to add functionality.\\nThe subsequent sections describe functions that have been added or \\nmodified.\\n• To check the firmware version of the camera, select [Firmware Version] in the \\n[Setup] ([Others]) menu.\\n• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware, \\nvisit the following support site:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index4.html\\n(English only)\\n\\n\\nFirmware Update\\nF-2\\nAbout Applications/Software\\nWhen you have updated the firmware for the camera, use the latest \\nversion of the application for your smartphone or the software for your PC.\\n“LUMIX Sync”\\n• Install or update the application on your smartphone.\\n“LUMIX Tether”\\n• Check the following site and then download and install the software:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html\\n(English only)\\n\\n\\nF-3\\nFirmware Ver. 1.1\\n≥[AFC Live View] Has Been Added: F-4\\n≥Added Menus: F-5\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 1.1 – [AFC Live View] Has Been Added\\nF-4\\n[AFC Live View] Has Been Added\\nIt switches the display speed in the live view on the monitor and viewfinder \\nwhen the focus mode is set to [AFC].\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  Select [AFC Live View]\\n[IMAGE PRIORITY]\\nThis setting prioritizes the image quality of the live view display.\\n[SPEED PRIORITY]\\nThe display speed increases in the live view while the shutter is being pressed \\nhalfway.\\n• There may be a decrease in the image quality in the live view, but there will be no \\nchange to the images recorded.\\n• The setting is fixed to [IMAGE PRIORITY] in the following cases:\\n– HDMI output\\n– While connected to Wi-Fi\\n– Tethered recording\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 1.1 – Added Menus\\nF-5\\nAdded Menus\\nSpecifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.\\nList of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available \\nfor Copying\\n: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings\\n: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom \\nmode\\n: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Setup]: \\n[Monitor / Display]\\n[AFC Live View]\\n[SPEED PRIORITY]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\nF-6\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0\\n≥Support for Upgrade Software Key: F-7\\n≥Extended Functions: F-8\\n≥[Live View Composite] Has Been Added: F-16\\n≥[Video Repair] Has Been Added: F-21\\n≥Additions/Changes to Other Functions: F-24\\n≥Added Menus: F-25\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Upgrade Software Key\\nF-7\\nSupport for Upgrade Software Key\\nUpgrade Software Key (DMW-SFU2: optional) is now supported.\\nUsing an Upgrade Software Key to activate the camera enables usage of \\nextended functions.\\n[Activate] Has Been Added\\nUsing an Upgrade Software Key (DMW-SFU2: optional) enables usage of \\nextended functions for the camera.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  Select [Activate]\\n[Export Serial Code]\\nExports the device information of the camera to the card.\\n[Import Activation Code]\\nImports the activation code into the camera to enable extended functions.\\n[Activation List]\\nDisplays extended functions which have been enabled for usage on the camera.\\n• After activation, even if [Reset] is selected in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu, \\nre-activation is not required.\\n• Refer to the Installation guide supplied with the Upgrade Software Key \\n(DMW-SFU2: optional) for details about activation methods.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-8\\nExtended Functions\\nThis section explains the extended functions that become available by \\nusing an Upgrade Software Key (DMW-SFU2: optional).\\nOutput of RAW Video Data\\n12-bit RAW video data with a maximum resolution of 5.9K can be output \\nvia HDMI to a compatible external recorder.\\n(A) RAW Video\\n(B) External recorder\\n• Recording of the RAW Video Data of this camera has been confirmed on the \\nfollowing external recorders. (As of June 2023)\\n– ATOMOS HDMI field monitor/recorder “Ninja V+” (AtomOS 10.92.00 or better)/\\n“Ninja V” (AtomOS 10.92.00 or better)\\nFor details, please contact ATOMOS.\\n– Blackmagic Design “Blackmagic Video Assist 5q 12G HDR” and “Blackmagic \\nVideo Assist 7q 12G HDR” (Ver. 3.10 or higher)\\nFor details, please contact Blackmagic Design.\\n• This does not guarantee all of the capabilities that the compatible external recorder \\nmay have.\\nHDMI\\n5.9K(16:9)/FULL\\n29.97p/25.00p/23.98p\\n3.5K(4:3)/APS-C\\n50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/23.98p\\n4.1K(17:9)/APS-C\\n59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/23.98p\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-9\\n• You will need compatible software to edit the RAW Video Data recorded with the \\nexternal recorder.\\n• When editing RAW video data that was recorded with an ATOMOS recorder, in order \\nto match the coloring with the V-Log/V-Gamut, download the LUT (Look-Up Table) \\nfile from the following support site and load it into the software.\\n• Visit the following site to download LUT file or view the latest support information:\\nhttps://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/\\n(English only)\\n• Video cannot be recorded to cards while RAW Video Data is being output via \\nHDMI.\\n• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], RAW Video Data \\ncannot be output via HDMI.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-10\\nOutputting RAW Video Data via HDMI\\nThe image quality for the output images is set in [Rec Quality].\\nGetting started:\\n1\\nTurn off the camera and the external recorder.\\n2\\nConnect the camera and the external recorder with a commercially available \\nHDMI cable.\\n• Use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m \\n(4.9 feet) long).\\n3\\nTurn on the camera and the external recorder.\\n1\\nSet the mode dial to [\\n].\\n2\\nSet [HDMI RAW Data Output].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [HDMI RAW Data Output]  [ON]\\n• [HDMI RAW] is displayed on the recording screen.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-11\\n3\\nSelect [Rec Quality].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Rec Quality]\\n4\\nSet the HDMI input on the external recorder.\\n• When the connection is complete, images will be displayed on the screen of \\nthe external recorder.\\nThere are differences from normal HDMI output operation.\\n• [HDMI Rec Output] in the [Custom] ([IN/OUT]) menu.\\n– [Info Display] is not available. You cannot output the camera information \\ndisplay to an external recorder connected by HDMI.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-12\\n[Rec Quality] (When [HDMI RAW Data Output] is selected)\\n• Bit value: 12-bit\\n• Audio format: LPCM (4ch)\\n– When the XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is connected, if [4ch \\nMic Input] is set to [ON], 4-channel audio can be recorded.\\n– Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks \\nof the video.\\n• [Image Area of Video] is fixed to the image area according to the [Rec Quality] \\nsetting.\\n• [Sound Rec Quality] can be set to [96kHz/24bit] when you have connected an XLR \\nMicrophone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), Stereo Shotgun Microphone \\n(DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional).\\n[Rec Quality]\\n[System \\nFrequency]\\n[Image Area \\nof Video]\\nResolution\\nFrame rate\\n[5.9K/30p/16:9]\\n[59.94Hz \\n(NTSC)]\\n[FULL]\\n5888×3312\\n29.97p\\n[5.9K/24p/16:9]\\n[FULL]\\n5888×3312\\n23.98p\\n[4.1K/60p/17:9]\\n[APS-C]\\n4128×2176\\n59.94p\\n[4.1K/30p/17:9]\\n[APS-C]\\n4128×2176\\n29.97p\\n[4.1K/24p/17:9]\\n[APS-C]\\n4128×2176\\n23.98p\\n[3.5K/30p/4:3]\\n[APS-C]\\n3536×2656\\n29.97p\\n[3.5K/24p/4:3]\\n[APS-C]\\n3536×2656\\n23.98p\\n[5.9K/25p/16:9]\\n[50.00Hz (PAL)]\\n[FULL]\\n5888×3312\\n25.00p\\n[4.1K/50p/17:9]\\n[APS-C]\\n4128×2176\\n50.00p\\n[4.1K/25p/17:9]\\n[APS-C]\\n4128×2176\\n25.00p\\n[3.5K/50p/4:3]\\n[APS-C]\\n3536×2656\\n50.00p\\n[3.5K/25p/4:3]\\n[APS-C]\\n3536×2656\\n25.00p\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-13\\nMonitor/Viewfinder Display When Outputting RAW Video Data\\nImages equivalent to those recorded when recording with V-Log are \\ndisplayed on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera for monitoring purposes. \\n[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] with the [Vlog_709] preset applied can be used \\nfor the [V-Log View Assist].\\n• The LUT for the monitor display cannot be changed.\\n• When you use [LUT View Assist (Monitor)], [709] is displayed on the screen and \\n[RAW] is displayed on the screen as a [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] item.\\n• [Luminance Spot Meter], and [BASE/RANGE] of [Zebra Pattern] are set at “Stop” \\nunits.\\n(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))\\nNotes on displayed images\\n• The images displayed on the camera do not affect the RAW Video Data that is \\noutput.\\n• The images displayed on the external recorder are images that suit the external \\nrecorder specifications. This means that there may be differences between the \\nimages displayed on the camera and the images displayed on the external recorder.\\n• The monitor/viewfinder of the camera shows images with the angle of view of the \\nRAW Video Data. There may be some difference with the angle of view of the data \\nrecorded on the external recorder.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-14\\n[HDMI Time Code Output]/[HDMI Recording Control]\\nThe time code of the camera can be added and output via HDMI to the \\nexternal recorder.\\nIn addition, recording can be started and stopped on the external recorder \\nby using the video rec. button and shutter button of the camera.\\n1\\nSet [HDMI Time Code Output] to [ON].\\n•\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Time Code]  [HDMI Time Code Output]  [ON]\\n2\\nSet [HDMI Recording Control] to [ON].\\n•\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [HDMI Rec Output]  [HDMI Recording Control]  \\n[ON]\\n• [HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to \\n[ON] in [\\n] mode.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Extended Functions\\nF-15\\nNotes When Outputting RAW Video Data\\nOperation is as follows when outputting RAW Video Data:\\n• The lower limit of available ISO sensitivity is [640] (when [Extended ISO] is set: \\n[320]), and the upper limit is [51200].\\nThe range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in \\n[Dual Native ISO Setting].\\n• [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] and [\\n] cannot be used for white balance.\\n• [Photo Style] is fixed to [V-Log], and Image quality cannot be adjusted.\\n• [\\n] of the AF mode is not available.\\n• Enlarging the display with [MF Assist] and [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] is not \\npossible.\\n• The following functions are not available:\\n– [Master Pedestal Level]\\n– [i.Dynamic Range]\\n– [Vignetting Comp.]\\n– [Diffraction Compensation]\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n– [Rec. File Format]\\n– [Filtering] and [add to list] in [Rec Quality]\\n– [Rec Quality (My List)]\\n– [Luminance Level]\\n– [E-Stabilization (Video)] ([Image Stabilizer])\\n– [Loop Recording (video)]\\n– [Segmented File Recording]\\n– [Live Cropping]\\n– [Color Bars]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Live View Composite] Has Been Added\\nF-16\\n[Live View Composite] Has Been Added\\nImages are recorded over several times and only the parts that change to \\nbecome brighter form part of the composition.\\nThe images composed by recording at a set exposure time (shutter speed) \\nare displayed, allowing the images to be confirmed as recording proceeds.\\nThis allows you to reduce the overall brightness for recording, so it is \\nconvenient for recording the light trails of stars or fireworks against a bright \\nnightscape.\\n1\\nSet the mode dial to [M].\\n2\\nSet [Live View Composite].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Live View Composite]\\n3\\nStart Live View Composite recording.\\n≥Select [Start] and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Live View Composite] Has Been Added\\nF-17\\n4\\nDecide on the composition and then fix the camera in \\nplace.\\n5\\nSet the shutter speed and ISO sensitivity.\\n≥Rotate \\n to set the shutter speed.\\n≥Press [ISO], then rotate \\n, \\n, or \\n to set the ISO sensitivity.\\n• The shutter speed can be set in the range between 60 seconds \\nand 1/1.6 of a second.\\n• The ISO sensitivity can be set in the range between [100] and \\n[3200] ([50] and [3200] when [Extended ISO] is set).\\n6\\nGet the image to use for noise reduction.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n7\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n• Recording is done according to the settings in Step 5, and images \\nprocessed with noise reduction are merged a frame at a time.\\n(A) Histogram display\\n(B) Shutter speed × Number of images merged\\n(C) Elapsed time\\nLC\\nLC\\nLC\\n5 sec. x 1200\\n sec. x 1200\\n5 sec. x 1200\\n1h40m00s\\n1h40m00s\\n1h40m00s\\n(A)(B)\\n(C)\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Live View Composite] Has Been Added\\nF-18\\n8\\nStop recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n• A maximum of 3 hours can be recorded with one Live View \\nComposite recording.\\n(Recording automatically ends when the time exceeds 3 hours.)\\n9\\nEnd [Live View Composite].\\n≥Press [Q].\\nSetting Items ([Live View Composite])\\n[Start]\\nStarts Live View Composite recording.\\n[Shutter Delay]\\nSets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is \\nreleased.\\n[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[OFF]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Live View Composite] Has Been Added\\nF-19\\n• [Long Exposure NR] will be [ON].\\n• When recording with the flash, the flash fires only in the first frame.\\n• [Flash Synchro] is fixed to [1ST].\\n• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log] or [REAL TIME LUT], [Dual Native ISO \\nSetting] is fixed to [AUTO].\\n• Some menus are not displayed after getting the noise reduction image.\\n• The image for noise reduction is discarded when you do the following. Do Step 6 \\nagain.\\n– Modify the shutter speed/ISO sensitivity\\n– Switch the playback mode\\n• When pressing the shutter button fully to end recording, the last image may not \\nbe merged.\\n• During Live View Composite recording, audio is not output to an external device \\nconnected by HDMI.\\n• [Power Save Mode] does not work.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Live View Composite] Has Been Added\\nF-20\\n• [Live View Composite] is not available when using the following functions:\\n– [ELEC.]/[ELEC.+NR] ([Shutter Type])\\n– High Resolution mode\\n– [Filter Settings]\\n– [Silent Mode]\\n• When using [Live View Composite], the following functions are not available:\\n– Burst recording\\n– [Time Lapse Shot]\\n– [Stop Motion Animation]\\n– High Resolution mode\\n– [\\n] ([Self Timer])\\n– [\\n] (AF mode)\\n– Bulb Recording\\n– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])\\n– [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]\\n– [i.Dynamic Range]\\n– [Filter Effect]\\n– [Bracketing]\\n– [Silent Mode]\\n– [Shutter Type]\\n– [Shutter Delay]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Video Repair] Has Been Added\\nF-21\\n[Video Repair] Has Been Added\\nWhen the recording of a video could not be completed normally, a video file \\nthat cannot be played back may be generated (extension “.mdt”).\\nYou can repair the “.mdt” file with this function to make it playable.\\n• Possible causes for the generation of “.mdt” files are:\\n– Power turns off during video recording (battery is removed, AC cable is unplugged, \\npower outage while using the AC adaptor, etc.)\\n– Card removed during video recording\\n– Card removed while writing to card after video recording\\n– When an unexpected freeze occurs during video recording/while writing to the \\ncard\\n1\\nSelect [Video Repair].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Video Repair]\\n• Videos that can be repaired are those videos recorded with the [Rec. File \\nFormat] being [MOV].\\nVideo recorded in [MP4] cannot be repaired.\\n• As repairs can take some time, use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10:  \\noptional) and DC Coupler (DMW-DCC17:  optional) or supply with power during \\nthe operation.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Video Repair] Has Been Added\\nF-22\\n2\\nSelect [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2].\\n≥Press 34 to select, and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Video files that can be repaired are filtered.\\n3\\nSelect the video file to repair.\\n≥Press 21 to select a file and then press \\n or \\n.\\n• Refer to the recording date and time (A), folder/file number (B), and video \\nrecording time (C) to help with selecting the video file.\\n4\\nSelect [Yes] on the confirmation screen.\\n• Video repair starts. Repair takes some time.\\n• The video file after repair is saved in the same folder as the file before repair.\\nCanceling Video Repair\\nEven if you cancel video repair, the file is not deleted, so the procedure can \\nbe done over again later if required.\\n1\\nPress either \\n or \\n in the video repair progress screen.\\n2\\nSelect [Yes] on the confirmation screen.\\n(B)\\n(A)\\n(C)\\n2023.12.1  10:00\\n100-0001\\n1/2\\n8m30s\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – [Video Repair] Has Been Added\\nF-23\\n• It may not be possible to repair videos with a short recording time.\\n• It may not be possible to repair videos in some cases due to the state of the data.\\n• Video repair cannot be started if there is very limited free space on the card.\\n• Do not turn off the power or remove the card during repair.\\nOtherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.\\n• Do not perform other operations during the repair.\\n• You cannot repair videos recorded with devices other than this camera.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions\\nF-24\\nAdditions/Changes to Other Functions\\n[Live View Composite] Has Been Added to [Fn \\nButton Set]\\n[Live View Composite] can be assigned to an Fn button.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Fn Button Set]  Select [Setting in \\nREC mode]\\n[1] tab\\n[Others (Photo)]\\n• [Live View Composite]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Added Menus\\nF-25\\nAdded Menus\\nSpecifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.\\nList of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available \\nfor Copying\\n: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings\\n: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom \\nmode\\n: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Photo]: \\n[Others (Photo)]\\n[Live View \\nComposite]\\n[Start]\\n—\\n[Shutter Delay]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Format]\\n[HDMI RAW Data Output]*\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Setup]: \\n[Setting]\\n[Activate]\\n[Export Serial Code]\\n—\\n[Import Activation Code]\\n—\\n[Activation List]\\n—\\n[Playback]: \\n[Edit Image]\\n[Video Repair]\\n—\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.0 – Added Menus\\nF-26\\nList of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording \\nMode\\n*\\nAvailable when activated with the Upgrade Software Key (DMW-SFU2: optional).\\n• Ninja V+ / Ninja V / ATOMOS are registered trademarks of ATOMOS Pty Ltd.\\n• ‘Blackmagic Design’ is a registered trademark of Blackmagic Design Pty. Ltd.\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Photo]: \\n[Others (Photo)]\\n[Live View \\nComposite]\\n[Start]\\n\\n[Shutter Delay]\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Format]\\n[HDMI RAW Data Output]*\\n\\n\\n\\nF-27\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2\\n≥[AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been Added: F-28\\n≥High Resolution Mode Function Has Been Enhanced: F-30\\n≥MF Assist Magnification Setting Has Been Added: F-33\\n≥Additions/Changes to Other Functions: F-34\\n≥Added Menus: F-36\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – [AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been Added\\nF-28\\n[AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been \\nAdded\\nThis magnifies the focus point when the AF mode is [\\n], [\\n], or [\\n]. (In \\nother AF modes, the center of the screen is magnified.)\\nYou can check focus and observe an enlarged subject as with a telephoto \\nlens.\\n1\\nRegister [AF-Point Scope] to the Fn button. (Fn \\nButtons: 503)\\n2\\nPress and hold the Fn button set in Step 1.\\n≥While pressing the button, the focus point is enlarged.\\n• When the screen is enlarged, pressing the shutter button halfway re-acquires \\nfocus in a small central AF area.\\n• When the screen is enlarged, turn \\n or \\n to adjust the magnification.\\nUse \\n for more detailed adjustments.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – [AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been Added\\nF-29\\n[AF-Point Scope Setting]\\nChanges the enlarged screen settings of AF-Point Scope.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  Select [AF-Point Scope Setting]\\n• When the screen is enlarged, [AFC] changes to [AFS].\\n• When the following function is being used, AF-Point Scope does not work:\\n– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])\\n– Video recording/SH burst recording\\n[Keep Enlarged \\nDisplay]\\nSetting this to [ON] maintains the enlarged screen after pressing \\nthe Fn button until it is pressed again.\\n[PIP Display]\\nSets the display method (full screen mode*1/windowed mode*2) \\nof the enlarged screen.\\n*1 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 10×.\\n*2 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – High Resolution Mode Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-30\\nHigh Resolution Mode Function Has Been \\nEnhanced\\n≥Support for Long Exposure Recording: F-30\\n≥[Handheld High-Res] Has Been Added to the High Resolution Mode: \\nF-31\\nSupport for Long Exposure Recording\\nIt is now possible to set shutter speeds up to 8 seconds in the High \\nResolution mode.\\nThis means that it is now also possible to use [Long Exposure NR].\\n• Settings in the High Resolution mode change as follows:\\n– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.] (When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [OFF])/\\n[ELEC.+NR] (When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [ON])\\n– Shutter speed: 8 seconds to 1/8000 of a second\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – High Resolution Mode Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-31\\n[Handheld High-Res] Has Been Added to the High \\nResolution Mode\\nThe image stabilizer works when [Handheld High-Res] is set to on and you \\ncan record pictures with higher resolution even without using a tripod.\\n1\\nSet the drive mode dial to [\\n] (High resolution).\\n2\\nSet [Handheld High-Res].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [High Resolution Mode Setting]  \\n[Handheld High-Res]  [ON]\\n[Handheld High-Res]\\nYou can record without using a tripod. Turn on the image stabilizer function.\\n• When [OFF], the image stabilizer function is not available.\\n• When [ON], [Motion Blur Processing] is fixed to [MODE2].\\n3\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n• The High Resolution mode icon (during handheld recording) [\\n] is \\ndisplayed.\\n4\\nDecide on the composition and then fix the camera in \\nplace.\\n5\\nStart recording.\\n≥Press the shutter button fully.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – High Resolution Mode Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-32\\n• Hold the camera firmly during handheld recording so that the camera does not \\nshake. Recording may fail if there is a lot of shaking.\\n• Image merging can take a long time with handheld recording.\\n• When [Handheld High-Res] is set to [ON], [Operation Mode] in [Image Stabilizer] \\nchanges to [\\n] ([Normal]).\\n• When you have attached a lens that has an image stabilizer function that \\nsupports panning, the image stabilizer on the lens also switches to normal mode \\nwhen [Handheld High-Res] is set to [ON].\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – MF Assist Magnification Setting Has Been Added\\nF-33\\nMF Assist Magnification Setting Has Been \\nAdded\\nIt is now possible to magnify the full screen mode display in MF Assist up \\nto approx. 20 times when recording pictures.\\nThe maximum magnification rate can be selected in a menu.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [MF Assist]  Select [Max. \\nMagnification in \\\"FULL\\\"]\\n[6x]\\nFull screen display can be enlarged up to approx. 6 times.\\nThe area that can be enlarged is broader.\\n[20x]\\nFull screen display can be enlarged up to approx. 20 times.\\nThe quality of the enlarged image improves, but the area that can be enlarged is \\nreduced.\\n• The magnification rate becomes up to 6 times in the following cases:\\n– During video recording\\n– [\\n] mode\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n– When [Enlarged Live Display] in [HDMI Rec Output] is set to [OFF] during \\nHDMI output\\n– During the windowed mode of enlarged display\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions\\nF-34\\nAdditions/Changes to Other Functions\\n≥[Luminance Spot Meter]/[Zebra Pattern] Units Display Has Been \\nChanged: F-34\\n≥[AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-35\\n≥[AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Lens Fn Button Setting]: F-35\\n[Luminance Spot Meter]/[Zebra Pattern] Units \\nDisplay Has Been Changed\\n[Luminance Spot Meter]\\nWhen [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT], measurement is with the \\n“Stop” units when a LUT file has not been applied and with “%” units when \\na LUT file has been applied.\\nWhen [BASE/RANGE] Is Selected with [SET] in [Zebra \\nPattern]\\nWhen [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT], settings are made with the \\n“Stop” units when a LUT file has not been applied and with “%” units when \\na LUT file has been applied.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions\\nF-35\\n[AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Fn Button \\nSet]\\n[AF-Point Scope] can be assigned to an Fn button.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Fn Button Set]  Select [Setting in \\nREC mode]\\n[1] tab\\n[Focus/Shutter]\\n• [AF-Point Scope]\\n[AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Lens Fn \\nButton Setting]\\nYou can assign [AF-Point Scope] to the focus button of an interchangeable \\nlens.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Lens Fn Button Setting]  Select \\n[AF-Point Scope]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – Added Menus\\nF-36\\nAdded Menus\\nSpecifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.\\nList of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available \\nfor Copying\\n: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings\\n: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom \\nmode\\n: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Photo]: \\n[Image Quality]\\n[High Resolution \\nMode Setting]\\n[Handheld High-Res]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Custom]: \\n[Focus/Shutter]\\n[MF Assist]\\n[Max. Magnification in \\n\\\"FULL\\\"]\\n[6x]\\n\\n\\n\\n[AF-Point Scope \\nSetting]\\n[Keep Enlarged Display]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[PIP Display]\\n[PIP]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Custom]: \\n[Lens / Others]\\n[Lens Fn Button Setting]\\n[Focus Stop]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 2.2 – Added Menus\\nF-37\\nList of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording \\nMode\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Photo]: \\n[Image Quality]\\n[High Resolution \\nMode Setting]\\n[Handheld High-Res]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\nF-38\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0\\n≥Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added: F-39\\n≥Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud: F-44\\n≥SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added: F-53\\n≥Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced: F-58\\n≥Image Stabilizer Function Has Been Enhanced: F-64\\n≥Additions/Changes to Other Functions: F-66\\n≥Added Menus: F-69\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-39\\nVideo Proxy Recording Function Has Been \\nAdded\\nDuring video recording, a proxy video with a low bit rate can also be \\nrecorded simultaneously.\\nThe size is small so it is suitable for data transmission, such as uploading \\nto the cloud. It is also less demanding on your PC during editing.\\n1\\nSet [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Rec. File Format]\\n2\\nSelect a recording quality with which you can record \\nproxy video.\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Rec Quality]\\n• Items available for recording with proxy video are indicated as [Proxy \\navailable].\\n3\\nMake proxy recording settings.\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Proxy Recording Settings]  [Proxy \\nRecording]  [ON]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-40\\n≥The original video set in [Rec Quality] is recorded to card slot 1 and the \\nproxy video is recorded to card slot 2.\\n≥During playback, the original video is indicated with [\\n] and the proxy \\nvideo is indicated with [\\n].\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-41\\n• You cannot change the recording destination for proxy videos.\\n• [Proxy Recording] is not available if a card is not inserted in one of the recording \\ndestinations.\\n• If a lack of space on a card, etc., causes recording of the original video to stop \\nafter recording has started, [Proxy Recording] also stops. If recording of the \\nproxy video stops first, recording of the original video continues.\\n• [Proxy Recording] is not available with the following recording media \\ncombinations:\\n– SD/SDHC memory cards and SDXC memory cards\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Proxy Recording] is not available:\\n– [MP4] ([Rec. File Format])\\n– [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K\\n– [Rec Quality] with [4:3] or [3:2] aspect ratio\\n– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video\\n– [HDMI RAW Data Output]\\n• The following functions are not available while you are using [Proxy Recording]:\\n– [Double Card Slot Function]\\n– [Loop Recording (video)]\\n• The following functions are not available when recording proxy video: \\n– Fn buttons registered with [Photo Style] and [Apply LUT]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-42\\nSetting the Proxy Recording Quality\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Proxy Recording Settings]  Select \\n[Proxy Rec. Quality]\\n(A) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)\\n• The bit rate (Mbps) is a value for the images only. There is variation depending on \\nthe audio recorded.\\n• The frame rate is the same as the original video.\\n• The aspect ratio is fixed to [16:9]. When the original video is [17:9], black bands are \\nadded to the top and bottom of the screen.\\n• Audio is fixed to LPCM, 48 kHz/16 bit. The number of channels is the same as the \\noriginal video.\\nSave Destination for Proxy Videos\\nProxy videos are saved to the [xxx_PRXY] folder in card slot 2.\\n≥The proxy video file name is the same as the original video.\\n[Proxy Rec. \\nQuality]\\nResolution\\nYUV, Bit \\nvalue\\nBit rate (Mbps)\\n(A)\\n60p\\n50p\\n30p\\n25p\\n24p\\n[H]\\n1980×1080\\n4:2:0 10bit\\n16\\n16\\n12\\n12\\n12\\nHEVC\\n[M]\\n1980×1080\\n4:2:0 10bit\\n9\\n9\\n6\\n6\\n6\\nHEVC\\n[L]\\n1280×720\\n4:2:0 8bit\\n6\\n6\\n4\\n4\\n4\\nAVC\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-43\\nApplying LUT Files to Proxy Videos\\nThis can be set when [Photo Style] is [REAL TIME LUT] or My Photo Style.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Proxy Recording Settings]  Select \\n[Real Time LUT(Proxy)]\\nSettings: [ON]/[OFF]\\n≥When [Photo Style] is [REAL TIME LUT] or if a LUT file is applied in My \\nPhoto Style, this is fixed to [ON].\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-44\\nCompatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nBy connecting the camera to the internet via Wi-Fi, you can upload still \\nimages and proxy videos directly to the Frame.io platform.\\n*\\nThis does not guarantee all of the functions of “Frame.io Camera to Cloud”.\\n≥Connecting with Frame.io: F-45\\n≥[Send Images to Frame.io]: F-50\\n≥[Upload Setup]: F-51\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-45\\nConnecting with Frame.io\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Frame.io]  [Frame.io Connection]  \\nSelect [ON]\\n≥Perform [Wi-Fi Connection Setting] and [Pairing(Frame.io)] when \\nconnecting for the first time.\\n[Wi-Fi Connection Setting]\\nSelect [New connection] and connect via Wi-Fi to the access point.\\n[Pairing(Frame.io)]\\nA pairing code is displayed on the camera.\\nLog into Frame.io from a PC, etc., and enter the pairing code in the device registration \\nscreen.\\n• This can also be set by selecting [Frame.io Connection]  [SET]  \\n[Pairing(Frame.io)].\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-46\\n• You can view the [Status] in relation to Frame.io in the [Frame.io] menu screen.\\n– [NOT CONNECTED]: Connection with Frame.io not started\\n– [CONNECTING]: Currently trying to connect with Frame.io (incomplete)\\n– [CONNECTED]: Connection with Frame.io completed\\n– [CONNECTED(PAUSED)]: Camera connection has been paused on the Frame.io \\nsite\\n• The user name ([User]) and project name ([Project]) are displayed on the camera \\nwhen the connection is completed.\\n• If connection with Frame.io fails repeatedly (authentication failure), try the pairing \\nsetting procedure again.\\n• If it is not possible to connect with Frame.io, check the connection method and \\nthen try setting [Frame.io Connection] to [ON] again.\\n• Depending on the status of the camera, connections may be temporarily \\ninterrupted or it may take some time to transfer images.\\n• When the following functions are being used, [Frame.io] is not available:\\n– [Auto Transfer]\\n– [USB]\\n– Tethered recording\\n• When [Frame.io Connection] is set to [ON], the following functions are not \\navailable:\\n– [Auto Transfer]/[Send Image (Smartphone)]/[Pairing] ([Delete])/[Wi-Fi network \\nsettings] ([Bluetooth])\\n– [Wi-Fi Function]\\n– Tethered recording\\n– [Video Repair]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-47\\nChanging the Connection Method\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Frame.io]  [Connection Setup]  \\nSelect [Connection Method]\\n[Wi-Fi]\\nConnect to an access point via Wi-Fi.\\n[USB Tethering]\\nConnect using the USB tethering function of a smartphone.\\n• When a smartphone is used, the camera is connected to the internet via \\nmobile data communications (4G, 5G, etc.) enabling you to connect with \\nFrame.io from locations where a router is not available, when you are out \\nand about, for example.\\n1\\nConnect the camera and the smartphone using a USB connection cable.\\n(A) USB connection cable (commercially available)\\n2\\nEnable the USB tethering function on the smartphone.\\n• Select [USB Tethering] (for Android devices) or [Personal Hotspot] (for iOS \\ndevices) on the smartphone.\\n• If a confirmation message appears on the smartphone screen asking for \\npermission to enable access by the connected device, grant permission. \\nConnection is not complete until permission is given.\\n• Please also refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.\\n≥If the connection method is changed while connected with Frame.io, the \\nconnection with Frame.io is temporarily broken, and then it is \\nreestablished after the change.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-48\\nNotes When Using USB Tethering\\n• For information about the tethering function of your smartphone, refer to the \\noperating instructions of the smartphone and the contract you have with the \\ncell-phone provider.\\nDepending on the contract you have, there may be limitations on tethering or it \\nmay incur large additional charges.\\n• Set [Frame.io Connection] to [OFF] if you are not going to connect with \\nFrame.io.\\nWhen set to [ON], if the [Connection Method] is set to [USB Tethering], power is \\nsupplied from the battery of this camera to the connected device, so the battery \\nwill be consumed faster.\\n• For information about the high temperature display\\nWhen the temperature of the camera rises, [\\n] appears blinking on the screen. \\nIf you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot \\nbe used is displayed on the screen and some functions, such as recording and \\nHDMI output, will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the \\nmessage indicating that the camera can be used again. When the message \\nindicating that it can be used again is displayed, turn the camera off then on \\nagain.\\n• The network connection light does not light when connected to the internet via \\nUSB tethering.\\n• After connecting via USB tethering, when charging the battery in the camera, \\nmake sure that the charging light of the camera lights red.\\nIf the charging light does not light, reconnect the USB connection cable while the \\ncamera is turned off.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-49\\nChanging the Wi-Fi Connection Destination\\nChange the access point, etc., while connected to Frame.io.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Frame.io]  [Connection Setup]  \\nSelect [Wi-Fi Connection Setting]\\n≥Press [DISP.] to reselect the connection destination.\\nDisconnecting from Frame.io\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Frame.io]  [Frame.io Connection]  \\nSelect [OFF]\\n≥The upload queue is not cleared even if you break the connection (Wi-Fi) \\nwith Frame.io.\\nUnpairing (Frame.io)\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Frame.io]  [Frame.io Connection]  \\n[SET]  Select [Delete]\\n≥This deletes the information for pairing with Frame.io and breaks the \\nconnection (Wi-Fi) with Frame.io.\\n≥The upload queue is cleared.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-50\\n[Send Images to Frame.io]\\nWhen [Frame.io Connection] is set to [ON], the images to upload can be \\nreserved manually.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Frame.io]  Select [Send Images to \\nFrame.io]\\n≥You also can display the screen for selecting images by pressing the Fn \\nbutton which has been assigned [Send Images to Frame.io].\\n≥The images filtered by [Upload File Format] in [Upload Setup] are \\ndisplayed.\\n• Press 21 to select the images and press \\n to add check marks.\\n• Images are added to the end of the upload queue when you press \\n[DISP.].\\n• During playback, images reserved for transfer are indicated with [\\n] \\nand images already transfered are indicated with [\\n].\\n2.\\nュリヴヱハ\\n6HQG\\u0003,PDJHV\\u0003WR\\u0003)UDPH\\u0011LR\\n6HQG\\u0003,PDJHV\\u0003WR\\u0003)UDPH\\u0011LR\\n6HQG\\u0003,PDJHV\\u0003WR\\u0003)UDPH\\u0011LR\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-51\\n[Upload Setup]\\nMake settings related to uploading of images.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Frame.io]  Select [Upload Setup]\\n[Auto Upload to Queue]\\nWhen set to [ON], images are added to the Frame.io upload queue as they are \\nrecorded.\\n[Upload File Format]\\nSelect the format of the files to be automatically uploaded.\\nWith [Send Images to Frame.io], you can filter the file types to display when making \\nimage selections.\\nYou can upload proxy videos and pictures (JPEG/RAW).\\n[Clear Upload History]\\nRemoves the icon indicating an image is uploaded from images that have been \\nuploaded.\\n[Upload Status]\\nYou can see the projects that are connected and the number of files remaining to be \\nuploaded, etc.\\nPress [DISP.] to see even more detailed information.\\n[Clear Upload Queue]\\nClears the upload queue for Frame.io.\\nRemoves the icon indicating an image is in the queue for uploading from images that \\nare in the queue for uploading.\\n• Images that are removed from the upload queue are not uploaded to Frame.io.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud\\nF-52\\nNotes About the Upload Queue (Transfer Reservation \\nList)\\nWhen the camera has been connected to Frame.io, the images in the \\nupload queue are uploaded to Frame.io.\\n• If there are images remaining in the upload queue, uploading is continued even if the \\ncamera on/off switch is set to [OFF]. The power is turned off when uploading is \\ncompleted. If [Exit] is selected to turn off the power, uploading is resumed when the \\ncamera is next turned on. \\n• Uploading is canceled when the connection with Frame.io is broken and then is \\nresumed when the connection is reestablished.\\n• The upload queue is cleared in the following cases:\\n– [Clear Upload Queue] is executed\\n– Pairing with Frame.io is canceled\\n• Do not remove the battery while the camera is still turned on. The upload queue will \\nnot be kept properly.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-53\\nSH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been \\nAdded\\nThe SH pre-burst recording function has been added, which enables \\nrecording of images for the set amount of time even between when the \\nshutter button is pressed halfway until it is pressed fully when taking SH \\nburst pictures.\\nIn [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time] you can set the length of time recordings \\nare made before the shutter is pressed fully.\\n(A) [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time]\\n(B) Recorded range\\n1\\nSet the drive mode dial to [\\n] (Burst Shot 1) or [\\n] \\n(Burst Shot 2).\\n2\\nSelect [SH PRE].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Burst Shot Setting]  [Burst Shot 1 \\nSetting]/[Burst Shot 2 Setting]  [SH PRE]\\n[SH PRE]\\nTakes pre-burst pictures at ultra high speed, 30 frames/second.\\n(A)\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-54\\n3\\nClose the menu.\\n≥Press the shutter button halfway.\\n4\\nStart recording.\\n• Pre-burst recording starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway.\\n• Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed fully.\\nSet Time Recorded Before Pressing Shutter Fully\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Burst Shot Setting]  Select [SH Burst \\nPre-Recording Time]\\n[1.5SEC]\\nRecording starts from 1.5 seconds before the shutter button was pressed fully.\\n[1.0SEC]\\nRecording starts from 1 second before the shutter button was pressed fully.\\n[0.5SEC]\\nRecording starts from 0.5 seconds before the shutter button was pressed fully.\\n• The setting for [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time] is applied to both [Burst Shot 1 \\nSetting] and [Burst Shot 2 Setting].\\n• [PRE] is displayed on the recording screen during SH pre-burst recording.\\n• If the shutter button is pressed and held at halfway for approx. 1 minute, the \\nframes before pressing fully cannot be saved. Press the shutter button halfway \\nagain.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-55\\nBurst Rate\\n• The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture \\nSize] and focus mode.\\nMaximum Number of Frames Recordable\\n• When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.\\nRecording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.\\n*\\nRecording stops when the maximum number of frames recordable is reached.\\nThis includes the number of pictures taken with pre-burst recording.\\nNumber of Frames That Can Be Saved with Pre-burst \\nRecording Before the Shutter Button Is Pressed Fully\\nMechanical \\nshutter, electronic \\nfront curtain\\nElectronic shutter\\nLive View when \\ntaking burst \\npictures\\n[SH PRE]\\n—\\n30 frames/second\\nNone\\n[Picture Quality]\\n[FINE]/[STD.]\\n[RAW+FINE]/\\n[RAW+STD.]\\n[RAW]\\n[SH PRE]\\n200 frames*\\n[SH Burst Pre-Recording Time]\\n[SH PRE]\\n[1.5SEC]\\n45 frames\\n[1.0SEC]\\n30 frames\\n[0.5SEC]\\n15 frames\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-56\\nFocus when Taking Burst Pictures\\n• When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.\\n• With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the \\nextent possible.\\nExposure when Taking Burst Pictures\\nFocus mode\\n[Focus/Shutter Priority] \\n([Focus/Shutter \\nPriority]: 540)\\n[SH PRE]\\n[AFS]\\n[FOCUS]\\nFixed to the focus of the first frame\\n[BALANCE]\\n[RELEASE]\\n[AFC]\\n[FOCUS]\\nEstimated focus\\n[BALANCE]\\n[RELEASE]\\n[MF]\\n—\\nFocus set with manual focus\\nFocus mode\\n[SH PRE]\\n[AFS]\\nFixed to the exposure of the first frame\\n[AFC]\\nThe exposure is adjusted for each frame\\n[MF]\\nFixed to the exposure of the first frame\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added\\nF-57\\nNotes on SH pre-burst recording\\n• There are limits on the shutter speed you can set.\\n– [SH PRE]: To a minimum of 1/30\\n• Pictures taken before the shutter button is pressed fully are not saved in the \\nfollowing cases: \\n– When recording with the Touch Shutter\\n– When [Half-Press Shutter] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu is set to \\n[ON]\\n• When the ambient temperature is high or Pre-Burst recording is performed \\ncontinuously, even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not \\noperate to protect the camera from overheating. Wait until the camera cools \\ndown.\\n• Even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not operate when \\nthere is insufficient free space on the card.\\n• The refresh rate on the live view screen becomes 30 fps when you have selected \\n[SH PRE] and you press the shutter button halfway.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-58\\nAutomatic Detection Function Has Been \\nEnhanced\\nIt is now possible to set the subjects [HUMAN], [ANIMAL], [CAR], and \\n[MOTORCYCLE] for automatic detection.\\nIt is also now possible to set [Target Parts] and detect eyes for [ANIMAL].\\n≥How to set automatic detection: F-58\\n≥Types of Automatic Scene Detection (Intelligent Auto Mode): F-62\\n≥[Human Eye Detection Display]: F-63\\nHow to set automatic detection\\nWhen automatic detection is enabled, subjects for recording are \\nautomatically detected and the camera focuses.\\n1\\nSet [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]/[\\n]  [\\n]  [AF Detection Setting]  [ON]\\n• You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic \\ndetection [ON]/[OFF].\\n• Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.\\n• When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are \\nnot animals may be detected as animals.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-59\\n2\\nSelect [Detecting Subject].\\n≥\\n  [\\n]/[\\n]  [\\n]  [Detecting Subject]\\n• Select [Type of Subject] and [Target Parts].\\n• It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection \\nscreen.\\n[Type of \\nSubject]\\n[HUMAN]\\nDetects humans.\\nSelect either [Eye/Face/Body] or [Eye/Face] for the \\n[Target Parts].\\n• [\\n] or [\\n] is displayed on the AF mode icon.\\n[ANIMAL]\\nDetects animals.\\nSelect either [Body] or [Eye/Body] for the [Target \\nParts].\\n• Animals that can be detected are birds, canines \\n(including wolves, etc.), and felines (including \\nlions, etc.).\\n• [ ] or [\\n] is displayed on the AF mode icon.\\n[CAR]\\nDetects cars (mainly for motor sports).\\n[Target Parts] cannot be selected.\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the AF mode icon.\\n[MOTORCYCLE]\\nDetects motorcycles (mainly for motor sports).\\n[Target Parts] cannot be selected.\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the AF mode icon.\\n[Target \\nParts]\\nSelect the part to be brought into focus.\\nThis can be set when the [Type of Subject] is either [HUMAN] or \\n[ANIMAL].\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-60\\nWhen [\\n]\\nWhen a subject to be recorded is detected, an AF area is displayed.\\nIf multiple subjects are detected, multiple AF areas are also displayed, and \\nyou can select the subject you want to focus on from amongst these.\\nYellow\\nAF area to be brought into focus.\\nThe camera selects this automatically.\\n• A cross appears in the AF area when a human eye is detected. (A)\\nWhite\\nDisplayed when multiple subjects are detected.\\n(A)\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-61\\nWhen [\\n], [\\n], [\\n], [\\n], or [\\n]\\nIf even part of a subject to be recorded enters the AF area, it is \\nautomatically detected and focused.\\n• If eyes are detected inside the AF area, eye detection (B) works.\\nIt is not possible to change the eye to focus on.\\n• [AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [\\n].\\n• When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought \\ninto focus.\\nThe exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [\\n])\\n• Depending on [Detecting Subject], the number of subjects that can be detected \\nat once with [\\n] of the AF mode will be different.\\n[HUMAN] ([Eye/Face/Body], [Eye/Face]): Maximum 15 (maximum 3 bodies \\ndetected)\\n[ANIMAL] ([Body]), [CAR], [MOTORCYCLE]: Maximum 3\\n[ANIMAL] ([Eye/Body]): Maximum 1\\n• Automatic detection may not be available due to the camera settings.\\n(B)\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-62\\nTypes of Automatic Scene Detection (Intelligent \\nAuto Mode)\\n*1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus]) \\nmenu is set to [HUMAN].\\n*2 Detected when using an external flash.\\n*3 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus]) \\nmenu is set to [ANIMAL], [CAR] or [MOTORCYCLE].\\nTaking pictures\\nRecording video\\ni-Portrait*1\\n\\n\\ni-Scenery\\n\\n\\ni-Macro\\n\\n\\ni-Night Portrait*2\\n\\ni-Night Scenery\\n\\ni-Food\\n\\ni-Sunset\\n\\ni-Low Light\\n\\n*3\\n\\n\\n• If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [\\n] (standard setting).\\n• Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the \\nrecording conditions.\\n• Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.\\n• When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are \\nnot animals may be detected as animals.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-63\\n[Human Eye Detection Display]\\n[Eye Detection Display] in the [Custom] menu has been changed to \\n[Human Eye Detection Display].\\n[ON] / [OFF]\\nWhen set to [OFF], you can make the cross that appears on human eyes when \\nfocused disappear by pressing the shutter button halfway, etc.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Image Stabilizer Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-64\\nImage Stabilizer Function Has Been \\nEnhanced\\nFunctionality of [E-Stabilization (Video)] has been changed.\\nThrough the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image \\nstabilizers, corrections are made to camera shake on 5 axes during video \\nrecording along the vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes, and to the \\nperipheral distortion that readily occurs when you are using a wide-angle \\nlens. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)\\n[Photo]: \\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Image Stabilizer]  Select \\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n[Video]: \\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Image Stabilizer] Select \\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n[HIGH]\\nLarge shakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.\\nThe angle of view is narrower than [STANDARD].\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the screen during video recording.\\n[STANDARD]\\nShakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.\\nThe angle of view is narrower.\\n• [\\n] is displayed on the screen during video recording.\\n[OFF]\\nTurns the electronic image stabilizer (video) OFF.\\n• There will be variation in the effectiveness of the correction depending on the video \\nmode used for recording and the recording conditions.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Image Stabilizer Function Has Been Enhanced\\nF-65\\n• When the following function is being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not \\navailable:\\n– [S&Q] mode\\n• While you are using the following functions, [HIGH] in [E-Stabilization (Video)] is \\nnot available:\\n– Other than [OFF] in [Anamorphic (Video)]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions\\nF-66\\nAdditions/Changes to Other Functions\\n≥[Root Certificate] Has Been Added: F-66\\n≥[Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-67\\n≥[Send Images to Frame.io] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-67\\n≥[E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-67\\n≥[Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Q.MENU Settings]: F-68\\n≥[E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to [Q.MENU Settings]: F-68\\n[Root Certificate] Has Been Added\\nRegisters a root certificate when connecting to the network.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  Select [Root Certificate]\\n[Load]\\nRegisters a root certificate saved on a card to the camera. (Maximum 6 files)\\n• Root certificates meeting the following conditions can be registered:\\n– Saved in the root directory of the card\\n– Extension is pem, cer, or crt\\n– Can be recognized as a certificate with OpenSSL commands\\n[Delete]\\nSelects root certificates registered with [Load] and deletes them.\\n[Certificate Information]\\nSelects root certificates registered with [Load] and displays their information.\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions\\nF-67\\n[Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Fn Button \\nSet]\\n[Proxy Recording] can be assigned to an Fn button.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Fn Button Set]  Select [Setting in \\nREC mode]\\n[2] tab\\n[Image Format]\\n• [Proxy Recording]\\n[Send Images to Frame.io] Has Been Added to [Fn \\nButton Set]\\n[Send Images to Frame.io] can be assigned to an Fn button.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Fn Button Set]  Select [Setting in \\nPLAY mode]\\n[1] tab\\n[IN/OUT]\\n• [Send Images to Frame.io]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to [Fn \\nButton Set]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)] can be assigned to an Fn button.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Fn Button Set]  Select [Setting in \\nREC mode]\\n[2] tab\\n[Others (Video)]\\n• [E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions\\nF-68\\n[Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Q.MENU \\nSettings]\\n[Proxy Recording] can be assigned to the Quick menu.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Q.MENU Settings] Select [Item \\nCustomize (Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]\\n[1] tab\\n[Image Format]\\n• [Proxy Recording]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to \\n[Q.MENU Settings]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)] can be assigned to the Quick menu.\\n  [\\n]  [\\n]  [Q.MENU Settings] Select [Item \\nCustomize (Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]\\n[1] tab\\n[Others (Video)]\\n• [E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Added Menus\\nF-69\\nAdded Menus\\nSpecifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.\\nList of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available \\nfor Copying\\n: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings\\n: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom \\nmode\\n: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details\\nMenu\\nDefault setting\\n[Photo]: \\n[Focus]\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n[Type of Subject]\\n[HUMAN]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Target Parts]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Photo]: \\n[Others (Photo)]\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Burst Shot Setting]\\n[Burst Shot 1 Setting]\\n[H]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Burst Shot 2 Setting]\\n[SH]\\n\\n\\n\\n[SH Burst Pre-Recording \\nTime]\\n[0.5SEC]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Format]\\n[Proxy Recording \\nSettings]\\n[Proxy Recording]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Proxy Rec. Quality]\\n[M]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Real Time LUT(Proxy)]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Focus]\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n[Type of Subject]\\n[HUMAN]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Target Parts]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Others (Video)]\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n\\n\\n[Custom]: \\n[Focus/Shutter]\\n[Human Eye Detection Display]\\n[ON]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Added Menus\\nF-70\\n[Setup]: \\n[IN/OUT]\\n[Frame.io]\\n[Frame.io Connection]\\n[OFF]\\n\\n[Send Images to \\nFrame.io]\\n—\\n[Connection Setup]\\n—\\n\\n[Upload Setup]\\n—\\n\\n[Setup]: \\n[Others]\\n[Root Certificate]\\n—\\n\\n\\nFirmware Ver. 3.0 – Added Menus\\nF-71\\nList of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording \\nMode\\n• Frame.io, the Frame.io logo and Camera to Cloud are either registered trademarks \\nor trademarks of Adobe in the United States and/or other countries.\\nMenu\\niA\\nP\\nA\\nS\\nM\\nS&Q\\n[Photo]: \\n[Focus]\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n[Type of Subject]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Target Parts]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Photo]: \\n[Others (Photo)]\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Burst Shot \\nSetting]\\n[Burst Shot 1 Setting]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Burst Shot 2 Setting]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[SH Burst Pre-Recording \\nTime]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Image Format]\\n[Proxy Recording \\nSettings]\\n[Proxy Recording]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Proxy Rec. Quality]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Real Time LUT(Proxy)]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Focus]\\n[Detecting Subject]\\n[Type of Subject]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Target Parts]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n[Video]: \\n[Others (Video)]\\n[Image Stabilizer]\\n[E-Stabilization (Video)]\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\\n\",\"difficulty\":\"hard\",\"domain\":\"Long In-context Learning\",\"length\":\"medium\",\"question\":\"Which of the following is inccorect according to the instruction book?\",\"sub_domain\":\"User guide QA\"}","display_format":"text","language":"","answer_status":"published","assets":[],"source_url":"https://huggingface.co/datasets/zai-org/LongBench-v2","history":"initial import","indexing_mode":"noindex","subproblems":[],"grids":[]}